Research in the Community, vol. 1

Research in the Community Volume 1 Issue 1 November 2008 The Bay School of San Francisco

2 Table of Contents Drinking under the Law……………………………………………………………………………….. Rio Agosta

3

Sea Level Rise in the San Francisco Bay and its Effects on the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta…………………………………………… Nora Bales

5

Is Religion Child Abuse?……………………………………………………………………………Mason Bellber

8

The Grotesque Aesthetics: How Technology Has Affected Traditional Art………………………….. Alexis Best 10 Future of the Internet: Address Crisis………………………………………………. Vincent Brubaker-Gianakos 13 SAD San Francisco…………………………………………………………………………………. Frank Driscoll 15 The Invisible Scar……………………………………………………………………………… Sabrina Gershbein 18 The Lion and the Lamb: A Story of Skateboarding and Authority……………………………… Tate Gieselmann 22 By the Teen for the Teen: The Lure of Online Social Networking…………………………………… Jay Gloster 24 Land vs. Water Pollution: Who Will Come out Victorious?…………………………………… Fay Goldenshteyn 27 Operation Enlist…………………………………………………………………………………………Sam Green 31 4x7=Zzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzz………………………………………………………………………………...Erin Harris 34 Gears and Brakes Are for Old Men…………………………………………………………………. Dylan Hyman 37 Skate Culture and the Many Growing Problems……………………………………………………….. Justin Kim 39 Teenage Girls Across the World are Sinking Their Teeth into Vampire Fiction…………………… Charlotte Lee 42 Animals in Zoos…………………………………………………………………………….. Jasmine Marckwordt 45 Success at the First Basket: How Participating on a Sports Team Brightens the Lives of Underprivileged Youth……….. Angelina Matarozzi 49 Man’s Best Friend…………………………………………………………………………………… Ian Matthews 53 Autism: A Battle Bravely Fought by Parents……………………………………………………… Ariella Mostov 56 Finding Comfort for Elderly GLBTs: What is the best solution for the elderly GLBT to live comfortably?……………………………….. Molly Owens 59 Golden or Black?………………………………………………………………………………………. Lucas Peck 61 Is Micro Finance Worthwhile?……………………………………………………………………….. Jules Robins 64 San Francisco and the Economic Crisis…………………………………………………………… Aubrey Russell 67 America’s Future Lies in the Youths’ Hands and Obama is the One to Lead Them………………... Ashley Terry 70 Land Wars: Incorporation Political and Legal Battles…………………………………………….. Meeks Vaughn 73

3 Rio Agosta Craig Butz Research in the community D block 9/15/08 Drinking under the law Introduction of the issues There has been much controversy over the legal drinking age. The drinking age should be lowered, while others believe that lowering the drinking age would not only put the drinkers in jeopardy, as well as the people around them. ‘The National Minimum Drinking Age Act’ of 1984 required all states to make it illegal to drink alcohol under the age of twenty one (with some exceptions such as religious purposes). Recently, one hundred and twenty nine college presidents signed a statement calling on elected officials "to support an informed and dispassionate public debate over the effects of the 21-year-old drinking age" (Would Lowering the Drinking Age Make Alcohol Problems More or Less Prevalent on Campus?). Generally people ages eighteen to twenty five believe that the drinking age should be lowered. Many adults older than twenty five believe that lowering the drinking age will put many people at risk.

Some believe that the drinking age forces teenagers between the ages of eighteen and twenty to drink in secrecy and private causing more harm. When they do drink, there is no one supervising them, and it is harder to receive medical help.

Another argument to decrease the drinking age is that when a person turns eighteen, they are then allowed to vote, sign legal contracts, and smoke. At that age, many believe that persons should also be able to legally drink.

On the other side of the argument, as reported in the New York Times, polls show that few support a lower drinking age. When the drinking age in the USA was eighteen, the alcohol related deaths increased, including alcohol poisoning, and car crashes caused by driving under the influence. The drinking age was raised shortly after, and the incidence of alcohol related deaths decreased. A change in the drinking age to eighteen could both benefit and hurt the people of America.

Drinking Age change Pros The argument over the age of drinking is a controversial one. Two main arguments have been made for a change of the drinking age. The first major argument is, young adults under the age of twenty one have to conceal the fact that they drink. It is argued that since they are going to drink, the best way for them to do it is in a place where they can be regulated. “Surveys find that more than eight in ten college students drink and that four in ten are binge drinkers” (Looking for an Answer at America’s No. 1 Party School). When a person turns eighteen they gain all kinds of rights, such as the ability to join the military and fighting wars, the right to vote, and the right to smoke.

One argument is that a higher drinking age is risky for teenagers between the age of eighteen to twenty.

“The current limit ignores the reality of drinking during college years and drives it underground, making binge drinking more dangerous and students less likely to seek help in an emergency" (They can Vote at 18, but Drink?).

Men and women between the age of 18-20 are going to drink. To make it illegal is unnecessary and will only stop them from receiving medical help when needed. “More than half of 18- to 20-year-olds, according to the Department of Health and Human Services' latest survey on drug and alcohol use, reported that they drank alcohol in the last month alone” (Old Enough to Fight, Old Enough to Drink). With such limitations, the government is actually placing persons of the age eighteen to twenty in danger.

Throughout all the articles that I’ve read about the drinking age, the most used argument is, at the age of eighteen, teenagers gain many rights that they can utilize, such as voting and signing legal contracts. At the age of eighteen we gain many freedoms that we deserve as US citizens. MADD chief executive officer discussed that several studies have found that a 21 year drinking age has saved many lives. The “Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, reported a survey that showed that the 21 year old drinking age saved many lives. “By that account, then, raising the drinking age to 25 or 30 or 40 would save lives, too. But there is this thing called freedom. And freedom should apply to men and women old enough for military service, old enough to get married and old enough to have had an abortion” (Old Enough to Fight Old Enough to Drink).

The United States has the single highest legal drinking age in the world. The runner ups are Japan and Iceland with a drinking age of twenty, and South Korea with a drinking age of nineteen. 66 other countries have a drinking age of eighteen or less (Legal Drinking Age). In many European countries the drinking age of eighteen, there are fifteen and sixteen year olds who drink more often than the U.S. teenagers. They “have fewer dangerous occasions of intoxication, according to a study that was sponsored in part by the World Health Organization.”

(Would Lowering the Drinking Age Make Alcohol Problems More or Less Prevalent on Campus?).

4 Arguments for drinking age change A lower drinking age would also have negative side affects. As reported in the New York Times, polls show that few support a lower drinking age. When the drinking age in the USA was eighteen, the alcohol related deaths increased. This including alcohol poisoning, and car crashes caused by driving under the influence. In “1982, 5,000 young people ages 15-20 died in alcohol-related traffic crashes” (Study Says Drinking Age Has Saved Lives).

The drinking age was raised shortly after and alcohol related deaths decreased. “Over the years, after the drinking age was raised, those numbers decreased by 60 percent. Now the alcohol related fatalities for 15-to-20-year olds is 2,220,"( Study Says Drinking Age Has Saved Lives). These numbers show that after the drinking age was raised the death toll of DUI deaths decreased substantially. This could be due to the fact that the cars are becoming safer.

Though I don’t, others believe it should stay the same, such as Victoria Foster, a Student at Georgetown Visitation Preparatory School, in Washington, DC. She said “Lowering the drinking age should not be up for debate.

Teenagers who drink are not only a danger to themselves, but to others as well, especially when driving.” (Should We Lower the Drinking Age?) Another problem is if the drinking age is lowered, then it makes it easier for teenagers even younger then eighteen to gain access to alcohol. Thus resulting in further drinking problems.

Arguments against drinking age change After reading multiple articles I believe that I have come up with a good compromise. I think the drinking age should be changed to nineteen. There are several reasons for this solution. The main focus of most drinking age articles is on college drinking. A nineteen year-old drinking age would allow college students to drink out in the open, and be more likely to receive help, in times of danger. If the drinking age was eighteen, then high school kids would gain access to it though the senior class, but at a nineteen age the alcohol would stay in the colleges. When the drinking age was raised the death toll of DUI deaths decreased substantially. It could be due to the fact that the cars are becoming safer. It will cause the drinking related deaths to rise. I believe that we have the “right to vote at age 18, continues to infantilize people who are allowed to make life-and-death decisions on every issue save one.

We believe in rights - except for those of college-age kids, even if they are serving in the military” (Old Enough to Fight Old Enough to Drink). In conclusion, at the age of nineteen a person should be able to drink because they are adults; they can vote, die for their country, and sign legal contracts.

Work cited "They Can Vote at 18, But Drink?" They can vote at 18, but drink? 20 Aug. 2008. Los Angeles Times. 27 Oct. 2008 <http://www.latimes.com/news/printedition/california/lame-drinking20 2008aug20,0,1651220.story>.

Morgan, Scott. "College Presidents Call for Debate on Lowering the Drinking Age." Stop the drug war. 20 Aug. 2008. 2 Nov. 2008 <http://stopthedrugwar.org/chronicle_blog/2008/aug/20/college_presidents_call_or_deba>.

"Study Says Drinking Age Has Saved Lives." Local news. 08 July 2008. KCBS. 3 Aug. 2008 <http://www.kcbs.com/pages/2559997.php?>.

Saunder, Debra J. SF Gate. 14 Sept. 2008. San Francisco Chronicle. 27 Aug. 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/09/14/insm12r688.dtl>.

"Drinking by Degrees." New Haven Advocate. 28 Aug. 2008. 19 Oct. 2008 <http://www.newhavenadvocate.com/article.cfm?aid=9362>.

Foster, Victoria. "Should We Lower the Drinking Age?" DUI. 2008. Georgetown Visitation Preparatory School. 28 Oct. 2008 <http://www.duianswer.com/library/should-we-lower-thedrinking-age.cfm>.

Hanson, David J. "Legal drining age." Alcohol problems and solutions. 2007. 2 Nov. 2008. <http://www2.potsdam.edu/hansondj/LegalDrinkingAge.html> Hanson, David J. "The National Minimum Drinking Age Act of 1984." Alcohol problems and solutions. 2007. 2 Nov. 2008 <http://www2.potsdam.edu/hansondj/youthissues/1092767630.html>.

5 Nora Bales Craig Butz Research in the Community (B Block) 10/28/2008 “Sea Level Rise in the San Francisco Bay and its Effects on the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta” Due to rising sea levels in the global oceans and the San Francisco bay, 1,700 km of levees that prevent salt water from flooding islands in the Sacramento San Joaquin river delta are in danger of breaching, irreversibly changing the Delta from fresh to salt water, and leaving two-thirds of California’s residents without a water supply.

The Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta is at the edge of California’s Central Valley, formed by the intersection and confluence of the Sacramento and the San Joaquin rivers. Islands throughout this historic delta are protected by levees from salt water encroachment which is a result of sea level rise, which refers to the average water level over the course of a 20-year period (CA Regional Assessment 26). Sea level rise as a result of global warming refers to the mean sea level rise as a result of warming and expanding oceans, and sea level rise as a result of melting polar ice sheets and glaciers. The levees should be stronger, but for now California does not have the money, much less the means to construct stronger and taller levees, or to completely replace them. Nor does it have the money to deal with the consequences if any more failures do occur.

The Sacramento-San Joaquin river delta is made up of dozens of islands that are surrounded by small, intricate channels. At the northern end of the Delta, the Sacramento River, which accounts for most of the water in the delta flows in, at the East, the American River, the south the San Joaquin River, and at the west the San Francisco Bay. Each Delta island has agriculture, and now increasingly, residents on it, and all of these are protected by levees. This protection is needed because intensive agriculture has caused oxidation of the rich organic soil that makes up the islands, and thus a lowering of the land surface. That is, organic matter in the soil had been converted to carbon dioxide, which escapes into the air.

The delta was first used as a water source for agriculture and human consumption in the mid 1800s, when salt water encroachment was only a problem in the summer months, as a result of natural fluctuation. The problem of salt water encroachment as a result of rising sea levels was first recognized in 1920, but no actions were taken because the proposals were not possible from an economic or environmental standpoint. The idea was reviewed in 1946 and again in 1963, but still nothing was done because it was impractical. The issue was viewed with a higher priority again in 1976, an incredibly dry year. Eventually, 1,700 km of levees were constructed to keep the islands from flooding and the water in the Delta fresh. Theses deltas have key in maintaining fresh water standards so a large portion of California’s residents and agricultural developments can use this resource (UC Davis Department of History).

Concern about these levees on the Sacramento-San Joaquin River rose to a head just recently, when the largest breach in history occurred, the Jones Tract Break. It was a break in a middle levee protecting the Jones Tract Island. This break occurred in 2004. It flooded near 1,000,000 acres and had a total estimated damage of $124.8 million (San Joaquin County Office of Emergency Services). It flooded a major highway and quite a few agricultural fields and homes. This is a small example of what could happen in the event of the levees totally failing. . The most significant threats to the levees currently are seismic activity in the surrounding area, and sea level rise. Earthquakes would threaten the stability of the levees, potentially causing breaks, breaches, and flooding.

Sea level rise will result in salt water moving further upriver into the delta, especially during storms, and the surrounding area, which includes the habitat of four endangered species of fish and several homes and businesses (Envisioning Futures for the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta 170). Rivers discharging into the delta supplies two thirds of California residents with water, as well as 3.6 million acres of farmland (Economic Impacts of Levee Failure 7). It is estimated that there is a two-in three chance that 100-year recurrence interval floods or earthquakes will cause catastrophic flooding and significant change in the Delta by 2050 (Economic Impacts of Levee Failure).

A significant factor contributing to this failure risk is the expected sea level rise associated with climate warming.

Approximately 30% of the increase in levee failure risk by 2050 was associated with a scenario of sea level rise of between two and three millimeters per year. This means that about a third of the total risks that are threatening the levees are associated with climate warming. Considering that this is a rather conservative estimate of sea level rise, however, different projections show predictions ranging from two to seven millimeters per year, it is clear that climate change poses a major threat to potential Delta levee failure (Economic Impact of Levee Failure). This means that if climate warming continues at the rate that is currently at, it can be assumed that sea level rise will not stay at its current rate of two to three millimeters per year, it will most likely increase unless something is done to slow down the rate of climate warming.

6 As well as being a key resource for a huge chunk of California, the Delta is also a home to four endangered species of fish, including the delta smelt, which can only survive in the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta. If the delta was to be flooded with salt water, the fish would most definitely die, and the source of water for one of the most industrious agricultural areas, the central valley, would be severed (Comparing Futures for the Sacramento San Joaquin Delta).

Action obviously needs to be taken to help mitigate the several problems facing the Delta. To adapt to the changing conditions in the Delta a new system needs to be put in place to meet the water needs of Californiaâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s residents, keep the Delta as a habitat for several species of fish, and preserve the homes and agriculture on the islands. Stronger levees that will not break in the instance of earthquakes and storms should be built, and a maintenance system needs to be put in place for these new levees. As if has been before, this can all be paid for by bonds. This method will get the money for the project immediately, without charging the taxpayers more money.

If the worst should happen, the levees break and the delta becomes an extension of the San Francisco Bay, that is, salty instead of fresh, several problems would need to be addressed. To ensure that the citizens of southern California still get their fresh water, it has been proposed that a canal should be built off of the Sacramento River that completely bypasses the Delta and connects directly to the pumps at the southern end of the Delta. This would be a crippling blow for everything that goes on in the Delta. There would be hardly any water for agriculture, water levels would drop and salt water would come flooding in and the fish would have nowhere to go. It is obvious that something needs to be done about the future of the Delta if options like this are being proposed and much less considered.

It can be assumed then, that climate warming is one of the major threats to the Delta and the levees that protect the islands in it. Because of climate warming, global sea levels have risen and the Delta is in a state of distress. Rising sea levels will result in the encroachment of salt water from the San Francisco Bay, slowly turning the Delta from fresh to salt water. The implications of this change would be huge; the water source for two thirds of the stateâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s residents would be unusable, the ecosystem would be shattered, killing countless wildlife, including the probable extinction of four endangered species. Water from the Sacramento River would have to be rerouted to supply Southern California with water, stressing an already overstressed ecosystem and resource. When storms occur, the sea level is increased greatly and as a result, the level of the water in the Delta is raised high enough that it can breach the levees. The problem with this is that the water that is at this level is sea water.

These problems are looming and imminent, and they can only be stopped or slowed down if immediate action is taken. The first most pressing step is to build taller, stronger levees that have a reliable maintenance system. This needs to be done because what is left of the delta needs to be preserved for future generations. To fund this proposal, bonds would need to be sold to ensure that there are funds available for the project. The next step is the most important. The rate of climate warming needs to be drastically slowed. If this happens, not only the Delta will benefit, but the whole world will benefit from less intense global warming and rapid climate change. Key measures that should be taken to accomplish this are reducing emissions, reducing our reliance on oil, and reducing consumption. The benefits from reducing emissions would include less carbon dioxide in the atmosphere, meaning that global warming would be slowed. It also entails not having to pay for gas and oil as frequently. The first and second measures somewhat go hand in hand, but the main idea of the second measure is that cleaner power sources should be utilized so emissions would be lessened, and valuable natural resources would not be stripped from the earth. Slowing the rate of climate warming will not only benefit the Delta but the whole world. Consumption must severely curbed, because this state, much less the country relies too much on consumer goods and unnecessarily large amounts and sizes in most everything. Moving to a smaller house is an example of reducing consumption because in theory you should use less for a smaller space.

In conclusion, one of the most valuable resources in California, the Sacramento-San Joaquin River Delta is in imminent peril and will no longer be available to use unless immediate action is taken to help preserve it and the ecosystem that is part of it.

7 Works Cited Paterson, Alan M., and W. Turrentine Jackson. The Sactamento-San Joaquin Delta: The Evolution and Implementation of Water Policy. University of California, Davis. 1977.

Lund, Jay, Ellen Hanak, William Fleenor, Richard Howitt, Jeffrey Mount, Peter Moyle. Envisioning Futures for the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta. San Francisco, Public Policy Institute of California. 2007.

Lund, Jay, Ellen Hanak, William Fleenor, William Bennett, Richard Howitt, Jeffrey Mount, Peter Moyle.

Comparing Futures for the Sacramento-San Joaquin Delta. California: Public Policy Institute of California, 2008.

Vicuñua, Sebastian, Micheal Hanemann, Lary Dale, Goldman School of Public Policy, University of California, Berkeley. Economic Impacts of Delta Levee Failure Due to Climate Change: A Scenario Analysis.

California Climate Change Center, 2006.

Boxall, Bettina. “California’s Levees are in Sorry Shape.” Los Angeles Times 19 Sep 2005: A1

8 Mason Bellber Craig Butz Research in the Community 11/06/2008 Is Religion Child Abuse?

The stereotypical image of American childhood is little league, biking with friends, and waking up on Sundays to go to church. Although many people consider religion an important part of childhood, others believe that it is damaging to children and for some, teaching religion to children even amounts to child abuse. Teaching religion to children can sometimes give them a sense of belonging and make them behave, but because children aren’t old enough to decipher the difference between truth and fiction, their belief in religion can have very drastic consequences in their adult life.

Many people hold the view that religion is an essential part of a child’s upbringing. In fact, Arvind Sharma wrote an article in Today’s Parent about just that. He says, “In a sense, then, those who claim children should not be raised with religion, or taught about it, are short-circuiting a child’s entire process of development” (Sharma 2). He believes that religion provides a strong moral structure, provides children with a sense of community, and helps children accept others from different religions (Sharma 1-2). Another positive aspect of religion is a sense of belonging; also, the church can provide a safe-haven for children. Rich Alves, a police officer who was born into a non-religious family, started going to Catholic Church when he was 16. The main reason for going to church for him was “Well, I had a girlfriend who went to church, so I went too.” He said that having the same religion as his girlfriend helped him bond with her. Religion can also give kids something in common with each other, which helps build relationships. Many religious people show the positive aspects of religion by pointing to studies about the positive influences religion has on teenagers. Studies have shown that non-religious kids are more likely to become involved in drugs, alcohol, and premarital sex than teens that go to church and are involved in religious youth programs (Religious Teens; Adolescent Risk Behaviors). The reason why adults teach their children about religion is that they believe in it. They believe that if they don’t have faith in god, they will go to hell. Thus, they teach their children about the bible and church so they won’t go to hell. Religion is such an important part of some peoples lives, that they can’t imagine life without it and don’t even consider not teaching it to their children. But for many children, the study of their religion begins at such a young age—sometimes even before preschool—that religion is the most important factor in their lives. For many children religion helps them make friends, feel accepted, and make good choices.

Religion is such a big aspect in American life because of the tremendous power it has both positively and negatively. Religion can cause people to disregard useful information, drive families apart, and teach people to judge other people. Teaching children religion doesn’t only have negative aspects in a child’s life, it also affects them when they grow up. If a child is taught something by their parents and church for their entire life, chances are that they are going to believe that no matter what. If a child is taught all his life that god made the earth and humans, then that it presumably what he is going to believe. When he goes to college though, and is taught about the big bang and evolution, he will have trouble deciding which idea he wants to believe.

Another negative of religion is the fact that it has the power to drive families apart. Though most children who grow up in religious households do not convert to atheism, there are a great many that do. Many times someone tells their religious parents that they are an atheist, the parents will respond with outrage and anger. In Richard Dawkins’ book, The God Delusion, he writes about two professors who told their parents they were atheist. “Two professors from one university in America wrote to me independently about their parents. One said that his mother suffers permanent grief because she fears for his immortal soul. The other one said that his father wishes he had never been born, so convinced is he that his son is going to spend eternity in hell” (Dawkins 325). The fact that religion has the power to drive apart families is astounding, and is yet another reason teaching religion to children is damaging to them in the long run.

Many people were taught religion so strictly growing up, that they believe and tell others that those who don’t follow a certain faith will go to hell. This is definitely a negative aspect of religion because it promotes judging people based on their religion. Some of the most extreme religious people, such as Islamic terrorists, are willing to kill people for their religion. Though these examples are on the far end of the spectrum, and not many people are as extremist as this, it is important to understand just how much power religion can have over people.

For many adults, their childhoods were dominated by their religion, to some, this was good, but for many others, this destroyed an important part of their lives. On Word net, the definition of child abuse is “The physical or emotional or sexual mistreatment of children” (“child abuse”). Many adults feel that instilling the fear of hell into children could be considered child abuse because of the deep emotional trauma that can be instilled in children.

Another example of child abuse in Christianity is hell. Hell is portrayed as the most awful place possible, where you

9 burn in fires for eternity. In The God Delusion, Richard Dawkins speculates why hell is portrayed as horrible as it is.

“If hell were plausible, it would only have to be moderately unpleasant in order to deter. Given that it is so unlikely to be true, it has to be advertised as very very scary indeed” (Dawkins 321). Telling children about this place, and saying that everyone who isn’t part of their religion will go there, can be very traumatizing. Some people even admit to the trauma, but say that it benefits the child in the long run. A priest that was in charge of a ‘hell house’, a sort of haunted house depicting hell aimed towards kids said “And if they end up having nightmares, as a result of experiencing this, I think there's a higher good that would ultimately be achieved and accomplished in their lives than simply having nightmares” (Dawkins 320). The priest admits to traumatizing kids, but justifies it by saying that it will be worth it in the long run. Traumatizing children so they will act well in their life might have good intentions, but if someone is acting well because of fear of repercussions if they don’t, then that is not acting well.

Another instance of scaring children with images of hell was with a 7 year old girl. This girl, who was raised a Roman Catholic, had two horrible things happen to her; she was molested by her priest in his car, and told that one of her friends who had died was in hell because she was a Protestant. She considered the emotional trauma of being told her friend was going to hell as much worse then being molested by the priest. “Being fondled by the priest simply left the impression (from the mind of a 7 year old) as 'yucky' while the memory of my friend going to hell was one of cold immeasurable fear” (Dawkins 318). Although physical abuse may have long-lasting effects, the emotional trauma caused by scaring these children can be much, much worse. For children as young as this, who don’t understand the difference between reality and fiction, the trauma caused by telling them things like that has deep impact on their childhoods.

Teaching religion to children seems like a strange practice when you compare the negative aspects and the positive aspects. Granted, it does have some positive aspects, but compared to the negative aspects of violence and hatred, the positive effects are very minimal. Religion gives children false information and beliefs that interfere with actual information that can benefit them. The only reason the practices of religion on children are accepted is because many people engage in them. If there were only one man in the world circumcising his child, he would certainly be condemned as crazy; but because it is backed by the Christian Church, it is a widely common practice.

There is a quote by Robert Pirsig that explains my point. “When one person suffers from a delusion, it is called insanity. When many people suffer from a delusion it is called religion” (Robert Pirsig). Many people use the cover of religion to condemn their actions, when, in any other circumstance, it would be considered child abuse.

10 Alexis Best Craig Butz Research in the Community 31 October 2008 The Grotesque Aesthetics: How Technology Has Affected Traditional Art What do Monet, Andy Warhol, and Chuck Close have in common? They all share technology’s influence over their work. In a world where everything is constantly changing, people wonder how technology affects the flow of creativity, especially now. With the technological advances of the twentieth century, artists expressed their need to examine the new era through a more grotesque side of the traditionally aesthetic world. When a specific form of art is established, most critics will eventually grow accustomed to the work. So when a band of artists create something radical, critics generally take the new style of work harshly. Especially in times of questioning, artists express their curiosity and explanations through styles that people initially have a hard time wrapping their minds around. From Impressionism to the 2000s, we see that technology can morph an art form from having very strict rules and specific styles to being completely willy-nilly and running with any idea that forms.

Impressionism: In order to get to the roots of the affects of technology in art, there has to be a discussion of Impressionism, an art form that’s beauty was recognized many years after it began. It started in 1874 with the idea of painting what was seen. Prior to this time, art was produced in such a way that made the people painted seem ethereal and godly.

Art was strongly tied to aristocracy; they were the commissioners of such works of themselves, or their families.

However, in 1874, artists began to stray away from the traditional style. Instead of being bound to their studios, they left them (Richter 30) and painted sceneries, and as Manet, one of the founders of the movement, put it "I paint what I see, and not what others like to see" (The Impressionist Movement and Its Greatest Painters). There was a strong feeling of emotion that also began to be captured in these artists’ works. Other changes with this style included capturing movement and sticking to a specific palette that avoided black, brown, and grey (Richter 30).

Many of the Impressionist artists wanted to get away from the happenings of that day and age. Most importantly, these artists tried to work in places that had not been affected by the industrial revolution. The cause of their scenery painting was technology. Escaping from the modern warfare, ideas, and technology caused these artists to paint what they wanted to (Lambert 1). This style was so new and unlike anything before it. Because of these changes, the public was disgusted with the new art form. This was the beginning of change in the art world.

Pop Art: Pop Art originated from 1955 common, household technologies and proved to be disturbingly without a style due to these new technologies. America and England were the two centers of the genre. Pop Art was formed from the reflection of daily life and the popular culture that formed from a post-war economy of abundance (Richter 114). It is often seen that “the Pop artists held a mirror to society itself” (Concepts 238); the art genre was often seen as an accidental by-product of the lifestyle in those times. It showed that people had cut themselves off from nature and turned to the flow of the masses of people within the consumer societies of the world. Pop Art began to incorporate the common household items into their artwork, transforming certain images into popular culture icons (Concepts 231). Andy Warhol’s Campbell’s soup cans are an example of this. Warhol silk-screened soup cans in groups or individually and sold them, turning this household food product into an art piece to be reproduced (Gay 475). Because of his usage of this item, it became an icon. Warhol’s Marilyn Monroe paintings were a reverse of this. Instead of making Monroe into a popular icon, he used her face in his artwork, making the artwork stand out more (Gay 276). The items that were circulating around the world became images that circulated at a greater magnitude “by producing images of everyday thing using the techniques of film, television advertising, newspapers and magazines” (Lambert 75) along with Warhol’s painting style. Any media could be used to do the same as Warhol had. When the world starts to constantly have new technologies available to everyone, an art style that centers around them will change with the new products. Despite this, baffled critics said that Pop Art did not have a style (Concepts 228). This constant change allows for constantly changing styles and whirlwind of new images in Pop Art. Technology formed Pop Art, while also allowing it to reproduce what already existed, giving it the title of “styleless”.

11 Photorealism: A more obvious example of a direct reaction to technology over art is Photorealism or superrealism, a style that proved that there are limits to perfection. This style is essentially a painting of a photograph; without the invention of the camera or film this style would not exist. In addition, this style shows how traditional artists can make their artwork look extremely realistic, a competition between technology and the human hand. These paintings are often created to be so close to the actual photograph that they even maintain “the distortions of focus present in the original” (Oxford Art Online); they would even replicated the photographic mistakes in the pictures.

The artists did not focus on the subject matter but on the idea of men being equal to machines, and that even the human hand can recreate the accidents of film. It challenged the values of painting by showing how similar photography could be to painting, and how painters could also replicate and recreate the “accidental subject” affect that photos often portray; their paintings could look as randomly and quickly completed as the photograph.

Photorealism showed that achieving a realistic copy of a photo, a technological advancement, can appear to be perfect and frightening as the line between the two styles blurs.

Contemporary Art: In modern times, contemporary art is the most prominent thing but also the most diverse because these artists use all kinds of media and more than often are sending off a message through their work, some times making their imagery quite obscure. Many artists choose to focus on things that affect them in their personal lives. Walking into a contemporary art gallery will allow you to see film, painting, quilts, sculpture, and just about anything else that an artist can get his or her hands on. Society had become more inviting, and so has the art world. Within contemporary art is a genre known as installation, and this style tends to have its own galleries because so many artists are currently using it.

Installations are large sculptures or art pieces that make you feel as if you are walking into the artwork.

They were originally created to go against collecting artworks; installations are generally too large and often created in spaces that do not allow for them to be removed. Many installations incorporate multiple layers of themes and ideas to create one artwork. All of the many objects and themes throughout the piece make the installation come together as one entity (Oxford Art Online). When walking into these spaces, audiences often cultural issues thrown at them. Because the person is inside the artwork, they come face to face with these problems and ideas that the artist wants them to see. These ideas show the things going on in the world from the perspective of someone who might have been experiencing them. In this sense, technology’s ability to give the artist access to new mediums to add into their installation can stir emotions in the audience that are more or less pleasant.

2000s: In a world where the computer’s presence is everywhere, there is no doubt that art can be found woven into the machine in the most surprising ways. Traditional and digital media define the border between the new age of art and the past. Digital art is what is on the computer, what might be drawn in Photoshop, while traditional art is defined by anything done without a computer. This ranges from pencil sketches to oil painting to sculpture to dark room photography. Many artists have a style that involves both, a sketch by hand can be scanned in and manipulated with colors and textures until it finished, or one might take a photo and then use their imagination to pull the image away from anything mildly close to super real, often manipulating self-portraits into the living dead, or just hyper beauty. It all comes down to what the artist finds most appealing to their senses.

Because of the wide variety of styles moving about in the art world, there is no defining genre for the time period. This makes many studiers of the art anxious and impatient for the future. Many critics have doubts for the internet and art and wonder is the artwork is “truly democratic, artistically worth-while, [or] marketable" (Richter 152). They can guess that it will play a large part in the future of art, and they can assume that "internet art, like all online phenomena, will be hybrid" (Richter 152). But who is to say that the next big movement will be tied to the internet? There is no doubt that it will be tied to technology, and there is no doubt that it will affect people negatively at one point or another. Impressionism proved to be grotesque to the people of that time because such a dramatic theme change in the art world was unheard of. Pop Art recreated common technology and received the title of “styleless” because of its constant reproductions. Photorealism showed that perfection can reveal flaws in what appears to be a perfect picture of reality. Contemporary art’s multimedia spectrum allows for a wide range of ways to prove a point, or to bring attention to world happenings. Art on the computers is often manipulated to become something far too surreal and often scary. Whatever comes next will raise the standards of art and will show the world how big of an affect technology can have over it.

12

Works Cited Caroline A. Jones. "Post-modernism." Grove Art Online. Oxford Art Online. 21 Oct. 2008 <http://www.oxfordartonline.com/subscriber/article/grove/art/T069002>.

Concepts of Modern Art: From Fauvism to Postmodernism. 3rd ed. New York, N.Y.: Thames and Hudson, 1994.

Gay, Peter. Modernism the Lure of Heresy. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, Inc., 2008.

Grosenick, Uta. Art At the Turn of the Millennium. New York: Taschen, 1999.

Hunter, Sam and John Jacobus. Modern art from Post-Impressionism to the Present : Painting, Sculpture, Architecture. New York: H. N. Abrams, 1976.

The Impressionist Movement and Its Greatest Painters. 2004. Web-Sy. 29 Oct. 2008 < http://www.impressionniste.net/impressionism_history.htm>.

"Installation." Grove Art Online. Oxford Art Online. 22 Oct. 2008 <http://www.oxfordartonline.com/subscriber/article/grove/art/T041385>.

Lambert, Rosemary. The Twentieth Century. Cambridge [Eng.]; New York: Cambridge University Press, 1981.

Lucie-Smith, Edward. Art Now : From Abstract Expressionism to Superrealism. New York: Morrow, 1977. This book talks about contemporary art, art from today, and its history.

"Modernism." Grove Art Online. Oxford Art Online. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.oxfordartonline.com/subscriber/article/grove/art/T058785>.

“Photorealism.” Art Articles. 2003. Art Articles. 2 Nov. 2008 <http://www.artarticles.net/photorealism.htm>.

"Photorealism." Grove Art Online. Oxford Art Online. 21 Oct. 2008 <http://www.oxfordartonline.com/subscriber/article/grove/art/T067235>.

Richter, Klaus. Art: From Impressionism to the Internet. New York: Prestel, 2001.

Witcombe, Christopher L. C. E.. “1. Roots of Modernism.” Modernism. 2000. Christopher L. C. E. Witcombe. 15 Oct. 2008 <http://witcombe.sbc.edu/modernism/roots.html>.

13 Vincent Brubaker-Gianakos Craig Butz Research in the Community 9 November, 2008 Future of the Internet - the Address Crisis IPv4 and IPv6 are both Internet Protocol address formats; they are the way in which all computers, portable digital assistants, cellular phones, networks, servers, and the like are addressed to the internet. The current standard for internet addressing is IPv4. The format for this type of address is four numbers between zero and 255 separated by decimal points, which allows for 4.3 billion different possibilities. The format for IPv6 is eight entries of hexadecimal values, each one a number between zero and 65,535; allowing for a total of 2128 or 3.40×1038 different addresses. An example is to say that the number of IPv4 addresses is the number of golf balls could cover a three square-mile field; the number of possible IPv6 addresses is more than the number of golf balls it would take to fill the volume of the sun. The reason for having the IPv6 system which can support such an enormous range of addresses is that the number of available IPv4 addresses is running out, and the future of the internet relies on the crossover to IPv6.

The current conflict today surrounding IP addresses is the fact that IPv4 addresses are running out. There are fewer addresses available than there used to be, as when IPv4 was first implemented in 1981 (RFC 791). At that time it was unfeasible for every student in a classroom to have their own computer with an internet connection or cellular devices with internet-enabled content (C. Butz). The Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF) dedicated the first-number chunks (1/256th) of the IPv4 address space to IBM, AT&T, Hewlett-Packard, Xerox, General Electric, Apple, United States Postal Service, US Army, and other large associations during the 80’s and 90’s (IPv4 Census Map, CAIDA). In 2002, The Internet Assigned Numbers Authority (IANA) was assigned the job of coordinating assigned numbers globally (hence IP addresses), which were previously managed by the IETF (RFC 3232). These assignments allowed those associations to use those blocks however they want. The Cooperative Association for Internet Data Analysis (CAIDA) created a map that represents the IPv4 addresses that are responsive or unresponsive to a “ping” command to that IP address. This map displays that a vast majority of the IP addresses are not connected to the web, or any device whatsoever, or could potentially use NAT (Network Address Translation) in certain conditions. NAT is used when devices connect to a router, which assigns them their own LAN (Local Area Network) address. The connection to the internet is fed from a modem into the router where it is then distributed. All of the computers then share the single public IP address, known as the WAN (Wide Area Network) address. This allows for hundreds of computers to access the internet while only using one WAN address, thus reducing the number of needed addresses. Blocks of addresses that are not currently allocated efficiently could potentially be subdivided, and be managed more appropriately. The only problem with this proposal is that to remap all of the IP addresses, all of the companies would have to coordinate the movement, and that some addresses may not appear to be in use at a particular time, but could in fact be intermittently occupied. That means that they are not constantly running online, and have downtimes, or are configured to block any inbound query.

Another consideration is the migration from IPv4 to IPv6, where there is no possibility of exhaust. This would allow each and every one of the current IPv4 block shareholders to own a massive range of IP addresses greater than the total number of possible IPv4 addresses; that’s more than 4.3 billion addresses per shareholder with lots of room to spare. This has been proposed as the fix-all solution for the exhaustion of IPv4 addresses. Since there are plenty of spaces for IPv6 addresses, designating addresses for associations would be fairly simple, thus coordination for migration to IPv6 is not a problem whereas remapping IPv4 addresses is.

The current crisis has been analyzed to predict the different dates of the exhaustion of IPv4 addresses per country, but these calculations give very little evidence and supply inadequate support. As an example, China is currently tackling the problem with the IPv6 transition method. “As a basic resource for the Internet, the IPv4 addresses are limited and 80% of the final allocation IP addresses have been used (JagsLive, China To Run Out of IPv4 Addresses).”

The inflation rate is very unpredictable (especially for the whole world) for predicting when IPv6 becomes the standard. “China aims to become the leading player in the creation of the next generation of the Internet with the launch of an Internet Protocol version 6-based network linking 25 universities in 20 cities across China (CNet News, China launches largest IPv6 network).” This huge movement to IPv6 has promoted the crossover, and implies that reorganizing IPv4 is only going to be “a Band-Aid on a bullet wound.” IPv6 will eventually become a replacement to IPv4, but the transition will take years for china to convert. The dates supposedly range anywhere from 2011 to 2012, but as this is information is a coarse speculation, it could take even longer.

The majority of the world is still running on IPv4, which brings up possible contributions to this crossover to IPv6. Tunnel Broking is one of possible ways to contribute to the IPv6 crossover; it is a service that tunnels IPv6

14 packets to your network encapsulated in IPv4 packets; you need to be able to decode IPv6 packets on the other end when doing this (most computers today support this feature). The server is a 6to4 service; it puts IPv6 packets into IPv4 packets, which then get interpreted as IPv6 on the client end. “…tunnel broker service enables you to reach the IPv6 Internet by tunneling over existing IPv4 connections from your IPv6 enabled host or router to one of our IPv6 routers (Hurricane Electric).” This service allows people without a proper IPv6 to be connected to the IPv6 internet.

This technology is crucial to the implementation of IPv6 throughout the world.

The crossover to IPv6 is not one that can happen overnight. IPv4 is still used as a default, and IPv6 is not natively available to everyone yet. “IPv4 isn't going to simply go away. IPv6 is expected to coexist with IPv4, which means administrators will have to manage both protocols for quite some time (Redmond, The ABCs of IPv6).” In the future, however, it is a must that people begin using IPv6, as IPv4 will most likely be abandoned at some point; however, IPv4 will continue to be used long after IPv6 has become the address standard. The reason for this is that certain hardware does not support IPv6 packets, such as routers. The solution here is simple: update the firmware, or update the hardware. For many, this could be a problem, especially if one has to reconfigure all of their settings for all of their devices.

IPv6 will become the successor to IPv4; crossover and implementation will take years, and deprecation of IPv4 could take decades. The pros for the course of this action vastly outweigh the cons. Alternative solutions sought to get to the bottom of this crisis are insufficient, too time consuming, too expensive, or too much work; the future of the internet demands that IPv6 become the standard for internet addressing in order to solve the address exhaustion crisis once and for all.

15 Frank Driscoll Craig Butz Research in the Community November 11, 2008 SAD San Francisco San Francisco is the city of fog, and while many people enjoy the not-too-hot temperature, there are others, with SAD, who feel differently about the overcast days in the City by the Bay. Although Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD) usually occurs in the winter months, due to San Francisco's foggy weather, people may suffer SADlike symptoms during other seasons of the year.

It has been thirty years since scientists began to research Seasonal Affective Disorder and how the seasons affect a person’s mood (Rosenthal 3). The characteristic that makes SAD, or winter-onset depression, different from other types of depression, is that it usually occurs in the winter months, beginning in fall and ending in the summer (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” familydoctor.org). While this is true in most places, it is different for people with SAD in San Francisco. In some cases SAD can occur in the summer when the weather is overcast, or if a person’s indoor lighting is decreased (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” NAMI). Because SAD is caused by a lack of sunlight, any time a person experiences a long period without a sufficient amount of sun, they can experience the same symptoms as they do in the winter months. While having SAD in the summer is rare, it is possible to experience symptoms in places that are overcast in times other than the winter; places such as San Francisco.

The causes of SAD are not completely known. A leading theory is that lack of sunlight causes SAD (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” familydoctor.org). Lack of sunlight specifically affects two key hormones, melatonin and serotonin.

Melatonin is a hormone produced in the brain by the pineal gland from the amino acid tryptophan. The synthesis and release of melatonin are stimulated by darkness and suppressed by light, suggesting the involvement of melatonin in circadian rhythm and regulation of diverse body functions. Levels of melatonin in the blood are highest prior to bedtime.” (“Melatonin” MayoClinic) Serotonin has been studied for almost thirty years now to see its connection with depression. Scientists have discovered that “depletion of serotonin was another cause of depression, one that worked by promoting, or ‘permitting,’ a fall in norepinephrine levels” (“Brain Chemistry Basics”). Norepinephrine is a hormone that can work as an antidepressant, and when levels are lowered, a person will experience depression and mood swings (“Serotonin and norepinephrine”). Melatonin and serotonin regulate a person’s mood, energy level, and sleep-wake cycles. When there is less sunlight in a person’s environment, there is an increase in levels of melatonin, and a decrease in levels of serotonin. This alteration in hormones “creates the biological conditions for depression” because of the way they affect the brain and the body (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” NAMI). Scientists believe that these two hormones play a key role in SAD and the symptoms that accompany this disorder because “melatonin levels are higher than normal during the day, so sufferers experience sleepiness and other melatonin induced effects, and are also prone to serotonin deficiency symptoms such as negative emotional states”(“Seasonal Affective Disorder (S.A.D.)” EIR). Because of the lack of sunlight in the city, San Francisco’s foggy weather could make these symptoms worse.

There are many symptoms of SAD, and they all have huge effects on the afflicted. One symptom is a change in appetite, especially a craving for starchy or sweet foods. Most people with SAD develop an increased craving for carbohydrates ("Seasonal Affective Disorder" NAMI), which usually causes weight gain. Fatigue is another symptom of SAD, which is most likely caused by increased levels of melatonin; this is because melatonin affects sleep and wake cycles, and increases when there is less sunlight, meaning that people will feel drowsy when there is fog. This is also why many people with SAD have less energy during the day (“What is Seasonal Affective Disorder”). In most places, people would only experience an increase of melatonin just prior to bed time, when the sun has set and it is dark outside, but “in coastal cities like San Francisco, continual fog can spawn widespread SAD among residents” (“Seasonal Affective Disorder: When Winter Turns Your Mood to the Dark Side”) because it confuses the body into increasing the melatonin during the day. Other symptoms include difficulty concentrating, irritability, anxiety, increased sensitivity, and avoidance of social situation ("Seasonal Affective Disorder" familydoctor.org), all of which are most likely caused by the decreased levels of serotonin in the body. Scientists have discovered that many “cases of mental depression are apparently caused by reduced quantities or reduced activity of serotonin in the brain” (“Serotonin” Encyclopedia Britannica). These symptoms range in severity and are different for every person with this disorder. A person with SAD living in San Francisco would experience symptoms for a longer period of time compared to somebody living in a sunny place that is only cloudy in the winter. This is because there are more days of the year without sun, meaning there would be more days with increased levels of melatonin and decreased levels of serotonin.

16 In order to find out more about SAD, research has been done around the entire country, to see where SAD is most severe, who it affects the most, and to find the amount of people affected. Statistics show that an estimated 10 million Americans are affected by SAD (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” Pharmasave). Researchers also found that 3 out of 4 people with SAD are women (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” Pharmasave); further examination showed that most women with SAD start seeing symptoms in their twenties (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” NAMI).

While SAD mainly affects women, statistics show that there have been an increasing number of men with SAD in the recent years (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” NAMI). Another valuable piece of information found was that SAD occurs most in the northern states (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” MedlinePlus). This piece of information helps to support the theory that SAD is caused by lack of sunlight, and gives scientists an idea of what type of treatment is needed for people with SAD. San Francisco’s unique weather causes the city to be partly foggy for approximately 100 days of the year and completely foggy for approximately another 105 days of the year (“Weather History”); this means that San Francisco’s foggy days outnumber the sunny by two to one. Scientists discovered that this occurs because San Francisco is in an area where the air is warm, but the ocean is cold; fog is created when warm air goes over cold ocean water and cools (Rawls). Spring and fall are somewhat sunnier than summer and winter, but are very unpredictable and can become overcast randomly and for an unknown period of time (“San Francisco Weather”).

Research has also found that San Francisco’s weather is unique because of its many microclimates. Due to the fog, and topography of San Francisco, when it is sunny in one district, just a mile away it can be raining, or foggy. For example, “at a time when the city's Sunset District may be fogged in and experiencing breezy 60-degree weather, Potrero Hill could be enjoying a sunny, comfortable 70” (Gilliam). While some parts of the city may see more sun than fog, the majority of the city experiences more foggy days. The amount of fog in San Francisco is immense, and anybody without treatment for SAD would feel more of its affects.

There are many treatments available for people with SAD, but the treatment known as light therapy is used by the majority. Light therapy works for patients so well because it “mimics outdoor light and causes a biochemical change in your brain that lifts your mood, relieving symptoms of seasonal affective disorder” (“Seasonal affective disorder: Treatment with light therapy”). Light therapy is used 50 – 80% of the time because of its effectiveness (“Seasonal Affective Disorder” NAMI). Other treatments include: medicines, changes in diet, learning to manage stress usually through counseling, and moving to a sunny area during the cold months of the year ("Seasonal Affective Disorder" familydoctor.org). In San Francisco, somebody living in the Richmond District could move to the Mission, where it is sunnier, or could move to a city that is always sunny. While the alternative treatments are acceptable, none have proven to be as affective as light therapy. Light therapy would be the best treatment for people with SAD in San Francisco because it would increase the amount of serotonin and decrease the amount of melatonin, balancing out the levels of the two hormones.

The problem with light therapy is that it “is time-consuming and tough to stick with for months at a time” (Mulhauser). People with SAD would have to endure the time consuming treatment “for one or two hours per day” (Mulhauser). Many people would quit treatment because of lack of time, and could experience the symptoms of SAD without any help. While other treatments are available, they have not proven to be as affective as light therapy, but many people with SAD in San Francisco might feel forced to use the treatment that is less reliable because “Light therapy is time-consuming and does not fit readily into the mornings of a busy person… Poor treatment adherence is not rare… and antidepressants may be regarded as a time-saving alternative” (Eagles).

Scientists are looking for better and more efficient ways to treat SAD, but until then, residence of the City by the Bay will have to take time out of their lives for light therapy or take counseling and other treatments that are not as effective.

While San Francisco is a beautiful and exciting city, people with SAD should think twice before moving to the metropolis. San Francisco is a city that is foggy for most of the year, a quality that would not suit a person with SAD. In most places around the world people with SAD would only experience symptoms for a quarter of the year, but in San Francisco, people might feel its affects for more than half the year. If a person with SAD did decide to live in San Francisco, it would be best if they lived in a district that is sunnier than the majority of the city; a district such as Potrero or the Mission. San Francisco is a wonderful place, but its fog is not always forgiving.

17 Works Cited “Brain Chemistry Basics.” Find the Light. 30 Jul. 2008. 2 Nov. 2008 < http://www.findthelight.net/Depression/the_chemistry_of_dep.htm>.

Eagles, John. “Light therapy and seasonal affective disorder.” ScienceDirect. Jun. 2006. 6 Nov. 2008 <http://www.sciencedirect.com/science?_ob=ArticleURL&_udi=B82Y74JXY7H51&_user=10&_rdoc=1&_fmt=&_orig=search&_sort=d&view=c&_version=1&_urlVersion=0&_ userid=10&md5=c1e5ce02eeab8d27fbb171a2e713528f>.

Gilliam, Harold. “Weather as varied as the people.” SFGate. 9 Jul. 2001. 10 Nov. 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?file=/chronicle/archive/2001/07/09/MN139536.DTL>.

“Melatonin.” Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research. 1 Feb. 2008. 27 Oct. 2008 < http://www.mayoclinic.com/health/melatonin/NS_patient-melatonin>.

Mulhauser, Greg. “CBT More Effective than Light Therapy for Seasonal Affective Disorder.” Counseling Resource.

4 Nov. 2005. 5 Nov. 2008 <http://counsellingresource.com/features/2005/11/04/cbt-sad/>.

Rawls, James. “San Francisco.” World Book Encyclopedia. New York, NY: World Book, Inc., 2004.

Rosenthal, Norman E. Winter Blues: Seasonal Affective Disorder. New York, NY: The Guilford Press, 1993.

“San Francisco Weather.” SanFrancisco.com. No date. 23 Oct. 2008 <http://www.sanfrancisco.com/weather/>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder.” familydoctor.org. Jul. 2008. American Academy of Family Physicians. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://familydoctor.org/online/famdocen/home/common/mentalhealth/depression/267.printerview.html>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder.” MedlinePlus. 10 Nov. 2008. 10 Oct. 2008 < http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/seasonalaffectivedisorder.html>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder.” National Alliance on Mental Illness. Feb. 2004. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nami.org/Content/ContentGroups/Helpline1/Seasonal_Affective_Disorder_ (SAD).htm>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD).” Pharmasave. 2000 – 2008. 18 Oct. 2008 <http://content.nhiondemand.com/psv/HC2.asp?objID=101038&cType=hc>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder (S.A.D.).” The Environmental Illness Resource. 23 Nov. 2007. 6 Nov. 2008 <http://www.ei-resource.org/illness-information/related-conditions/seasonal-affective-disorder-(s.a.d)/>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder: Treatment with light therapy.” Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research. 5 Jan. 2008. 10 Oct. 2008 < http://www.mayoclinic.com/health/seasonal-affective-disorder/MH00023>.

“Seasonal Affective Disorder: When Winter Turns Your Mood to the Dark Side.” NurseVillage.com. 2004. 6 Nov. 2008 <http://www.nursevillage.com/nv/content/personalside/yourhealth/sad.jsp>.

“Serotonin.” Encyclopædia Britannica. 2008. Encyclopædia Britannica Online. 1 Nov. 2008. <http://www.search.eb.com/eb/article-9066858>.

“Serotonin and norepinephrine.” Mayo Foundation for Medical Education and Research. 8 Dec. 2006. 2 Nov. 2008 < http://www.mayoclinic.com/health/antidepressants/MH00067>.

“Weather History.” City Rating.com. 2002. 24 Oct. 2008 <http://www.cityrating.com/cityweather.asp?city=San+Francisco>.

“What is Seasonal Affective Disorder (SAD)?.” MedicineNet.com. 3 Mar. 2007. 10 Oct. 2008 < http://www.medicinenet.com/seasonal_affective_disorder_sad/page2.htm>.

18 Sabrina Gershbein Craig Butz November 7, 2008 The Invisible Scar Post Traumatic Stress Disorder (PTSD) is a mental health disorder resulting from a traumatic event, such as: the possibility of death or severe injury and the associated panic, intense anxiety, and feeling of helplessness. Its symptoms include: avoidance of places, people, and activities; re-experiencing the event; symbolic reminders of the event; nightmares; loss of emotions (especially positive feelings); sleep deprivation; and inability to concentrate.

Symptoms must be present for at least a month after trauma to be classified as PTSD ("Mental Health." Fact Sheet.

23 Oct. 2008. National Center for PTSD).

PTSD causes distress, anxiety, depression, paranoia, and an inability to carry out everyday responsibilities.

It impacts an individual’s ability to function socially, domestically, and/or occupationally ("Mental Health." Fact Sheet. 23 Oct. 2008. National Center for PTSD).

A rising numbers of veterans from the Iraq, Afghanistan, and Vietnam wars have Post Traumatic Stress Disorder. It is the U.S Military’s obligation to treat soldiers still in the service, whether they are overseas or on a military base. It is the Department of Veteran Affair’s (VA), a government funded organization, responsibly to treat mental and physical problems of U.S veterans. The military and VA are obligated to provide benefits, treatment, and/or compensation to veterans and soldiers for any mental and/or physical problems resulting from military service. The Assistant Secretary Defense of health affairs claims their program’s goal is to identify the problem, provide support, and restore soldiers to good health.

I feel the VA and the US military haven’t lived up to their obligations. The army sugarcoats their “great program”. It looks good on paper but in practice it has not lived up to its charter.

The military routinely down plays the impact of PTSD and does not competently care for its victims.

Because PTSD does not leave any physical scars; it is ignored. PTSD’s scars however are invisible. By treating PTSD as ‘invisible”; these organizations keep costs down and the military’s image up. I feel it is immoral to ignore soldiers and veterans who suffer from PTSD. They run the risk of ruining their lives and their families suffer tremendously.

The Military and the VA claim they care and help soldiers with mental problems. However, they are often condescending towards soldiers who struggle with mental problems. They make it difficult for soldiers with PTSD to receive help by placing many obstacles in their way. They blindly deny responsibly for PTSD and minimize its seriousness. The army has been known to falsely accuse soldiers with PTSD of misconduct so they would be dismissed before receiving treatment and/or compensation for their mental injuries.

According to Army studies, serious mental health problems, such as Post Traumatic Stress Disorder, substance abuse, depression, and anxiety are present in 20% to 25 % of soldiers who served in Iraq. Administration officials claim there is an extensive program to help soldiers experiencing strong emotional reactions to war (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish"). However soldiers at a Ft. Carson army base in Colorado, report the program and services are out of reach for victims. Instead they are regularly punished and ignored for having mental health issues. Soldiers report the army ignores and punishes any exhibits of anguish or distress (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Do Soldiers Receive Adequate Mental Health Care”).

The following are examples of the military’s response to stress disorders among their rank and file. Cavey Davis, a gunner who served in Iraq, arrived at Ft. Carson experiencing recurring nightmares, a result of trauma experienced in war. He knew he needed to get help, so he went to the base’s hospital. Hospital personnel told him he’d have to wait a month and a half before he could speak to someone about his mental problems. Cavey Davis, almost crying, begged for help, “You know, there were many times I've told my wife — in just a state of panic, and just being so upset — that I really wished I just died over there [in Iraq]” (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

Another soldier, Tyler Jennings cried to his commanding officer that he was hurting, scared, paranoid, and felt like he was dying. He had resorted to drug use to address his troubles. The commanding officer did not refer Tyler to get help; his response was condescending and not sympathetic. His sergeants hazed him about his drug use and mental problems. Jennings eventually called his supervisor to let him that he was going to check himself into a psychiatric ward and would not attend a military formation (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Hear Jennings Describe What Happened When He Saw His Company Commander").

Military’s medical health center records note Jennings suffered from “crying spells, and feelings of: hopelessness, helplessness, and worthlessness”. After Tyler Jennings breakdown at the medical health center, the army threatened to kick him out. Tyler felt so desperate for help and overwhelmed with distress he attempted suicide. Military clinical guidelines state it is best to hospitalize suicidal soldiers; yet Jennings’s supervisor ordered

19 Jennings be put in military jail for going AWOL (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Hear Jennings Describe What Happened When He Saw His Company Commander").

Supervisors at Ft. Carson admit giving soldiers with emotional troubles a hard time, but they firmly believe these soldiers do not belong in the army. In Jennings and Davis’s cases, the sergeants thought they were faking their symptoms to avoid returning to war (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

Jennings and Davis are not the only soldiers to have been abused and ignored by Army Officials.

Officials routinely play down the seriousness of mental problems so these soldiers were unable to receive treatment.

A soldier, Alex Orum, was diagnosed with PTSD came to his military post unwashed and late. He was expelled from the army for “misconduct”. According to psychiatrists Orum’s actions were uniform with affects of PTSD. Another soldier, Jason Harvey, was diagnosed with PTSD, after he had a breakdown where he sliced his wrist in an effort to obtain help and was soon he was kicked out of the army for misconduct. After Tyler Jennings was diagnosed with PTSD he was expelled for drugs use and infractions (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

Mr. Wright, a soldier with PTSD, had to wait weeks at Ft. Drum to see mental health professional. He states, “The average wait time is five to six weeks. When a soldier is having a mental breakdown, he has to wait over a month to see a counselor about his problems. For those who still doubt the legitimacy of these wounds, they often are abusive of fellow soldiers in their unit” (Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base").

There is a pattern in these cases. Once a soldier seeks help for their PTSD they are removed from the army for “misconduct”. The military doesn’t want to deal with PTSD because its treatment elevates costs and create more work for the military. A former employee of Ft. Carson says the army’s obligation is to pay soldiers who are discharged from the army due to PTSD; so they discharge them for misconduct or violating rules so they don’t have to give those benefits and/or compensation. Clearly, as evidence suggests, soldiers are purposely ejected from the army because they suffer from PTSD (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

The military appears more interested in maintaining the image of its soldiers as fearless, manly, and strong; thus creating an atmosphere where one should simply get over problems because seeking care for mental health is a sign of weakness.

Nathan Towsley, a retired army sergeant, exemplifies the military’s attitude. In an NPR interview, Sergeant Towsley described his intolerance for soldiers who were weak-minded. He further stated the military is a place where individuals have to be strong; if they have problems they don’t belong. "When I'm daily dealing with a soldier struggling with personal problems (PTSD), I don't have time to train soldiers to fight in Iraq. I have to get rid of them, because they are a detriment to the rest of the soldiers” (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

Only 53% of service members and veterans who reported symptoms of depression or PTSD, sought treatment, according to a RAND study (Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base”). This low treatment rate suggests soldiers and veterans are afraid to seek treatment for PTSD; it is regarded as a sign of weakness. Soldiers’ and veterans’ reframe from seeking treatment which keeps medical care costs down for the government. I feel the military needs to publically acknowledge and encourage soldiers and veterans suffering from PTSD to seek help and position it is a sign of strength rather than weakness.

Upon arrival at Ft. Carson soldiers fill out a questionnaire which helps identify signs of mental problems including depression, PTSD, and substance abuse. The GAO found that 80% of these intake questionnaires show signs of potential risk of PTSD; yet soldiers weren’t given mental health checkups. The Pentagon disagrees with GAO’s study (Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish").

According to The Veterans for America report soldiers fear doctors’ lack of autonomy. Base leaders unconvinced as to the legitimacy of war related mental wounds would force their position on the doctors (Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base"). “There’s a trickle- down problem with the message, and that is that there’s still pervasive stigma around mental health treatment in the military, along with a lack of confidentiality,” said Mr. Forrester of Veteran for American (Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base").

Veteran, Herold Noel returned home with PTSD it took 18 months for the VA to declare his PTSD. The VA did not help him get a job or a place to live. He almost took his life he became a drunk and homeless and had to leave his family because of his irrational behavior. In Iraq he drove the most dangerous truck, rooted with explosives. When he came home he couldn’t get help he needed, he was denied jobs, had no place to live, and was full of shame. After 18 months the VA reversed itself decided to give Noel monthly disability payments. He wondered if the country was committed to the troops returning home with mental and physical disabilities. A man named Paul who started Operation Truth helped Noel get involved. He became an advocate to help get more medical

20 care at the VA. Herold Noel went to Washington D.C to speak to congress, asking them to support a bill expanding mental health benefit for returning soldiers (Shapiro, Joseph. "PTSD Among Poor Soldier Herold's Story and "Returning Soldier Finds Role as Advocate”).

One can’t deny the serious issue of PTSD being down played. Soldiers and veterans who have symptoms are simply ignored. Their wounds are invisible to the eye. The military should be treating soldiers and veterans with PTSD instead of punishing them by denying them proper service or care. PTSD leaves invisible scars on soldiers. Its lack of visibility makes it easy for the VA and Military Hospitals to misdiagnosis and down play the seriousness. The VA and military need to reform their policies to properly handle the rising PTSD claims instead of hiding behind its invisibility.

The VA requires veterans with PTSD to be unemployed in order to receive compensation. I feel veterans with PTSD should be able to receive compensation even if they are employed. Psychiatrist Nancy Andreasen, of the University of Iowa, states, “You can’t get a disability payment if you get a job—that’s not a logical way to proceed in terms of providing an incentive to become healthier and a more productive member of society” (Lewis, Libby.

"Advice to Stop PTSD Diagnoses Triggers Probe"). Chris Frueh, former VA clinician said, “The VA’s disability policies for veterans with PTSD were developed over 60 years ago and now require major, fundamental reform” (Vedantam, Shankar. "VA benefits System for PTSD Victims Is criticized").

In a VA facility in Texas, a psychologist who led the PTSD program told employees to restrict themselves from diagnosing veterans with PTSD because there were many veterans seeking government payment for their disability. At a medical facility for veterans, Norma Perez the psychologist wrote in staff members, “Given that we are having more and more compensation seeking veterans, I’d like to suggest that you refrain from giving a diagnosis of PTSD straight out” (Lee, Christopher. "Official Urged Fewer Diagnoses of PTSD"). Melanie Sloan, executive director of Citizens for responsibly and ethics stated, "It is outrageous that the VA is calling on its employees to deliberately misdiagnose returning veterans in an effort to cut costs. Those who have risked their lives serving our country deserve far better” (Lee, Christopher. "Official Urged Fewer Diagnoses of PTSD" and Lewis, Libby. "Advice to Stop PTSD Diagnoses Triggers Probe”). Because PTSD is an “invisible” scar, it is easy for psychologists to refrain from making a proper diagnosis and not get caught.

There was a class -action lawsuit in federal courts that disputed over the problem whether veterans with mental health issues are being ignored or whether the number of veterans with mental issues are overwhelming the system. This lawsuit was presented by Veterans for Common Sense and the Veterans United for Truth against the Department of Veterans Affairs (VA).

The process of veteran's claim for benefits takes over 180 days, which demonstrates continuation of neglect. If the veteran seeking help is denied benefits, they can enter for appeal which can take about four year to get results. Waiting an estimated time of four years to receive the care they need now is ridiculous, wrong and unfair.

Arturo Gonzalez (lawyer on behalf of Veteran for Common Sense and Veterans United for Truth) stated, “I don't know how any veteran can stand it and stick with it and get to the end of this process" (MacFarguhar, Neil. "In Federal Suit, 2 Views of Veterans' Health Care").

Among 5.6 million veterans that the VA treats, 1000 veterans a month commit suicide, which shows that veteran's mental health issues need much greater attention than it has now. The VA argued that there has been a 25% increase in the past year of veteran’s claims. VA accepts that the delays for compensation/benefits have been prolonged. They argue that the increase in claim has been one of four reasons that have been causing issues for VA, its not being neglected. Their lawyer Daniel Benising defends the VA by saying the claims are very complicated, they have to investigate whether the medical problem has to do with their military experience, the claims are open so veterans can add any information whenever, and there are budget limits. He understands the seriousness of the suicides in veterans, however it takes time for the VA to adapt given they have to run the largest heath care systems in American. Daniel Benising states, “It cannot all be done immediately like plaintiffs seem to think." Dr. Kussman under the secretary for health at the V.A was asked at the stand whether he was down playing the issue of PTSD. He responded saying, “It is unfair and inappropriate to stigmatize people with mental health diagnosis when they are having what people believe are normal reactions to an abnormal situation” (MacFarguhar, Neil. "In Federal Suit, 2 Views of Veterans' Health Care"). The head lawyer for the plaintiffs Gordon P. Erspamer said that Dr. Kussman’s answer showed that the V.A had failed to recognize the problem. The plaintiffs want the judge to parenthetically make the VA work more productively; they are not seeking budgetary damages In the case the Plaintiffs talk about how the VA had a good and possibly effective plan made five years ago but has still not been implemented (MacFarguhar, Neil. "Closing Arguments in Suit on Veterans' Mental Care"/Shafer, Scott. "VA sued Over Mental Health Care"). The military and VA can make as many excuses but they can’t back down on their obligation to our U.S veterans despite budget limits. The Military’s and VA’s response to PTSD is falling short. The VA and Military needs to take a different approach in treating veterans and soldiers. This issue cannot be ignored. It is not

21 morally right to continue on the current path of denying proper treatment and support. Mental health care should be available all veterans and soldiers with PTSD. I agree with Paul Rieckhoff, the executive director of Iraq and Afghanistan Veterans of America, a nonpartisan advocacy group when he says, “We can pay for mental health care now or pay for jail cells and cemeteries and alcohol and drug treatment programs later. Not to mention the moral obligation we owe to these veterans” (Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base").

In summary, I feel the government should overhaul its policies, standardized its evaluations, help veterans find jobs, offer extensive therapy, compensate employed individuals, reform the claims process, encourage veterans and soldiers to seek help, and make care accessible. The government’s role is to provide the care needed by veterans and soldiers. As a result, the government should fund programs for PTSD and supervise the VA and military to ensure adequate care for all veterans and soldiers suffering from PTSD despite its invisible scars.

Works Cited Foderaro, Lisa W. "Report Faults Mental Care for Iraq Veterans at Upstate Base." N.Y/ Region. 13 Feb. 2008.New York Times.1 Nov. 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/02/13/nyregion/13drum.html?ref=nyregion>.

Lee, Christopher. "Official Urged Fewer Diagnoses of PTSD." Washingtonpost.com. 16 May 2008.Washington Post.7 Nov. 2008 <http://www.washingtonpost.com/wpdyn/content/article/2008/05/15/ar2008051503533.html>.

Lewis, Libby. "Advice to Stop PTSD Diagnoses Triggers Probe." Morning Edition. NPR. 23 May 2008.

MacFarguhar, Neil. "Closing Arguments in Suit on Veterans' Mental Care." US. 1 May 2008.New York Times.5 Nov. 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/05/01/us/01vets.html?ref=us>.

MacFarguhar, Neil. "In Federal Suit, 2 Views of Veterans' Health Care." Washington. 22 Apr. 2008.New York Times.2 Nov. 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/04/22/washington/22vets.html>.

"Mental Health." Fact Sheet. 23 Oct. 2008. National Center for PTSD. 29 Oct. 2008 <http://www.mentalhealth.va.gov/mentalhealth/ptsd/fs_what_is_ptsd0ddb.asp>.

Shafer, Scott. "VA sued Over Mental Health Care." Day to Day. KQED. 18 June 2008.

Shapiro, Joseph. "PTSD Among Poor Soldiers: Herold's Story." Morning Edition. NPR. 7 July 2005.

Shapiro, Joseph. "Returning Soldier Finds Role as Advocate." Morning Edition. NPR. 8 July 2005.

Vedantam, Shankar. "VA benefits System for PTSD Victims Is criticized." Washingtonpost.com. 9 May 2007.Washington Post.1 Nov. 2008 <http://www.washingtonpost.com/wpdyn/content/article/2007/05/08/ar2007050801746.html>.

Zwerdling, Daniel. "Do Soldiers Receive Adequate Mental Health Care." Talk of the Nation. NPR. 7 Dec. 2006.

Zwerdling, Daniel. "Gaps in Mental Care Persist for Fort Carson Soldiers." All Things Considered. NPR. 24 May 2007.

Zwerdling, Daniel. "Hear Jennings Describe What Happened When He Saw His Company Commander." All Things Considered. NPR. 4 Dec. 2006.

Zwerdling, Daniel. "Soldiers Say Army Ignores, Punishes Anguish." All Things Considered. NPR. 4 Dec. 2006.

22 Tate Gieselmann Craig Butz Research in the Community The Lion and the Lamb: A Story of Skateboarding and Authority Have you ever felt like you were in a perpetual argument, where neither side could grasp the views of the other? This question describes the relationship between skateboarders and authority figures such as policemen and town leaders. The two have a strained relationship: skateboarders spend their free time rolling through the streets, trying to jump on and over benches and other concrete obstacles. In doing so, they damage property and are quite loud, disturbing people’s peace. In response, politicians enact laws that prohibit skateboarding in most public spaces, angering skateboarders, and their anger is mostly let out towards police officers. This cycle of mistrust is harmful to both parties: police officers harass skateboarders more, which costs skaters money in tickets and perhaps even arrest, while police officers have to take time out of their busy schedules to regulate skateboarders. The tension exists because neither side understands the other. Skateboarders just want to have fun, but police officers have to enforce the laws against skaters.

This conflict has come into the spotlight recently because of skateboarding’s newfound popularity. Thanks to reality show stars/skateboarders like Bam Margera and Ryan Sheckler, skateboarding has morphed from an outlaw activity into a national pastime. Now that skaters are in the spotlight, it is time for authority figures and skateboarders to bury the hatchet. Because there is so much tension between skateboarders and authority figures, the only way for them to coexist peacefully is for skateboarders to respect police officers and skate only where it is legal, and for police officers and other figures of authority to make spots for skaters that are integrated into the urban landscape of a city.

Skateboarding and the law have always had a strenuous relationship. In the early 1990’s, skateboarding was booming in San Francisco, and Justin Herman Plaza was one of many overcrowded skate spots on the Embarcadero.

Skaters like Chris Long, a writer, learned to question those in authority. Long was arrested for skateboarding at Herman plaza, and remembers hearing about drug overdoses in the police car he was placed in. He questioned the officer, saying, “Hey man, why don't you go after that instead of wasting your time harassing me?” (Harmanci). The officer then replied curtly, asking the skater if he was “lawyering” him (Harmanci). Skateboarders like Long assume that they aren’t doing anything wrong, but in fact they are scratching up ledges and making a lot of noise, which is disturbing to people. This is why they are sometimes arrested. To solve this deep-rooted problem, both sides must look deeper into each other’s argument to find a happy medium.

To skaters, skateboarding is free; it is a sport with no boundaries, no practices, and no coaches. All of this freedom comes at a price to society: skateboards scuff cement and property owners risk lawsuits, especially if a skateboarder is injured on their property (Harmanci). Therefore, laws are set up against skateboarding. When a skateboarder feels limited, his/her natural response is to resist that limitation. That entails skateboarding on public property.

When I talked to skateboarders, they told me that it is all for the love of the sport. According to Chris von Blohn, a skateboarder who lives in Sausalito, policemen “have no clue what our goals are”. He agrees that skateboarding is “dangerous” and skaters can “sue the place they skate if they hurt themselves”. However, he voices the same opinion as a lot of skateboarders, who feel disrespect towards policemen. The problem that skateboarders have with accepting the law is that the skateboarder is an “Outlaw athlete” (Morning Edition). Part of the appeal to many young skateboarders is the illegality of it. Skateboarding is a lot like graffiti, because it uses many public spaces for illegal purposes, and the enthusiast is not always on the side of the law (Harmanci).

Many skateboarders, when interviewed, conceded that they would be willing to work with policemen towards strengthening their relationship. It is all for the love of the sport, that is true, but skateboarders also sympathize with police officers. Skateboarder Jake Alexander, a freshman at Marin Catholic High School, says that police oficers are “genuine” and “nice people” who “deserve our respect”. I believe that the skateboarders that I have talked to would be willing to skateboard only in places where it is legal. According to von Blohn, “it is not worth risking the chances”, he says, “just for some footy”. In other words, many skateboarders are tired of this back and forth power struggle that has existed for years. If we want to solve this complex problem, then we must look to the other side of the argument to get a clearer view.

23 Skateboarding is illegal on the streets of many cities in California. According to Sausalito Police Chief Scott Paulin, skateboarding is illegal on the streets of Sausalito because it endangers the citizens who are on them.

He says that if skateboarders were to join bikers, pedestrians and cars on the crowded streets of Sausalito it would be a catastrophe. He goes on to say that the main priority of policemen is to keep the people safe, and by allowing skateboarding they would jeopardize the well-being of Sausalito residents. Paulin himself has two children who skateboard: he is a fan of the sport. However, he is required to prioritize his duties as a policeman over his personal beliefs, and his duty is to protect the city of Sausalito. Paulin stated that he is only carrying out the laws. Like many other policemen, he does not always support the laws that he enforces, but it is his job. He calls police officers the “representative government” (Paulin). That is, he does not always want to be the bad cop who writes tickets to lawbreakers; however, that is what provides for his family.

These are both good concessions on both sides, but there is still a lot of work to be done. If skateboarders and legally appointed authority figures want to coexist peaceably, they must both make some sacrifices. Town council members need to make more places in their city legal for skateboarding. Many skateboarders don’t like skate parks. There are too many rules around the parks, such as helmet and pad laws, and the obstacles are not always up to par with the actual streets. Some skateboarders feel that it is not cool to skateboard in a place that the opposite side of the law has built for you; however, these skateboarders might be willing to cooperate on a different level. A good solution to this problem would be to build small skate elements right into the streets. If there is an abandoned lot in between buildings, make it into a small skate plaza. Put in obstacles such as rails, ledges, and banks to skate on. The building doesn’t have to stop there. The city could build rails and banks right into the sidewalks or on sides of buildings. This would give skaters a place to skate without forcing them into a park where certain rules are enforced. There need be no rules at a skate plaza other than that of any other recreational facility. This would relieve stress to police officers and city officials. The police force would spend less time dealing with skateboarders, because skateboarding could be legal in designated places. City officials would like the idea of small obstacles because it pleases multiple groups of people: skaters are happy, people can watch the skateboarders, without fences in between, and admire the art of skating. In the end, every politician wants to please his or her people, so there is no reason for politicians not to back this project. Lastly, skateboarders would like this because it imitates the streets.

There is no hassle of having to be kicked out of a spot, and skaters can have more fun in a less constricted environment.

Skateboarders and authority figures do not see each other’s beliefs clearly. Skaters want to have a good time, but in doing so they harm public property. Police officers are seen by skaters as bad people, while they really are just following orders. In order for the two to coexist peacefully, authority figures and skateboarders need to cooperate: skaters need to skate only where they are allowed, and respect police officers. City leaders need to build obstacles integrated into the urban landscape of a city, as well as special areas set aside for skateboarding. Both of these provide places where skaters can go and legally skateboard. These concessions, on the sides of both parties, can mend the long-broken relationship between skaters and authority figures.

Bibliography "California Codes: Health and Safety Code: 115775-115800". Legislative Counsel of California. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://www.leginfo.ca.gov/cgi-bin/waisgate?WAISdocID=65611122211+0+0+0&WAISaction=retrieve>.

"IASC supports Senate Bill 1179 to protect skateboarding in CA!" Skateboard IASC. 1 Feb. 2006. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://www.skateboardiasc.org/news-detail.asp?NewsID=56>.

"Skateboarding, a National Pastime?" New York Times. 17 Aug. 2002. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://www.nytimes.com>.

Baker, Al. "Law Requires Children to Wear Helmets While Skateboarding". New York Times. 25 Nov. 2004. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://www.nytimes.com/>.

"Commentary: Choice to skate in city plazas and stairways rather than skate parks even if it means outrunning security guards." Morning Edition (August 16, 2002): NA. General OneFile. Gale. Bay School. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://find.galegroup.com/itx/start.do?prodId=ITOF>.

Harmanci, Reyhan. “Question authority -- Skateboarders' Anthem Finds Voice In Anthology”. San Francisco Chronicle. 18 Jan. 2006. <http://www.sfgate.com>.

24 Jay Gloster Craig Butz Research in the Community 11 November 2008 By the Teen for the Teen: The Lure of Online Social Networking What are Myspace and Facebook, and why are teens, all over America, using them? Myspace and Facebook are part of Web 2.0 and so are teens who use them. Web 2.0 is an aspect of Internet communication where users make content and interact with content made by other users. People can create profiles on social networking sites, through which they can share photos, videos, web links and almost anything else they desire. They can also send messages to each other (Palfrey 350-351). These websites have recently become very popular among teens. A study done in 2007 by the Pew Internet and American Life Project showed that 55% of teens ages twelve to seventeen who had access to the Internet use social networking sites (Lenhart “Social Networking Websites and Teens.”). Nearly all of these teens use the websites daily and about half use them several times a day (Lenhart “Social Networking Websites and Teens.”). What is it that makes these websites so popular? Three main reasons that teens are using social networking sites are that the sites make it easy for frequent communication, the teens get a feeling of validation when the content they generated receives responses from their peers, and it is a safe place to explore different parts of their identities as well as to try on new ones.

Teenagers love keeping in touch with as many friends as possible; they are always calling friends, making plans, sending texts and emails to their numerous friends. When a newer, faster technology, is released that lets the them communicate with all their friends at once, of course they will want to use it, and this is one reason many teens use social networking sites for communicating with their peers (An). Social networking sites make communication instant and easy, which lets it become more frequent (Harris 50). Teens use social networking sites for the same reasons some people use phones (An). They can stay in touch with friends who move away or who they can rarely see, and can chat and make plans with their current friends, but social networking sites also give opportunities that the phone doesn’t; teens can meet new friends based on interest rather than location (Lenhart “Social Networking Websites and Teens.”). Teens can also communicate with more than one person at once (An). Social networking sites also give many options of ways to communicate. People can send private messages, or public messages that anyone can see. They can participate in a chat room, or post a comment about something someone put in their profile. Even posting stuff on their own profile is a form of communication (Lenhart “Social Networking Websites and Teens.”) (Lenhart "Teens and Social Media"). Teens are attracted to the ability to communicate with anyone anywhere at any time. Social networking sites give them this ability, which lets them strengthen their friendships and forge new ones, letting them build their own bigger, stronger social community.

Adolescence is a time when kids are becoming adults, they are no longer the children of their parents, but instead are individuals. Who is that individual? To define themselves as an individual, teenagers have to forge themselves an identity, and social networking sites are used by many teens to explore and redefine their identities.

Even without the Internet, teens are constantly exploring their identities trying to figure out who they are (Harris 51). Social networking sites make this easy, and they are, as John Palfrey wrote in Born Digital, "a virtual laboratory for experiments in identity development" (27). Social networking websites give control to the user, and with control comes the feeling of safety. Profiles on these websites are easily made and manipulated to give viewers whatever view the maker wants to present (Palfrey 23) (Harris 51). Many teens use information like friends, interests, books they like, hobbies, and anything else about their life, to portray themselves. In a virtual community, like on social networking sites, nobody knows who anyone is, unless they are told. Anyone can make a new profile and become anyone they want, so that they don’t have to personally acknowledge or take responsibility for what they post or say online. A person can try on any personality online, and other people wouldn’t know that that wasn’t what that person always acted like. In a real world environment people are more directly judged by their peers for their experimental stages, but on the Internet things seem less real. If someone chooses to be anonymous, they can’t be held responsible for their actions. Teens experiment with their identities anyway, but social networking sites provide an easy, quick and seemingly safe way to experiment.

One result of teens portraying themselves through social networking sites is an increase in sharing personal information. Teens have been more and more using information about themselves to define themselves. Youth Radio’s Lauren Silverman spoke about how her attitude toward her “so called secrets” has changed, "I publicize my whereabouts and embarrassing escapades. It used to be enough to have a Facebook profile, but now you have to stand out. I once alluded to the crazy happening of my life, hinted about a new crush, now I italicize, CAPITALIZE, and bold my, so called, secrets" (Silverman). She was pointing out how young people under the age of 25 use private information. Youth are more and more often using public communications rather than private (Silverman).

Teens are more and more often using personal information to create their online identity. Teens’ view of sharing

25 personal and private information on the Internet it is a key way for teens to identify themselves on the online community and to be validated for who they are.

Teens love feeling accepted, receiving feed back, and having someone appreciate their jokes. It gives them a rush, a sensation of validation. On a social networking site they can also post as many things as they want at once, and can receive instant feedback from the nearly endless number of other teens using the same social networking site (Goodstein 61). Social networking sites are becoming the stage for teens to perform and to show off for their peers, where instant feedback is currency, and the spot light can have an infinite number of targets. Teens love creating their own content, like photos or poems, and posting it on their online profile (Palfrey 6). Teens care about what their peers think more than any other age group, so teens’ online profiles are great places where they can put themselves out in the vast openness of the Web to receive assurance that their peers care about them. To visit someone’s profile is to look at what they think is notable in and around their life. On a social networking site, people have the ability to send a comment to anyone that can be viewed by everyone. Receiving a good comment from a peer about a photo or any thing else a teenager posted gives a feeling of validation to that teenager, because it validates that what they think is notable is also noteworthy to someone else. If they receive a negative comment, it also seems less personal than in person and is less bruising and easier to ignore. A teen girl will feel accepted and validated if the picture she posted of herself in a bikini receives good comments about how sexy she is. If it doesn’t get good comments, she can just take down the picture, so it at least seems like there isn’t much to lose by posting things on a profile (Goodstein 61). This isn’t the only way of receiving validation. When the messages and comments people send are replied to, then they feel like they are welcome as a friend. These comments are expected to be sent and replied to, and they become almost like a social currency. Someone who receives many comments and messages must be popular, and that is exactly the feeling they get (Goodstein 61). The social networking sites are the perfect place for teens to seek validation from their peers, because it is easy for people to see all their content and if something flops then they don’t have to feel terrible about it. Teens receive almost instant feedback and can have almost constant communications with all their peers, which provides an excellent stage to receive validation.

More and more teens are joining social networking sites (Lenhart “Teens and Social Media”). Teens are not the ones who are changing, but rather it is the technologies that are. Teens have the same need to communicate, to define their identities, and to seek validation, but now they have faster, socially safer, virtual way to achieve these needs. These social networking sites aren’t replacing old technologies, but instead are being added on top of them (Lenhart “Teens and Social Media”). Teens still chat on phones and meet in person, but now they also have another way to interact, social networking sites. Why do so many teens use social networking sites? Teens need social interactions to develop, to communicate and to feel accepted, and social networking site are the newest tool that helps them to do these things.

26 Sources Cited An, Caroline. “Teens share lives online." Whittier Daily News.3 January 2007, California Newspapers. ProQuest.

Bay School Library. 1 Nov. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> "Commentary: Social networking on the Internet: In the future, we'll all be famous for 140 characters." Long Island Business News (Sept 26, 2008): NA. General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 12 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Good background information.

Goodstein, Anastasia Totally Wired : What teens and tweens are really doing online. U.S.A, 2007.

Harris, Frances Jacobso. I Found It on the Internet : Coming of Age Online. U.S.A, 2005.Hogge, Becky. "Privacy, the media and the internet; What is a MySpace page but a personal version of a spread in Hello! magazine?.” New Statesman (1996) 137.4899 (June 2, 2008): 52(1). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School Baisl. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Keen, Andrew. The Cult of the Amateur : How Today's Internet is Killing Our Culture. New York, N.Y.: Doubleday, 2007.

Lenhart, Amanda, and Mary Madden. “Social Networking Websites and Teens.” PEW Internet and American Life Project 3 January 2007. PEW Trust. 31 October 2008. <http://www.pewinternet.org/pdfs/PIP_SNS_Data_Memo_Jan_2007.pdf> Lenhart, Amanda, and Mary Madden. “Teens and Social Media.” PEW Internet and American Life Project 19 December 2007. PEW Trust. 1 November 2008. <http://www.pewinternet.org/pdfs/PIP_SNS_Data_Memo_Jan_2007.pdf> “Online socialising hits other leisure spending." New Media Age (Jan 10, 2008): 8. General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Palfrey, John and Urs Gasser. Born Digital : Understanding the First Generation of Digital Natives. New York, N.Y. :Basic Books, 2008.

Silverman, Lauren. “Public is The New Private.” What’s the new What. Courtesy Youth Radio. npr. 7 August 2008.

1 November 2008. <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?s toryId=93374338>

27 Fay Goldenshteyn Craig Butz Research B Block October 27, 2008 Land vs. Water pollution: Who will come out victorious?

Covering 70% of Earth’s surface, water is a very important to our every-day lives. One would think everyone would try and take their part in preserving it, yet water pollution has become a major problem found all throughout the world. It causes many unlikable results that affect the world in an unfortunate way. Many people know that different types of water pollution affect organisms in the water, but they affect plants, animals, and people living on land as well.

Water becomes polluted in many different ways, some intentional, some oblivious to others, and some accidental. Most of water pollution comes from oil spills. Because people do not want to spend much money disposing their oil, they illegally spill it into oceans, lakes, and other sources of natural water. Water becomes polluted by regular plastic garbage as well. Many people throw away unwanted garbage such as rappers and cans onto the ground, and eventually it reaches the water sources. This pollution accumulates over the years and forms a large mass of plastic pollution in the oceans. Without thinking anything will happen, people dump harmful chemicals into bodies of water. Also, sewage, garbage, and sludge are dumped into Earth’s oceans. Factories discharge in oceans which create another form of pollution, heat increase (Krantz and Kifferstien, 1). Yet some pollution is unintentional. For example, some oil spills happen accidentally. For example, equipment on a boat that carries oil could break down and leak a large spill of oil. This type of pollution also occurs when water drain pipes are located right next to sewage pipes. The sewage pipes overflow because of rainwater and spill into water sources such as the ocean and rivers. In addition, harsh chemicals from fertilizers, used with something such as farming, are washed up by rains into. In the end, the major types of pollution are usually referred to as direct and indirect contaminant sources and occur every day.

Large imbalances in the ecosystems on land are caused because of fertilizer pollution in water. Fertilizers cause “dead zones,” which are harmful pesticides that are lead into the ocean by runoffs. In addition, some industries dispose of their excess fertilizers in bodies of water. In return of these zones, algae begin to build up and a lot of oxygen disappears. Not only this, but the algae block the sunlight to other aquatic plants. In result there are much more dead plants, and the oxygen level lowers even more. This chain causes many aquatic lives to die. Because animals die, others that pray on them die as well. Eventually animals begin to starve and become extinct. Then this process affects the ecosystem of many serene areas. These fertilizer pollutants affect the food chain from the smallest micro organism to mass numbers of humans. Lastly, the delicate balances of the water systems break down and have a harder chance to attain clean water, fishing advantages, and preserving the nature of the water sources because of fertilizer pollution (Bankss 1).

Although most types of pollution can be fully or at least slightly restored, the solution for nuclear waste has not yet been created. Like many industries, creating their products creates waste. This waste is then usually dumped into the ocean. These radioactive fuel pollutants are extremely dangerous. Some high-level forms of this waste take more than twenty thousand years to decay. A way to stop this pollution is to stop all the industries from creating energy, yet this solution is very flawed for 16 percent of the world’s electricity depends on them. One solution has been storing these nuclear wastes underground, yet because the world moves no one can judge precisely when or where earthquakes will take place (Dorion 17-19). In the end, a definite solid solution for nuclear waste has not yet been created.

Global warming is a major effect of water pollution. Fossil fuels such as oil are found in many water sources that cause dangerous gasses for anyone around them. Many fossil fuels are found at the bottom of the ocean from dead sea-life animals because of oil spills and other forms of pollution. Because of these fuels, global warming increases. When one pollutes, they send unhealthy chemicals into the air that destroy the atmosphere. In result, more light and heat cannot escape from the earth’s atmosphere. Global warming is an ongoing problem in the world, and the pollution of fossil fuels in water speeds up the process (World Almanac 2000).

Land is affected by thermal pollution in water in two ways. One, hot water causes less oxygen making it hard for life forms to live in. In result many animals and organisms in the water die. This sets the food chain in an unequal balance. When thermal pollution creates warmer water, aquatic organisms increase their respiration rates and begin to consume oxygen much faster. Because of this their chance to attain diseases, parasites, and toxic chemicals increases. And second, those who prefer cool water move away from that water source. The change in this environmental source can cause a disruption in the ecosystem. In addition, the most desirable organisms for human beings begin to disappear. In the end, the rising temperatures reduce the productivity of oceans, such as plankton and krill, that imbalance the base of the food web (Kay, 1).

28 Thermal pollution can be easily reduced by a process called cogeneration. Factories and power plants can discharge their heated water through cooling pods and towers, instead of dropping it into bodies of water. These towers and pods cause the hot water to evaporate thus cooling it down, and then they discharge the cool water safely into the ocean. This process also considers creating power plants that use less wasted heated water in the first place.

Then the small amounts of wasted water that are left would be used in another type of manufacturing process that needs it (Ghosh, 1). This way, no wasted hot water would be left in bodies of water, thus causing no harm to the food chain and nature around it.

The air that we all breathe is drastically affected by water pollution. Sulfur dioxide found in metal pollutants can cause permanent lung damage and cause acid rain which kills trees and causes severe damage to statues and buildings .Metal pollutants in the ocean contain dangerous chemicals such as lead and sulfur dioxide, which emit into the air. Lead can cause brain and nerve damages as well as digestive problems to people and animals around the water source (World Almanac 2000). In March 1989, the tanker Exxon Valdez ran aground in the Prince William Sound inlet which is in the Gulf of Alaska. It spilled around 11 million gallons of crude oil.

(Martin, 1). These winds contained chemicals and smells from the oil spill that spread all over that area. The harmful chemicals in the air are very hard to escape; they infect many every day all over the world. (Raine, 1).

Many animals, people, and other organisms also die or become infected because of sewage problems and pollution. In often cases, drains for rain are located right next to sewage pipes. These drains lead into the ocean, and because the sewage pipes are not fully secure they break and join the rainwater drains.

Eventually the waste flows into the ocean. This causes infectious diseases and infects aquatic life to those who eat, swim, or stay around the pollution. In addition, it affects the drinking water that terrestrial life receives. They cause disease such as cholera and typhoid fever, which kill many infants (Water Pollution Guide, 1). These toxins from these pollutants and pesticides have passed through the food chain but were originally discharged thousands of miles away" (Dorion, 11). California is among the top 10 states that is leaking more pollutants into water ways than the Clean Water Act permits. These violations exceed the permitted level by at least 500%. The state collected 8.8 million in fines last year because of those caught by the Clean Water Act (Coile, 1). This has been an ongoing problem throughout the whole world, especially in third world countries that do not have strong enough sewage systems.

Sewage pollution can be prevented in mostly buy sewage treatment plants. Having sewage go through combinations of biological, physical, and chemicals processes that mostly remove the pollutants is a much better process than discharging pollution into a body of water. In these sewage treatment plants, the harmful chemicals found in pollutants are neutralized and deactivated. These plants work by using the bacteria found in out colons. It eats away the organic matter, phosphates, and nitrates which are all found in the sewage. Yet these treatment plants and the process are expensive. In result, scientists have found that preserving wetlands can be used as an alternative.

Scientists state that “the plants and bacteria found in the wetlands will do the same thing that bacteria in standard sewage treatment plants do” (Hariri 1). Not only does this solution prevent sewage pollution, but it restores wetlands as well.

Even more diseases, death, and even retail difficulties are caused by Cargo ships that have heavy bunger fuels. Many areas were worsened by fleets of diesel-powered trucks which carried cargo in and out of facilities.

When people go near these areas, the air from this pollution causes many people to attain asthma, irregular heartbeats, heart attacks, and early death, especially with those who have heart or lung disease. In 2005, pollution from trade oversees has caused 750 premature deaths out of California's 9,000 average. (Raine 1). In addition, millions of aquatic life forms die because of the polluted oil. On the beach, instead of sand there are millions of fish bones because of the horrible pollution. This unappealing view also affects property sales. Joel Bourne states, “It's hard to sell waterfront lots when dead fish carpet the shore and rotting algal blooms raise a stench vile enough to keep people indoors miles away” (Bourne 1). If this isn’t enough, oil pollution happens in the world every day, causing diseases, killing fish, and halting retail sales.

Oil pollution can be prevented in separate ways, and different places all over the world have taken serious actions. Air resources approved a set of laws that for the very first time would control pollutants that were discharged by cruise lines, tankers, and container ships. One of the rules would be would be limiting the amount of sulfur dioxide and nitrogen oxide emitting from these ships. The ships will be required to operate on two different types of fuels when they enter a boundary 24 miles away from the coast. The second rule would be a regulations that require the controls on diesel to stop on tractors, yard trucks, forklifts, and cranes used on ports. Yet, this has not been fully authorized (Raine, 1).

Another way land is affected by water pollution is by plastics people use every day. A large amount of pollution that many people call a "graveyard of plastic," which doubles the size of Texas, swirls between Hawaii and San Francisco. Scientists have found that for every one part plankton there is six parts of plastic. Much of the toxic

29 plastic washes up on the shores of land. In result killing wildlife, poisons seafood, which many people get unbelievably sick from, and even affects exacerbates global warming. Many creatures mistaken shiny and colorful rappers as food. These plastics also act as sponges to very harmful chemicals such as PCBs, concentrating the water much higher than any regular seawater. According to the Environmental Protection Agency only about 3 percent of plastic are recycled (Dorion, 4-5). Not only does it harm animals. For example, plastic bag can easily clog an outboard engine's cooling system. This can potentially drown people or set unwanted oil into the water. In the end, land is affected by plastics by killing animals, spreading harmful chemicals, and breaking ships.

There are many ways to prevent garbage pollution. A simple way anyone could take part in would be achieving garbage cans with tight cans. For without a lid, the garbage can fall over and eventually join in a runoff that goes towards the ocean (Argent 1). Many people hope that some other material will soon be used instead of plastic; one that can hopefully be decomposed much faster (Wenzel 1). On the other hand, some believe that â&#x20AC;&#x153;healthy wetlands are essential in reducing the effects of polluted runoffâ&#x20AC;?. They believe the wetlands act like filters, they degrade and remove all different types of toxic compounds that come from garbage (Martin 1). The more wetlands there are around the water source, the more filtration there is. Lastly, people can simply recycle. By recycling, no waste will end up in the ocean, and less garbage will be made.

Water pollution affects the land, humans, and many other things in an unfortunate way. Some completely unexpected, such as causing acid rain or problems with selling property. Yet most pollution can be repaired. Day by day the world is being polluted, so day by day it should be cleaned. Anyone can take part in this process, so get up, get active, and help clean up the magnificent world you live in.

30 Works Cited Argent, Gemma. “Pollution and San Francisco Bay.” Associated Content. 12 April 2007: 1. 11 October 2008 <http://www.associatedcontent.com/article/199686/pollution_and_san_francisco_bay.html>.

Bankss, Peter. “What is Water Pollution?” Ezine Articles. 6 Oct. 2008: 1. 10 Nov 2008 <http://ezinearticles.com/?What-is-Water-Pollution?&id=1559169>.

Coile, Zachary. “Pollution pouring into nation's waters far beyond legal limits.” San Francisco Chronicle. 12 October 2007. 11 October 2008. <http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2007/10/12/MNIPSOF76.DTL&hw=Pollution+pouring+into+nation+waters+far+bey ond+legal+limits&sn=001&sc=1000> Dorion, Christiane. Earth’s Garbage Crisis. New York: Gareth Stevens Publishing, 2007.

“Environment Global Warming and Greenhouse Effect.” World Almanac 2000.

Mahwah: World Almanac Books, 2000.

“Environmental Problems and Energy Use.” Macmillan Encyclopedia of Energy. Ed. Macmillan Reference USA. Vol. 2. New York: Macmillan Reference USA, 2001. Gale.

11 October 2008 <http://go.galegroup.com/ps/retrieve.do?sgHitCountType=None&sort=RELEVANCE&inPS=true&prodId =GVRL&userGroupName=san58140&tabID=T003&searchId=R2&resultListType=RESULT_LIST&cont entSegment=&searchType=BasicSearchForm&currentPosition=1&contentSet=GALE%7CCX3407300109 &&docId=GALE|CX3407300109&docType=GALE>.

Ghosh, Goutam. “Thermal Pollution.” The Hindu. 28 April 2003: 1. 10 November 2008 <http://www.hinduonnet.com/thehindu/mp/2003/04/28/stories/2003042800200400.htm> Hariri, Zeina. “ Effects of Dumping Sewage Water Directly Into the Sea.” Planetary Notions. 2002: 1. 10 November 2008 <http://www.youthcanworld.org/PN/dumpingsewage.html> Herrera, Dennis. “Taking Water Pollution by Storm.” SfGov. February 2003: 1. 11 October 2008. <http://www.sfgov.org/site/cityattorney_page.asp?id=29003>.

Kay, Jane. “Mother Ocean needs a helping hand to battle pollution, abuse.” San Francisco Chronicle. 19 October 2007. 11 October 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2007/10/19/SSGLS4S9C.DTL&hw=Mother+Ocean+needs+helping+hand+to+battle+ pollution+abuse&sn=001&sc=1000>.

Krantz, David and Kifferstein, Brad. “Water Pollution and Society.” University of Michigan. 10 November 2008: 1. 10 November 10, 2008 <http://www.umich.edu/~gs265/society/waterpollution.htm> Martin, Glen. “Our poisoned Bay.”San Francisco Chronicle. 2 August 1999. 11 October 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/1999/08/02/MN14115.DTL&hw=Our+poisoned+bay&sn=001&sc=1000 >.

Wenzel, Elsa. “Plastic pollution in oceans worse than imagined.” Smart Planet. 05 March 2008: 1. 11 October 2008 <http://www.smartplanet.com/news/people/10000849/plastic-pollution-inoceans-worse-than-imagined-says-oceanographer.htm>.

31 Samuel William Green Craig Butz Research in the Community 27 October 2008 Operation Enlist War -- it causes death, fear, and it is expensive. But unfortunately war is sometimes necessary in today’s world. Currently the War on Terror is costing the United States over 570 billion dollars and counting (Cost of War Counter); this and the questionable justification for the War in Iraq has caused this war to be extremely unpopular.

At the end of the day recruiters need to find a way to put soldiers on the battle field. But due to the lack of support going into this war, the amount of recruits is at an all time low. Because of the ever growing pressure to recruit troops, America's youth has been targeted for recruitment misleadingly by the armed forces.

The army, feeling pressure to meet the quota, has had to change its recruiting methods. They have looked to new forms of advertising such as video games, increasing their budget for advertising and targeting youth in high schools. They have appealed to youth under the age of 18, which is ethically questionable. A minor is an individual under development. Some statistics put it as a 1 in 100-150 chance of dying by serving a tour in Iraq (Don Hodges).

The choice to join the army is an important choice that can change or end their lives forever. Do we want individuals that are not fully developed to make a decision that will change their lives forever? That was why the Optional Protocol was created. The protocol “is meant to safeguard the rights of children under 18 from military recruitment and deployment to war (Soldiers of Misfortune, 4)”. The military has violated this important protective measure by having military recruiters on high school campuses and other forms of advertisement aimed at youths.

Because recruiters are paid based on how many recruits they obtain, the pressure to sign more recruits has caused their tactics to be questionable. For example when at a California high school, recruiters “bought students” prom tickets if they signed up for information about enlisting, attended school dances and faculty meetings, and at times received permission from teachers to address their classes during class time (Soldiers of Misfortune, 12).”

Bribing students to join the army is an irresponsible act because one day their selfish act of bribing will cause the recruit to be injured or killed in action. Another such case pertains to an alumni from Thomas Edison High School in New York, named Romy Chowdury. He said: “At least twice a week I’d see recruiters coming to the guidance office talking to us about the military and giving us bags, cups, squishy balls, etc. promoting the Marine and Army slogans … We have enough to worry about our education that we don’t need to also be worried about military recruiters talking to you. They really should not be there (Soldiers of Misfortune, 12).” These acts should not go unpunished. A recruiter that does not follow the proper protocol should be dismissed from the army unless that is what the army wants their recruiters to do.

A proposed solution to this is to punish recruiters that misuse their power. Recruiters that use their power to blackmail or harass recruits so that they will meet their quota should be incarcerated immediately. These severe punishments would surely make a recruiter think twice before he/she abused their power.

The recruiters are not the only problem. Unknown to most when the No Child Left Behind act was passed there was a key piece of legislature included in it. Within its depths is a clause that “threatens the federal funding of any school refusing to turn over all students' personal contact information to military recruiters upon demand (AFSC, Y&M).” This provision means that all public high schools must give the personal information (phone number, email address and home address) of all students to the military. This information can be used directly by recruiters to contact youth about joining the military. Which is an infringement on peoples privacy.

The easiest and simplest solution to this is to eliminate the clause that allows recruiters extra access to student’s personal information such as email addresses and phone numbers from the No Child Left Behind Act altogether. The personal information of minors should not be given out to the military for recruiting purposes. The reason behind this is that a minor should be allowed to learn and follow their own path without the army bothering them about joining the army. This is an easy but very effective solution to this problem.

Another issue is that the United States unbelievably is the only world power that has not signed the CRC or the Convention on the Rights of the Child. This is one of the most commonly held pacts that preserves minors’ rights. Yet the U.S, which considers itself one of the most advanced and sophisticated countries in the world, still has not signed a pact that gives commonly held rights to minors. If the US wants to be respected by foreign nations it must sign protocols such as this one.

Technology has served the military well because through it they have been able to explore new dimension of recruiting. This new frontier has become one of the most popular and effective forms of media for America’s youth. The army has seized this opening by creating video games that are targeted at youth. The main video game that the army has produced is America’s Army, which continues to grow in popularity. According to The Nation, the production cost over $6,000,000 in Tax Dollars. Besides costing a fortune the game is extremely realistic to some

32 aspects of war. According to Paul Boyce, an army spokesperson. the game features include “Weapons that are modeled directly from the Army's arsenal. They feature real-time reloading, clips that fall the right way at the right speed. Guns even malfunction from time to time. Everything, from the explosion of different types of grenades to the way soldiers run, walk, and crawl, is accurate…even the night-vision goggles make the exact click and whir that the real, $3,000 goggles do (Hodes, Sachs, The Nation).” The disturbing part about the game is that all the weapons look realistic, but the one part of the game that is lightly brushed over detail-wise is the killing. When you kill someone there is nearly no blood and no sound effects. The reason behind this is so that the game could get a T (for teen) rating. One might ask: if the game is targeted at 18+ why would the army try to get a T rating? Unfortunately, because of the rating, children as young as 13 are allowed to purchase the game. Was this an accident? According to some reports, military personnel have said that the goal of the game “is to penetrate youth culture and get the Army into a young person's consideration set…By reaching kids when they're young, the Pentagon hopes they will develop a level of comfort with the military that will increase their propensity to enlist later (Hodes, Sachs, The Nation).”

There are a few details of this game that need to be changed. One, the rating must be changed from teen to mature. This way child as young as 13 will not be able to buy the game anymore. If a child wants to, they will be able to play. This is where the parents must come into the picture and take responsibility by preventing their children from playing this game.

The recruits need to be informed of what all their options are. There has been much demand in communities for a “recruit’s bill of rights (Soldiers of misfortune, 8).” The bill would contain information on the power of the recruits, their rights and advice on what to sign or not.

Unfortunately most people do not know of these problems. The main way to solve them is through publicity. For example the provision within the No Child Left Behind Act is not widely known. If more people knew they could prevent the personal information of their children being given to the military.

A child is a beautiful thing. As free citizens with rights for free speech. We must make our voices heard.

We must protect our youth from the dangers of war until they are fully educated and are mature enough to make such important decisions on their own.

33 Works Cited ACLU. Soldiers Of Misfortune. Rep.No. American Civil Liberties Union. 1-13.

Antigua, Juan. "We Want You(th)! Military Recruitment Report -- Statement by Juan Antigua." NYCLU.org. New York Civil Liberties Union. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nyclu.org/node/1351>.

Austin, Adana. "We Want You(th)! Military Recruitment Report -- Statement by Adana Austin." NYCLU.org. New York Civil Liberties Union. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nyclu.org/node/1352>.

Chowdhury, Romy. "We Want You(th)! Military Recruitment Report -- Statement by Romy Chowdhury."

NYCLU.org. New York Civil Liberties Union. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nyclu.org/node/1350>.

"Cost of War Counter." NationalPriorities.com. National Priorities Project. 11 Nov. 2008 <http://www.nationalpriorities.org/costofwar_home>.

Hintze, Wayne, and Jerry Lehnus. RECOGNITION OF MILITARY ADVERTISING SLOGANS AMONG AMERICAN YOUTH. Ijoa.org. Ijoa. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.ijoa.org/imta96/paper19.html>.

Hodes, Jacob, and Emma Ruby-Sachs. "America's Army Targets Youth." TheNation.com. 23 Aug. 2002. The Nation. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.thenation.com/doc/20020902/hodes20020823>.

Jonsson, Patrik. "Enjoy the Video Game? Then join The Army." Christian Science Monitor (2006).

"Military Recruitment at Select New York City Public Schools Violates Students Rights, Report Finds."

NYCLU.org. 8 Sept. 2007. New York Civil Liberties Union. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nyclu.org/node/1348>.

"Military Recruitment Practices Violate International Standards, Says ACLU." ACLU.org. 13 May 2008. American Cicil Liberties Union. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.aclu.org/intlhumanrights/gen/35258prs20080513.html>.

"The Military-Industrial Brain Washing of America's Children." RINF.com. 3 Jan. 2006. RINF Forums. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.rinf.com/columnists/news/the-military-industrial-brainwashing-of-americas-children>.

"Students and Recruiting." The AFSC.org. American Friends Service Commitee. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.afsc.org/youth&militarism/ht/display/contentdetails/i/18302>.

U.S. Army. Military. "Army Strong Advertising Campaign; National Advertising begins Nov.9." Press release. 09 Oct. 2006. U.S. Army. 09 Oct. 2008 <http://www.army.mil/-newsreleases/2006/10/09/363-us-armyannounces-new-army-strong-advertising-campaign-national-advertising-begins-nov-9/>.

"We Want Youth." Aug.-Sept. 2005. NYCLU. 10 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nyclu.org/files/we_want_youth_milrec_report_090607.pdf>.

"What are the chances of dying in Iraq, for a member of the U.S. military stationed there?" DonHodges.com. 23 Dec. 2007. Don Hodges. 11 Nov. 2008 <http://donhodges.com/chances_of_dying_in_iraq.html>.

Wollering, Mellissa. "Army Advertising or Military Recruitment?" NBC15.com. 9 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nbc15.com/home/misc/11039441.html>.

34 Erin Lori Harris November 2008 Research in the Community 1A, D Block C. Butz Insomnia Essay 4 x 7 = ZZZZZZZZZZZZZZ Insomnia is a sleep disorder when one cannot sleep and as a child, this can be very harmful to even the most basic of everyday routines. Insomnia is caused by many different factors; and doctors haven’t figured out all the causes yet. Insomnia in children and adolescents can also lead to many different health issues in children which in turn has an effect on their schooling. I chose to write about insomnia because I have insomnia and I am an example of the effects that insomnia has on the schooling of teens/children. Over the course of the last few months, my bodily functions and my school work have become a perfect model for teens with insomnia and I want to know how I can be cured. Insomnia has a negative effect on the world’s teen and child population because it affects the way kids and adolescents function at school and their capability to learn.

Insomnia in teens and children can be caused by many different things but ADD (Attention Deficit Disorder) / ADHD (Attention Deficit Hyperactive Disorder) have a huge impact on their sleeping habits. AAD and ADHD are prominent in adolescents and children and they affect the person’s ability to focus. This affects insomniacs in two ways. First, because their minds are simply too distracted to be able to focus on calming their minds enough to sleep (Greene). In these scenarios the minds of the teen or child wander and they cannot be tranquil enough to sleep and their running thoughts make them more awake. Secondly, teens and children with ADD/ADHD have the tendency to forget that they are supposed to be doing something when they are doing something else. Many times, the young person can be socializing, surfing the web, reading or doing other activities when they should be trying to sleep or trying to wind down so they can sleep (Tarkan). I have ADHD and in my personal experiences, I find myself reading at 2:00 o’clock in the morning and it takes a loud noise or a bright light to break my focus from my book. Then, I glance at the clock and will realize that I was supposed to be fast asleep long ago.

Along with ADHD, stress is a major factor in the sleeping habits of teens and children. Too much stress can lead to anxiety (especially in persons under the age of 25) and when someone is anxious, their mind races about all their issues and everything that is bothering them and making them stressed. When this happens, the adolescent or child’s mind will actually be more awake from all of the worrying (Chokroverty). This is what causes temporary insomnia in most temporary insomnia patients. Temporary insomnia is when someone has insomnia for less than three weeks due to (usually) excessive amounts of stress and/or anxiety (Greene). The bodies and minds of minors are neither developed enough nor capable enough to handle all of the stress that the world of the 21st century imposes on them and this causes excessive exhaustion (on top of what insomnia causes) and makes it extremely difficult to calm down enough to sleep (Tarkan). In my personal experiences, I have found that when I have too much stress and anxiety, I lay awake all night worrying about everything that is bothering me and then am more concerned and awake (from all the worrying) and that it makes it even more difficult to sleep.

The third and final major psychological cause of insomnia is depression which can cause insomnia in a few ways. The first is that when a person is depressed, they cease to do many physical things that all persons need to function such as eating, talking, and sleeping. Depression in teens and children is also usually much worse than it is in adults because the bodies and minds of all people over the age of 20 are better suited to cope with depression (Caldwell). The second is that depression causes a lack of motivation for complicated issues, none the less everyday bodily functions. Many depression patients with insomnia just don’t care enough to try to sleep so they don’t go though the necessary steps to get to sleep. To sleep, one must calm themselves down and make sure their mind is at rest or at least semi tranquil. Adolescents and children with depression sometimes don’t care enough to try to calm themselves every night so they can’t get to sleep. In this scenario, even if one wanted to, depression can make it so settling ones self down enough to sleep is an impossible task (Chokroverty). Depression is a major issue and it has a huge effect on insomnia and the lives and sleep habits of insomniacs.

Insomnia can also be caused by things that the insomniac is doing that do not promote healthy sleep; mainly, the activities that rouse the brain (as opposed to calming it) too close to bed time. Scientific studies have been done that show that the waves cell-phones, TVs and computers produce do not aid in falling asleep but make it harder. The waves interact with one’s brain and basically, make the person hyper and awake (Caldwell). It sharpens their focus and the bright lights make them believe that they are not tired. The person will believe that they do not need to sleep because they are not tired since the waves from technology are in their minds but in reality, they are just as exhausted as they were to begin with. Doctors and professionals recommend turning off and staying away form all electronics that can cause sleep issues an hour and a half to two hours before trying to sleep (Dement).

35 Also, food can be a stimulant because it takes lots of energy to digest. It is recommended to not eat for two to three hours before bed time. Insomniacs may be unknowingly causing or worsening their own sleep problems and with basic knowledge of how to avoid it they can change their before bed time habits so they aren’t causing their own sleep disorders (Chopra).

Insomnia in teens and children is obviously a huge issue that we need to solve now; this is easier said than done and we do not yet have a cure for insomnia. As is the automatic response for most Americans concerning any type of disease or disorder, modern medicine is the first response. However this reaction doesn’t work for insomniacs. There is no cure for insomnia, which means that none of the medicines that claim to cure insomnia actually do (Riha). There are some modern medicines that are temporary solutions for insomnia but they do not cure it. These medications can be prescriptions or over-the-counter but they are all still only temporary solutions. There are two main issues with modern medicine. The first is that they stop working after two weeks to two months.

Prescription drugs have the tendency to work for longer periods of time in teens and children but even so, after a while, the person’s body builds up a resistance to them; in other words, the body builds up immunity so the drug no longer makes the child or teen sleepy (Kimball). The second issue is that these drugs cause long-term liver damage.

This will put the teen or child at risk of needing a liver transplant later in life and can lead to liver failure which has the potential to be fatal. Drugs that induce sleep can be a good solution for temporary insomniacs but they are not a legitimate cure for insomnia.

As Americans and world citizens, we are prone to resort to natural cures when the modern medicinal ones don’t work and this field promises a brighter future for insomniacs everywhere. Even though there are no natural cures for insomnia, there are many natural remedies that have been scientifically proven to help make teens and children sleepy and to help them sleep. These herbs are much better for the human body for two reasons; the first is that they are natural so one is not putting unnecessary chemicals into one’s body when using them and the second is that herbs do no harm to people (Hirshkowitz). Along with many others, some of main the herbs that have been proven to help stimulate sleep are chamomile and lavender. These can all be found in a variety of forms; most commonly bubble baths, teas, pill capsules, and dry satchels to keep near ones bed. All can be purchased for a small amount at most supermarkets, drug stores and natural food or herbal stores. Many of these herbs help people sleep because they are calming and they help people settle down before bed time. These herbs are a great step in the direction to cure insomnia (WebMD. "Sleep problems, Age 12 and Older, Topic Overview.").

Insomnia does not directly affect the school work and learning habits of teens and children but it does affect their everyday life which in turn affects their educational lives. Insomnia in young adults has been proven to increase a teen or child’s desire to participate in activities that may lead to health problems, trouble with the law, and other bad behavior (Riha). For example, teens with insomnia are more prone to try smoking, drinking, and drugs than a teen or child without insomnia. All of these can lad to car accidents and trouble with the law and/or the parents. Insomnia also has the tendency to cause depression and anxiety to worsen in teens and children. This creates a vicious cycle in which depression and anxiety keep the teen or adolescent up at night which makes depression and anxiety worse which makes it harder to sleep, so on and so forth. Insomnia also makes it very difficult for teens and children to pay attention not only in school but in everyday life. This means that the lack of sleep at a young age makes ADHD/ADD worse in teens and children. This is another nasty cycle; ADD/ADHD makes it more difficult to sleep which increases ADD/ADHD which makes it even more difficult to sleep, etc. All of these side affects of insomnia in minors affect their day to day lives which affect their school work and learning habits because education is a part everyday life for adolescents and children (Dement, William C., and Christopher Vaughan).

Insomnia in teens and kids also affect their health which affect their academics. The most important factor is that 70 percent of the hormones that a child or especially adolescent’s body needs to function and grow properly are created during these vital years of maturation are produced during sleep. When a child or teen isn’t sleeping, that means that all of those hormones aren’t getting produced and this has a negative affect on the child or teen’s school life because it puts them behind the rest of their peers developmentally (WebMD. "Sleep Disorders: Hormonal Insomnia?") In addition, lack of sleep or poor quality sleep can lead to the decline in the immune system which means that teens and children with insomnia are more likely to get sick than the rest of the population of their age. When adolescents and kids are sick they aren’t able or allowed to attend school or do academic work which puts them behind in their studies and schooling. Illnesses, especially viruses are notorious for causing drowsiness in many of their victims; as do many of the medications used to treat them. This just makes children and teens with insomnia even more tired than they already are (WebMD. "Insomnia common among teens."). In my experiences with insomnia, I have developed migraines due to lack of sleep. As the migraines progress, it becomes more and more difficult to pay attention in class, function in class and do my work. I also routinely have to leave class because the pain is too much to deal with in a loud classroom. My extreme headaches also make it much more

36 difficult to do homework especially when the material is new, confusing or dense. All of these factors put minors behind in their studies as a direct result of the side-affects of insomnia.

In conclusion, I think we need to find a cure for insomnia now because I have not only watched my life get completely turned upside down by it but I have watched insomnia drastically change the lives of many people who I am close to. I hope that with all of the doctors and scientist who study insomnia plugging away in their labs and offices we will find a cure soon. Insomnia is obviously a problem especially when the academic lives of adolescents and children are being jeopardized and worsened by something that is not their fault nor under their control.

Insomniacs are basically being punished for something that they have no control over and that they usually donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t even know what it is caused by. Insomnia in teens and children is a serious subject that many people have dedicated their lives to solving. Insomnia has the power to change the lives of adolescents and children everywhere because it has a negative impact on their academic lives. We need a healthy and smart generation of people to solve the problems of the 21st century and to move civilization along smoothly. How can this be done if my generation includes many tired, hurting individuals?

Works Cited Caldwell, J. P. Sleep : The Complete Guide to Sleep Disorders and a Better Night's Sleep. New York: Firefly Books, Limited, 2003.

Chokroverty, Sudhansu. 100 Questions and Answers about Sleep and Sleep Disorders. New York: John Wiley & Sons, Incorporated, 2001.

Chopra, Deepak. Restful Sleep : The Complete Mind-Body Program for Overcoming Insomnia. New York: Southgate, 1994.

Dement, William C. The Sleepwatcher's. New York: Nychthemeron P, 1996.

Dement, William C., and Christopher Vaughan. The Promise of Sleep : A Pioneer in Sleep Medicine Explores the Vital Connection Between Health, Happiness, and a Good Night's Sleep. New York: Broadway Books, 1999.

Greene, Gayle. Insomniac. New York: University of California P, 2008.

Hirshkowitz, Max, Patricia B. Smith, and William C. Dement. Sleep Disorders for Dummies. New York: For Dummies, 2004.

Kimball, Chad T., ed. Adolescent Health Sourcebook : Basic Consumer Health Information about Common Medical Problems, Developmental Issues, and Fitness in Adolescents. Danbury: Omnigraphics, Incorporated, 2002.

Riha, Renata L. Sleep : Your Questions Answered. Ed. Anne H. Rennes. Grand Rapids: Dorling Kindersley, Incorporated, 2007.

Tarkan, Laurie. "When childhood is enough to keep you up at night." New York Times. 14 Sept. 2008. 29 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/09/15/health/healthspecial2/15insomnia.html?_r=1&scp=1&sq=when%20 childhood%20is%20enough%20to%20keep%20you%20up%20at%20night&st=cse>.

WebMD. "Insomnia common among teens." Sleep Disorders Health Center. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.webmd.com/sleep-disorders/news/20040610/sleepless-nights-common-among-teens>.

WebMD. "Sleep Disorders: Hormonal Insomnia?" Sleep Disorders: Hormonal Insomnia? 13 Oct. 2008 <http://blogs.webmd.com/sleep-disorders/2006/03/hormonal-insomnia.html>.

WebMD. "Sleep problems, Age 12 and Older, Topic Overview." WebMD. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.webmd.com/sleep-disorders/tc/sleep-problems-age-12-and-older-topic-overview>.

37 Dylan Hyman D Block Research in the Community November 2, 2008 Gears and brakes are for old men Fixies, or fixed gear bikes, are the most basic of bicycles. In fact, the first bike ever created was a fixed gear bicycle. It was invented by Karl van Drais in 1818. The difference between a regular bike and a fixed gear bike is that the wheel on the fixie is directly connected to the pedals by the chain, which means the rider can’t coast. This bike also doesn’t have gears, which appeals to some people because they don’t have to deal with the upkeep of the gears and the derailleur or gear-shifting device. This absence also makes the fixie lighter and cheaper to maintain.

This form of biking is very appealing to adrenaline junkies and dare-devils because it is a more dangerous version of riding: most people ride them without brakes. One may think that the rider cannot stop without brakes, but because it is a fixed gear bike, the rider can stop only by locking up his feet and forcing the wheel to skid to a stop. Another reason that fixed gear bikes are dangerous is because clothing can get stuck in the chain which will most likely throw him to the ground. Another danger is the chain falling off, causing the rider to lose control of the speed of the bike. This would force the rider either to jump off or try to ride until the bike stops rolling. A pedal strike, which is when your inside pedal hits the ground, is one of the worst fears of beginning fixed gear riders because on a freewheel or normal bike one can coast around a corner so the pedals don’t hit the ground. On a fixie, because the rider cannot coast around a corner, one of the pedals may strike the ground if the rider leans too far. This throws the bike sideways and launches the rider into the air and eventually onto the pavement. These dangers are part of the fun of riding a fixie, but there are ways to avoid injuries and accidents.

The fixed gear bike movement started with Velodrome racers. Velodrome racing is racing in indoor or outdoor arenas that have a steep banked oval track to keep the rider from having pedal strikes at high speeds. Most Velodrome racers race with gear ratios of around 53:12, a very high gear which on the streets would be impractical because of hills. Velodrome racing is a very tactical sport, and it requires a great deal of quick maneuvers, fast acceleration, deceleration, quick thinking, and critical decision making. The bike messengers in New York thought that these bikes would help them with their work because they are faster, nimbler, and more efficient. They can maneuver through traffic more effectively and go faster than on a geared bike which in a job that depends upon time is a great asset.

Since more and more bike messengers are riding fixed gear bikes in major cities in the United States. Many fixie enthusiasts ride daily and demonstrate a passion or obsession as demonstrated by the number of Google hits since 2004 about fixies and accessories. Many riders report that these bikes have a magical or even Zen feel to them that they can’t get with any other bike. Instead of riding on the bike one rides with the bike. One feels connected to the bike, the road, the traffic, and the greater environment. Skateboarding and BMX are about as close as a rider on land can get because the rider gets the same sort of rush combining speed and risk. However, it still cannot compare to riding a fixie. Once one starts riding you get hooked and you just can’t stop. Given the number of youth willing to take the risk of looking for new thrills we will be seeing more of these bikes in the future.

On the downside these bikes do take a toll on your body. Many knee injuries happen because of the extreme stress on these joints caused by skidding. Fixies are also easy to crash if one is inexperienced on the bike, which can unfortunately result in serious injury and even death. As my friend Justin said “I’d rather be less fashionable and ride with a brake, than ground up into pieces in the wheel well of garbage truck”. I don’t see a need for a front brake, but it is probably smart to have a front brake but some people believe it numbs their senses and they think it’s safer to ride no brakes than a front brake. A friend of mine got an expensive ticket for having no brakes even though, because he was a skilled rider, he was only endangering himself. In Portland Oregon they have even gone to the extent of banning biking with no brakes. Most fixed gear riders take the blame for getting hit by cars like this one fixed rider who got hit by a car because he ran a stop sign he says it is his fault and he does not blame the driver he says it’s all part of the danger and the fun of riding a fixie. Of course it’s never fun to get hit by a car but the feeling that you are like an untouchable force that glides around the city on two wheels never coasting.

Many people ask the question is it hard to go up the San Francisco hills? And the answer is, it is hard if you don’t build up momentum before. The advantage is that you can go up hills at a much faster pace than a geared bike can and I would rather g fast and ride up fast then shift down and spin your feet a lot and go very slow. There are many advantages and disadvantages of a fixed gear bike but the truth is that if you really get into the bikes then for as long as you live you will eat, sleep and live fixed.

Fixed gear bikes are used by bike messengers all over the world because they are faster than regular bikes.

A long time London messenger said “then he got a fixed gear bike and he was fast, scary fast”.

38 Fixed gear bikes were becoming a fad and were a fashion accessory to lots of trendy kids; people just have them so that they look cool and they fit in with the crowd. But now the movement has a new branch. A branch of people who ride these bikes every day or at least when ever they can. This new kind of fixed gear rider is really more serious about the riding than looking cool. Don’t get me wrong these people still like to make their bikes look good, but they won’t go out and spend $1,000 on a bike and then never ride it because it is a limited edition or because they don’t want to scrape it up. They buy the bikes so that they can ride and do tricks. The fixed gear movement has even become a kind of street sport. All of this you are crazy to ride these on the streets happened to bmx riders and skateboarders everybody thought that they were crazy, but eventually they got used to the fact that they don’t care what you say they love what they do and they wont stop having fun until the day that they die.

39 Justin Kim C. Butz Research in the Community Skate Culture and the Many Growing Problems Skate culture involves dedicated skaters willingly to do whatever it takes to get better and most of the time, it involves a confrontation of law enforcement officers, security guards, or angry community members who view their passion in a negative way. Skateboarders skate with a passion and nothing will stop them from staying off the streets and having a good time. Many skate as a sport and some skate as a way of transportation also (“Skateboarding Rises as Transportation).

Skateboarding is a major growing sport and a huge influence on youth today. Top skaters such as Paul Rodriguez, Ryan Sheckler, Sean Malto, and Peter Ramondetta skate big cities like San Francisco, New York, and Los Angeles. Kids and teens see this and dream that one day they will be good enough to join a pro skate team and travel the world and do what they love which is skateboarding. This is all great, but the problem starts when skateboarders skate in the streets and in public areas where it is disturbing residents and workers. You do not go to a skate spot and skate for five minutes and leave, but you stay all day filming each other and have a good time skating.

Skating is loud and sometimes is scratches and tears apart public property and when people who are not skaters walk by and see this activity, they view it in a negative way. Because of this, skateboarders have earned a stereotype to be disruptive people.

Traffic laws in the county of San Francisco say that skateboarding is prohibited on public and business areas. Also, skateboarding laws in California requires skaters under the age of 18 to wear a helmet on bike paths, streets, or trails (San Francisco Skate boarding Laws). Skate boarding laws in San Francisco is as follows: a) Prohibits skateboarding on any city street at any time, on any sidewalk in any business district at any time, and on any non-business district sidewalk commencing 30 minutes after sunset and ending 30 minutes before sunrise (Traffic Code, Section 100) b) Prohibits skateboarding "in or about any public transit station (including an outdoor high-level boarding platform), streetcar, cable car, motor coach, trolley coach or other public transit vehicle, including, but not limited to, those stations or vehicles operated by the Bay Area Rapid Transit District" (Traffic Code, Section 128) c) Prohibits skateboarding in Yerba Buena Gardens, the Japanese Tea Garden, the Arboretum, Conservatory Valley, where it is posted as prohibited, and in South Beach Park or Rincon Park unless otherwise permitted (Park Code Sections 3.05 and 11.02 and Port Code Sections 2.4 and 7.2). d) Requires skateboarders at skating facilities owned or operated by the City and County to wear helmets, kneepads, and elbow pads (Park Code Section 4.17).

Many skaters view law enforcement officers as “annoying” and “a life wrecker”. Most skateboarders have no respect for authority and law enforcement and do not listen to their orders unless force is used upon.

Skateboarders think that police are out on the streets to make kids miserable and “be annoying”. A couple years ago, on Fox News, there was a story of a skateboarder skating a ledge and a police officer comes by and pushes the skater off the ledge and into a bush. The camera man got footage of it and the police officer was charged of assault.

Sometimes police are fed up of skater’s activity and desire to be mean to skaters. Not all skaters have a bad idea of police, but most skaters when asked their opinion of the police, they would say “F*** the Cops”.

One of the reasons for skateboarders on the street is because there is a lack of skate facilities in the United States. Currently there are about 1800 skate parks in the United States (Skate Park Industry Statistics). Some of the more rural states have less than ten skate parks in the state, so skateboarders are forced to skate at public areas that are most convenient to them. If there is ground and you have a skateboard, you can skate basically anywhere. The problem starts when people who do not understand the skaters position calls security and the police. They are not always doing anything wrong, but people misconceive them for kids who drop out of school and purposely make trouble.

The other reason for skateboarders skating in public and private areas is because skateboarding is an art and culture. If you take a look at professional skateboarding, most of the places they skate and film at are public spots.

Take San Francisco as an example. San Francisco was the most popular skate spot in the 1990’s. The hills, Victorian homes, stair sets, and ledges are combined to provide a skate spot better than a skate park. The streets were filled with the top pros in the world “shredding” down the hills of San Francisco (“Built to Grind”). Some skaters enjoy skating at a park, but most skaters love finding new places to skateboard and be creative. Tate who explains his love for skating as a “creative outlet” says “I love skating street because of the freedom, finding new places to skate and the ability to be as creative as you like to be”. Another skater, Cole Stevens, describes skating street as “more risky”.

40 Many street skaters would say that skating in the street is risky because of authority, but that does not stop skaters like Tate from doing what they are most passionate about.

A solution to the lack of skate parks in the United States can be solved by a group of skaters in a community and working towards building a skate park. First, they should create an organization of skate boarders in their community that would work towards installing a skate park. Next, they should set up a meeting time in order for all the members of the organizations to discuss the plans of the skate park and financial budgeting. The organization members should meet with non-profit organizations, city officials, and law enforcement agencies and propose their plan, so that the skaters don’t bother community members and community members do not bother the skaters. After they have done that, the skaters should plan a campaign and develop and fact sheet and information sheet (Getting a Skate park). They should share this information by posting it on a blog or creating a mailing list to send out to people who support the idea. Flyers that are posted around large populated areas can be an important part of getting the attention of community members. If possible, media exposure can be a great help especially through television commercials or on the radio. After all of this has been put together and building a skate park will benefit many skaters, take it to city hall and get the idea approved. If all goes well, hopefully a skate park will be built in your neighborhood. Successfully installing skate sparks in neighborhoods will decrease the number of skateboarders on the streets which will lead to fewer confrontations between law enforcement and skaters.

The problem of skaters skating on the streets will most likely continue to be a problem. Even though skaters sometimes have access to skate a park, they choose not to. Zak Blatt loves skating street and looking around the city to find places to skate and he said “I love taking day trips to down town San Francisco with a group of homies filming and skating local skate spots”. When skaters are driven by their passion, nothing can stop them from doing what they love, and they are fully aware of the consequences that follow their actions, but do not care about these consequences. Sometimes, skaters think that they can run or get away from trouble and skate anyways.

Because of the growing skate problems in cities and neighborhoods, law enforcement agencies create regulations and “no skateboarding” signs at local skate spots, but no one ever follows these rules. This causes friction between skaters and the rest of the world who doesn’t understand skate culture because the two different groups have different mind sets and views.

This is a famous San Francisco Skate spot located on 3rd and Army.

Many of the pictures shown in skateboard magazines such as Thrasher or The Skateboard Magazine is shot around a scenic view with a skater doing a trick. In the eyes of skateboarders, skating around a city and finding new locations to skate is more fun than skating a skate park where you skate often. Pro teams travel the nation going to the most famous skate spots to do what they love. When beautiful skate spots right by the bay like 3rd and Army are just a short walk to a bus ride away, who wouldn’t enjoy the scenery and have fun skating there? Skating these kinds of skate spots drive skaters to get out and skate and maybe one day be on the cover of a magazine or in a video doing a line at one of these skate spots. Because of these people, kids and teens work hard from a young age and aspire to become like them one day.

41 Skateboarders and law enforcement officers are not always right, but skaters will get the negative image from non-skaters. Skateboarders intentionally skate prohibited places because it is a nice spot to skate and they do not really care of the consequences and other times, law enforcement officers take advantage of their authority and mistreat skaters. No one is right, but finding a solution in order for the two to coexist peacefully is critically needed to lessen the tension and redeem the images of skaters around the world.

Works Cited Denike, Bob. Built to Grind. Santa Cruz: Prism Photographs, 2004.

“San Francisco Skateboarding Laws.” Adam Van de Water.7 July 2003. 8 October 2008 <http://www.sfgov.org/site/bdsupvrs_page.asp?id=18376>.

“Site.” Site Design Group. No Date 13 October 2008 <http://www.sitedesigngroup.com/faq.html>.

“Skateboarding Rises as Transportation.” DrSinValley. 30 April 2007. 17 October 2008 <http://sf.broowaha.com/article.php?id=1410>.

“Skate Park Guide.” Anthony Gembeck . No Date. 13 October 2008 <http://www.skateparkguide.com/Get%20a%20Park.htm>.

42 Charlotte Lee Craig Butz Research in the Community 27 October 2008 Teenage Girls Across the World are Sinking Their Teeth into Vampire Fiction It is rare that you find someone who has never heard of vampires. We all know vampires are undead creatures who stalk the night, looking for victims from which they can get blood. They are said to survive off blood and live forever; they are thought to be the ultimate super-humans who have paid the ultimate price, their souls.

Throughout the past few years, vampires have become more and more present in teen fiction. It is not unusual to see excited teens gab over ‘Twilight’, a movie adaption of the bestselling book scheduled for release November 21, and swooning over the handsome Edward Cullen. Vampires are present not only in novels but in manga (Japanese comics), anime (Japanese animation), and on television. Vampires pose as one of the most interesting subjects of our modern world; and in my opinion nothing is more interesting than a soulless teen looking for love and a normal life with the human they love most. But why are teens so attracted to it? Teens everywhere have been reading more and more vampire fiction because vampires can do that one thing many of us long to do: rebel against time, morality, and mortality, and to be young, beautiful, and super-human for all eternity.

Has vampire fiction always been popular or is it just starting to surface? Vampires in fiction first started with John Polidori’s “The Vampyre”. Later, in 1897, Bram Stoker wrote “Dracula”, which has been made into several different movie adaptations. Vampire fiction did not pick up again until 1973 when Anne Rice wrote “Interview with a Vampire”, the first book in her series about the vampire Lestat.

The story of Twilight attracts the teenage mind with love, loss, drama, and danger. “Twilight” was published by Stephanie Meyer in 2005 and is the story of a teenaged girl, Bella, who moves from Arizona to Forks, Washington. There she meets and falls for Edward Cullen, a vampire; as well as befriending Jacob Black, a werewolf.

Since then, other vampire series have begun to become more and more prominent in literature. In 2007 alone, writers Rachelle Mead, Kristen and PC Cast have published several books about vampires. The Casts have published the first four of their ‘house of Night’ books, a series about Zoey Redbird, a teenager has to deal with being Marked (chosen by the goddess Nyx to become a vampires) as well as extreme goddess given powers, three boyfriends, and the death of her best friend. Mead’s series ‘Vampire Academy’ is a favorite of mine. It is the story of a school where half vampires are trained to protect their full vampire charges against the evil, immortal vampires; it also entails a character who deals with depression and a forbidden romance between a student and her mentor.

Vampires are also very prominent in other forms of the media. The popular 1997 show, ‘Buffy the Vampire Slayer’ was one of the first to incorporate vampires. Recently vampires have appeared in the new shows like ‘Trueblood’, 'Moonlight’, and ‘Angel’. Another form of media would be Japanese comics and animation; series like ‘Vampire Knight’, ‘Vampire Hunter’, ‘Vampire + Rosario’, and ‘Chibi Vampire’, have all been popular and have been made into television shows.

English teacher, Tobey Schwartz says that although she is not a teenager, but the idea of what vampires are, is intriguing within it’s self. Vampires in fiction are normally very rich, well dressed, mysterious, brooding, extremely good looking, and most importantly, every teenage girl’s dream ‘bad boy’ and every parent’s nightmare.

“They are always portrayed as misunderstood, not evil at all, romantic, angsty, broody kind of characters; again, typical bad boys - who often have a sensitive side to them” (Schwartz).

On twilight in particular, Schwartz said that Bella represents what FanFictors (in other words people who write fan fiction: fiction about characters or settings written by admirers of the piece, as apposed to original author) call ‘Mary Sue’, the character who everyone wants to be. Bella is a character that is alone in the world and desires to be separated from her current life and from her parents. She is loved by all the boys at her school but yet goes after the one she can’t have, which is a common dilemma in literature. Bella is the answer to most problems in the books and has powers that no one else does. Bella’s character is sweet, sensitive, desired by all in one way or another, and most of all, she has Edward. Edward is posed as the ‘perfect boyfriend’, he is handsome, romantic, strong, smart, and has that hint of danger. Having him places Bella in a point where some hope they are able to find their ‘special someone’ who is as perfect as Edward is. She is always the center of focus in the books, and who wouldn’t want that. Going back to Buffy, at that point in time, everyone was in love with the two vampire characters, Angel and Spike. Vampires prove to be a sense of danger that we all want to get close to. In Dracula, Bram substituted various physical relationships with the drinking of blood, and other attraction for the teenaged girl.

On a site called ‘Quzilla’, I sent out a message asking kids my age what they thought of vampire fiction. I asked for people who have read ‘Twilight’ or other vampire books to tell me what made vampire fiction so appealing to them. The overall response I got was a love of fiction. One person said, “Fantasy always shoots out surprises, and

43 you use your head to imagine great stories” (Wanting2growwings). Another argued, “Vampires are mysterious and most girls like a good mystery” (PureHeart1901). My close friend KT Quan when talking about the ‘Twilight’ series, said: “because [of] my attraction to fiction, I liked the first two best. By the third book, I was starting to realize each character’s personality and at times, grew upset because of one's choices. In the fourth book, I didn't like it that much because I thought it had lost most of its fictional personality and was more focused on the love connection” (KT). These being some of the many responses I got when I asked people my age why they enjoyed vampire fiction so much.

I feel that the things that come with becoming a vampire are the most alluring of them all. Ellen Guiley describes them as being supernatural people who attack living things, draining blood; or as a ghost in human body, leaving the grave at night. Normally dead wizards, werewolves, and outcasts, also those who were killed by vampires join the ranks of these undead (Guiley, 287). In her book, the encyclopedia of vampires, werewolves, and other monsters, she explains that vampires are dead people who leave there graves at night to suck the blood out of the living. Vampires have the power to turn into mist and enter the houses of the living through cracks under doors and windows, as well as through key holes.

To detect a vampire, Guiley explains, you must lead a virgin boy on a black horse through a graveyard on a Saturday, once you come across the place where a vampire sleeps, the horse will alert you of the vampire. This must be done on a Saturday for that is the only day a vampire will not awaken (Guiley, 295). One other way of detecting and destroying a vampire is to hire a Van Helsing (also known as a Dhampir), or a vampire hunter. The hunter will spread ash or salt around the grave of a suspected vampire and once the vampire is detected, they will destroy it with one of the few different ways. The only known ways to kill a vampire is through decapitation, a stake through the heart, or direct exposition to sunlight, fire, silver, or a cross or any other holy item (Guiley, 101). Bay School student and vampire expert, Vanessa Vanderlaan, and found most of this information is complete gobbledygook.

Vanessa in her view Vampires are indeed undead creatures who feast off of blood, but they are not like the monsters you see in bad horror films. They are two ways to become a vampire, one is to be bitten by a male vampire, therefore turned; the second is to willingly give up your soul in some manner in which I am unfamiliar.

Vampires who are turned do indeed age while those who become one by choice remain the same, through they can appear to be aging, as well as appear to be living. Detecting a vampire can be done easily by noticing if the suspected person acts oddly around crosses and churches and burns easily; most are open about their vampirism so in some cases all you have to do is ask. The abilities of a vampire vary depending on each situation and the vampire’s age. Most have the ability to shape shift into both different human forms and into animals. Decapitating or stabbing a vampire will only make them angry and they do not fear fire, the only means of destroying one is through sunlight or starvation. A vampire must take blood once a week if they drain the person, once a day if they only make the person see spots. Those who are killed by vampires stay dead. Mainly, you really do not want to bother a vampire (Vanessa). Again these facts will change depending on who you talk to.

Vampire fiction suggests that there are people out there that are more alone and misunderstood than you.

Teens like it for the reasons that they can relate to someone when they feel ‘the world is against them’. Vampires are mysterious yet they are sweet, sensitive and romantic, very teenage girl’s fantasy. Also for a society so focused on the superficial, shallow, ways of how you look defines who you are and being good looking is enough to get you by in life, to beautiful forever is too much of a temptation. Imagine never having to worry about how you look or having to watch what you eat (vampires don’t technically eat), or never having to worry about losing your hair or getting wrinkles. Vampires can never get sick and don’t have to worry about dying. Without the common voice of self-preservation screaming in your ear 24/7, you are much freer to do what you please and not worry about getting hurt. The fact that you can also live and be extremely smart, and in most cases, very rich, is a big plus; it allows you to possibility of getting to travel the world and make as many changes as you like in your life.

Being able to change things also allows those who don’t like to get attached to people move as they like.

But on the other side of the spectrum you are also able to be in love forever. No fear of losing the one you love most.

Yes, you will have to watch all your friends and family die, you will never be able to have children of your own, but in our time, the teenage girl cares more about love than anything else.

As I said earlier, vampires are thin, beautiful, and don’t eat (unless you count blood). These facts lead me later to believe that vampirism may have some subconscious effects on teens that lead to eating disorders like anorexia. Most cases of anorexia are caused by a combination of low self-esteem, a lack of control over one’s life, depression, anxiety, anger, and loneliness. The fact that vampires fit into the category of ‘image perfect’ doesn’t help much in battling disorders.

So how does this affect our society? Some people have a criteria for banning books—the three Ss (Sex, Swearing, and Satan). Vampires most definitely fit into at least one if not all of these. Schools find they are a bad

44 influence on teens. I find that these books allow me to wrap my mind around something that is more than human. As a person who likes to write, I find that vampire fiction opens up so many new doors and ideas.

Vampire fiction allows teens to connect with someone, weather it be a fictional character or other people who can relate to the books. Teens normally are going through the state in their life where they are constantly confused, a time when things change and they have to find out who they are. Imagine being stuck as a teen forever, it gives you a lot of time to be confused. Vampires in fiction have learned to deal with there supernatural lives and they gives us hope that maybe we can deal with our own too.

Works Cited Belanger, Michelle A. Vampires in their own words: an anthology of vampire voices. St. Paul, Minnesota, Llewellyn, 2007.

Cast, P.C. Cast, Kristin. Marked: a house of night novel. New York, St. Martin’s Press, 2007.

----. Betrayed: a house of night novel. New York, St. Martin’s Press, 2007.

----. Chosen: a house of night novel. New York, St. Martin’s Press, 2007.

----. Untamed: a house of night novel. New York, St. Martin’s Press, 2007.

Causes of eating disorders. National Eating Disorders Association. November 5, 2008 <http://www.nationaleatingdisorders.org/p.asp?WebPage_ID=286&Profile_ID=41144> Guiley, Rosemary Ellen. The encyclopedia of vampires, werewolves, and other monsters. New York, Facts on File, 2005.

Immortal: Love Stories with Bite. New York, BenBella, 2008.

Mead, Richelle. Vampire Academy. New York, Penguin Group, 2007. A school where half-vampires (Dhampir) are trained to protect their vampire charges at all times. Lissa and Rose share an unbreakable bond which is good because Lissa has been having some mental issues. A Dhampir’s job is to protect their vampire from the Strigoi, bad undead vampires, at all costs.

----. Frost Bite: a Vampire Academy book. New York, Penguin Group, 2007.

Meyer, Stephanie. Twilight. New York, Little Brown, 2005.

----. New Moon. New York, Little Brown, 2006.

----. Eclipse. New York, Little Brown, 2007.

----. Breaking Dawn. New York, Little Brown, 2008.

PureHeart1901, Interview, October 10, 2008 Schreiber, Ellen. Vampire Kisses. New York, Katherine Tegen Books, 2003.

Skal, David J. vampires: encounter with the undead. New York, Black Dog & Leventhal, 2006.

Stoker, Bram. Dracula. Great Britain, Archibald Constable and Company, 1897.

Schwartz, Tobey, interview, October 30, 2008 Vampires. Article on Wikipedia. < http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Vampires> Vanderlaan, Vanessa, interview, October 21, 2008 Wanting2growwings, Interview, October 10, 2008

45 Jasmine Marckwordt Craig Butz Research in the Community 11/10/08 Animals in Zoos Although zoos do offer many opportunities to learn more about wildlife, zoos often give too much attention to the people that visit the zoo and not enough to the animals in the zoo, and because of this the animals suffer.

Asian elephant Tinkerbelle was a popular exhibit at the San Francisco Zoo, but in 1988 her living conditions were investigated due to suspicion of neglect and abuse of the animal. After in depth research, the San Francisco Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals, SF SPCA, came to the conclusion that Tinkerbelle was being confined indoors for unacceptable periods of time, sixteen hours a day, also the zoo was understaffed and the workers were too inexperienced. Tinkerbelle was also being intolerably abused and inhumanely disciplined. In a few cases zoo keepers used electric shock to discipline her, which was only to be used in emergency cases where an animal or human was in imminent danger. This kind of treatment led to the high levels of stress and unnatural and hostile behavior in Tinkerbelle (San Francisco). This is one of the few extreme cases where neglect and abuse got out of hand and farther than it should have before anyone did anything about it. However there are problems in zoos that must be addressed so we can take better care of the animals in our zoos. Zoos have been around for more than a century, but unfortunately there have been few advances in the way the animals in the zoos are taken care of. When the first zoological gardens were established, people would come see their favorite wild animals and it would be entertaining and fun for the whole family, but then no one stopped to think of how the animals felt living their whole lives in a cage too small for them. Now we have learned more about different animal behaviors and needs but little has changed between then and now. There are positives as well as negatives to zoos and over the years this has become a very debatable and controversial topic. Though both sides have good arguments for and against the zoo there needs to be a solution or compromise.

Zoos have always been a place where children and adults alike could have fun. Before the 1960s zoos were mostly used for entertainment purposes, but since then zoos have argued they offer a place of recreation, education, conservation, and research. This shift of focus is necessary if we want improvements to be made (Baratay). Now zoos also provide a place where animals can be saved from extinction. Animals such as the California condor and American Bison would be extinct today if zoos hadn't stepped in and helped them. Even the American bald eagle would still be endangered if it wasn't for the San Francisco Zoo. But the best example of how much zoos help endangered and threatened species is the black rhino. Since 1970, because of poaching and habitat loss, the population of black rhinos has dropped from 65000 to just a little more than 3000. Thirty-six zoos nationwide, including the San Francisco Zoo, are big contributors to the recent recovery of the black rhino. The San Francisco Zoo has already produced fourteen black rhino calves and reintroduced many more back into Botswana (Maddy). The black rhino is just one of several similar cases. A more recent story is of the two spectacled bears currently at the San Francisco Zoo that were saved from being euthanized in Montana. Deniz Bolbol of In Defense of Animals commented on this stating "We want to see more of that. This is a concept that everyone can get behind" (quoted in Yollin). People want to see animals and go to the zoo but not if that means the animals aren't receiving the proper treatment they should, which means big enough living space and attention to the animal. Although animal rights activists make a good argument that wild animals are not meant to be kept in captivity and should be free, zoo professionals can argue the animal's most basic and essential need is survival and if extinction is the cost of freedom it is not worth it. Zoos do so much to help animals and their survival that if we did not have them we might have even more species on the endangered and extinct lists than we have today such as the black-footed ferrets and Spix macaws (Zoos supporting).

Another good characteristic of zoos is they offer a place to learn about these wild animals that we otherwise would not be able to see in person. Zoos bring the wildlife that seems worlds away right to our own backyard, and by making the animals more up close and personal people can learn more about them and be more appreciative of them (Robinson). When most people go to a zoo it seems they are amazed at the magnificence and beauty of the animals, which makes them want to contribute and take a part in helping them. Either by donating time or money everyone feels they can do something to help. Even children can make a difference by becoming more educated and aware of the world around them and how much these animals mean not just in their outer appearance but in the entire ecosystem. This connects the people that visit the zoo with the animals in the zoo, but "we not only want the ability to connect in person with rhinos and tigers - as well as rescue animals in need - we need to ensure animals' survival in the future, for them and for us" (quoted in Maddy).

Although zoos contribute a lot to the survival of many species all around the world, there are some bad characteristics too. One thing that zoos are criticized for is their breeding programs. Sometimes zoos breed animals

46 only because the baby animals will bring in more people than the adult animals will. When the baby animals grow up the zoo is overcrowded and the zoo doesn't know what to do with their surplus of animals. In some of the worst cases the zoo will find a way to get rid of their surplus and will unnecessarily bring in younger animals from the wild. In 1992 two marmoset monkeys, the world's rarest primate species, were sold to a pet shop by the zoo they lived in currently. This was done so that the zoo could make room to bring in younger marmoset monkeys from the wild. Between 1982 and 1991 32 Sumatran rhinos were taken from Indonesia to be put in U.S. zoos, and in 1992 nine black rhinos were captured from Zimbabwe to be put in an Australian zoo. The black rhinos were meant for a breeding program, but both males died shortly after arriving at the zoo, therefore the females had no breeding partners, so not even one rhino calf was produced from this. Animal rights activists can argue that a better solution to saving endangered species than breeding programs in zoos is to help save their habitat so it doesn't get to the point that breeding for captivity is the only option (10 facts).

Something that zoos struggle with is when it comes to if they should let natural events take their course or if they should interfere to do what they think is best for the animal. Zoos have said they want to let the animals act just as they would in their natural environment, but animals in zoos can't possibly act natural when there are always people looking in at them and taking them in and out of their exhibit. Conservationists like Charlotte Uhlenbroek have commented on this topic by saying natural events can't possibly occur the same they would in the wild when the animals have been introduced to such an artificial environment so far removed from what they would experience in the wild. Some zoos say they will interfere to help the animal if there is a chance of returning it back into the wild, but the zoos still take in animals that they know will never be able to go back into the wild. The polar bear for example cannot return safely to the wild after being in captivity. Since polar bears are very solitary animals, they wouldn't survive on their own in the wild after being in a zoo, but polar bears are popular exhibits so zoos still take them in. Monkeys on the other hand can be returned to the wild because monkeys live in big groups, and a monkey going into the wild for the first time would be able to learn and adjust to what it needs to while having other monkeys to help it (Geoghegan). So if a monkey was to be returned to the wild after being in a zoo, there would be a short period of adjustment and adaptation, but eventually the monkey would get used to the new conditions and would be fine. It might also be hard for any animal to return to the wild after being in a zoo because animals may lose some of the skills necessary to survive in the wild. Because they weren't necessary in the zoo, these skills weren't developed and the animal wouldn't survive. In the wild an animal has to find food, water, and shelter, and fight off other animals that try to intrude on their territory to survive. In a zoo all these things are handed to the animals and they don't need to worry about anything (Baratay). If a zoo knows a certain animal may never return to the wild for any of these reasons they shouldn't breed that certain animal in captivity or take them from the wild.

Another big topic of controversy in zoos right now is the animals' living spaces. In the 1930s when zoos really started changing their exhibits from cages to more realistic and scenic enclosures, it was a big step towards improvement. Although it was progress and it was more appealing to the visitors, it was still artificial to the animals (Baratay). Enclosures today are much bigger than they were in the 30s but there is still room for improvement. Small living spaces can be harmful to the animal's mental and physical health, especially for larger animals such as the elephant. As a result of a small living space several elephants have experienced arthritis, foot problems, and eventually premature death. If an animal becomes depressed being confined in such a small space they can develop unnatural and self-destructive habits. Betsy Dresser, ecologist, said most people who visit the zoo are looking for a day of fun not to save the world, and "if the occasional pang of guilt flashes through an onlooker as she watches a caged bear pull his hair out, a rare tiger languish in boredom in a fenced patch of grass or a hyacinth macaw pluck its own feathers out from stress, she can quickly appease herself by reading the two-sentence plaque that tells her how sadly rare these creatures are and how 'zoos' plan to save them" (quoted in Geoghegan). Over the years the environment for an animal in the zoo has changed substantially, it has gone from cages to more open, scenic enclosures. However the space is still too small, and there are still many necessary improvements that have to be made.

An example of just how much an animal is affected by its environment is a Princeton experiment in which scientists took three different groups of monkeys and put them in three different living conditions. One group lived in high quality living conditions, one group lived in middle class living conditions, and the last group was in a very simple, small living space. In the high quality living conditions the monkeys were given lots of toys and plenty of room to run around and climb on trees. In the middle class the monkeys still had all these same things but a little less of everything. The monkeys living in the worst conditions had barely anything. After four weeks of letting the monkeys adjust to their new living conditions their brains were studied. The scientists conducting the experiment looked for neuron activity. The more neuron activity meant the more the brain was developing, therefore the happier the monkey was. The results showed the monkeys in the best living conditions had forty percent more brain activity and development than the monkeys in the worst living conditions. Between the monkeys in the best living

47 conditions and the monkeys in the middle living conditions there was barely any difference. The conclusion was that at some point between the middle and the high quality living spaces the monkeys were satisfied and their brains were the most active they could be. In the bad living conditions the monkeys weren't doing anything to keep their minds active and curious so the neurons weren't being used. The monkeys in the better living spaces were happier than the monkeys in the worse living conditions, and all it took for this change to happen was a little more room, a few more trees and toys, and a little more attention to what would make the animal happy. After just four weeks there was a significant change in the monkeys' brain activity, they were in a better mood, and they were interacting with each other more. If all this can happen after four weeks there could be even bigger changes if these living arrangements were made permanent (Zoos). Although middle living conditions proved to be satisfactory for monkeys this is not the case for all animals. As shown before elephants can't thrive in the living spaces they are confined to now. They need more space not just because it is the "right" thing to do but because their health may be at risk if they are deprived of open spaces. Here there is one example of an animal that can live in a confined space and one example of an animal that cannot. Each animal has specific needs that have to be met. To determine whether the animal is content and happy in a zoo environment zoos have to educate themselves on what the animal's needs are and if they can provide that for them. Unless they can give the animal everything it needs to thrive they shouldn't even try to put it in a breeding program or captivity.

Although these small changes to the animal's environment seem easy, for some zoos it is almost impossible to expand and improve living spaces because of money. Some zoos just can't afford it, so the animal enclosures become outdated and a danger to the animal's health. Some zoos do have the money but they don't spend it wisely.

One example of this is the $48 million given to the San Francisco Zoo in 1997. This money was meant to improve the animals' living conditions but instead the zoo used the money for their cafĂŠ and gift shop (Han). Over the years there has been growing awareness of how bad zoo animals' living conditions are. Some zoos are doing what they can to help this by educating themselves on what the animal's specific needs are, and they are updating their exhibits, but still other zoos are ignoring this problem which cannot be tolerated. It should be a privilege for zoos to keep animals but instead most zoos treat it as if it was the opposite way, that it is the animal's privilege to stay in their zoo.

Even with improvements in living spaces and breeding programs some zoos just don't cater to the animals' needs the way they should. A good zoo has its priorities straight and knows education and conservation come before business and entertainment. Zoos are not going to improve everything on their own unless we put the pressure on zoo officials to raise the standards so that they are forced to change.

With all these different aspects of why animals should or should not be in zoos there is no general answer that can be applied the same way to every animal. Each animal has specific needs and reasons why they should or shouldn't be in a zoo. For example a gorilla can be just as happy in a zoo as it would in the wild if it has enough to keep itself occupied and active because a gorilla has to be in an intellectual environment to thrive. A bear on the other hand shouldn't be in zoo because bears naturally have curious minds and there are too many opportunities in a zoo where a bear can get itself into trouble or hurt itself (Lemonick). Koalas especially shouldn't be in zoos because they have weak hearts and can die from a heart attack if they are startled. With a bunch of little kids running around there is a good chance a Koala can be frightened. When considering what animals to put in zoos we have to make sure we can take care of them properly. Too many animals in zoos die because of human error or ignorance. Since 2004 in the San Francisco zoo alone three elephants have died from inhumane living conditions such as an insufficient amount of space and neglect, and all three within the same year. Two black swans have died from shock, a dozen penguins from disease, and a hippo one day after being moved to a temporary exhibit (Han).

Zoos are very helpful and useful for the animals' conservation and the people's education, but there are too many animals that shouldn't be in zoos because they canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t receive the proper care but are still exhibited anyway. The only reason an animal should be in a zoo is if they need help from the zoo to survive, either if an animal is injured or if the species is endangered. We shouldn't keep animals, especially large animals, enclosed in a space where they will be unhappy, and we do not have the right to deny animals the use of their natural instincts like a leopard's instinct to run freely. The issue of keeping animals in zoos takes a lot of consideration of all these aspects, so before it is determined whether animals should or should not be in zoos each animal must be evaluated and the zoo must see if they can realistically give this animal what it needs. The important thing to remember is it is okay to enjoy watching wild animals and to go to zoos as long as the animals in the zoos are treated humanely and receive the proper care. To achieve this zoos have to learn about the animals they put in their zoos and see what accommodations need to be made and if these accommodations can be made. Enough is already taken away from animals once they are put in zoos, but humans need to draw the line when they get to the point where what is being sacrificed by the animal is not worth the human benefits. There have been many improvements over the years but more still have to be made. We need to continue to learn more about the animals we put in our zoos and hopefully this will lead to bigger improvements in the future.

48

Works Cited "10 facts about animals in zoo." 3 Nov. 2008 <http://www.captiveanimals.org/zoos/zfact1.htm#no8>.

Baratay, Eric, and Hardouin-Fugier, Elisabeth. Zoo : a history of zoological gardens in the West. London: Cultural Service of the French Embassy, 2002.

Geoghegan, Tom. "What are zoos for?" BBC News. 8 Jan. 2008. 19 Oct. 2008 <http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/magazine/7175652.stm>.

Han, John. "Animal Rights Group Calls for Change in Zoo Policy." Fog City Journal. 4 Jan. 2008. 9 Oct. 2008 <http://www.fogcityjournal.com/news_in_brief/jh_sf_zoo_policy_080104.shtml>.

Lemonick, Michael D. "Who Belongs in the Zoo." Time. 11 June. 2006. CNN. 12 Oct. 2008 <http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,1202920,00.html>.

Maddy, Jim. "Why the zoo should remain a zoo." SF Gate. 3 July. San Francisco Chronicle. 21 Oct. 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/07/02/ED4U11IQTK.DTL>.

Robinson, Philip T. Life at the Zoo. New York: Columbia University Press, 2004.

San Francisco Society for the Prevention of Cruelty to Animals. Report on Investigation into Allegations of Elephant Abuse at the San Francisco Zoo. 21 Nov. 1988.

Yollin, Patricia. "Experts say S.F. Zoo outdated." SFGate. 2 Feb. 2008. San Francisco Chronicle. 9 Oct. 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/02/02/MNGMUQOJH.DTL>.

"Zoos." Radiolab. Host Jad Abumrad. WNYC Radio. 1 June. 2007.

"Zoos supporting endangered species." science.ie. 11 May. 2005. 31 Oct. 2008 <http://www.science.ie/EN/index.cfm/section/news/page/newsPage/news_key/66>.

49 Angelina Matarozzi C. Butz Research in the Community 10/27/08 Success at the First Basket: How Participating on a Sports Team Brightens the Lives of Underprivileged Youth.

He’s the child that always gets into trouble. He never turns in his homework; he sleeps in class, and gets into fights after school. He seems to be constantly in the thick of problems and doesn’t have a way to get out. He’s an at-risk youth. Youth that fall under these categories are missing something that other kids have; they don’t have an essential characteristic to succeed in life. That essential is motivation. Lack of motivation can stem from a number of personal aspects of a child’s life. Living in a violent neighborhood and having an unstable family are factors that can prevent at-risk youth from achieving. At-risk youth need a facilitator to do well. They need a form of motivation when they have no sense of belonging, people that are on the look out for their welfare, or success in their lives. Participating on a healthy and positive sports team has the potential to motivate at-risk youth to stay off the streets and to reach their personal best by providing them with coaching, camaraderie, and healthy competition to build on for future success.

Coaches, camaraderie, and competition are three aspects of athletics that make a big impact on a child’s sports experience. Like any academic teacher, a coach is someone who takes on a parental role. He or she is a highly impressionable person in a child’s life. Research has shown that coaches make a bigger impact on at-risk youth than academic teachers because of the bond from working toward a common goal and personal interaction outside of everyday life (Engh). Camaraderie and the friendships formed from being on a sports team fosters a healthy feeling of belonging for at-risk youth and increases their personal motivation. Finally, competition acts as the most important, yet controversial part of a child’s sports experience. When competition is healthy, for perhaps the first time in the lives of at-risk youth, they have a sense of motivation which is vital for on and off the court success.

Coaches The influence coaches have on young athletes are the dominate factors in a good or bad sports experience.

Whether kids come from stable or unstable households, coaches operate as an extension of athlete’s parents and an instinctive role model. Fred Engh, President of the National Alliance for Youth Sports, explains why coaches are so vital. He believes that the true role models for kids are not the pros on T.V. but their local coaches. Nathan J. Smith, M.D agrees, and explains that coaches set the tone for the team by teaching teamwork, sportsmanship, and effort that professionals can’t develop. Generally, coaches are former players who want to give back to the sport they love by teaching youth to do so with their natural leadership skills. When such coaches set good examples, such as those who use the ‘Positive Coaching Approach’ where the athlete’s desired behaviors are strengthened by motivation, and the coach instills honesty and pride in the game, young athletes are positively affected (Smith). For example, in a Purdue University Study, 83 percent girls and 70 percent boys polled that their coach was the most important influence in whether “…they would take part in aggressive acts that broke the rules of the sports they were playing”(Engh 75). The conclusion is drawn that when coaches instill positivity in the sport, youth athletes, are highly impressionable to the standard set (Engh; Lench; Smith).

Although athletes are impressionable to positive examples set by their coaches, they are also receptive to negative behavior in their sports experience. Literature shows that when coaches eclipse the welfare of the player and trade it in for winning, a fear of failure can develop. This is shown through Smith’s second theory on coaching, ‘The Negative Approach’, which encompasses a common coaching technique that is used to eliminate negative performance with punishment and strict discipline. When coaches react to mistakes by yelling and sitting the player down (more commonly known as “benching”) players develop a negative attitude on their performances (Lench).

Some youth give up the sport altogether simply because of negative experiences with coaches.

Putting this together; can coaches help the lives of at-risk youth? Unanimously, research has shown that coaches are a dominate influence in youth’s positive or negative experience in sports, but how about outside of sports? Can coaches make an impact on the lives of at-risk youth? To answer this question, anecdotal literature proves to be more effective than statistical writings. A prime example is the City of Hawaiian Gardens in East Los Angeles that is plagued by gang violence and racial tension. Many kids in a local neighborhood are subjected to the violence because their whole family is involved. A gang prevention coordinator, Ernie Vargas, changed the direction for these kids. He created a rugby team for the youth to join and chose the sport specifically because it was aggressive with a lot of teammate interaction. The aggression proved to be a healthy alternative for gang involvement and the community within the team became a family for those kids that didn’t have a stable home.

However, what most affected the kids was Ernie. Most players on the team credited their coach for the reason they were off the streets. One player, Jesse Ortiz, said that “Basically, Ernie saved my life. All of us here….I don’t live

50 with my parents…but I’m still up here. I don’t let any of that stuff bring me down. Ernie’s just always there for us.

We go eat together, do everything together. I love Ernie, man” (Martin 4).

Motivation is a characteristic every child needs in order to succeed in school, social interactions, and going in a positive direction for their future. For most kids, motivation isn’t hard to come by; having a stable family and living in a safe neighborhood are lifestyles that set kids up for success in these areas. However, there are youth that are less privileged. Children that come from unstable families and violence ridden neighborhoods don’t always have positive facilitators to help them with the sense of belonging and personal potential for achievement. For underprivileged kids in society, participating in a gang has become an outlet for belonging and succeeding. Lisa Taylor- Austin, a forensic mental health evaluator, consulted and interviewed police officers and communities about gang life. Police Chief, John J. Romero observed that youth are “….lured by the prospect of finding in the gang the respect and acceptance they sometimes can’t find at home.” He believes that the kids coming from broken homes need a feeling of welcome. For these kids, there has to be an alternative for feeling protection, belonging, and success; they need a source of powerful motivation. For kids that don’t have caring parents or have a family involved in gang life, “…the coach is the only role model for the child…" (Engh 75).

One of the dominate reasons coaches become affective in providing better lives for at-risk youth is because of their personal investment for the athlete’s success. This stems from the interdependence Ortiz mentioned that develops between coach and athlete from working toward a common goal on the court or field. This interdependence and relationship can translate over into other areas of the athletes’ life such as academically. The relationship manifests into the coach taking on the role of an academic confidant or advocate. Robert S. Griffin concludes that "A youngster might feel less pressure to present an image of academic competence to a coach than to a parent or teacher and therefore be more willing to share academic weakness and concerns and accept help" (Griffin 43). Youth are more likely to share their problems with an outside adult who isn’t pressuring them as a teacher would. Similarities are found in the story of the Pee Dee Flyers basketball team that participates in the United States Specialty Sports Association. The coaches act as father figures and communicate with the athlete’s teachers when the boy’s grades are falling (Haselden).

Coaches become mentors because they invest their personal time to make sure that their athletes are succeeding in every aspect of life. The relationship between a coach and an athlete can move beyond the game and into a friendship that benefits the one third of children who live only with their mothers and interact with their fathers in person once a year at most (Engh). Although some coaches abuse their influential power on young athletes and turn their sports experiences negative, the majority of coaches are qualified and motivate athletes with their continual support.

The camaraderie and commitment of a team is beneficial to the motivation and sense belonging for at-risk youth. In all team sports, the group as whole is more important than the success of the individual. However, with team success, comes individual success. For instance, Robert S. Griffin, a professor in the College of Education and Social Services at the University of Vermont, found that the mark of a superior athlete is one that contributes to the success of other athletes on the team. In turn, Griffin found that athletes use the people around them as inspiration to drive them forward. For example, an athlete that is on a team with someone who is above their level of talent, not only improves their abilities when playing with the advanced player, but is more driven to reach greater levels of success because of the exposure to superior talent. Thus, youth that participates on sports teams come in contact with successful athletes and talent. This increases the athlete’s skill level and motivates youth to achieve greater levels of personal accomplishment to set new goals.

A 1951 study from The Psychological Foundations of Sport showed that individuals join groups because they have a need for affiliation (includes friendship and belonging), esteem (includes pride and personal worth), and achievement. Being on a sports team fulfills all of the aforementioned needs, because a team is a group of people working together to achieve success. In terms of affiliation: high fives, going to games together, and the interdependence teammates have within each other to get work done brings a sense of belonging for individuals.

This sense of belonging mirrors the attraction that youth find in gangs. Lisa Taylor-Austin explains, “I think that most people want to get jumped into a gang because they're interested in finding a place where they can feel like they belong. They're looking for love, respect, a bond that they’ll have with other people.” The rugby team in L.A. talked about how teamwork formed between mixtures of races. One of the athletes said, “It don’t matter what race you are, we’re just here to play” (Martin par. 5). Teamwork inspires youth to see past racial divisions that they might be used to from gang life. Youth can develop esteem from the “…desire of group success….from which members derive pride in performance and satisfaction if it successfully accomplishes a challenging group task” (Silva 235).

Wanting a winning record and achieving a winning record develops esteem and pride in youth. They find their place and contribution to the success of their team which contributes to their personal worth; a feeling many youth from unstable homes might not have felt before. As teams get closer and relationships develop, significance of the

51 membership increases; teaching youth that being apart of a team is a healthy way to represent abilities with pride among others (Lench).

The commitment kids make when joining a team has lasting positive effects on their futures. Four out of five women in the Oppenheimer Study said that sports helped them function as a part of a team in their daily lives (Lench). The review of Black Political Economy suggests the same. The article shows that college athletics promotes teamwork that is rewarded in the labor market. Also, children learn moral behavior from engaging with others; participating on a sports team is an excellent way to facilitate it. The study of “Emphasizing Sportsmanship in Youth Sports” by Dr. Lori Ganu- Overway similarly finds that “Social interactions…are fostered by the sport experience …” (McCloskey 274). What’s more, at-risk youth academically improve from participating on a team because being apart of something that is greater than the individual puts personal responsibility to achieve a standard in order for a team to function. For example, it is common for a school to require students to achieve a 2.0 grade point average to be able to play on a sports team. This means the possible success of the team relies on each player to come through academically. An athlete on the rugby team talked about his poor grades increasing to a 3.0 during the season and his coach believes “….it’s a direct result of him interacting with this organization……that’s the kind of commitment we have to this team” (Martin par. 5). The commitment kids make to a team motivates them to come through for their teammates which can result in doing better in other parts of life.

Competition: Friend or foe?

Challenging athletic situations arouse a strong desire to achieve. Succeeding in competition or an athletic situation can be the ultimate emotional release for an athlete. For example, winning a game against a tough team is an uplifting sense of accomplishment for youth, especially those that have struggled to become good at something in life (Wolff). People who develop competitive spirits usually possess leadership qualities which are useful because life is full of obstacles to achieve success. Research shows that competition may push athletes to new and further boundaries and become very useful for later success (Engh). However, competition can sometimes get out of control. When athletes have the desire to win at all costs they turn to “ingestion of…substances of pharmacological means to achieve advantage” (McCloskey 82). These substances generally mean steroids, a drug that increases cellular tissues, especially muscles. When winning is everything, youth can rely on harmful drugs. Dr. Charles Yesalis estimated that 500,000 kids in the United States have used steroids in the previous year (McCloskey). When there is pressure to win, where does the useful tool of motivation go to an at-risk youth? It pulls them out of one category of risk and into another full of steroids.

The pros of a competitive spirit can last a lifetime for youth that need a push. Although competitive spirits can be taken to dangerous heights, competition arouses desire to achieve. Desire is the backbone in life and in sports. The correlation between the two is too significant for at-risk youth to rule out competition as an evil.

Advocating for the Solution Sports become a healthy opportunity for at-risk youth to have because perhaps for the first time, they have a sense of belonging from the sports community, personal worth from the investment of their coach, and success in an area of life as a result of the motivation stemming from competition. Although some youth benefit academically from sports, not every single at-risk kid is benefited in that area, or perhaps in any area off the court. This depends on the complete initial athletic experience. For example, if an at-risk youth enters sports for the first time with a coach that exercises the ‘Positive Approach’, a welcoming team, and doesn’t happen to abuse winning in competition, the youth is given the tools to carry this success over into other parts of life. However, it isn’t guaranteed that every sports experience is going to be positive or that youth will carry that positivity with them.

There are two variables in this situation: First, the chance that youth will be brought into a great sports experience and second, that the individual will have motivation to carry what they learned from sports over into their lives.

Although nobody can guarantee the second variable, a strong conclusion can be drawn. At-risk youth that are brought into a positive sports team, experience a sense of belonging, people that care for their welfare, and some amount of success on the team that they may never have had before in their lives.

Sports never saved my life, but athletics changed the way I look at every homework assignment and every interaction with the people around me. The game of basketball instilled hard work and dedication in every area of my life. My first moving experience came from my coach in middle school. His name was Sogolon Best, he was also my sixth grade math teacher and everyone called him “Sog”. Before sixth grade, I felt as if I was a step behind my classmates in math and I had intense anxiety around the subject. From my very first class with Sog, I felt the anxiety slip away. He put each student at ease with his anecdotal approach and related everything we did in class with stories about life. He treated every student as if they were a mathematician and with each class I felt myself becoming more confident around him and an upswing in my desire to do well. This was no different on the basketball court.

52 Each basketball practice Sog instilled the same ethic of hard work and commitment I had felt in math class and there was something about the way our personalities meshed that made Sog and I compatible. I found myself becoming overwhelmingly passionate about the sport in ways I had never felt in any area of my life. For me, he was a mentor; I modeled everything in my life after him. I strived to be like him in his leadership, hard work, and power of observation. What I liked best about Sogolon in my three years of learning from him was his investment in his students. There was one rough game when our team lost 24-2 and Sog noticed my obvious disappointment. That night, when I was feeling bad, Sog called to check up on me. I had never had someone invest their time to make sure I was feeling good. He pointed out an extraordinary thing to me on the phone. Before he hung up, he asked me if I had ever felt really bad about losing a competition in my life. I had to answer no. The question plagued me for a long time. The fact that I was upset over losing told me that I was passionate about something; that I cared to do my best. From then on, I treated school and people around me the way I treated basketball; with the determination to do well. I was a good leader in class, I worked hard, but most importantly, I was passionate about life.

Works Cited Bashir, Martin. “Off the Streets and Onto the Rugby Pitch: Friendly Competition Has Fierce Effect on Lives of Troubled Kids.” ABC News. 18 July 2008. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://abcnews.go.com/Nightline/Story?id=5399059&page=1> Engh, Fred. Why Johnny Hates Sports: Why Organized Sports are Failing Our Children and What We Can Do About It. New York: Avery Publishing Group, 1999 Ewing, Bradley T. “High school athletics and the wages of black males.” The Review of Black Political Economy 24.1 (1995): 65.

Griffin, Robert S. Sports in the Lives of Children and Adolescents. United States: Praeger Publishers, 1998.

Haselden, Mark. “Pee Dee Flyers Winning on and off the Court.” Scnow.com. 14 Jun. 2008. 12 Oct. 2008. <http://www.scnow.com/scp/sports/high_school_prep/high_school_basketball/article/pee_dee_flyers_winn ing_on_and_off_the_court/9111/ > Lench, Brooke de. Home Team Advantage: The Critical Role of Mother in Youth Sports. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, Inc., 2006.

McCloskey, John, Julian Bailes. When Winning Costs too Much: Steroids, Supplements, and Scandal in Today’s Sports. Lanham: Taylor Trade Publishing, 2005.

Silva III, John M. Psychological Foundations of Sport. Illinois: Human Kinetics Publishers, Inc., 1984.

Smith, Nathan J. Kids Sport: A Survival Guide for Parents. Massachusetts: Addison Wesley Publishing Company, 1983.

Tackling Gang Recruitment. Bashir Martin. 2008. Video.

Taylor-Austin, Lisa. Gang Colors. 1998-2008. 28 Oct. 2008. <http://gangcolors.com/index.php> Wolff, Rick. Good Sports: A Concerned Parent’s Guide to Little League and Other Competitive Youth Sports. New York: Bantam Doubleday Dell Publishing Group, 1993.

53 Ian Matthews Craig Butz Research in the Community 10.28.08 Man’s Best Friend The 12,000-15,000 years of domestication between dogs and humans has created a special bond between the two species that no other species of animal have been able to rival. This bond has given dogs their title of "Man's Best Friend." The long history between the two has created a unique mental bond, which allows dogs to understand humans in an unusual fashion. This long history has also created a timeline of interactions between humans and dogs that few other animals can rival. However, some of the effects that humans have had on dogs have not been terribly beneficial, such as breeding purebred dogs that have genetic diseases or sometimes bad training. The burial of dogs shows this connection because it displays the honor and value people have for their dogs now and in the past.

Finally, dogs are considered our best friends due to how they serve man and are always at his side.

One reason that dogs and humans share this extraordinary mental bond is their long history together. These 15,000 years of friendship between man and dog has made man's best friend able to understand humans in unusual ways, many ways are still unknown to dog owners and lovers as well as scientists (Walton). However, the starting of this bond is through ancient wolves sharing food, shelter, and surviving with these prehistoric humans. Through these many years of survival, dogs have gained an insight about humans, which has given them the title of "Man's Best Friend" (Walton). Dogs have also gained and developed a power of making people much happier when they are ill, which also helps with the overall healing process. Animals are able to calm and bring joy to many people who are sick. Florence Nightingale, who is an experienced nurse, observed that animals, such as the Golden Retriever, Patrick, who visits hospitals, have a positive effect on many sick and mental patients (Lambert). This links back to dogs attaining their title of “Man’s Best Friend” since it shows strength in their mental bond. There have also been scientific tests that have been conducted on this relationship. Brian Hare, who conducted one of these tests, says, "It looks like dogs really do understand what we are trying to tell them, they are thinking about what we want, and they understand that we are trying to communicate." The dogs that Hare was conducting experiments on showed a greater comprehensiveness of humans than what chimpanzees or wolves had, which were the original domesticated animals by humans. He conducted the experiment by having a researcher stand by two contains, one of which had food in it, and then the researcher would draw attention to the container that had food in it through direct and indirect ways like tapping the box or staring at it. They tried this with puppies, adult dogs, wolves, and chimpanzees. The results of the experiments was that both dogs, young and old, would pick the correct container more often than the other two animals would and they had not picked them by chance either (Walton). This outcome was not expected and surprised many of the scientists, and researches because they thought that the wolves would do better because they had bigger brains, or chimpanzees would do better because they are primates and are more closely related to humans. In addition, even a puppy that was nine weeks old could perform just as well on the test as an adult dog, even though it had not spent as long of a time around humans, showing how dogs share a unique bond with humans that aid them with their complicated comprehension of human instinct (Walton). In addition, technology has advanced so far, that many scientists are talking about genetically engineering dogs so that the dogs have the qualities of the owners that want them. They are talking about doing this so that people get exactly what they want in a dog and not as many are abandoned or abused. Dr. Pauleen Bennett of Monash University said that "Successfully matching the dog, its requirements and behavioral traits with the understanding and desires of the owner should mean the animals are more likely to enjoy good welfare throughout long, healthy and happy lives."

Linked to the topic of attitudes and training is the reason for why a dog might respond to a command at one point, but at another the dog will be completely unresponsive. It is not know completely why this happens with dogs but one example that Patricia McConnell gives is: "Perhaps you've taught your dog to sit, and you want to show this off to your friends, you say, 'sit,' but he just looks at you." She says that it might be because how your dog comprehends or obeys a command you give. For example, when a dog was leaning the command, if the person tilts their head or makes a sweeping action with their hand or arm, the dog may only respond to that certain action, and not to the verbal command that goes along with the physical command. (Walton).

Dogs, wolves, jackals, coyotes, and foxes all belong to the Canidae family (Man's Best Friend). Narrowed down further, the Canis genus contains dogs, wolves, and jackals (Man's Best Friend). Like wolves, especially the male dogs, usually pick an alpha human who they mainly bond to, since female ones are more family oriented.

Quite an amount of time has passed since dogs were first domesticated about 15,000 years ago. All dog breeds of the world are believed to have descended from East Asia long ago, and now have since migrated to places all over the world, following people (Walton). The first dogs that humans domesticated were grey wolves, which were domesticated by the time some of the first humans had crossed the Bering Strait to their new home about

54 12,000 to 14,000 years ago (Walton). Back then, they were most likely domesticated not only for companionship, but also for work. Jennifer Leonard, a postdoctoral at the Smithsonian Institution's Nation Museum of Natural History, says that, "We know that dogs were useful for lots of things in Stone Age culture, as draft animals, in hunting, for warmth, and for protection." However, now dogs’ uses can be quite different. They range from being companions to people, to helping to pull in fishing nets into a boat in cold icy water.

Humans have had many effects on dogs that have changed the species and also had ones that have not have been terribly beneficial. An example is the breeding of purebred dogs because their genetic chains often become too related to other dogs of their kind or sometimes owners do not train dogs properly, which can make them dangerous, just like people when they are neglected. One change that we have made is the variation in colors and somewhat of a variation in seize. We do not know the exact reason for the variety in the size or colors in dogs. It is partly due to how humans breed them, but we do not all the reason for the diversity in dogs. It has to do somewhat with humans because in nature the species of animal that survives is the one that does the best in nature, meaning there are two maybe three species of each type of animal while there are many different breeds of dogs. Slight seize differences in dogs may be due to nature, for example dogs that natively live in a place like Norway might have long hair and be bigger in seize than a dog that lives in a place like Mexico or Brazil (Tyson). Some scientists believe that the varying dog sizes was due to the smaller dog breeds being related to foxes and jackals or other members of the Canis family. However, when Robert Wayne at the University of Los Angles conducted a close study, he found that all the DNA in the 400 or so breeds of dogs is related to wolves and not to the other spices in the Canis family (Tyson).

This is also one reason dogs might be more connected to humans than other animals because they are more easily "Designed", which many humans have taken advantage of through out the centuries. Budiansky says that, "It may be just one of those things like why do elephants have trunks and others don't? It may just be almost an accident of evolution that dogs are so plastic while cats aren't." This shows in certain ways why cats may not have been "Man's Best Friend", because they could not be bred in different ways to fit what man wanted, thus meaning that they were not as close to humans and did not develop the same bond. However, this breeding has also caused detrimental effects due to genetic diseases of breeding family members of dogs to close together. This issue mainly happens with purebred dogs that were deemed noble because royalty deemed them aristocratic and still are desired for being “pure” as well as their appearance (Derr 217). These breeds include bloodhounds, collies, pugs, and among other purebred dogs (Derr 217). Dogs are sometimes also abused by their owners, which makes the more vicious breeds become violent and often have a thirst for blood and killing due to how they are neglected (Foote). Hopefully, as time goes on, people will breed purebred dogs with others that are not closely related, and dogs that are mutts will become more popular.

Pet cemeteries are an example of this relationship because they have strengthened the human-dog bond over thousands of years. Often people burry their dogs, and in ancient times dogs were sometimes buried with their owners because of the respect and honor that they had for them. Even though some people might think that it is a frivolous thing, burying a dog, it actually show a strong connection the two species since when they are buried, they are being treated like a human family member, which, they often are to people. Darcy Morey of the University of Kansas said, "People have been burying or otherwise ritually disposing of dead dogs for a long time." They have been “documented from every major land mass in the world except Antarctica." "'As to why people bury their pets, even today, that is less of a mystery, given the dog's natural home in human families", Morey writes. "When family members die, we usually bury them"' (Vergano). Dogs have been buried for a very long time, almost as long as they have been domesticated. The oldest dog ever found was in Germany. It was buried about 14,000 years ago with two people. Also at Indian Knoll, in Kentucky, more than half of the dogs buried there 5,000 years ago were buried with their owners. Finally, at Ashkelon located in Israel, there were about a 1,000 findings of dogs being buried next to humans about 2,000 years ago (Vergano). All of the burials show how many people through history valued their dogs and tried to honor them in their deaths because of the diligent way they served these ancient people. These burials were also very carefully done with the dog placed carefully next to its owner and it’s tail curled at the owner’s feet. In addition, there is evidence that the owners cared for their dogs wounds and also provided long-term care for their dogs (Vergano). This also shows that to some people, they were like sons and daughters, just like there are now many people that treat their dogs in this fashion too.

The way dogs treat people and show respect for them gives them the title of not only man’s best friend, but also man’s best servant. According to Foote, dog is man's best friend because of their loyalty, matchlessness in service, and their willing of heart. According to McConnell, "As much as anything on earth, dogs want to understand us" (226). More or less, "…they put up with treatment that would infuriate humans, remain seemingly cheerful in appalling circumstances, and, amazingly often, avoid using the weapons they carry, cocked and loaded, in their mouths" (171). According to Foote and McConnell, dogs are not only man’s best friend because of their

55 willingness to always stand at man’s side, but also because they will always be steadfastly loyal and put up with what we do.

Dogs are mans best friend due to many reasons, such as their long history and mental connection, their healing abilities, and their willingness to always be loyal and serve. No animal will ever be able to rival their connection and their devotion to humans. She says in summary "Emotions like fear and happiness and love simmer within us, sometimes bubbling to the surface, always linking us together. The glass of our shared experience [dogs and humans] may be half empty, but that means that it's half full. How lucky we are that it's a big glass, and that, most of the time, the liquid within it is sweet and good" (McConnell 285).

Works Cited Bliss, Sarah. “Man's Best Friend Being Phased into Dorm Life”. CNN.com/Living. 26 Sept. 2008. 12 Oct. 2008 < http://www.cnn.com/2008/LIVING/wayoflife/ 09/24/dorm.life.pets/>.

Budiansky, Stephen. “The Truth about Dogs.” NOVA. 21 Oct. 2008. < http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/nova/dogs/evolution.html>.

Foote, Timothy. “It's a Dog's Life”. New York Times. 10 Aug. 1997. 12 Oct 2008. < http://www.nytimes.com/books/97/08/10/reviews/970810.10footet.html?_r=3&oref=slogin&oref=slogin&o ref=login>.

Lambert, Lisa. “Man's Best Friend Is Working Overtime”. 21 Feb 2005. 12 Oct 2008 <http://einside.kent.edu/?type=art&id=2906>.

McConnell, Patricia B. For the Love of a Dog: Understanding Emotion in You and Your Best Friend. New York: Random House Publishing Group, 2007.

McDougall, Alex. Pontefract, Alexandra. Izzard, Bryan. Stula, Nicole. Wainberg, Jeffrey. “Man's Best Friend”. Tree of Life. 12 Oct 2008 <http://tolweb.org/treehouses/?treehouse_id=3804>.

Monash University. "Can Science Improve Man's Best Friend?". ScienceDaily. 8 September 2008. 12 Oct 2008 <http://www.sciencedaily.com- /releases/2008/09/080904220139.htm>.

Perlman, David. “When dog became man's best friend”. SF Gate. 22 Nov 2002. 12 Oct 2008 < http://www.sfgate.com/cgi- bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2002 /11/22/MN30608.DTL>.

Tyson, Peter. Budiansky, Stephen. “Dogs and More Dogs”. PBS/NOVA. 12 Oct 2008 < http://www.pbs.org/wgbh/nova/dogs/>.

Vergano, Dan. “Ritual Dog Burials Tell a Story of Man's Best Friend, and Man.” USA Today.com. 12 Oct 2008 < http://www.usatoday.com/tech/science/columnist/ vergano/ 2006-01-22-dog-burials_x.htm>.

Walton, Marsha. “15,000 Years with Man's Best Friend.” CNN.com/Science and Space. 22 Nov 2002. 12 Oct 2008 <http://archives.cnn.com/2002/TECH/science/ 11/21/coolsc.dogorigin/index.html>.

Derr, Mark. Dog’s Best Friend: Annals of the Dog-Human Relationship. Chicago: The University of Chicago Press, 2004.

56 Ariella Mostov Craig Butz Research in the Community 11/04/08 Autism: A Battle Fought Courageously by Parents What does a parent do if his/her child refuses to talk, stops making eye contact, and becomes emotionally detached? What should a parent do if the doctor ignores his/her concerns? How does a parent or doctor diagnose a child when there is no clear scientific standard? When a child displays symptoms of autism, parents are often the ones who find themselves fighting for a diagnosis and a cure. After the diagnosis, parents must find a way to treat their child and improve their child’s prognosis. Although most people would assume that doctors are the most reliable professionals to treat autistic children, in fact, parents play the most vital role in improving the prognosis for their autistic children.

Today, diagnosing an autistic child is difficult even for professionals; the majority of doctors examining children with symptoms that are classified under the autism spectrum disorder fail to come to a conclusive diagnosis. Diagnosing an autistic child is a daunting task since symptoms are highly variable and may mimic other disorders. However, according to Dr. Maria Paluszny, there are three essential characteristics in all cases of autism.

These are, “profound and general failure to develop social relationships” (23), language retardation which also includes impaired comprehension, echolalia (repetition of words) and pronominal reversal and finally, ritualistic or compulsive phenomena behavior (23).

It is of great concern when a child “by one year of age … is not gesturing, babbling, maintaining eye contact, looking or responding to calling of their name, or having self stimulatory movements such as hand flapping”(Chez 25) The child may be at risk for an autism spectrum disorder. Therefore, parents should always seek an autism specialist if any of these concerns have arisen with respect to their child. It is vital that parents are encouraged by pediatricians to ask abut the development of their child. However, “parents and primary care providers should not confuse global development delay in gait, motor and speech development with autism” (Chez 25). Once it is clear a child has been diagnosed with autism, the next step is allowing the families to adapt to a life with an autistic child.

Many parents who have had their child diagnosed with autism become overwhelmed with fear and grief and lose hope for the future. There are four major parental styles to adapting to life with an autistic child. Some fathers “emotionally divorce” themselves from the child and leave the mother to fully care for the child. Some parents join together in rejecting their child, a parental reaction that usually leads to institutionalizing the child. Another style is when the child becomes the center of the family, and the parents subordinate all their own desires. The final approach is when the parents mutually support their child and each other, but maintain a normal life (Paluszny 141).

The variation between the different styles of parenting suggests the difficulty in raising an autistic child, but once the parents have successfully adjusted to life with an autistic child, they must take the lead in improving the child’s prognosis.

The parents play the most crucial role in improving the prognosis of an autistic child because every autistic child’s case is different. Because of these variations, treatment must be tailored for each child; however, since doctors are not in constant interaction with the child, they are not as adept in developing a treatment that is specific to each child. The parent, however, will understand the child’s individual and unique problems. Beyond the medical community, there is little consensus on autism, and society doesn’t really have the resources for autistic children in place yet. Therefore, the parent must be a constant supporter and advocate for their autistic child. They are the ones capable of stressing the needs of and modifications necessary for their child the best. Dr. Maria Paluszny states that “anyone who has worked with parents of autistic children cannot fail to be impressed with their ability to survive and even to succeed in the face of what often seems to be insurmountable obstacles”(147).

Parents often notice developmental problems in their children before the doctors do because when children undergo examination, there is little scientific evidence to confirm autism. Therefore, since doctors fail to confirm the parents’ concerns by considering an autism diagnosis, it frequently falls on the parents to informally diagnose their child. It is the parents of autistic children today who create successful support groups that advocate for autistic children and help raise the funds for clinical research and treatments of autism. Amy Thompson, a single mother of her autistic son Kollin, believed there was something wrong with her son before he was even diagnosed with autism.

She tried to speak up but no doctors would listen to her, even though she consistently told doctors that Kollin was not developing normally. The doctors disregarded Thompson’s concerns until Kollin was finally diagnosed with autism at age 5. The scientific community agrees that if an autistic child does not have medical intervention before age three, the chances for improving prognosis are slim. Amy became incredibly frustrated that she could not access the proper early care for Kollin, and by the time he was diagnosed, his prognosis had been compromised (Autism Chronicles). When Amy joined a local support group, however, she found that communicating with other parents

57 similar to her was extremely helpful and heartwarming. Hearing stories of hope made her believe that Kollin might grow up to be functional(able to participate in society like a normal child). Many parents of the group also spoke about how the doctors did not believe anything was wrong with their children even if they vocalized concerns about autism (Autism Chronicles). They all had a sense something was wrong with their children, but no one was willing to help. That is why local autism support groups were founded, for parents to help other parents and their children, since doctors would not.

It is increasingly evident that parents, if they undergo proper training, are the most important members of the therapeutic team. When autistic children are treated in a controlled setting, such as a hospital, and make momentous gains, such as making eye contact, these gains are often lost once the child returns home to their parents. If the parents have not been trained in the treatment therapy and are not constantly reinforcing what was taught to their child, those gains are so easily lost. To maintain the progress made in the treatment setting, there must be a trained person in the child’s natural environment to reinforce what was taught and extend learning in new and exciting directions. It is best if the trained person is the parent of the child because the parent knows the child best. Parents can be trained to work with their children by participating in the therapy that takes place in controlled settings.

Studies have shown that after children leave a therapy program and go home to parents trained in that program, they begin to make more progress at home (Paluszny 132-125).

Plenty of therapies exist today, but whether they will positively affect the child really depends on the child’s specific condition and the parent’s constant attention. Many therapies require consistent supervision and responsibility on the parent’s part. Therapies range from alternative therapies (not highly recommended by physicians), to medications to treat psychotic symptoms, to behavior modification techniques. All these techniques require that the parent carefully monitors the child’s condition to ensure the complete and utter safety of their child during the treatment. Each child has a different reaction to therapies, and parents must be insightful and cautious when treating their child to prevent physical harm. This is especially true when treating a child with psychotic medicines. However, it is the physician’s responsibility to advise the parents on management of therapies involving medication.

Medicines can be used for treating symptoms and behavior issues; however, reactions and effects of such medicines vary based on the child’s unique situation. Psychiatric medication has been advised to treat symptoms such as attention deficit disorder, obsessive compulsive disorder, anxiety, and bipolar behaviors in autistic children.

In terms of treating such conditions as language delay, speech deficiency and auditory processing, autistic children usually respond to medicines such as L-Carnosine, corticosteroids and valproic acid, as well as to a steady course of speech therapy to support the medication (Chez 129-133). Medication always comes with some risk, and parents are the ones who must monitor the child’s reactions at home, since they are the ones in constant interaction with their child. Every medication will have a different effect on the child, so parents must maintain caution when treating with medication, since the effects can cause more harm than good. Medication is not necessarily the best course of treatment, and most parents find that their child does not respond well to medication and turn instead to other forms of therapy.

Other therapies include special educational programs at schools or even schools specifically designed for autistic children. However, schools that specifically cater to the needs of autistic children are limited, and most people cannot afford the tuition or do not live close enough to the school for their children to even attend. Parents should be specifically demanding of the learning programs provided to their autistic children to ensure that the program fits their child’s needs while also providing the child with the tools necessary to be functional in society.

Some programs at local public schools are designed for children with generalized disabilities are not fully equipped to provide the constant attention that an autistic child demands in order to learn. Parents who send their children to schools must therefore be greatly involved with the therapeutic and educational processes by measuring the progress the child makes at home to monitor whether the child has improved outside the school environment.

It is best if a child is enrolled in a school for autistic children only, such as The Community School in Decatur, Georgia. The Community School (better known as T.C.S.) is a small, private school for teenage boys with autism or related disorders. The founding director, Dave Nelson, has a son that was diagnosed with autism and left his business to pursue teaching and clinical and counsel work in the autism field (Greene 1). T.C.S. employs a new, creative, interactive teaching method known as D.I.R./Floortime, which has been successful at T.C.S. D.I.R stands for developmental, individual differences relationship-based approach. It is a method developed by Dr. Stanley Greenspan and Dr. Serena Wiede. This approach encourages students to develop strengths and interests by working closely with one another and the teachers. “The latest findings in the field of neuroplasticity support D.I.R’s faith in the capacity of the human brain to recoup and compensate for injury and illness,” says Dr. Greenspan (Greene 4) The goal of D.I.R. is for students to make neurological progress through real world engagement (Greene 1).

58 In contrast, The majority of programs for autistic youth today employ Applied Behavior Analysis (ABA) where the teachers and therapists use established techniques of reward and punishment to shape students’ actions.

However, critics argue that this method just modifies the symptoms rather than addressing underlying disabilities.

However, T.C.S. employs the intensity of ABA but, instead of asking children to master skills, harnesses the child’s energy and desire to learn. Floortime is a method that works best when the patient is motivated. It consists of intense interactions over as many hours as possible, including at home, which is what enhances the parent’s role when working with this program. The goal of T.C.S. is that students should be able to think, feel, communicate and learn.

Students make their first friends at T.C.S., which is a very gratifying experience for parents (Greene 2). Often, T.C.S. is the last hope for some families. D.I.R. Floortime is an intensive method that focuses on the fact that “brain development is not a solo pursuit but a rich and complex flowering that occurs only in the hothouse of human relations,” says developer of the method, Dr. Stanley Greenspan (Greene 3). D.I.R./Floortime connects autistic students with other people to fuel cognitive potential, giving them accent to their own feelings, desires and insights (Greene 4). However, critics believe T.C.S. only works for children with a high functioning type of autism.

Either way, special schools like The Community School seem to offer positive results. However, it is important that parents maintain an active role in their child’s life even if their children attend such an intensive school as T.C.S. It is for the child’s well-being that the parents actively engage themselves in their child’s learning and advocacy. Parents are the ones who see what works best for their child and are the ones who make the final decisions about what treatment they think will be most effective. Clearly, the parent is the most important person in improving the prognosis of an autistic child.

Works Cited "Autism Chronicles: Single With An Autistic Child." Day to Day. Prod. Dan Collison 8 Sep. 2008. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=94386596> .

Chez, Michael G. Autism and its Medical Management A guide for Parents and Professionals Philadelphia: Jessica Kingsley Publishers. 2008.

Ebert, Michael H., Loosen, Peter T., Nurcombe, Barry eds. Current Diagnosis and Treatment in Psychiatry United States: McGraw-Hill. 2000.

"Finding Support For Autism" Day to Day. Prod. Dan Collison 9 Sep. 2008. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=94415424> .

Greene, Melissa Fay. “Reaching an Autistic Teen”. The New York Times 2008. 20 Oct. 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/10/19/magazine/19Autismt.html?_r=1&ei=5070&emc=eta1&oref=slogin.

“For Families living with Autism” Autism Research Institute 2007. 23 Oct. 2008 <www.autism.com/families/index.htm>.

Paluszny, Maria J. Autism a Practical Guide for Parents and Professionals. New York: Syracuse University Press.

1979.

59 Molly Owens Research in the Community: B Block C. Butz 10/28/08 Finding Comfort for Elderly GLBTs Question: What is the best solution for the elderly GLBT to live comfortably?

“Shame over being gay leads retired teacher to suicide.” –Gay News Watch “Elderly gay Indiana couple murdered in possible bias attack.” –Gay News Watch “Discrimination and older gays: surviving aged care.”-Anti-Discrimination Board However the news lines portray it, there is clearly a serious discrimination toward the elderly gay in care facilities.

GLBTs, Gay Lesbian Bisexual or Transgender people, are all facing this harsh reality as well. Some solutions have been suggested to allow queers to have a comfortable retirement. Because discrimination against GLBTs in some retirement homes is so terrible, the government should fund the building of gay-friendly care facilities while providing classes in encouraging acceptance in standard retirement homes.

Although GLBTs are becoming increasingly accepted in today’s society, some harsh discrimination still lingers. In many care facilities, GLBTs are being ordered out of their rooms by their roommates, moved onto different floors, or are being verbally abused. Doctors, psychiatrists and social workers noted: "some [gays] have seen their partners and friends insulted or isolated. Others live in fear of the day when they are dependent on strangers for the most personal care. That dread alone can be damaging, physically and emotionally" (Gross). One of the side effects of discrimination is that seniors are actually afraid of going and receiving help in care facilities. This is problematic because the GLBT elderly do not receive the assistance they need to live safely. One writer from San Francisco wrote, “Accustomed to being out of the closet, they don't want to go back into it for fear of rejection or discrimination at a retirement center. They go along with Barbary Lane's [Gay Retirement Home] motto, "Closets are for clothes, not seniors”’ (Richter). However, most of the GLBTs who are brave enough to head to the retirement homes end up wishing to leave or becoming depressed.

Depression from discrimination is a serious problem amongst elderly gays. The Chronicle stated; "Elderly gay people … living in nursing homes or assisted-living centers or receiving home care, increasingly report that they have been disrespected, shunned or mistreated in ways that range from hurtful to deadly, even leading some to commit suicide" (Gross). It is true that suicide has been one of the extreme, yet occurring, side effects from GLBT prejudice. For example, one 79 year gay man in an East Coast nursing home was moved off of his floor and into the dementia ward to tone down the amount of protests. Even though the nurse explained they were looking for other ways to deal with the problem, the man was so distraught, embarrassed, and depressed from the extreme bigotry that he hanged himself (Gross). GLBTs are afraid of going to retirement homes for fear of sexual discrimination. David Aronstein, president of Stonewall Communities says, "many times gay people avoid seeking help at all because of their fears about how they’ll be treated, unless they see affirming actions, they’ll assume the worst ” (Gross) The hazing, slurs, and the problem of overall discrimination toward GLBTs has lead to terrible outcomes and must be resolved.

One suggested solution to this problem is training long-term care providers for the elderly. Although this process is already taking place, the projected idea would be to train even more providers to take care of aging GLBTs. This solution is beneficial because it opens many new job opportunities for people looking to interact with senior citizens. In addition, GLBTs would not have to leave the comfort of their own homes. Although this may seem like a well-to-do plan, it may be difficult to find trainers and does not resolve the prejudices in retirement homes. The solution would indeed keep elderly gays from dealing with prejudices in their homes but would not eliminate the hatred toward GLBTs by homophobic people. Gay or lesbian people, who would not be able to afford a care provider, would still have to endure the hatred in care facilities. However, other potential solutions have been proposed that may cover these issues.

Another possible way of handling this issue is to create additional gay-friendly or exclusive GLBT retirement homes. Projects would allow queers to choose where they would like to spend their retirement - take their chances at a standard care home or a discrimination-free facility. Some surveyed gays, “indicated that administration, care staff, and residents of retirement care facilities themselves were all potential sources of discrimination, and that education addressing awareness and acceptance of GLBTs is one potential remedy for discrimination against GLBTs in retirement care facilities. Respondents also indicated a strong desire for the development of GLBT-exclusive or GLBT-friendly retirement care facilities” (Johnson). This project could appear to the public as segregation between heterosexuals and homosexuals however it does not fall under this category since gays would have the to choose where they would want to live. The other issue with this undertaking is that it could be potentially expensive. Some experts on aging, entrepreneurs, and nonprofits say “the need is there, but the

60 challenge is more complex than build it and fill it. They have to raise money; find an affordable, attractive, gayfriendly locale; and motivate people who, like all seniors, might want or need anything from Pilates classes to nursing care” (Richter). These projects would require funding of some kind, most likely from the government or fund-raising. Though difficult, the process of installing gay-friendly retirement homes has already begun which proves it can be done. In California, Barbary Lane in Oakland, Openhouse in San Francisco and Fountaingrove Lodge in Santa Rosa were established and “each is premised on the concept that many gays want to spend their retirement years in places where they're comfortable being themselves” says the Chronicle (Richter). The process is already on its way and is spreading throughout the country. Both solutions have many strong assets and differences which make the answer to the problem difficult to decipher, however the superior way to solve the issue is by creating gay-friendly retirement homes.

The best way to handle discrimination against GLBT elderly in retirement homes is to create GLBTfriendly care facilities. This would allow gays, lesbians, bisexuals, transgender people, and even straight people, the option of retiring to a place where they do not have to face sexual discrimination of any kind. Judy Richter, a writer from the Chronicle says, “Because of anti-discrimination laws, none of the projects is exclusively gay. Straight people may move in, too, but the projects bill themselves as gay-friendly” (Richter). Gay-friendly projects of this kind are already starting to appear in other places than California. For example: "In the Boston suburbs, the Chelsea Jewish Nursing Home will break ground in December for a complex that includes a unit for the gay and lesbian elderly” (Gross). Although the issue of cost is in play, both proposed solutions require a decent amount of government funding. Segregation would not be an issue because GLBTs would have the right to choose which home they would like to live in. Although this proposition would allow elderly GLBTs to avoid the prejudice in their homes, the creation of GLBT-friendly homes would not solve the real core of this problem, homophobia. Therefore, in addition to creation of new facilities, acceptance classes should be taught in standard retirement homes. These would allow homophobic people to eliminate their fear and hopefully learn to show common decency and respect toward GLBTs. This course would be offered with the hope that the base of discrimination could be reduced significantly or even diminished so that in the future there would be no need for separate homes. GLBT-friendly retirement homes and acceptance classes would allow aging gays to live comfortably.

Discrimination toward elderly gay, lesbian, bisexual, and transgender people in retirement facilities is a serious issue going on today. It prevents GLBTs from receiving equal care, terrifies them to the point that they do not wish to receive the care they require, and can send GLBT people in serious depression. Although there are other proposed solutions discussed amongst the professionals, the best way to prevent this prejudice is by establishing GLBT-friendly care centers while implanting GLBT acceptance classes in standard retirement homes. Aging homosexuals need and deserve the same amount of quality and care in retirement homes therefore; they should receive it by being allowed the chance to live comfortably amongst people who will treat them fairly.

Works Cited “Anti-Discrimination Board.” Lawlink. 15 November 2007. 3 November 2008 <http://www.lawlink.nsw.gov.au/lawlink/adb/ll_adb.nsf/pages/adb_et61>.

“Gay News Watch.” Virtual Atlantic. 2008. 4 November 2008 <http://www.gaynewswatch.com/Page.cfm?PageID=2&STID=202>.

Gross, Jane. “Aging and Gay, and Facing Prejudice in Twilight.” New York Times. 9 Oct 2007. 16 Oct 2008 <http://www.nytimes.com/2007/10/09/us/09aged.html>.

Johnson, Michael J., Nick C. Jackson, J. Kenneth Arnette, and Steven D. Koffman. "Gay and lesbian perceptions of discrimination in retirement care facilities." Journal of Homosexuality 49.2 (April 2005): General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 20 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Richter, Judy. “Bay Area gay senior housing closer to reality.” San Francisco Chronicle.

30 March 2008. 3 November 2008 < http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/03/29/REM9VR0FE.DTL>.

61 Lucas Peck Research in the Community Craig Butz 11/07/08 Golden or Black?

On October 10, 2008 the Golden Gate Bridge District Board of Directors voted to install a net underneath the Golden Gate Bridge to stop suicides. The bridge is the location of the most suicides of any place on earth (Prado). Although creating a suicide barrier in the form of a net underneath the Golden Gate Bridge would be costly financially and possibly environmentally, because the appeal of jumping off the bridge is so strong, a barrier that makes this attractive way to die unavailable would be worth the costs.

Over 1,300 people, the most of any single place in the world, have given into their temptations and jumped off the Golden Gate Bridge in order to end their lives since its opening in 1937 (Cassady and Prado). Crashing into the water below at a speed of about 88 mph after approximately 4 seconds is a gruesome way to die says Kevin Hines (The Bridge). Kevin is part of the 2% of the people to have survived the fall (Vick). He knows the lure the bridge offers to people contemplating suicide. On average once every two weeks someone kills themselves at the bridge. Statistics like these show how common this terrible act is (Glionna, “The World”).

Immediately after Kevin Hines jumped of the bridge, the first thought that went through his mind was "Oh s---, I don't want to die. What am I going to do?" Right then he knew that he had just made the worst decision of his life and he had practically no chance of survival. Despite jumping off head first, he understood that the only possible way he could survive would be to hit the water feet first, so he tried to shift his body so his feet would point down.

When he hit the water he had managed to turn and was at a slight angle with his feet down which is the optimal way to survive this kind of fall. After sinking 40 to 50 feet in the water he struggled to fight his way to the surface, which was difficult after having broken his back and shattered multiple vertebrae on impact. Once he reached the surface he gasped in a massive breath and at that same moment he felt something brush against his leg. Apparently what brushed his leg was a seal that was keeping him afloat by nudging him upward until the rescue boat arrived. He believes that without the seal he never would have survived. When Kevin jumped he was 19 and was on his school’s wrestling team in high school which put him in superb physical condition. After the horrible initial decision to jump, everything went perfect for Kevin Hines. For those people who don’t hit the water at a certain angle, have a miracle savior seal or are not at the peak of physical condition, they will have almost no chance of surviving the fall and will not get to live the rest of their lives (The Bridge). He has spent much of his life since his attempted suicide, working with a task force that helped persuade the Golden Gate Bridge District Board to create a barrier (Glionna, “The World”).

One of the main reasons that people choose the Golden Gate Bridge to kill themselves is because they see it as a romantic way to die and this romantic death is so definite and easy to obtain (The Bridge). There is only a four foot railing stopping people from jumping, which can easily be bypassed and does not in any significant way deter people who want to jump. Also people who are thinking about committing suicide know that once they jump off the bridge they can not change their mind and their life will soon be over. While some suicides methods leave room for the possibility of rescue or recovery, jumping off the bridge is almost certain to be their final act (Vick).

The idea of having a barrier on the Golden Gate Bridge has been around for a long time but after many years of careful consideration the Golden Gate Bridge District Board determined that a net would be the best solution for reducing suicides. The net will be made out of steel cables and coated in a plastic material. It will be located 20 feet below the walking area and will go out 20 feet over the water (Chawkins). The net will be constructed in a way so that if a person lands on it the net will partially collapse making it difficult for the person to get out or at least stalling them enough so that they can be removed from the net before they could reach the edge.

Although the net will catch the people who jump, the main purpose of it will be to stop people from even thinking about jumping in the first place (McKinley).

Besides the net the other main option the Bridge District Board considered for preventing suicides was extending the railings vertically from 4 to 12 feet (Glionna, “Golden Gate”). This railing would definitely stop suicides but was not chosen because the negative side effects of it would be greater than if the barrier was a net.

Having a railing would be quite unattractive for people looking at the view from the bridge which would really hurt tourism. Also the bridge has rarely been shut down and most of those times it was due to high winds. The railings would make the bridge shake more during high winds. From a financial view point the net is a much better option than extending the railings because while the net will cost 78 thousand dollars a year to maintain, the railings would have cost 500 thousand dollars over the same period (Chawkins). This option would prevent suicides and is better than nothing but a net is the best option (Prado).

62 The hope is that the net would make those people who are unsure whether or not to commit suicide lean towards not committing suicide. The president of the Psychiatric Foundation of Northern California is in full support of the net. He says, "It's [The Golden Gate Bridge] a suicide magnet. And sometimes all they need is a certain amount of time to stop and reflect and change their mind.” Of the people who the bridge staff have intercepted from jumping over the years, 9 out of 10 of those people are alive today or died of natural causes (McKinley). "The study is part of a growing body of scientific literature that explodes persistent myths about suicide while reinforcing a simple principle: When it is harder to kill oneself, fewer people do so" (Vick). This runs contrary to the argument that some use who think that people who want to kill themselves will find a way regardless of potential changes to the bridge.

Although I believe that the ‘net’ effect of the barrier would be a positive one, there would be some negative effects as well. Before the net was chosen as the preferred barrier an online survey was conducted that showed that of the different options for suicide barriers, more than half of the people who responded voted to not have a barrier at all (McKinley). One of the main reasons that people didn’t want a barrier is because they think that the net will have no effect and people will just kill themselves in other ways. People who are against having a barrier feel that the 40 to 50 million dollars to install the net and an additional 78 thousand dollars per year should be used in other ways. A citizen of San Francisco, Paul J. Miller, believes, "Attention should be given to mental health assistance, not paying tens of millions of dollars to contractors who are just trying to milk money from citizens" (Chawkins). At this time the environmental impact has not yet been determined and could easily have some negative side effects such as birds getting caught by the net (Prado). There are many people in San Francisco who feel that the net would cast a negative light on San Francisco’s image to the world at large. This is because they feel the net would show that the people of San Francisco are worried about suicides (Vick).

A life is a life, so no matter what, if a life can be saved almost everything possible should be done to save it. The greater the amount of lives that can be saved the greater prevention measures should be put into place. Due to the Golden Gate Bridge having such a high amount of suicides makes having a barrier extremely important. Because of the fact that when being able to kill ones self is less available people will do so less often, the money, environmental impact and damaged image of San Francisco are all worth the sacrifice when human life hangs in the balance (Vick and Prado). So what it comes down to is the fact that the net would reduce the suicide rate on the bridge and according to multiple psychiatrists would then reduce the total suicide rate making having a barrier on the bridge a worthwhile compromise.

63 Bibliography Golden Gate Bridge Suicide Cassady, Stephen. Spanning the Golden Gate: The Golden Gate Bridge. Santa Rosa: SQUAREBOOKS, 1986.

McKinley, Jesse. "Golden Gate Managers Vote to Build Suicide Net: [National Desk]." New York Times [New York, N.Y.] 11 Oct. 2008, Late Edition (East Coast): A.11. New York Times. ProQuest. The Bay School.

14 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> Glionna, John M. "Golden Gate barrier studied; Report on the bridge explores five design options aimed at deterring jumpers." Los Angeles Times [Los Angeles, Calif.] 9 Jul 2008,B.5. Los Angeles Times. ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> ---. "The World; A Jump Survivor's Bridge to Activism; John Kevin Hines wants a suicide barrier erected on the Golden Gate to keep others from leaping: [HOME EDITION]." Los Angeles Times [Los Angeles, Calif.] 23 May 2005, A.1. Los Angeles Times. ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> Vick, Karl - Washington Post Staff Writer. "The Golden Gate: A Bridge Too Deadly? After longtime resistance, Bay Area may follow other efforts to prevent suicides at landmarks. " The Washington Post [Washington, D.C.] 3 Mar. 2008, A.1. US National Newspapers. ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> Lundstrom, Marjie. "Suicide barriers for Golden Gate Bridge? Public will debate life-and-death issue as old as the span itself. ”The Sacramento Bee [Sacramento, Calif.] 21 Jul 2008, A.1. California Newspapers. ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> Prado, Mark. “Net OK’d as best bridge suicide barrier.” Marin Independent Journal 11 Oct. 2008: A2.

Friedman, Stacy. "Nothing golden about a bridge without a suicide barrier." The Jewish News Weekly of Northern California: J [San Francisco, Calif.] 15 Aug. 2008, 16A, 18A. Ethnic NewsWatch (ENW). ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> Roleff, Tamara, ed. Suicide: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego: Greenhaven Press, 1998.

Chawkins, Steve. "Golden Gate to get suicide net; A web below the bridge is OKd to save jumpers and the view." Los Angeles Times [Los Angeles, Calif.] 11 Oct. 2008, B.1. Los Angeles Times. ProQuest. The Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://www.proquest.com/> The Bridge. Dir. Eric Steel. DVD. Easy There Tiger, 2007

64 Jules Robins Craig Butz 11/11/08 Community Research Paper Is Microfinance Worthwhile?

Hidden behind a facade of perfection, the microfinance industry utilizes sketchy figures and near impossible claims about success rates and self sufficiency. Microfinance is the lending of small amounts of money to people without collateral, for things such as starting businesses, buying homes, or paying for health care; it puts trust in the poor to use the money to benefit their long term financial situation and to pay off the loan instead of simply taking the money. In 1977, Grameen Bank, the worldâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s first microfinance institution, was born. It lends money to people in the villages of Bangladesh (mostly women) to start or expand their businesses. Because the program functions without requiring collateral, even those too poor to provide it can become part of the marketplace (Yunus, 62-83). Mohammad Yunus and Grameen Bank shared the Nobel Peace Prize in 2006 because of their importance to the developing field of microfinance. Microfinance usually uses groups to improve repayment rates, if the amount of money oneâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s group members can borrow is based on them paying off the loan, their group members are more likely to pressure the initial borrower into doing so (Schultz, Maccawi, and El-Fatih). Although microlending often fails to pull the people of the third world and urban America out of poverty, it has other surprising positive affects on these individuals and their communities, such as improving their standards of living and allowing them to avert financial crisis in emergencys.

The loans given out by third world microfinance institutions are indeed tiny by first world standards, but these small sums are being used by many impoverished people to improve their lives and to bolster their confidence.

Microfinance was developed in Bangladesh as an attempt by Mohammad Yunus to help the poor become active members of the financial world. Microfinance in the third world makes seemingly minuscule loans, usually less than $300, with which people can start businesses. However, according to Karol Boudreaux and Tyler Cowen, writers for The Wilson Quarterly, Most microcredit banks charge interest rates of 50 to 100 percent on an annualized basis (loans, typically, must be paid off within weeks or months). That's not as scandalous as it sounds -- local moneylenders demand much higher rates. The puzzle is a matter of basic economies: How can people in new businesses growing at perhaps 20 percent annually afford to pay interest at rates as high as 100 percent?

On the other hand, many Islamic banks (those run to follow the dictates of Islam) use qard al-hasan, a type of microfinance without profit-sharing or mark-ups; this is the only kind of unsecured money lending possible under Islamic religious restrictions. Unfortunately, it only lends to those so poor that they have no chance at starting businesses due to complete lack of experience in any financial field, while leaving micro-entrepreneurs in the lurch (Seibel). Microfinance has been an important contributor to the improvement of living standards and confidence levels for people in the third world.

Grameen Bank was the first microfinance institution, it offers the impoverished loans with which to start their own businesses so that they can become self sufficient. Grameen brought a new outlook to the scene; according to John Adams and Frank Raymond, writers for the Journal of Economic Issues, "Yunus's key innovation was to create loan circles, usually of five women, who used social suasion to ensure high repayment rates and sustain their creditworthiness." Yunus says that Bangladesh was an ideal startup place for microfinance because the country is run by a small group, most of whom are college friends who he was able to persuade to allow him to start his business despite the lack of concrete backing for his ideas (117). Yunus and Gameen's joint reception of the Nobel Peace Prize in 2006 was an odd occurrence. Firstly, it is very rare for economics to be at all involved in the peace prize, much less a bank. Despite the seeming controversy, the committee seemed at ease with the decision, some critics less so (Adams and Raymond); this sparked more growth in the field of microfinance and has encouraged people to support it (Adams and Raymond). Grameen Bank has set the mold for the workings of a third world microfinance organization; one that encourages self employment and relies on peer pressure. Grameen is widely accepted as a force of good in the world, and is loved by the public and experts alike (Bethell).

Despite the success of microfinance in the third world, the same model can't be directly applied to the first world because of legal requirements on businesses. Unlike the third world, where the vast majority of people are self employed, in the first world most people work for larger companies; In addition, in the first world, entrepreneurship isn't as widely accepted as the best destination for loans; oftentimes building financial stability and receiving higher education are considered more important (EARN). These societal traits have brought modes of thinking such as 'the poor aren't smart enough to run small businesses' into many people's minds (Yunus 175). Further, self employment is made sparser in the first world because potential entrepreneurs would lose their welfare benefits without attaining the certainty of pay they would have working for a larger company (Yunus 185). Despite these difficulties,

65 microfinance has still made an impact on the confidence of the poor; it has helped them to see that they can make progress and attain a better standard of living.

EARN, a microfinance institution in San Francisco, role models American microfinance. EARN has very different views on microcredit than traditional microfinance institutions. For example, as opposed to solely emphasizing entrepreneurship, their main programs are oriented towards asset building and higher education. EARN believes that assets are vital because they can be passed on to future generations, as opposed to jobs which will end with the worker. EARN also believes that education is very important because instead of attempting to address difficult immediate problems, it will help future generations to get good jobs and to keep themselves above poverty.

EARN claims impressive results, such as more than seven and a half million dollars in savings for its clients, (EARN) but itâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s hard to evaluate the relevance of these numbers because it can't really be determined how much of what their clients bought they actually needed. Nevertheless, it is still an impressive sum and should not go unnoticed. EARN And other organizations like i have adapted microfinance to a more charity oriented form in line with what is accepted in the realm of poverty alleviation in the first world.

Many doubt the claims made by Grameen Bank and other institutions about repayment and poverty alleviation success rates, and they're right; the numbers are somewhat inflated. Despite what is said about the purposes of microfinance, studies show that people usually can't escape poverty through it (Boudreaux and Cowen).

It is likely that the ninety-nine percent repayment rate Grameen shows is partially due to the inclusion of late repayments and loans taken out to pay other loans off in their repayment numbers (Bethell). Though many microfinance institutions aspire to be self sustaining, few actually are, in fact, on average they can only pay for about seventy percent of their costs, so need grants and donations for the rest (Bethell). The seemingly idyllic microfinance market still has some unresolved with difficulties.

Despite not being an efficient means of eliminating poverty, microfinance has worthwhile benefits. Those who receive loans usually improve their standard of living, if not through greater income, then still through new interpersonal connections (Boudreaux and Cowen). A lot of loans are used to pay for school instead of business, but this improves the overall education level of affected regions (Boudreaux and Cowen). Loans can also provide borrowers with protection from medical and natural disasters by giving them a fast way to get back on their feet instead of going bankrupt from the enormous costs (Boudreaux and Cowen). Microcredit has good implications for the state of the world.

Microfinance is not as effective as one would like, so what should be done about it? There a four options for dealing with the problems of microfinance; the first is to give up on it and try something new, such as organizing entire new companies then assigning people jobs within them. Either instead of, or in conjunction with the development of a new method, microfinance could cease to be seen only as a means of fighting poverty, and start also being seen as a way to improve lives without for less investment than classical charities so as to be more successful with a new set of lesser goals to accomplish the same greater goal of improving the lives of the poor.

Alternatively, microfinance could be reformed with greater emphasis on helping the clients become business people, as opposed to simply providing loans and hoping that the clientele can achieve financial security.

Lastly, everything could stay as it is, and microfinance institutions could continue to do less good than they have potential to do. It would be most helpful to undertake the third option, reform of the business education system.

Modern microfinance helps those who have extensive knowledge of how to get ahead do so, but has less affect on the rest of its target population. Microfinance institutions ought to make the education programs that some already offer mandatory, and help clients at first to manage their businesses before sending them off on their own.

Additionally, the suggested programs like the donkey cart many such institutions offer (Schultz, Maccawi, and ElFatih) should be scrapped, because success will only come if the borrower knows what they're doing, not if they pick the recommended option because they donâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t know what to do.

Microfinance usually can't achieve the goals it sets, but it is still a major force for good in the world. The third world especially has seen great gains in attitude, confidence, and even to a certain extent in income level. The first world has yet to see as many improvements, but the process has begun, and contributors like EARN are adapting microlending to a more suitable form for the future. Microfinance lacks the power to do what it was intended to, but it is well worth the money it uses to improve the world.

66 Works Cited Adams, John, and Frank Raymond. "Did Yunus deserve the Nobel Peace Prize: microfinance or macrofarce?'

(Muhammad Yunus)." Journal of Economic Issues 42.2 (June 2008): 435(9). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 10 Oct. 2008.

Armendáriz de Aghion, Beatriz, and Jonathan Morduch. The Economics of Microfinance. Cambridge, United States, M.I.T., 2005.

Bethell, Tom. "Micro man: everyone, from free-market conservatives to socialists, loves Muhammad Yunus and the Grameen Bank, which has been lending tiny sums to millions of women in Bangladesh. Yunus won the Nobel Peace Prize last year, but Tom Bethell wondered if the story was too good to be true." The American (Washington, DC) 1.4 (May-June 2007): 34(7). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 10 Oct. 2008.

Boudreaux, Karol, and Tyler Cowen. "The micromagic of microcredit: the millions of tiny loans microcredit banks make to the world's poor do not work the miracles some advocates claim. But like the Wizard of Oz, microcredit does not need to be magic to do a great deal of good." The Wilson Quarterly 32.1 (Wntr.

2008): 27(5). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 10 Oct. 2008.

EARN. “Quarterly Impact Analysis Q2 2008”. EARN. 2008. Oct. 28, 2008. <http://www.sfearn.org/files/EARN_Q2_2008_summary.pdf>.

----.“Why Assets Matter”. EARN. 2008. Oct. 26, 2008. <http://www.sfearn.org/ site/downpage.php?NodeID=35>.

Schultz, Ulrike, Asia Maccawi, and Tayseer El-Fatih. "The credit helps me to improve my business: the experiences of two microcredit programs in greater Khartoum." Ahfad Journal 23.1 (June 2006): 50(16). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 10 Oct. 2008.

Seibel, Hans Dieter. "Islamic microfinance in Indonesia: the challenge of institutional diversity, regulation, and supervision.(Research Notes and Comments)(Report)." SOJOURN: Journal of Social Issues in Southeast Asia 23.1 (April 2008): 86(18). General OneFile. Gale. Bay School - Baisl. 10 Oct. 2008.

Yunus, Muhammad. Banker to the Poor: Micro-Lending and the Battle Against World Poverty. New York, PublicAffairs, 2003.

67 Research Aubrey Russell Economy research paper 10/27/08 San Francisco and the Economic Crisis The recent U.S. economic crisis has hardly affected San Francisco business and profits much, but will likely even help San Francisco business in the long run. Subprime mortgages, loans owned by banks, and credit defaults swaps, compiled packets of loans, are the primary causes of the economic crisis across the U.S. These two things caused banks to lose all of their money and the money of insurance companies insuring them, but fortunately, the San Francisco bank, Wells Fargo was protected. Banks, especially Wells Fargo, are important/significant to San Francisco because without them, businesses in San Francisco would not be able grow and create their products, creating a very bad situation for business. Because businesses across the U.S. were unable to buy loans, businesses were unable to make money and in effect caused Wall Street and hedge funds, hedge funds being pools, in which people invest money in with other people to gain larger capital, to recede. However, San Francisco business, specifically the tech sector, is safe because of the success of Wells Fargo during the crisis. San Francisco will likely be resistant to the crisis as long as the factors keeping it economically stable continue to stay in place.

Subprime mortgages and the short selling of them are the primary cause and ignition of the economic crisis affecting the United States today, but have not affected the San Francisco headquarters bank, Wells Fargo, significantly. Subprime mortgages are home loans given to people with a low credit score. This usually indicates that the borrowers do not have enough money to repay the loan because they didn’t have enough to pay their previous loans in the past (“Wall Street Blues”). San Francisco banks, such as Wells Fargo, have a limited number of these subprime mortgages (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”). One article says that “Wells Fargo did minimize its use of subprime mortgages, which ultimately led to its success” (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”). Wells Fargo’s performance can be seen in the market because it minimized the usage of subprime mortgages. At one point, the Dow Jones index experienced one of the largest losses ever, while Wells Fargo shares reached a new, fifty-two week high (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”). The reason why banks, even the slight amount lent by Wells Fargo, lent subprime loans in the first place was because banks thought they would be able to profit by these loans through short selling; they would buy a property for a lower price, sell it to a person under a subprime mortgage (so that they can sell to a larger bracket of people), wait for the price to be higher and then sell it to Freddy Mac and Fanny Mae, two government companies Zacks). Wells Fargo did not do much short selling of subprime mortgages because Wells was a conservative bank. The fact that Wells Fargo did not participate in subprime mortgages and short selling nearly as much as other banks means Wells couldn’t have been affected by the financial crisis much. This allowed Wells Fargo to become one of the most stable financial icons in the market” (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”).

San Francisco’s relative success from Wells Fargo can be seen from its comparison with other sections of the U.S. Stockton is a place that has been devastated by the economic crisis. Real estate values, or housing prices, in Stockton are down 34% since September 2007 (“Stockton home Value information”). San Francisco however, has only gone down 1% since September 2007(“The San Francisco Real Estate Report”). This relative success can be attributed to Wells Fargo because of its minimal use of subprime loans. Stockton banks had many subprime loans, while San Francisco banks had very few, that’s why San Francisco has so much better real estate values. However, the fact that San Francisco is down 1% real estate shows the effect the small amounts of subprime mortgages Wells Fargo had on San Francisco.

The banks that did not do as well as Wells Fargo, such as the banks invested in Stockton, compiled the subprime loans into packets called credit default swaps. Insurance companies, such as AIG insured the entirety of credit defaults swaps making the banks feel secure in their loans. However, the problem with subprime mortgage loans in credit defaults swaps is that they depend on the average price of houses going up. The average price, contrary to housing price trends, of houses across the U.S. actually went down in value. The effect was that for most of the banks lost money from the subprime mortgage since people were unable to pay (Zacks).

The banks who owned many of the subprime mortgages, such as Lehman Bros, decided to increase rates for the rest of people’s mortgages in the credit defaults swaps to make up for lost profits, but San Francisco was again unaffected because of Wells Fargo. Failing credit default swaps caused a snowball effect that engulfed people who hadn’t even heard of a subprime mortgages, the snowball effect meaning the interest rates kept increasing for each failed mortgage, which kept affecting the next level of people, who were barley paying their mortgage off (“Another Frightening show about the Economy”). San Francisco did not suffer from the problems of the credit default swaps because Wells Fargo had very small ones, which were only affected slightly because of the small amount of subprime loans (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”). Some banks, unlike Wells, suffering from these problems then looked to their insures, AIG and other big companies, to pay for the deficit. However, AIG and others

68 were unable to provide the money causing AIG and other insurance companies to almost fail (Zacks). The problem is that Lehman Bros did not survive the crisis and many billions of dollars were lost, now circulating in the system.

This forced the Federal Reserve Bank to print money at historic rates to replace the lost bank money and caused for the first time, Mutual funds in banks to loose money. Anyone with a supposedly safe fund (considering its one of the safest investments in the country) now had lost money and pulled money out fast. Without money from these mutual funds, the many banks besides Wells Fargo would not be able to lend money as much money. The government had to intervene and guarantee the money lost back to keep all investors from pulling out. Now however, due to the many circumstances, numerous banks are afraid to give loans and the commercial paper market has frozen up (“Another Frightening show about the Economy”). However, Wells Fargo is not afraid to lend money, which is one of the greatest contributors to San Francisco’s success (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”).

The effect the freezing up of the commercial paper market had on Wall Street and Hedge funds, including the Hedge funds owned by Wells Fargo was enormous. Companies without the ability to borrow money suffer. One source explains this. It says, “The problem with having the banks fail is that all the businesses use the loans to expand and produce their product, so if they're not able to do that, they lose money” (Wall Street blues). Since Wall Street is a compilation of businesses in the form of stocks, especially in indexes, business performance has a direct affect on Wall Street.

The losses for thousands of hedge funds nation wide have been excruciatingly painful due to the financial crisis and might affect the Wells Fargo bank in the future. Mr. Griffin’s, an extremely intelligent, educated stock manager, hedge fun, Citadel, for example, a well known fund for its high twenty percent returns per year, has been hit hard by the recession. Since hedge fund returns have been down ten percent on average, the rich members paying the lavish fees to hold accounts have pulled out. This caused significant profit losses for hedge funds in the past few months alone. Hedge funds are significant because many banks have or own them. Wells Fargo could impact from this significantly because it owns several hedge funds and has profited from them in the past (Wells Fargo). If things continue to get out of control in the economic crisis and hedge funds are affected more, Wells could recede.

However, Wells Fargo has three billion set aside for emergencies such as this (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells”).

In addition to Wells Fargo, San Francisco is also resilient towards the economic crisis because it has numerous tech industries (“Monthly Economic Barometer”). Tech industries do fairly well with returns of ten percent on average, but since 2007, have only been up three percent. Even though losing seven percent average profit is very bad, given the current economic status, it is remarkable that tech industries are up in profits at all. A tech analyst, Stephen Baker at NPD says, “But hot products are selling well, he says. Sony is seeing few signs of flagging U.S. demand, says Stan Glasgow, president of Sony's U.S. electronics business. He said sales have been particularly strong for its priciest flat-panel TVs” (“Tech industry is Holding It’s Own”). If the products are selling well, especially the most expensive ones, then much of the San Francisco business, considering San Francisco has 356 tech companies, is safe economically(Manta).

San Francisco is likely to profit from the economic crisis. The Wells Fargo bank will allow for this to happen. Since Wells Fargo and San Francisco have a strong economic correlation, the success of Wells Fargo will result in the success of San Francisco in General. Wells Fargo will be able to buy other, weaker banks, due to its success, increasing its capital. One source says, “"In addition, the company has been selectively acquiring throughout the downturn. Following up on the $1.5 billion purchase of Greater Bay Bancorp last year, Wells has recently bought outright or picked up the assets of North Carolina insurer Professional Benefits Associates, Santa Rosa's Martin Financial….. Nearly every analyst who follows Wells expects the company to take advantage of the Wall Street bloodbath to pick up hobbled competitors on the cheap” (“Opportunistic Stage for Wells). If Wells Fargo buys all of these cheap banks, it is likely to emerge from the crisis as one of the most stable, successful banks in the U.S. This will help San Francisco businesses and make it easier and cheaper for them to borrow money. In addition, Wells Fargo has created 250 new jobs, which will benefit San Francisco even more.

The use of subprime mortgages and credit default swaps started the economic crisis. Many banks and insurance companies failed and for the first time, the Federal Reserve banks caused mutual funds to lose money. San Francisco was protected from these things because of Wells Fargo bank and the profits of the tech industry.

69 Works cited City and Country of San Francisco. Office of the Controller. Monthly Economic Barometer. June. 2008. 22 Oct 2008 <http://www.sfgov.org/site/uploadedfiles/controller/reports/Monthly_Economic_Barometer_June_2008.pdf > "Credit Default Swaps Explained." Zacks (Sept 25, 2008): NA. General OneFile. Gale. Bay School 27 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

"Hedge fund." The Columbia Encyclopedia. The Columbia University Press, 2000. General OneFile. Gale. Bay School 11 Nov. 2008 Kessler, Michelle. "Tech industry is holding its own." USA Today. (July 9, 2008). Opposing Viewpoints Resource Center. Gale. Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ovrc/infomark.do?&contentSet=IACDocuments&type=retrieve&tabID=T004&prodId=OVRC&docId=CJ181140211&source=gale&srcprod=O VRC&userGroupName=san58140&version=1.0>.

“Manta.” EcNext, Inc. 2008. 30 Oct 2008. <http://www.manta.com/mb_53_G4_24G/information_technology/san_francisco_ca> “Stockton home Value information.” Zillow.com. No date. 10 Nov 2008. <http://www.zillow.com/real-estate/CAStockton-home-value> Temple, James. "Opportunistic stage for Wells; As competitors falter, San Francisco bank draws customers - and managers keep their eyes open for potential acquisitions." San Francisco Chronicle. (Sept 21, 2008).

Opposing Viewpoints Resource Center. Gale. Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ovrc/infomark.do?&contentSet=IACDocuments&type=retrieve&tabID=T004&prodId=OVRC&docId=CJ185360278&source=gale&srcprod=O VRC&userGroupName=san58140&version=1.0>.

“The San Francisco Real Estate Report.” Information designs. No date. 10 Nov 2008. <http://www.rereport.com/sf/ron/> “This American life.” Another Frightening Show About the Economy. Chicago Public Radio. 3 October 2008.

Chicago: Chicago Public Radio, 2008.

"Wall Street blues: U.S. economy in crisis.(Cover story)." Current Events, a Weekly Reader publication. (Oct 6, 2008). Opposing Viewpoints Resource Center. Gale. Bay School. 13 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ovrc/infomark.do?&contentSet=IACDocuments&type=retrieve&tabID=T003&prodId=OVRC&docId=A186516826&source=gale&srcprod=O VRC&userGroupName=san58140&version=1.0>.

“Wells Fargo.” Wells Fargo. 2008. 29 October 2008 <https://www.wellsfargo.com/com/bus_finance/hedging_sol>

70 Ashley Terry Research B block November 4, 2008 America’s Future Lies in the Youths’ Hands and Obama is the One to Lead Them Before Senator Barack Obama ran for president, a lot of youth in America were not concerned with the issues that dealt with politics like they are today. Not only has Obama introduced himself to the United States as a person who cares for the issues adults can relate to, but also a person who focuses on the youth as an extraordinary and extremely important aspect for the future of an America that will prosper in the future. His ideas on changing our country have matched the ideas that the youth have been dreaming for and the adults working for. Because Obama’s views on modifying the U.S. to be a more successful place has a positive effect on the youth, the youth have demonstrated their similar ideas through programs and organizations such as SFBO (Students For Barack Obama) and the mock presidential elections held at Caldwell High School and many other schools. These organizations mainly spotlight the candidacy of Obama and keep the youth aware of the solutions that Obama has put together and thoroughly thought out that would benefit us all in education, economics, healthcare, and youth issues that have become problems throughout the country.

Obama has been supporting the youth and vise-versa. The youth and Obama go hand in hand. Other organizations that support Barack Obama that were already established before his movement on the youth are comparing him to other candidates included in the presidential elections. They realize that Obama has a passion for keeping the youth educated because he realizes that America’s future lies in the youths’ hands.

Obama centralizes the point that youth need to stay educated because education is the key to opening up their futures. Obama’s first approach about the education issue in America is planning to make education more affordable according to, Edward Summers a 25 year old supporter of Obama (Conlin). Obama believes that if the youth are going to have a higher education, the prices of education should be lowered. He has realized that the reason why some youth do not receive as good of an education as other privileged students is because the cost of the education. Lowering the cost of education will cause the parents and guardians of the students to be able to afford the school tuition or make more public schools that actually teach their students something and care about the work being done by the students. Obama wants “our students learning art, and music, and literature, and foreign languages and all the things that make an education worthwhile,” (Glass Booth). He understands that having teachers just teach the students information for standardized tests will only make their education seem boring. He wants students to want to go to school and be able to take academic classes and other subjects that interest them as well (Glass Booth).

The youth respect and adore Obama for his concerns on their education. For example, “The requests [of having money to help the schools afford to stay open longer and pay the teachers] came during a youth summit at Thornton Township High School, which dismisses students at 1:30 p.m. because it cannot afford to stay open longer,” (Phillips). These students were so worried about the lack of the education that they were receiving at school and decided to write to Obama. Some students would have been excited to get of school so early, yet these students were troubled by their need of more education. These students believed that writing a letter to Barack Obama would help because Obama believed that education was the key to succeeding in life. Along with the cut of these students’ education and school hours came the stop of their dreams. These students had big dreams and they understood that going to school and getting the education was important for them if they wanted to reach their goals and dreams (Phillips). Although Obama couldn’t provide all the money that Thornton High School and other schools just like it needed, he sponsored bills that helped students attend college without the worries of costs, and he pushed for better funding for special schools that should reduce the schools’ deficits. Obama’s views on education matches the views of the youth and he makes that clear when he tries everything in his power to make education youths’ first priority when working to reach their “big dreams,” (Phillips).

Because Obama has been interested in the youths’ concerns with education and other issues, like crime, this resulted in youth activism programs in and out of schools that have been created because of him and others supporting him through in-school mock elections. Two specific youth activism programs are Students For Barack Obama (SFBO), Generation Obama (GO), and The Paly Voice. SFBO “is the official student outreach arm of Senator Obama's campaign for president. We are the collective voice of over 70,000 students who see, for the first time in our generation, a promising political and moral future for America," (USF). The SFBO began in the summer of 2006 from a group of students on Facebook. They also have goals that include "raising student awareness about issues of national importance, creating national buzz around the Obama for America campaign, and ensuring high voter turnout for the primary and subsequent general elections," (USF). This is one of the "largest grassroots student organizations in history." These students are dedicated to getting Obama in office because they believe that he is going to bring change to America for the better (Students). GO is led by young activists that simply want Obama to become president. They show their support for Barack Obama and dispatch information about Obama through “field

71 work, political organizing and fundraising,” (Generation Obama). The Paly Voice, which is a journal written by the Palo Alto High School students, was established close to the end of the Vietnam War, around 1971. The Paly Voice has been associating with SFBO when the writers of the journal wrote about their support for Obama. Some of the students that are apart of the journal are also apart of SFBO. These youth activism programs have encouraged more youth to either join or participate on their own time to be informed about the presidential election this year than any other year.

There are also programs that are targeting youth that have the chance to vote, specifically, to get them to vote and let their voice be heard in this year’s election. Some of the organizations include Smackdown Your Voteestablished by the creators of WWE, Hip-Hop Summit- created by Russell Simmons (one of the biggest Hip-Hop icons), and Declare Yourself- created by Norman Lear who has already raised $27 million for his organization (Vlahos). These organizations keep the youth updated and informed on what is going on in the presidential election so far. They want to make sure that the youth know what is going on and have enough knowledge to vote for what they believe is the right thing for the country. Like Obama, these organizations value the opinions of the youth because they realize that the youth is next the generation to rule the country. These organizations and the country want that upcoming generation to be educated and know the history behind the previous presidencies, understanding what strategies worked and did not work for the country while trying to improve. The result of these organizations and the youth wanting Barack Obama as the President of the United States of America is that Obama is indeed a positive influence on the youth. He encourages the youth to stay focused on education in order to make it to their dream places in life.

Barack Obama has been focused on the youth and their education for his whole campaign. In an essay written by Barack Obama, he stated, “Taking action can mean getting involved politically. We've seen huge numbers of young people taking part in our campaign. They're knocking on doors and making phone calls and helping fight to bring about real change in this country” (Obama). He and the youth want change to happen now because they understand that waiting any longer will only ruin the U.S. Obama focuses more on youth issues than other candidate like John McCain and former President Bill Clinton. Bill Clinton focused more on the economic issues in America and not so much the youth like Obama is doing in this year’s election. At the time, Clinton focused on the money issues in the country and not the youth as one of his main targets during his presidency. President Bill Clinton’s main focus was that he was able to reach was “turning the greatest fiscal deficit in American history into a surplus … and presiding over the greatest level of economic prosperity since the early 1960s,” (Baliles). Similar to Bill Clinton, John McCain is focusing mainly on the economic crisis. He believes that the country needs more small businesses without taxing them. His first priority is fighting the “the greatest global financial crisis since The Great Depression” (McCain). Unlike Clinton and McCain, Obama lets America know that he is working with the youth to help develop the country in a way that not only adults benefit from but the youth as well.

Overall, Obama has been more than a positive influence on the youth; he has been a role model that the youth look up to as a source of courage that tells them that reaching their goal is only a matter of not giving up and being educated. Barack Obama has encouraged confidence in the youth in a way that makes them want to let their voices be heard without worrying about what outsiders think about it. He is someone that the youth has voted for as their president and they believe that with Obama having a chance to become president, they can finally ne able to be the “change” that Obama has been referring to during his campaign.

72 Work Cited Baliles, Gerlad L. “Bill Clinton.” American President: An Online Reference Source. 31 Oct. 2008 <http://millercenter.org/academic/americanpresident/clinton>.

Becker, Henry. “Obama Campaign inspires youth political activism.” The Paly Voice.

14 Dec. 2007. 20 Oct. 2008 < http://voice.paly.net/view_story.php?id=6106>.

Bhattacharjee, Riya and Rio Bauce. “10,000 Rally for Obama in Oakland.” The Berkeley Daily Planet. Vol. 8. 99 (2007): 1, 6. 20-22 Mar. 2007. 21 Oct. 2008.

Cohen, Roger. “Obama’s youth-driven movement.” International Herald Tribune. 27 Jan. 2008. 29 Oct. 2008 <http://www.iht.com/articles/2008/01/27/opinion/ edcohen.php>.

Conlin, Michelle, Jessica Silver-Greenberg, Paula Lehman, Eamon Javers, and Lindsey Gerdes. "Youth Quake; They're called the Millennials--and they're fed up. Why? Try angst about jobs, health care, and debt. Now they're getting pols to listen." Business Week. 21 Jan. 2008: 32. Gale Cengage Learning. The Bay School. 16 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/itx/start.do?prodId=EAIM>.

Generation Obama (GO). 31 Oct. 2008. <http://my.barackobama.com/page/content/ gohomepage>.

“Glass Booth.” 31 Oct. 2008 < http://glassbooth.org/explore/index/barack-obama/11/education/14/>.

Greenblatt, Alan. "Changing U.S. Electorate." CQ Researcher 18.20 (2008): 457-480. CQ Researcher Online. CQ Press. The Bay School. 20 Oct. 2008 <http://library.cqpress.com/cqresearcher/cqresrre2008053000>.

McCain, John. “What We’re Fighting For.” The Wall Street Journal. 3 Nov. 2008. 3 Nov. 2008 < http://online.wsj.com/article/ SB122567508079392051.html?mod=todays_us_opinion>.

Obama, Barack. “Choices for a Rising Generation.” Tolerance Teaching Magazine.

2008.

22 Oct. 2008 <http://www.tolerance.org/teach/magazine/ features.jsp?p=0&is=43&ar=945>.

Phillips, Katie. “Youth is served.” Daily Southtown. 28 May 2005. 31 Oct. 2008 < http://obama.senate.gov/news/050528-youth_is_served/index.php>.

Popkey, Dan. “Popkey: In GOP stronghold of Caldwell, youth stand behind Obama.” 13 Apr. 2008. 20 Oct. 2008 <http://www.idahostatesman.com/207/story/ 350794.html>.

Students for Obama. 28 Oct. 2008 <http://students.barackobama.com/page/content/sfbohome>.

USF Students for Barack Obama (SFBO). USF Students. 28 Oct. 2008 <http://my.barackobama.com/page/group/USFStudentsforBarackObamaSFBO>.

Vlahos, Kelley Beaucar. “Youth Activist Groups Target Voter Turnout.” Fox News. 11 Dec. 2003. 31 Oct. 2008 <http://www.foxnews.com/story/ 0,2933,105422,00.html>.

73 Meeks Vaughan Craig Butz Research in the Community 6 November 2008 Land Wars: Incorporation Political and Legal Battles Many municipalities in the United States and other nations came to be via incorporation. However, incorporation efforts are often marred by contention and litigation. Expensive and protracted political and legal conflicts sometimes occur as citizens and officials challenge bids to incorporate. These occurrences are quite common, for instance four annexation or incorporation conflicts currently in action are not expected to be resolved until after July 2009 in California alone (“Governor Signs Bill”). These conflicts result from disputes over municipal powers and services, zoning laws and revenues, particularly taxes.

Zoning codes are one important ource of incorporation controversy. These codes control the appearance of a community including what structures and properties can and cannot exist within the municipality enforcing the zoning codes. These codes vary in intent and rigor from one municipality to another. When zoning codes are in place, they exist to maintain a way of life and to maintain property values. However, if one municipality is annexed into another, the annexed municipality’s zoning laws will no longer be in effect and will be replaced by those of the annexing municipality. To prevent this from happening, residents and officials sometimes oppose annexation.

In 2006, the town of Richfield, Wisconsin attempted to reincorporate as a village. The nearby city of Hartford opposed Richfield’s incorporation effort. Hartford city administrator Gary Koppleberger told the court reviewing the case that, “such actions would affect Hartford's exercise of its own extraterritorial zoning and subdivision review authority” (Behm). Hartford believed that Richfield's incorporation as a village would undermine Hartford’s ability to use zoning in territory around Hartford, and would damage Hartford’s municipal agreements with other municipalities. As a village Richfield would also have been able to veto zoning changes and land subdivisions within 1.5 miles of its boundary. This was troubling to Hartford officials because “if Richfield chose to exercise such power, it would interfere with existing municipal agreements between Hartford and the Town of Erin and Village of Slinger, Hartford City Administrator Gary Koppelberger said in an affidavit” (Behm). These two issues caused a fierce dispute between the two municipalities and was a case of an incorporation controversy fought over municipal powers and zoning codes.

St. Petersburg, a well developed city in Florida, tried in 2008 to annex 28 acres of little developed oceanfront property and was opposed because of disputes over codes. The area to be annexed was called Tierra Verde, a quiet and relaxed coastal area, which was part of Pinellas County. The primary reason many “…Tierra Verde residents oppose the annexation because St. Petersburg allows greater building density than Pinellas County permits” (Lindbergh). In the eyes of those opposing annexation the current zoning codes were a shield protecting the area from the massive development that threatened to destroy the quiet, relaxed atmosphere of the area. When annexation threatened this shield Tierra Verde residents fought fiercely against incorporation.

In 2007, the town of Rancho Santa Fe, California was trying to reincorporate as a city for several reasons, but chief among these was the desire to maintain the rural nature of their community via zoning codes. Zoning was alluded to in that many “proponents of cityhood, which in government lingo is called ‘incorporation,’ say Rancho Santa Fe could better protect its rural environment if it were self-ruled” (Kaye). Ensuring that Rancho Santa Fe’s rural ambiance was not overrun by urbanism was most certainly a function zoning limitations. This was a case of the residents pushing to incorporate to gain control of zoning laws in order to protect the atmosphere of the community.

During the year 2007 in Texas Arlington’s incorporation controversy centered upon municipal incorporation of new land in order to place that land under Arlington’s zoning codes. Incorporation was opposed by a small cabal who didn’t want to pay property taxes. Arlington was trying to annex 350 acres of rural and forested land to support an effort to build 800 acres of upscale shopping centers and homes, replacing the forests currently there. City councilman Steve McCollum claimed that if Arlington did not “…annex the parcels north of the proposed development, any homes or businesses built there would not have to follow the city's design standards” (Schrock). However, this land grab was opposed by a dozen property owners in the area who were averse to the idea of paying property taxes to Arlington (Schrock). Arlington was annexing this large swath of land to bring the construction on that land under Arlington’s zoning codes and was opposed by those who did not wish to pay property taxes.

Municipal powers and services are the chief functions performed by cities. Municipal services represent both a large portion of the expenses paid for by taxes and the basic services and safety that Americans take for granted—services like sewage, fire departments and police protection while municipal powers are the ability of municipalities to represent their people and make agreements with other municipalities.

74 In 2008 in Alamo, an unincorporated suburb in CA, there were disputes as to whether the proposed new town could have supported its inhabitants with basic services and the cost of those basic services. An average citizen named R. Jean Taylor argued that the decision “…was made hastily, did not consider the recent economic downturn and underestimated costs of a new town government, among other things” (Blevins). This caused reconsideration of incorporation on the part of Local Agency Formation Commission, an agency which in most states controls the incorporation of new municipalities. In addition a lone commissioner (from the local agency formation commission) spoke against the endorsement of incorporation because he believed that the costs of a police force were deflated.

There were also concerns as to whether the hypothetical new city could provide fire fighters (Blevins). Alamo’s incorporation effort was a case of a popular desire to incorporate weighed against the fiscal cost of the hypothetical new government created by incorporation.

In 2008 controversy over incorporation occurred in the town of Marion, North Carolina, a quiet community bordering a lake, was caused by a concern for the county’s by dissatisfaction with the county and was opposed by worries about increased taxation and wasted money. The county had disappointed many Marion residents in its enforcement of zoning codes—one way in which proponents of incorporation to village status claimed the people would benefit from incorporation. However, a counter argument against incorporation claimed “residents who would be taken in by incorporation would have to pay more in taxes for services they already receive. He [Jim Powers and average resident and incorporation opponent] said Burke County already provides planning and zoning and police protection through the sheriff's office” (McBryer). This incorporation was fought for because of zoning laws and was fought against because of worries concerning increased expenditures on municipal services.

In Alabama during 2005 the possibility of the city of Tallahassee incorporating the quiet suburban community of Friendship was combated by residents of Friendship who were satisfied by the local government services they had. Opponents of annexation did not see any benefit to “…having the city's police protection wouldn't be a benefit because there is so little crime in the area and the Elmore County Sheriff's Department handles that” (Arrington). Residents of Friendship felt no need for Tallahassee police protection and were satisfied with what they have. Opponents of annexation in Friendship were also concerned about the replacement of their fire department.

Because they claim they had“‘…a lot better fire department than the city of Tallassee has. Of course, they work together, but we still beat them sometimes to fires,’ Parker (an average resident of Friendship) said. ‘I don't see any reason for them to annex.’” (Arrington). The many opponents of incorporation in friendship feared, that current community services and powers would be replaced by inferior services from another city at a higher cost.

Incorporation is often fought for and against fiercely because if an area is annexed and becomes gains a new municipal statues taxes and other revenues coming from that area will change hands. This new direction of revenues can jeopardize or harm communities. Therefore, incorporation disputes and controversy often center on money.

Slightly more than one month ago, in Lewisburg, Illinois, a lightly populated quiet suburb soon to be bisected by a highway, residents wished to control the revenues from development in their community. They wished to stop it from being overrun by development and further feared that they would not profit from the development that does occur. James Smith, the leader of the incorporation movement, said “‘We can’t control anything but we can guide it and keep our assets at home’ Smith said, noting large residential and commercial developments already are planned for the area on the heels of I-269” (“Lewisburg moving ahead”). The residents of Lewisburg wished to put themselves in control of revenue from development. They decided the best way to do this was by incorporating a government of their own.

Residents of Edgewood, Maryland began pushing for incorporation in 2007 to gain more control over their tax money and were opposed in order to be stopped from gaining that control and to stop needless government.

Edgewood’s incorporation effort was in danger from the county which “…has a financial reason for opposing incorporation: An incorporated town receives 17 percent of the income taxes generated by its residents,” (Park).

Therefore, the county would stand to lose revenues. Other opponents of incorporation within Edgewood “…argued that incorporation would bring more bureaucracy and taxes” (Park). This was an example of an incorporation conflict fought entirely over money. On one side was the pro-incorporation faction in the special taxing district of Edgewood which was trying to get more control of its resident’s tax dollars via incorporation. However, in opposition to incorporation there was the county which hoped to stop this redirection of revenues and a further group who feared needless and wasteful duplication of government services, making this an incorporation battle fought over money.

In Sydney, Australia, a highly metropolitan costal city, an extreme case of financial controversy arose in 2004 over the matter of incorporation. In Australia, Sydney tried to incorporate new territory from the South Sydney city council. However, this effort was defeated because the loss of revenue to the south Sydney City council would

75 have been so great that the council would not have been viable (“City drops legal claim”). This was an extreme example of taxation encouraged incorporation controversy, with no less at stake then an entire city’s existence.

In 1910 Hillsborough, California went from a large group of sprawling unincorporated estates owned by a few dozen wealthy residents to a legally incorporated city, in order for the residents to both control their tax money and create their own zoning codes. When two towns near Hillsborough grew, their “…need for money to make improvements became acute, and the residents began to show interest in annexing the estate owners' lands” (History of Hillsborough). So the rich estate owners incorporated to stop these two towns. They wanted to keep control of their income rather than see it taxed away to pay for projects in other cities. They also wished to avoid the urbanization of their communities in the forms of sidewalks and street lamps. They accomplished this by incorporating to prevent themselves from being annexed by nearby communities (History of Hillsborough). Once more incorporation was used to defend the zoning rights of community and again incorporation was used as a means to control tax revenues.

Another example of tax revenue acting as a driving force behind incorporation was the incorporation effort of Sandy Springs, Georgia in 2003 a densely populated town outside of Atlanta. Atlanta had lobbied in the Georgia House of Representatives, against incorporation in an effort to keep the tax revenues of that community under Atlanta's control. The proposed “…new city would get to keep much of the wealthy residential and commercial property taxes for its own coffers.” (Campos). The two sides in this controversy fought a fierce political battle to control the direction of the tax revenues of Sandy Springs.

Most incorporation conflicts revolve around one or more of these questions: Who will control municipal revenues (e.g. taxes, user fees, fines) from an area? What zoning codes will apply to a certain area? What municipal services (e.g. sewage, police and fire protection) will be provided, how much will they cost and how will they be paid for? These conflicts, which sometimes play out as protracted legal battles, may be an inevitable consequence of the authority given to municipalities. With the power to answer the three preceding questions in the hands of municipalities it may be inevitable that nearby communities sometimes come into conflict, particularly incorporation conflict, concerning what set of rules will govern them.

76 Works cited Adam Kaye. "Group pushing to incorporate Rancho Santa Fe." North County Times Dec 24, 2007: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 23 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Anne Lindberg. “Tierra Verde fights St. Petersburg’s annexation attempt.” Tampabay.com 23 October 2008 < http://www.tampabay.com/news/localgovernment/article865018.ece> Carlos Campos. "Fight to Incorporate Sandy Springs, Ga., Enters New Phase." Atlanta JournalConstitution Jan 28, 2003: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 22 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

"City drops legal claim amid fight on merger." Australasian Business Intelligence Jan 9, 2004: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 24 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Don Behm. "Hartford tries to block Richfield move: Town wants to incorporate as village; city fears disruption of agreements." Milwaukee Journal Sentinel July 23, 2006: General Reference Center Gold. Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 17 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/itx/start.do?prodId=GRGM>.

“Governor signs bill backed by incorporation supporters.” Los Angeles Wave. (2 Oct. 2008).

24 October 2008. <http://www.wavenewspapers.com/default.asp?sourceid=&smenu=79&twindow=Default&mad=No&sdeta il=10442&wpage=1&skeyword=&sidate=&ccat=&ccatm=&restate=&restatus=&reoption=&retype=&rep min=&repmax=&rebed=&rebath=&subname=&pform=&sc=1019&hn=w> Julie Arrington. "Small community hopes to ward off annexation." Montgomery Advertiser April 29, 2005: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 27 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Lea Blevins. “Alamo incorporation effort to receive fiscal analysis.” Contra Costa Times Dec 21, 2007: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 28 Oct. 2008 “Lewisburg Moving ahead with plans to incorporate.” Desoto Times-Tribune.com. 7 October 2008. 23 October 2008 <http://www.tampabay.com/news/localgovernment/article865018.ece> Madison Park. "Becoming a town is an uphill struggle: Edgewood effort to incorporate would entail years of effort." Baltimore Sun (Nov 18, 2007). Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 22 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>. <http://www.desototimes.com/articles/2008/10/08/news/doc48eb395b82fdc438328875.txt> Sharon McBryer. "Meeting set for those against incorporating Lake James." The News Herald August 11, 2008: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 28 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Susan Schrock. "Arlington eyes land to north." Fort Worth Star-Telegram May 19, 2007: Gale. Bay School, San Francisco, CA. 24 Oct. 2008 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

The Town of Hillsborough. Town of Hillsborough 10/10/2008 <http://www.hillsborough.net/about/history.asp>

77

Research in the Community Volume 1 Issue 2 March 2009 The Bay School of San Francisco

78 Table of Contents Ink: Political Cartoons over the Years…………………………………………………………… Ryan Armstrong 79 The Alternative Drug…………………………………………………………………………….. Alexandra Baum 83 Zak Blatt………………………………………………………………………………………………… Urban Art 86 Waiting and More Waiting…………………………………………………………………………….. Aaron Cera 88 Chicken Soup for the… Just about Everything…………………………………………………………. Jana Chan 90 Universal Health Care in the U.S.? ………………………………………………………………...Kevin Charette 94 How Soon Will The Ban Goodnight Moon? …………………………………………………… Michelle Chesley 96 Fill Me Up with Vegi-Oil! ……………………………………………………………………… Virginia Cortland 99 Professional Gaming: Sport or Lazy Excuse for a Job? ………………………………... Andreas DiGiorgio-Haag 101 Keeping Murals Fresh…………………………………………………………………………………. Cindy Dzib 103 Colors around the Globe: How Do Different Colors Evoke Emotional and Physical Responses in Humans………....Elamar Hakim-Moully 106 Bleeding Pain: Self-Mutilation in Teens and Its Effects on Interpersonal Relationships……………. Tesia Hirsch 109 Local Food…………………………………………………………………………………………. Jake Holtzman 112 Is Amtrak Doomed to Fail? …………………………………………………………………… Spencer Kirkwood 118 Yertle the Fascist Dictator and Other Stories: The Politics of Dr. Seuss Books………………. Grace McLaughlin 121 Record Labels vs. Artists & the Internet……………………………………………………….. Katie McLaughlin 125 Disco: The Inescapable Escape…………………………………………………………………...Tommy Mitchell 128 Whole Foods it the Haight: A Battle for the Neighborhood……………………………………... Caroline Muther 130 The Nightmare Suffered by Many but Known by Few………………………………………... Michael Nadelman 133 Sitting Still………………………………………………………………………………………… Abigail Nowell 136 From the Streets of Haight-Ashbury; To the Use of Psychedelic Drugs…………………………………... AJ Parr 139 Graffiti: A Therapeutic Art………………………………………………………………………… Deahna Scobie 142 It’s a Bittersweet Symphony: The Basis of Musical Stereotypes…………………………………Andrew Seaman 145 High Incidence of Breast Cancer in Marin County: Is it a Real Problem? ………………………. Tahirih Skolnik 149 The Innocuous Cure: The Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act……………………………... Madeline Spolin 152 How the American Dream Turned into a Nightmare: Home Ownership and the Financial Crisis of 2008………………………………………………… Skye Strachan 156 A Tainted Childhood: Preventing Child Abuse and Reactive Attachment Disorder…………………. Megan Tom 160

79 Ryan Armstrong Craig Butz 5 February 2009 Research in the Community INK Political Cartoons Over The Years Through out history, art has been used to describe important scenery. And then someone got the bright idea to put a word here, a word there. Before long, the pictures and drawings became what are now known as cartoons.

They come in many different offerings: some are funny; some are full of action, thrills, and suspense, while others offer insightful views on current and past subjects. Those cartoons, known as political cartoons, are very much the same as they were back then: work that depicts relevant and topical events, as well as the general mindset of the populace. The only things that have changed are the mediums and the styling of the drawings.

Political cartoons began in America with Benjamin Franklin. Published in the May 9, 1754 issue of the Pennsylvania Gazette, it depicted a rattlesnake, broken up into various pieces, with the names of seven colonies written either below or above each segment.

Below the drawing are the words, “Join, or Die” (Early America), suggesting that the colonies join together and become a full snake rather than just part of one, which is much less dangerous than a full snake. The drawing style was much like that of European drawings of the time, which made every animal look like they had the head of a serpent. Despite that, it was far cleaner than other American cartoons that appeared later, which “derived, naturally, from the contemporary British techniques. In general, they were overdrawn, covered with figures, and brutally satiric” (Becker, 289). This can be attributed to the fact that America was a British colony, and was influenced by them.

“Beginning in 1890s, cartoon technique moved more quickly in the direction of quick wit and immediate impact.

Backgrounds tended to fade entirely; the crowd thinned out to two or three primary figures” (Becker, 302). Cartoonists began to create cartoons based on their opinions, and hoped that they would influence the lower, more illiterate class. Boss Tweed, a Democrat of New York who was elected to the House of Representatives in 1852, was drawn with a money bag for a face by the famous cartoonist Thomas Nast, in order to demonstrate his greediness and corruption. “‘Let’s stop them damn pictures,’ the Tammany Hall Politician fumed. ‘I don’t care what the papers write about me- my constituents can’t read; but damn it, they can see pictures!’” (C. Ayoub).

WWII was the perfect cannon fodder for political cartoonists; even notable children’s book author Theordore Geiser (Dr. Seuss) started out as a political cartoonist drawing caricatures of Hitler and other leaders from the Axis of Evil. Drawn at a time when Japan had joined with the Nazis, it foreshadows a future

80 event against America by Japan, which we now know was Pearl Harbor. The styling is simple, black and white with crosshatching. Dr. Seuss uses large black areas as for darker shadows. Unlike the more serious tones of the Great Depression era cartoons, Dr Seuss’ drawing is almost whimsical enough to be in one of his later children’s books.

Other cartoons of the era were not as whimsical as Dr. Seuss’. C.D Batchelor’s 1937 Pulitzer Prize winning cartoon features a young man in baggy clothes with the words “Any European Youth” written on the back of his jacket. The woman, War, appears to be a prostitute, telling the boy to “Come on in, I’ll treat you right. I used to know your daddy.” (Becker 321) This implicates that history would repeat itself, in the form of WWII. The cartoon itself is a combination of soft and hard lines, cross hatching, and shading. Other cartoons of the period continued with a focus on an upcoming war; they were bleak and dark.

In the 1950s, cartoons still kept some of their darkness, but began to lighten up. One of the darker cartoons is entitled ‘The Scepter’, and has an arm with Stalin written on it, draping over the side of a bed as if the person has died. Falling out of the arm’s hand is a spiked mace, and below it, three other hands are reaching up to grab it. It marks the end of Stalin’s totalitarian regime, but hints that there are many more who are vying to take his place. Style wise, it utilizes a lot contrast between the background and the foreground, as well as various styles of shading and cross hatching. Still, it retains the appearance of a cartoon from the mid 30s and early 40s.The cartoons loose their sense of dread and start to become more obviously humorous about a less then a decade later. Here, Senator Nixon and Senator Lyndon Johnson are having a ‘senate clash’, as they often did in the late 50s. The clothing of the two men is exaggerated; both wear oversized trench coats and brimmed hats with massive feathers sticking out. Once again, the subject of the caricature was current with the times. The drawing itself uses heavy lines for the shapes of the cloaks, and soft lines for facial, clothing, and background details. Shading appears to be using a technique known as halftone. Halftone is when the artist makes a series of dots on the part of the drawing where they want shading to be: the smaller and more numerous the dots, the lighter color the shading. Halftones are used for most of today’s color comics and cartoons; the printing press can only print four colors, and must use a combination of different colored dots to achieve the required tone and color.

Currently, political cartoons appear not only in the newspaper, but also in magazines, television, and the internet. However, “There are now fewer than 60 full-time editorial cartoonists working in the United States today, down from over 200 in 1980” (C. Baumgartner 735). Without the restrictions of content and language, more and more artists are placing their work on the internet. Some have a large emphasis on humor, like the animations of JibJab, but still hit home on politics and current events through songs. Throughout their various political animations, JibJab pokes fun at the way things are run, and at the politicians themselves, often by exaggerating their mental capacity, physical ailments, merits and achievements. In on of their various cartoons, George W. Bush is dressed as a cowboy and playing the banjo, all while telling the viewer to vote for John McCain. Putting silliness aside, these animations is mock the way the politicians act and their supporting base; at one point in a cartoon entitled “Time For

81 Some Campaignin’”, John McCain sings along with other old people in a hospital (JibJab). He then has a heart attack. To some people, pieces of work like this are the only information that they receive, and what they base their votes off of.

Some cartoons, like Tom Tomorrow’s “This Modern World,” are serious, but are also humorous. As one cartoonist described, “Message comes first, humor second, and ideally both arrive at the viewer’s eye together” (Fiore). Even without any words, it’s easy to convey the message, a sort of “Take this for ruining our country!” feeling.

The drawing itself is neat and the coloring is crisp, suggesting that it was done in Photoshop, a medium that web artists use almost exclusively.

Most cartoons are just that: cartoons. However, some have the effect of igniting a large part of the world in anger. One of such cartoons was published in a Danish news paper on September30, 2005. The bomb was not what sparked the anger; it was the actual image of Mohammad himself. It is forbidden to show Mohammad’s face; in the Quran, his face is just a skin colored oval. After the publishing of the cartoon, Muslims around the world protested for months, occasionally leading to riots (and 100 deaths). Danish embassies were destroyed in Syria and Lebanon, and some Muslim leaders of groups like Hamas issued death threats towards the cartoonists and the newspaper editors (AINA).

Despite the long period of time that political cartoons have been around for, they are still what they were before: propaganda for the masses. Not everyone bothers to read a carefully drawn out argument, but they will pay attention to a picture. Whether they proclaim the defects in someone’s platform, or raise awareness on war, political cartoons give information. And now, there are more cartoonists than ever. Each one has their own unique style, and each one sees current events differently.

82

Works Cited Ayoub, Nina C. "'Drawn to Extremes: The Use and Abuse of Editorial Cartoons'." The Chronicle of Higher Education 51.23. Bay School. 3 Feb. 2009 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Baumgartner, Jody C. "Polls and elections: editorial cartoons 2.0: the effects of digital political satire on presidential candidate evaluations." Presidential Studies Quarterly 38.4 Gale. Bay School. 3 Feb. 2009 http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS Becker, Stephan. Comic Art in America: a Social History of the Funnies, the Political Cartoons, Magazine Humor, Sporting Cartoons and Animated Cartoons. New York: Simon and Schuster, 1959.

Fiore, Mark. "Animation and the political cartoon: these cartoons 'can reach inside someone's brain and grab just the right spot.'." Nieman Reports Bay School. 3 Feb. 2009. http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS Minear, Richard H. Dr. Seuss Went To War: A Catalogue of Political Cartoons by Dr Seuss. Mandeville Special Collections Library 2000. http://orpheus.ucsd.edu/speccoll/dspolitic/ 31, January 2009.

Tomorrow, Tom. â&#x20AC;&#x153;This Modern World.â&#x20AC;? This Modern World http://www.thismodernworld.com/ 1, February 2009 Cartoons of Muhammad. Assyrian International News Agency. http://www.aina.org/releases/20060201143237.htm 4, February 2009 http://www.earlyamerica.com/earlyamerica/firsts/cartoon/

83 Alexandra Baum Craig Butz Research in the Community February 7, 2009 The Alternative Drug Energy drinks have recently become the hottest way for athletes to get that quick-fix blast of energy.

However, when athletes want the rush of energy from these drinks, they are not only getting certain improved performance benefits like less fatigue and an increase in focus, but also a wide array of affects that are detrimental to an athlete’s performance like dehydration and addiction. Because of the increasing competitiveness of sports, athletes are now using energy drinks to get the physical and mental advantage over competitors; however, the affects of this aid hinders athletic performance more than helps it.

In every supermarket and corner store there is at least one section, usually located between the sports drinks and the soft-drinks, that is designated for energy drinks. Though right next to each other, the difference between these types of drinks is substantial. Energy drinks mainly get their “energy” from caffeine, guarana, taurine, and many other substances with similar properties. Sports drinks are mainly made up of sugars, electrolytes, and water in order to keep the body hydrated during exercise (Marie). Energy drinks are extreme versions of soft drinks and sports drinks because of their higher sugar content, as well as their large caffeine amounts (Edell; Original Rockstar). The amount of caffeine an energy drink contains can be up to “350 mg, which is equal to 10 cans of Coke” (Muzaurieta). Along with the high doses of caffeine and sugars, the other ingredients cause an imbalance of affects for many people which can ruin their athleticism.

The affects of caffeine and similar substances such as guarana and taurine on athletes are known to cause dehydration and addiction; however, they do utilize fat as energy. They also stimulate the central nervous system which is thought to be good, but in reality it is not that way. Jack Hartley from Vanderbilt University claims that when caffeine is consumed, there is an increase in blood flow to the kidneys which blocks water and sodium from being absorbed into the kidneys (Hartley). While this is happening, the kidneys are removing extra fluid into the bladder (Watson); however, when caffeine is consumed, it causes athletes to need to urinate by weakening the detrusor muscles which holds in urine (Hartley). This diuretic effect causes an athlete to become dehydrated because their fluid output is greater then their input. Though this effect does not apply to constant caffeine consumers, they are posed with a different disadvantage, addiction. Hartley also argues that people view caffeine as “the most inexpensive and readily available drug known to man” (Hartley). Because caffeine is legal and easily available, athletes are prone to using it to enhance their performance. Yet, when an athlete continually uses caffeine as an enhancer, they allow their body to get accustomed to the bad and good effects of caffeine; this makes them need higher doses of caffeine to get a “caffeine high” (Edell). Because caffeine’s affects are subject to an athlete’s body weight and type, smaller athletes such as gymnasts and ice skaters are more prone to caffeine overdoses. Along with overdosing, athletes that are already hooked on caffeine who do not feed their habit can have withdrawal symptoms which further worsen an athlete’s performance (Caffeine and the Athlete). Withdrawal symptoms may increase fatigue, so the athlete feels they need more caffeine to get more energy.

Energy drinks have aided athletes to be able to consume more caffeine faster, thus increasing addiction; Russ Paddock from the United States Sports Academy concludes that because “coffee is generally served hot, it is generally drunk slowly. But energy drinks’ good taste and chilled state mean they can be consumed quickly, allowing a high dose of caffeine to enter the body fairly quickly” (Paddock). Energy drinks have also become an easier alternative to getting energy from food. Because many athletes are busy, they do not have time to sit down and eat a healthy meal that will give them all the energy they need, so they turn to energy drinks (Graves). In the energy drinks, another substance, taurine, has the ability to enhance the flavor of the drink, making it even more desirable to consume. Taurine is an amino acid naturally found in the body which regulates heartbeats. The major affects of taurine are not known yet because of a lack of research. The primary reason for this is because taurine is generally mixed with caffeine and therefore scientists are not sure where the affects of these substances are coming from. What is known is that the body supplies itself with enough taurine, but scientists do not know if this added amount from energy drinks is good or bad. The main appeal that taurine has for energy drinks is its flavor enhancing, and its ability to regulate the heart’s beat (Paddock). However, the regulating of the heart beat that comes from taurine is countered by the irregular heart beats people can get from guarana (Gazella). This “synergy” is not necessarily good. Irregular heart beats are one of the many affects that guarana and caffeine have in common. Like caffeine, guarana also allows fat to be utilized for energy rather then glycogen (Barber).

Glycogen is the principal fuel for muscles and exhaustion occurs when it is depleted. A secondary fuel, which is much more abundant, is fat. As long as there is still glycogen available, working muscles can

84 utilize fat. Caffeine mobilizes fat stores and encourages working muscles to use fat as a fuel. This delays the depletion of muscle glycogen and allows for a prolongation of exercise. (Caffeine and the Athlete) When muscles use fat for energy instead of glycogen, the body is able to save more of the glycogen; this also helps to recover muscles more quickly and results in a longer workout with less sore muscles (Salleh). Along with changing the way that the body receives energy, it also changes the way people perceive things by stimulating the central nervous system.

Caffeine and guarana block the brain from chemical adenosine which is related to sleep; when this chemical is blocked it makes the neurons in the brain “fire.” Because of the neurons firing, the body thinks that there is somewhat of an emergency and initiates “fight or flight” mode and releases adrenaline. From the adrenaline, the heart rate goes up (which can cause irregular heart beats), sugar is released into the bloodstream, and dopamine levels change. Dopamine is a chemical that relates with pleasure, therefore when people’s dopamine levels rise with caffeine, it causes a greater sense of energy (Watson). Because people feel like they have more oomph, they do not feel as fatigued during exercise and can go longer without resting. With this alteration of perception, people do not realize how hard they are working. Also, the neurons that are firing in the brain heighten alertness, which allows athletes to focus more and improve their performance (Hobson). When an athlete exercises, their heart rate naturally goes up; by elongating exercise and blurring their perception of effort, an athlete’s heart rate goes up even higher.

By mixing in caffeine and guarana, their heart rate goes up even higher, which in some cases has proven to be fatal (Guarana). Caffeine is found in many things, and can be helpful; however, mixing caffeine with other strong substances like it is not necessarily healthy and beneficial.

Energy drinks are commonly marketed to people that they are good and healthy, but most of what they say to be healthy has not been proven to be. First, some of the ingredients added to the drinks have not been tested, or have been tested in unreliable circumstances. For instance, taurine and its effects were tested on house cats in the 1970’s (Paddock). The energy drink companies use this as their evidence that higher amounts of taurine are good.

The mixture of these substances are not necessarily good either; the supposed “synergy” of these items put together has not been proven to be beneficial (Paddock). As one substance causes irregular heart beats, another acts as a heart beat regulator, cancelling out the effect. Logically thinking about this situation, this theory seems to work; however, when taking into account how many cancelling out affects there are in energy drinks, this confusion the body is being put through cannot be healthy. If the body is receiving contradictory signals all at the same time pertaining to different parts of the body, and receiving these actions for different substances, the body must get overwhelmed. The body is not made to be cancelling out good and bad affects, especially when it comes to the heart.

As people drink energy drinks, their heart is receiving many signals as a result of caffeine, taurine, and guarana.

When a person with healthy blood pressure levels and other heart related matters drinks an energy drink, it will not necessarily hurt them; but if a person with heart problems consumes this drink without the knowledge of their internal issues, they could have fatal consequences.

While energy drinks have most commonly caused deaths while mixed with alcohol, many deaths have also been reported from mixing energy drinks with exercise. In Sweden, a person had consumed energy drinks before their workout at a gym. Shortly after their exercise, they died. Though energy drinks have not been proven to be the cause of this death, it is speculated to be that way because many other deaths have occurred in similar circumstances. In Ireland, 18-year-old Ross Cooney died after playing a basketball game and drinking three energy drinks. Both people were said to be healthy and had no known problems, so people continue to think that these and many other deaths of athletes can be linked back to energy drinks (Red Bull in Suspected Link to Deaths).

Besides the fact that energy drinks have bad affects on athletes, the use of a substance in order to get extra benefits is not being a good sport. When athletes drink energy drinks in order to be stronger and better in their sport, they are not being truthful to themselves about their actual ability. It is not natural for the body to have high levels of these substances and therefore they should not be used in exercise. When athletes consume energy drinks they are harming their talent. Athletes should be proud of their accomplishments, and they should not use energy drinks to get an extra edge against the competition because that extra edge also harms them; they should use their natural skills that caused them to become involved in sports in the first place.

85 Works Cited Barber, Jen. "Fat Burners: Beneficial or Dangerous?" Physical Training: Fitness for Combatives (2002). EJMAS. 2002. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://ejmas.com/pt/ptart_barber_0902.htm>.

"Caffeine and the Athlete." Rice University. Nov. 1995. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.rice.edu/~jenky/sports/caffeine.html>.

Edell, David. "Are Energy Drinks Safe?" The Athletic Advisor. 6 Apr. 2006. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.athleticadvisor.com/Weight_Room/Energy_drinks.htm>.

Gazella, Katie. "The buzz about energy drinks." University of Michigan Health System. 1 Mar. 2005. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.med.umich.edu/opm/newspage/2005/hmenergydrink.htm>.

"Guarana." Yahoo! Health. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://health.yahoo.com/nutrition-supplements/guarana/healthwise-d04471a1.html>.

Graves, Antonio. "Energy Drinks Not Smart For Athletes." Cardinal Points 7 Dec. 2007. Plattsburgh State University College. 20 Feb. 2009 <http://media.www.cardinalpointsonline.com/media/storage/paper1064/news/2007/12/07/Sports/Energy.Dr inks.Not.Smart.For.Athletes-3137520-page2.shtml>.

Hartley, Jack. "Caffeine and Sports Performance." Vanderbilt University. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.vanderbilt.edu/AnS/psychology/health_psychology/caffeine_sports.htm>.

Hobson, Katherine. "An Athlete's Legal Aid: Caffeine." U.S. News 31 July 2008. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.usnews.com/blogs/on-fitness/2008/7/31/an-athletes-legal-aid-caffeine.html>.

Marie, Lisa. "Rehydration and 'Sport Drink' Ingredients!" Bodybuilding.com. 5 Feb. 2009 <http://www.bodybuilding.com/fun/lisamarie1.htm>.

Muzaurieta, Annie Bell. "Energy Drink Sales, Anxiety Attacks Increase." Thedailygreen. 4 Jan. 2008. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.thedailygreen.com/healthy-eating/eat-safe/caffeine-energy-drinks-44040108>.

"Original Rockstar." Rockstar Energy Drink. 20 Feb. 2009 <http://www.rockstar69.com/productIngredients.php?pdt=1>.

Paddock, Russ. "Energy Drinks? Effects on Student-Athletes and Implications for Athletic Departments." The Sport Journal. 2008. United States Sports Academy. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.thesportjournal.org/article/energydrinks-effects-student-athletes-and-implications-athletic-departments>.

"Red Bull in Suspected Link to Deaths." BBC 12 July 2001. 18 Feb. 2009 <http://news.bbc.co.uk/1/hi/health/1435409.stm>.

Salleh, Anna. "Caffeine Use in Athletes Reignites Debate." ABC Science 1 Aug. 2008. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.abc.net.au/science/articles/2008/08/01/2321478.htm>.

Watson, Stephanie. "How do Energy Drinks Work?" Howstuffworks. 5 Feb. 2009 <http://recipes.howstuffworks.com/energy-drink.htm>.

86 Zak Blatt Craig Butz Research and the community 2/11/2009 Urban Art Graffiti is both a destructive and powerful form of vandalism, but also is a legitimate form of art, that can positively influence the Bay Area. The word “Graffiti”, “derived from the Italian ‘Sgraffio’, meaning scratch, graffitti has been around since mankind.” (Ganz, 8.) Graffiti has been around since the beginning of man kind, although it is not looked at as “Graffiti” per say. Many thousands of years ago man wrote on the walls of caves and we learned from their inscriptions. The idea of writing on a wall creates a message that is more permanent than on paper. It is much more powerful, more significant.

Ancient graffiti helps us uncover a historical record of civilizations far before our time. “During the second World War the Nazi’s used writing on walls, for their propaganda machines to stir up hatred towards Jews and dissidents.” (Ganz, 8) This method of spreading propaganda publicly was selected as a way to influence the minds of many people by writing on walls. Writing on walls has come in different forms, with different intensions. The Nazis wrote on walls to convince people bad things, their intensions were very evil. In todays world people writing on walls has a very different purpose, to spread art.

It wasn’t until the 1970’s when graffiti really took off as an art form. People wrote their name, also known as their “tagger name” or writing identity. “But soon the first pseudonyms started to appear.” (Ganz, 9) This particular art form took off mainly within the youth of America. “The glut of new graffiti artists brandishing their names across the whole city inspired writers to find new ways to make their work stand out.” (Ganz, 9) Graffiti began to emerge as an art form that garnered pride.

The Aerosol spray can became a popular tool for writing. “Simultaneously, the widespread introduction of permanent markers and aerosol spray painting gave the graffiti writer greatly enhanced visibility.” (Chalfant & Cooper, 14) Modern day urban art originated in New York and Philadelphia on subway trains. Kids were motivated by fame, seeing their name every wear meant respect and fame. “Kids whose names appeared most frequently or in the most inaccessible places became folk heroes” (Chalfant & Copper, 14.). This was the fame aspect of the art, this motivated some kids to get started with this art in the first place. With more people came more ideas, Graffiti was growing.

Styles began to develop, first in the mid 1970’s people wrote single line hand style. This form of graffiti closely represented a form of graffiti “handwriting”.

As time went by, things got more complex, more creative, and most importantly more artistic. People still wrote single line Tags but there was much more to be seen at this point. “Tags got bigger and bigger until the first ‘pieces’ ‘short for master pieces ‘appeared on New York trains.” (Ganz, 9.) The artists created these pieces by using colored in bubble letters. Also people focused not only on writing words but they drew “characters” and faces.

This idea of graffiti, expressing political sentiments in terms of disagreement or mockery, of the government is ever-present. “That is part of the reason that so much of the language of war has been used in the world of graffiti art over the years. Creation can be revolutionary alternative.” ( Gavin, 7.) Banksy, a notorious and celebrated, street artists is known for his symbols of Anarchy painted with traditional images of the English government all over Great Britain. Often Banksy’s art is mingled with images of the Queen of England, Lady Diana or British soldiers. Banksy has even gone as far as to paint scenes of paradise and freedom on the controversial and hated Segregation Wall of Palestine.

Graffiti has a powerful commercial appeal as well. “Street art became a counter balance to commercial advertising and its assault on consumers.” (Gavin, 6.) This popularity in the youth culture of the “brand like” nature of the graffiti image has harnessed graffiti into a lucrative profession. “Many of early writers are now freelance artists or work for key companies in the clothing industry as designers. Murals have become particularly popular as they help American artists to secure paid work.” (Ganz, 18.). Murals are a way that artists can legally put up beautiful art and not damage any property, they positively effect the common people and society.

Murals, in particular have been commissioned by graffiti artist in several neighborhoods to create large scale art on the sides of commercial buildings. In San Francisco’s Mission District, whole streets are devoted to graffiti styled mural art work. Which was a great idea that has helped the problem of illegal Graffiti. Cultures who traditionally shunned this form of expression now pay and request artists to create these pieces of art in their neighborhood. Artists are paid large amounts of money to write on certain walls “I’m being paid $2,000 to paint the walls of a tattoo shop,” (LANGO). This art is a positive way of using graffiti art to paint and glorify a tattoo shop.

The transformative nature and beauty of Graffiti is often viewed now as a powerful form of recognized art.

As an art form, graffiti has no rules, no fixed method of expression and is constantly changing its appearance.

87 Graffiti engenders both the way in which words can be spray painted and handwritten but also the way actual characters and scenes can be depicted. “A new wave of artists have developed. Artists who are reinventing art on city streets. Some are coming our of the street art and graffiti scenes; others have a fine art background but want to experiment with a public space.” (Gavin, 6.) This unique artistic expression has even become celebrated. Pieces are housed in Museums of Modern Art. “What makes their work so interesting is how it operates between fine art and street art to form something else.” (Gavin, 6.) Graffiti is always changing and this new form is a great example of that, there truly are no rules when it comes to Graffiti, that’s half the beauty.

If Graffiti is to be a positive influence on the bay area, the people must create safe ways to keep it legal.

Designated Graffiti areas, mural spots and try encouraging artists to paint on walls that they are aloud to paint. The attitude of “Graffiti is not an art, its all vandalism” (SFPD Officer Matthews) must change, there needs to be more positive and by making more spots and legal opportunities, people might start to respect this well deserving art form after all.

88 Aaron Cera Research 1 February 4, 2009 Waiting and More Waiting Have you ever been waiting at a bus stop tapping your heels wondering where your ride is, or even if it is ever going to show up? Throughout its history, the public transit system of the city, known as the Municipal Railway or “Muni” for short, has been an incredible asset to the San Francisco community in many ways. The system, if functioning correctly, has the ability to transport large numbers of riders to virtually any location in the city.

However, the system has not lived up to its capabilities and has experienced major problems. This is perhaps not surprising given the limited resources available to Muni in comparison to the huge demand from its customers.

Roughly 10.3 billion rides are taken on public transit in America every year. (Kaufmann) The Muni system carries 686,000 trips every weekday, 216 million per year, and employs 4,800 people, with a budget of over $600 million (Municipal Transportation Agency). Many of these systems are afflicted by a lack of punctuality which creates significant additional costs and causes harsh criticism. This is a depressingly common phenomenon that also plagues San Francisco’s transit system. The general inefficiency and tardiness of the transit system adversely affects the entire city of San Francisco, including both businesses and residents. Yet there are possible solutions which should be explored to restore the quality of service which the public deserves. Muni is an important part of the life of the city and serious efforts should be made to make it a model system of public transportation.

The San Francisco system's failures are primarily due to the lack of adequate funding, at the same time that there is increased demand for usage, as well as poor operational management. There is a perception that the Muni is simply unreliable in terms of excessive wait times for Muni vehicles, that total trip times are too long, and regular and timely service cannot be counted on (Municipal Transportation Agency). One factor that contributes to the lack of dependability is the poor work ethic of some of the transit system's employees. On one level, it is understandable that employees would not turn up to work regularly because they are underpaid and receive limited benefits. This does not excuse a lack of discipline and responsibility in some transit employees. Such a problem was dramatically shown by the events on the morning of February 18, 2009. A Muni union shop steward used her personal car to block the exit at Muni’s busiest yard from 5:30 a.m. to 6:30 a.m. Seventy buses were prevented from leaving the yard to operate on their routes (Gordon). The public was severely adversely affected as a large number of routes had no service at all for a lengthy period. The disgruntled employee was in a dispute about whether seniority rights were violated in a job assignment. This is an example of how disputes between employees and management contribute to poor performance.

Such problems, which come to represent the culture of the system, can have a snowball effect, becoming a mass problem that seems incapable of resolution.

There are significant operational problems as well. In fixing these problems, that goal has to be to increase the productivity of the system by attracting more riders or increasing average transit speeds so each bus can provide more service. One example of an operational problem is an extremely flawed “priority” system. The top priority in making the bus system work efficiently is to ensure that buses get as many green signal lights as possible, including allowing buses to benefit from a signal extension, where the bus is detected on a green signal , which is then maintained until the bus passes through the green light. Conversely, where a bus reaches a red light, the goal is to reduce the time the bus is waiting at the red light so waiting time is reduced., or a signal recall, where the bus is detected on a red signal , whose length is reduced so that the decided green aspect comes around more quickly.

(Liggett). It can be deduced from this that the public transit agency does not truly have the public in mind, as this priority list only adds to the reliability problem by creating more overall traffic congestion and ignoring that impact of this system on other traffic. A specialized signal system for buses only just serves to create confusion and clogging of major traffic arteries on which buses travel.

City government seems to always be trying to improve the municipal transit system. In addition, there have been several ballot initiatives affecting Muni. Overall there is a perception that little progress has been made. There have been many different heads of the transit agency, but the identity of the head of Muni has made virtually no difference. Over the years many ideas and plans have been presented in an effort to improve Muni’s performance.

This includes turning over full control of the public transit system to a Municipal Transport Agency. It was believed that such a step would allow for greater public funding, which in turn would result in more buses, and more stops, in order to spread out the area of traffic. But serious operational problems persist.

The goal of the public transit system is to allow people to travel quickly to destinations at a relatively low cost and also to minimize carbon dioxide emissions and be environmentally friendly. While many people still drive cars to and from work, there is a growing demand for inexpensive and clean public transit. With oil prices skyrocketing and more people turning to public transit, increased strain is placed on the systems because

89 of increasing passenger loads. Improving the efficiency of the public transit system remains a difficult problem in the face of such challenges. In the current recession, there is little likelihood of additional money being injected into public transport. However, small operational changes could allow for an increase in revenue. A system which has less waiting time and operates efficiently will result in increased revenue and the possibility of systemwide improvements. An efficient Muni is crucial to the successful functioning of San Francisco and there should be continuing efforts and investments to improve the system.

Works Cited Bose, Sonali. “Memorandom.” Muni. 23 Apr. 2007. Municipal Transportation Agency. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sfmta.com////-073rdqtrFinancialResultsyearendprojection.pdf>.

Gordon, Rachel. “Muni Misses On-Time Goal.” San Francisco Chronicle [San Francisco] 20 Feb. 2007, Natl. ed., sec. A1: 1A. Sfgate.com. 20 Apr. 2007. San Francisco Chronicle. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sfgate.com/bin/.cgi?file=///‌/‌/‌/O7I021.DTL>.

Gordon, Rachel. "Waiting for the Bus....and Waiting and Waiting." San Francisco Chronicle 18 Feb. 2009.

Munical Transportation Agency and the City of San Francisco's Controller Office.

San Francisco Transportation Effectiveness Project. San Francisco.

Municipal Transportation Agency. MUNI. 20 Feb. 2009 <http://www.sfgov.org/site/uploadedfiles/controller/csa/TEP_BRF.pdf>.

“Proof of Payment & Always.” SFMTA. 4 Feb. 2008. San Francisco Municipal Transportation Agency. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sfmta.com///.htm>.

Needle, Jerome A.; Transportation Security Board and Cobb, Renée M. (1997). Improving Transit Security.

Transportation Security Board. ISBN 0309060133.

Newman, Peter; Jeffrey R. Kenworthy (1999). Sustainability and Cities: Overcoming Automobile Dependence. Island Press. ISBN 1559636602.

Hess, D. 2007. What is a clean bus? Object conflicts in the greening of urban transit.

Sustainability: Science, Practice, & Policy 3(1):45-58. http://ejournal.nbii.org/archives/vol3iss1/0608-027.hess.html Valderrama, A. & Beltran, I. 2007.Diesel versus compressed natural gas in TransmilenioHistory of the Municipal Railway in San Francisco. Glendale: Interurban Press, 1981.

ISBN 0916374424.

90 Jana Chan Mr. Craig Butz Research in the Community, A Block 19 February 2009 Chicken Soup for… Just About Everything Many people experience that guilty feeling when devouring an entire chocolate bar. But should people continuously deny themselves the irresistible “food of the gods?” Is the mouth-watering confection so dangerous to potential fat gain and flabby thighs that it must be eaten cautiously, only once a month? Hardly, the diverse confection contains several healthy compounds called flavonols that are heart healthy and can release endorphins that generate feelings of happiness and euphoria. However, don’t start gorging on chocolate just yet. Chocolate, particularly dark chocolate, contains healthy compounds that can relieve stress on the body—expressed possibly through craving and addiction due to a “need” for flavonols—but simultaneous intake of calories must be limited, or else the benefits of chocolate can be outweighed by its detriments of possible fat gain.

Chocolate contains several healthy compounds called flavonols—substances that have been shown to decrease the risk of cardiovascular disease, diabetes, cancer, diarrhea, and boost brain functions in those with a brain impairments. The main concern with chocolate as a health food is its high fat concentration, mainly the saturated fat from 18-carbon stearic acid (Adams). “Some evidence from population studies have found an increased risk of heart disease associated with higher intakes of stearic acid, although with the exception of cocoa products, most foods rich in stearic acid are also high in other saturated fats, which do elevate cholesterol levels” (Adams). The reason why only cocoa products are an exemption from stearic acid collection begins with its high level of “potent antidioxidants.” Antidioxidants consume free radicals—destructive molecules common in heart disease that create plaque, blocking the arteries and increasing blood pressure (DeNoon). They also inhibit oxidation of LDL (lowdensity lipoprotein, bad cholesterol) and may therefore reduce the risk of atherosclerosis (disease in arteries) and coronary heart disease (Health).

Studies by Dirk Taubert (MD, PhD), and his colleagues at the University of Cologne in Germany, show that dark chocolate can lower blood pressure, but only after a certain age in those with mild high blood pressure. He conducted a series of ten published trials, involving at least ten adults in a period of a week or more (Cocoa). The studies altogether included 173 participants, between the years 1966 and 2006 (Cocoa). One particular study consisted of six men and women, recently diagnosed with mild high blood pressure ranging from 84-153, eating a 100-gram chocolate bar for two weeks daily. Half received white chocolate while the other half received dark chocolate with instructions not to eat any other foods similar in nutrients and calories to balance the 480 calorie bar.

Their results showed that the dark chocolate eaters experienced drops in BP with a diastolic (highest BP) decrease of five and a systolic (lowest BP) decrease of two (DeNoon). Another study, conducted by Mauro Serafini, included seven healthy women and five healthy men between ages 25-35, having them, on different days, either eat 100 grams of chocolate, 100 grams of chocolate and a glass of milk, or 200 grams of chocolate (DeNoon). The results showed that the dark chocolate eaters had the most antidioxidants in their blood and higher levels of epicatechin (a healthy type of flavonol), whereas the milk and plain chocolate eaters had the lowest levels of epicatechin (DeNoon). The increased blood flow after consuming a small amount of cocoa in dark chocolate is due to mediated dilation—how much the arteries can expand. The antidioxidants and epicatechin in dark chocolate relaxes the blood vessels, and therefore increases the flow for a few hours (Vries).

David Grassi and his colleagues at the University of L’Aquila, Italy found that eating 100 grams of favonol-rich dark chocolate daily decreased fasting glucose, insulin levels and insulin resistance, resulting in a hypothesis that cocoa in dark chocolate can lower the risk and/or symptoms of diabetes (Adams). Grassi did not understand how dark chocolate affected insulin levels so he and his colleagues hypothesized that the nitric oxide metabolism could be affected, causing insulin levels to rise. Similarly, Professor Jennie Brand-Miller and her colleagues at the University of Sydney examined effects on insulin and glucose levels of cocoa-included foods compared to basic foods without cocoa and found that they had the same glycaemic (concentration of glucose in blood) response, but the cocoa-fortified food had an average of 28% increase of insulin levels (Adams). The result provides evidence toward chocolate being used as a cure for diabetes. Another study was done in the UK to test whether cocoa actually affected insulin levels, and therefore could possibly be used to treat diabetes. Scientists in the UK wanted 150 women to eat chocolate everyday for a year to test if a compound in cocoa could decrease the risk of heart disease in women with diabetes who were post menopausal and under 70 years old (CNN). Dr. Ketan Dhatariya, diabetes expert, states that “The hypothesis behind this study is that flavonols may improve the level of protection against heart disease over and above that provided by conventional drugs” (CNN). They found that the benefits apply only for women under 70 years old, post menopause, and suffer from type 2 diabetes—when the body cannot produce enough sufficient insulin, which makes the risk of heart disease almost 3.5 times higher (CNN).

91 Flavonols in cocoa have been shown to have health benefits in many studies; therefore scientists are creating methods to synthesize those flavonols with other foods (Cocoa). Scientists are working with pharmaceutical companies to develop some flvaonol prescription drugs (Cocoa). The drugs synthesized with flavonols would be used mainly as a self medication for depressive syndromes, like PMS (premenstrual syndrome), explained for by a change in hormone levels during that time. Companies like Mars are trying to manufacture cocoa beans in such a way as to preserve the flavonol compounds (Haynes). Mars Nutrition develop specialized flavonol-enriched health bars, called Cocovia bars, which have been shown to lower LDL levels in those with high blood pressure (Haynes).

These flavonols are not just limited to chocolates though. They can be incorporated into other foods, and already have in some Mars Nutrition products (Cocoa). Other foods with already integrated flavonols, and possibly hearthealthy and cancer-preventative, are tea, primarily green tea, and wine, primarily red wine (Adams). Marlene Machut, communication director for Mars Nutrition declares, “We have been able to identify the molecular structure of flavonols found in nature and now have an impressive library of different flavonols. But we are also able to synthesize not only those found in nature but also compounds tailored to specific needs” (Cocoa). If proven to be true, then this new innovation could be used to help those with needs for certain flavonols.

Accompanying the benefits of chocolate comes the possibility of fat gain due to a collection of calories.

There are many types of fats in chocolate, the main ones being oleic acid, stearic acid, and palmitic acid. Oleic acid is a monosaturated fat, commonly found in olive oil (Stibich). Stearic acid is a saturated fat that neutralizes cholesterol and helps alleviate stress on the arteries (Stibich). Palmitic acid is a saturated fat that raises cholesterol and increases the risk of heart disease (Stibich). Cocoa butter contains approximately 62% of saturated fatty acids but is not shown to increase LDL in scientific studies (Health). Dr. Michael Gibson says that leading experts don’t recommend chocolate as a health food because it’s benefits can be countered by the risk of consuming too many calories and an increase in cholesterol due to palmitic acid (Vries). Instead, they suggest that people balance the calories in chocolate with other health foods. Scientists have found that people who eat milk chocolate regularly experience expected increase in LDL levels due to the fat consumption. Mauro Serafini, PhD from Italy’s National Institute for Food and Nutrition Research in Rome, says “Our findings indicate that milk may interfere with the absorption of antidioxidants from chocolate…and may therefore negate the potential health benefits that can be derived from eating moderate amounts of dark chocolate” (DeNoon). Studies done have found that women who consume chocolate daily have a lower bone density of 3.1% than others who eat it less than once a week (Eyre). The calcium in chocolate is so insignificant that it barely contributes to the proper amount of calcium needed per week.

Jonathan Hudgson, head researcher from University of Australia, says that “even though chocolate contains flavonols and calcium, both linked to having a positive effect on bone density, the confectionary product also contains oxalate, an inhibitor of calcium absorption, and sugar, linked to calcium excretion” (Eyre). The usual way of roasting and fermentation of cocoa beans destroy approximately three-quarters of the flavonols present in chocolate (Haynes). A medical journal, the Lancet, states that “manufacturers often deliberately remove the flavonols from their products because of the naturally bitter taste they produce, sometimes darkening the cocoa solids for aesthetic purposes” (Haynes). Professor Ian MacDonald from Notingham University warns that “The message must not get out there that all chocolate products have these benefits. It would be a more sensible strategy to develop low-fat, low-energy drinks that are enriched in these flavonols” (Cocoa). Therefore, the consumption of chocolate must be limited or else the simultaneous intake of calories will outweigh the benefits from flavonols. If chocolate contains such a risky amount calories to fat gain, then why do people still eat it?

What makes chocolate so irresistible? Is craving the psychological need for the flavonols present in chocolate? Or possibly the feelings of happiness and content it creates for a prolonged period (Yale-New)? With a 40% craving in women, generally around the time of menstruation, and a 15% craving in men it is a wonder that stores aren’t constantly sold out (Health). Some scientists hypothesize that women may be more addicted to chocolate than men in order to maintain steady hormone levels (Collins). Other scientists say that women crave sweet and high fat content foods during their menstrual period because of higher levels of their progesterone hormone—a female hormone important during ovulation and decreases fat in blood, fooling the body into thinking that it needs more to replenish itself (Collins). And even some other scientists believe that women experience a magnesium deficiency before menstruation and therefore crave the high levels of magnesium in chocolate (Slaughter). However, other non-craved foods have similar levels of magnesium (Slaughter). These hypotheses point to the possibility that the body is, indeed, in need and crying out for some flavonols through craving. Overall, many believe that the craving for chocolate is explained by a desire for certain ingredients present in the cocoa substance, namely caffeine, carbohydrates, bioactive agents, and possibly magnesium (Health). Bioactive agents have been attributed to happiness and well-being due to methylxanthines or pure alkaloids (caffeine, theobromine, and theophylline), biogenic amines, phenylalanine, and N-acylethandamine (Health).

92 The bioactive agents in chocolate are a main contributor to why chocolate is craved; pointing to the theory that it is a psychological need for the health benefits. Caffeine in chocolate is possibly the greatest stimulant of the nervous system, heart, and glands; it causes bronchodilation, enhances diuresis, and suppresses hunger and exhaustion (Health). The amount of caffeine in chocolate is extremely low so the usual stimulation caffeine causes is not present (Health). The effects of caffeine on the body is like an “energy-high” except drawn out in a more pleasurable way, due to the small amount. Phylethylamine is a chemical substance excreted by the brain and is responsible to triggering emotions, producing feelings of happiness and euphoria (Power). Some researchers believe “phenylethylamine causes the brain to release mesolimbic dopamine in the pleasure centers of the brain, which peaks during an orgasm” (Slaughter). This may be why more than 52% of women report to prefer chocolate to sex (Slaughter). Phenylethylamine breaks down before entering the brain completely so the actual amount that reaches the brain is unknown. This may be why 48% of women do not prefer chocolate to sex, because the amount may vary among different women.

A study done in mid-nineties by Doneile Piomelli discovered that anandamide, found in chocolate and produced in the brain, triggers the same cellular receptors as the THC-substance in marijuana, responsible for the drugs stimulating effects (Slaughter). However, chocolate doesn’t have enough anandamine to affect the brain as severely as marijuana, and is usually broken down in the stomach before reaching the bloodstream (Slaughter). Two anandamide-like compounds in chocolate prolong the break down of anandamide and combine with the body’s natural production, causing the period of pleasure to be dependent on the rate at which the body produces it (Slaughter). Chocolate also contains tryptophan, an essential amino acid, which plays a role in the production of serotin, a calming neurotransmitter (Slaughter). Other reasons chocolate may be craved so intensely is for its calming and stimulating effects.

Chocolate contains chemicals that slowly release energy for a longer feeling of content and satisfaction, improving energy levels, sometimes expressed in the pleasure felt while eating a chocolate bar (Health). The comforting quality of chocolate can be partially explained by the sensory organs and pleasing taste (Health). This counters the theory that chocolate is a psychological craving for flavonols, instead, stating that it is craved for its pleasing sensory properties. Because of slow digestion, the rich content of stearic acid in cocoa butter does not increase LDL levels, possibly explaining the neutral effect from chocolate on the cholesterol (Health). Three unsaturated N-cylethanolamines in chocolate, when used in drugs, increase brain sensitivity and create a feeling of euphoria (Health). Chocolate has the agents phenylalanine (an essential amino acid), noradrenaline (used to treat depression) and dopamine (calms nervous system), which may be responsible for craving by intensified senses (Health).

Debra Zellner, PhD psychologist and professor at Shippensburg University in Pennsylvania, theorizes that women indulge themselves on chocolate, during their menstruation period in particular, simply because psychologically it is a “nutritional taboo,” and disproves the theory that craving is a subconscious cry from the body for the health benefits in chocolate (Raunch). She conducted a study on cravings for chocolate, comparing Spanish and American women. She found that the Spanish, who don’t consider chocolate to be a nutritional taboo, crave it less than American women. Debra Waterhouse, dietitian and author of Why Women Need Chocolate, reports that “Chemicals in chocolate affect levels of the body’s mood-affecting chemicals, including serotonin, endorphins, and pheylethylamines, which the body normally releases in response to romance” (Raunch). A study was done in 1994 that tested male and female cravings. They were given milk or white chocolate, cocoa capsules, or placebos. They concluded that chocolate craving can be fully satisfied through energy content and sensory properties such as smell, sweetness, and texture, and can be intensified through bioactive ingredients. Similarly, another study was conducted by randomly giving men and women milk and white chocolate lacking beneficial bioactive agents, cocoa capsules without sensory properties (i.e. texture, aroma, etc), or a placebo. The researchers determined that only milk chocolate satisfied cravings fully, possibly indicating that chocolate craving can be based on aroma, texture, and sweetness (Slaughter). Although these experiments may seem to counter the theory that craving is attributed to the body’s needs, it is not direct evidence, so there is a possibility that both hypotheses are true.

So between all the long, difficult words and scary warnings, is chocolate still safe to eat? The simple answer is yes, in limited amounts. Chocolate has many benefits, with possible cures for cancer, heart disease, and undoubtedly more have yet to be discovered. It is a delicious treat, with a history of being able to sooth the heart in difficult situations ranging from the death of a relative, a bad grade, or breaking up with one’s partner. Chocolate can be responsible for some extra pounds, but with such beneficial qualities, who wouldn’t want to eat an entire chocolate bar everyday? There will always be a danger of ingesting too many calories, but that risk can easily be avoided through cautious and conscious consumption.

93 Working Bibliography Adams, Stuart J. A Critical Look at the Effects of Cocoa on Human Health. 1 Jun. 2006. Nutra-Smart.net. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://nutra-smart.net/cocoa.htm>.

Boal, Catherine. Dark Chocolate Acts as Asprin, Study. 15 Nov. 2006. Nutraingredients.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nutraingredients.com/Research/Dark-chocolate-acts-as-aspirin-study>.

CNN Health.com. Wanted: Women to Eat Chocolate For a Year. 28 Apr. 2008. CNN.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.cnn.com/2008/HEALTH/04/28/chocolate.trial/index.html>.

Cocoa, But not Tea, May Lower Blood Pressure. 9 Apr. 2007. James &Archives, American Medical Association.

2009 < http://pubs.ama-assn.org/media/2007a/0409.dtl>.

Cocoa Flavonols Emerging as Functional Food Ingredients. 26 Jul. 2005. Nutraingredients.com. 26 Jan. 2005 <http://www.nutraingredients.com/Industry/Cocoa-flavonols-emerging-as-functional-food-ingredients>.

Collins, Anne. Women, Hormones & Chocolate. 2007. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.annecollins.com/diet_news/women-chocolate.htm>.

DeNoon, Daniel J. Dark Chocolate is Healthy Chocolate: Dark Chocolate Has Health Benefits Not Seen in Other Varieties. 2003. WebMD. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.webmd.com/diet/news/20030827/dark-chocolate-ishealthy-chocolate>.

Eyre, Charlotte. Chocolate Linked to Weaker Bones. 15 Jan. 2008. Confectionarynews.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.confectionerynews.com/The-Big-Picture/Chocolate-linked-to-weaker-bones>.

Eyre, Charlotte. Health Benefits of Chocolate Questioned. 7 Jan. 2008. Confectionarynews.com 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.confectionerynews.com/Formulation/Health-benefits-of-chocolate-questioned>.

Haynes, Fiona. Chocolate as a Health Food? About.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://lowfatcooking.about.com/od/healthandfitness/a/chochealth.htm>.

Health and Happiness: Does Chocolate Have it All Wrapped Up? 1 Jun. 2001. FSTA. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.foodsciencecentral.com>.

NewsMax.com Wires. New Benefits Found in Chocolate. Reuters. 2007. NewsMax.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://archive.newsmax.com/archives/articles/2007/2/18/181852.shtml>.

Power, Darryl. 4 Sweet Facts About Chocolate. 5 Jun. 2007. Ezine @rticles. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://ezinearticles.com/?4-Sweet-Facts-About-Chocolate&id=593722>.

Rauch, Catherine Ann. “Women’s Craving: Cultural or Chemical?” Chocolate: A Heart-Healthy Confection? 2 Feb. 2000. CNN.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://archives.cnn.com/2000/HEALTH/diet.fitness/02/02/chocolate.wmd/>.

Robinson, Venita. Dark Chocolate Helps Diarrhea. 30 Sept. 2005. Children’s Hospital & Research Center at Oakland. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.eurekalert.org/pub_releases/2005-09/chr-dch092905.php>.

Slaughter, Gwen. Is Chocolate Physiologically or Psychologically Addictive? 7 Jan. 2002. Serendip. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://serendip.brynmawr.edu/bb/neuro/neuro01/web2/Slaughter.html>.

Stibich, Mark. Health Benefits of Chocolate. 24 Jan. 2009. About.com. 27 Jan. 2009 <http://longevity.about.com/od/lifelongnutrition/p/chocolate.htm>.

The Earliest Chocolate Drink of the New World: New Chemical Analysis Take Confirmation Back 500 Years and Reveal that the Impetus of Cacao Cultivation was an Alcoholic Beverage. Penn Museum University of Pennsylvania Museum of Archeology and Anthropology. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.museum.upenn.edu/new/news/fullrelease.php?which=306>.

University of California - Davis. Heart-healthy Compound In Chocolate Identified. ScienceDaily. 29 Dec. 2008. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2006/01/060119231042.htm>.

University of Oxford. Chocolate Is The Most Widely Craved Food, But Is It Really Addictive? 12 Sept. 2007.

ScienceDaily. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2007/09/070911073921.htm>.

University of Oxford. Chocolate, Wine And Tea Improve Brain Performance. ScienceDaily. 29 Dec. 2008. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sciencedaily.com/releases/2008/12/081223123530.htm>.

Vries, Lloyd. Dark Chocolate Could Help Hearts. Emma Ross. 30 Aug. 2004. CBS News. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.cbsnews.com/stories/2004/08/30/health/main639325.shtml>.

WebMD Health News. Dark Chocolate May Lower Blood Pressure: Eating Dark Chocolate May Also Fight Heart Disease and Diabetes. 11 Mar. 2005. WebMD. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.webmd.com/hypertension-highblood-pressure/news/20050311/dark-chocolate-may-lower-blood-pressure>.

Yale-New Haven Nutrition Advisor. Chocolate: Food of the Gods. 2008. Yale-New Haven Hospital. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://www.ynhh.org/online/nutrition/advisor/chocolate.html>.

94 Kevin Charette Craig Butz Research in the Community 09 February 2009 Universal Health Care in the U.S.?

While the U.S. is one of the most powerful countries in the world, it is the only developed country without its whole population covered by health insurance. Throughout the years, the number of uninsured people has progressively increased, currently with 47 million people uninsured. The United States has a grave problem with providing their people with health care, but instead of fixing the problems, all the politicians and lobbyist do is argue and give excuses so that they do not have to change their system. Throughout the last century, many important improvements were made from their original basic and faulty system. However, the improvements that have been made are not enough anymore and the United States must install universal health care before the 47 million turn into 100 million. While there is strong opposition against universal health care from wealthy insurance companies benefiting from the rich insured Americans, the United States needs to modernize and protect its people.

While the United States is currently struggling with installing universal health care health insurance, there have been many improvements to the health care system throughout the last century. A century ago, health care in the United States was horrible due to medical school’s lenient curriculum around the country. Joseph Califano, a former U.S. secretary of health, states that "at the end of the [19th] century and into the early years of the 20th century, American medicine was crowded with charlatans and hustlers." (Califano 19). During this era, the medical schools were letting everybody by, there were no standards and it was havoc in all the United States. However, in 1910, Abraham Flexner with the help of other influential people convinced Congress to shut down many medical schools that had these terrible systems in place. This was the start of many more improvements relating to health care. Another addition was the Food and Drug Administration (FDA), which is an agency designed to test medication and see if they are safe for American citizens. This organization helped the people of America greatly throughout the years, and prevented many diseases that other countries experienced. For example, in Britain "thousands of children were born deformed as a result of mothers taking thalidomide," (Califano 19) which is a sedative drug, and because the FDA had tested the side effects of this medication, pregnant mothers knew not to take thalidomide. Due to the intensive testing of drugs, millions of Americans were saved from diseases that hit other countries.

Health care did not substantially improve until World War II, when the United States’ government made many investments to improve their research and their training for medics. The findings that the researchers found all helped the United States’ hospitals combat disease, which saved millions of people from dying. During this time, “most large corporations started including health insurance coverage as part of their basic wage and benefit package, and the government built half a million hospital beds” (Califano 21). While this benefit was very helpful to the adults who were still working, Congress had to pass Medicare and Medicaid, which were health care services for the poor and elderly. Ever since these major adjustments to the health care system, Congress has been trying to make it easier for the unemployed and children to get insurance. For example in 1960, “Congress passed Medicare to provide physician and hospital care for all citizens 65 and older and Medicaid to provide such care to the poor and nursing home care to the elderly who need it" (Califano 21). These new organization helped increase the number of people insured. To help the children who were born in a low-income family, Congress created a program to provide them health insurance and in 1996, a year before Congress created this program, Congress passed the KassebaumKennedy law, which made it easier for American citizens to get insurance during the period of wait between jobs and the unemployed. All these improvements were beneficial for most Americans; however, there are 47 million who still need insurance.

While there have been improvements to the health system in the United States, it is still in great need of universal health care. One reason for the United States to provide universal health care to the citizens is so that the 47 million people who are suffering from lack of insurance are treated for the illnesses that they refuse to go to the doctor for because of the cost. A common phrase that these people say is “I would have gotten care earlier if I had had health insurance” (Pear 42). The ill that are uninsured purposely get sicker so that they do not have to pay for the ridiculous prices that the hospitals ask for. And while the government of the United States knows about this problem, instead of considering universal health care, which will save most of these people, all they do is say it costs too much.

The excuse of universal health insurance being too expensive is a misconception that most political figures try to convince their citizens to believe. In fact, universal healthcare insurance is actually cheaper than the current healthcare system in the United States. Canada is one of the many developed countries that has universal health care and what not many people know is that the health care expenditures that they have to spend is substantially lower

95 than the United States’. Statistics from 1991 show that while Canada is spending 10 % of its GDP, the United States is spending 13.4 % (Kangas 25). Since then, the figures have been getting worse and worse for the Untied States, but the fact that the country with 100 % of its population covered with public health care spends less money on health care than the one who covers 40 % of its population, shows that the politicians have been lying to their people. Not only did the politicians lie to their people, but they also refused an option that would have saved money for the United States!

Many people who are hesitant or completely against universal health care also believe that this might ruin the quality of the health care system we have in the United States. First of all, while there are many famous and world known doctors in the United States, many statistics show that the United States has actually been doing very poorly compared to the other developed countries relating to health care. As Fullwood, a former City Councilman in Jacksonville, clearly states that “the U.S. ranks poorly relative to other industrialized nation in health care despite having the best trained health care providers and best medical infrastructure of any industrialized nation" (Fullwood 3). Some statistics from 1991 show how poorly the United States. For example, life expectancy in the United States was 71.6 years old for men while Canada’s men had a life expectancy of 73.4 years (Kangas 25). In all other categories like infant mortality rate, premature death, the United States is ranked worst. Therefore, by changing the quality of the current health care system, the politicians would be doing the Americans a favor.

America, instead of keeping their system, should try to improve their health care system and make it like Canada’s health care system. Canada has universal health care, which means that the citizens pay for the health care system through taxes and instead of having thousands of different insurance companies there is just one: the government. Many surveys have been taken by Americans asking them if they would mind if their taxes are increased for the benefit of having a better health care system and "59 percent of respondents agreed that the government could do a better job than the private sector in ensuring that more Americans have access to quality care…[and that the] people would be willing to spend more tax dollars to improve health coverage" (Quadagno 207). The Americans are prepared for the big change in health care systems, so why isn’t the government?

The politicians argue that the Canada’s healthcare system has many drawbacks that can ruin United States’ credibility. For example, in Canada, although every one is covered, it takes several months for them to see a specialist. "In Ontario, pregnant women are being sent to Detroit because no obstetricians are available. Specialists of all kinds are in short supply. Patients have to wait eight weeks for an MRI, ten weeks for referral to a specialist, and four months for heart bypass surgery" (Hurd 163). This wait is actually due to the fact that “cost-crunching bureaucrats had reduced the size of medical school classes, shuttered hospitals, and capped physician fees.”

(Gratzer). However, because America is one of the richest countries in the world and that, it is already spending a lot of money currently on 40 % public health insurance, it is possible that these burdens that affect Canada will not apply to United States. Many politicians criticize this system because of this long wait for surgery and to schedule appointments with specialized doctors, however this wait is a small price to pay for the 47 million uninsured Americans, because at least with this system, the uninsured people have just as much chance as those who are capable of buying private insurance. It is certain that the healthcare system in Canada is not perfect; however, its health care system is far better than the one in the United States. The United States has much to learn from Canada.

United States has one of the worst public health care systems in the world. It is the only country in the world covering less than 50 % of its people (Kangas 25). While the Americans are ready for the drastic change in health care systems, the government, instead of trying to please its people, is delaying this transition as best as it can by trying to convince the people with lies.

Bibliography Califano, Joseph. “America has the best health care system in the world.” Torr 17-23 Fullwood, Reggie. "Universal Healthcare." The Jacksonville Free Press. 18 Sep. 2008. Ethnic NewsWatch (ENW). ProQuest. Bay School Library. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.proquest.com/>.

Gratzer, David. "The Ugly Truth About Canadian Health Care." City Journal (2007). 21 Feb. 2009 <http://www.city-journal.org/html/17_3_canadian_healthcare.html>.

Hurd, Michael. “Canada’s system is not a model for health care reform.” Torr 162-167 Kangas, Steve. “America does not have the best health care system in the world.” Torr 24-30 Pear, Robert. “The Uninsured are a serious problem.” Torr 40-46 Quadagno, Jill. One Nation Unsured: Why the U.S. has no national heath insurance. New York, NY: Oxford University Press, 2005.

Torr, James. Ed. Health Care: Opposing Viewpoints. San Diego, CA: Greenhaven Press, 2000.

96 Michelle Chesley Craig Butz Research in the Community – E Block February 20, 2009 How Soon Will They Ban Goodnight Moon?

People have banned books because of the author's opinion, racial and religious slurs, and for showing a side of life which they do not want to think about, but those are not sufficient grounds for censoring books. Even children’s books such as Dr. Seuss’ The Lorax and the Lion, the Witch, and the Wardrobe by C.S. Lewis, and true stories like Anne Frank: the Diary of a Young Girl have been banned in some places (Elkins). While some books, such as those describing how to create an atomic bomb, should probably be kept from the public, most of the challenged books are harmless, or even beneficial in an academic environment.

Books are being banned everywhere, and often with little cause. Books have been challenged for inappropriate language, racial slurs, anti-Semitism, profanity, and for promoting Satanism (Karolides, Bald, and Sova). While many books do include some of these aspects, oftentimes it is simply because it is necessary in order to accurately represent the setting in the book. Although these elements may be present, the overall message of the novel is usually stronger and overrides its negative qualities.

Animal Farm and Black Boy have both been challenged on the basis that their authors are Communist (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 16, 23); however, neither book speaks in favor of Communism. Animal Farm by George Orwell is the story of a farm which is taken over by its animals. With the humans gone, the pigs slowly take over, until they become essentially human, and the farm returns to its original dictatorial state. The book is an allegory to the Russian Revolution. It speaks against Communism, explaining that the resolution to the Russian Revolution brought Russia back to where it started.

Black Boy by Richard Wright is the autobiography of an African American boy growing up in the South of the United States, when slavery was still legal. It was originally going to be published in two parts—Wright’s experience in the South and escape to Chicago in one, and his experience in Chicago in the other. The second half was never published, so as not to offend the Communists, who were the United States’ allies at that point (Karolides, Sova, and Bald 23). However, the part that was published does not discuss Communism at all, and no one would know that Wright is a Communist by reading it. Reading a book is not the same as talking to an author, and a book should not be challenged because someone dislikes its author.

Black Boy, as well as Oliver Twist and To Kill a Mockingbird, have also been challenged because of racial and religious slurs. When Richard Wright was growing up, he was taught to dislike Jews. In one of the places he lived, he would pass by a convenience store owned by a Jew, and he and his friends would call out insults. People have objected to his book because of these passages. Similarly, in Oliver Twist by Charles Dickens, the protagonist, Oliver, joins a group of thieves in London. The thieves' leader is a Jew named Fagin, whom Dickens refers to throughout the novel as “the Jew”. His description of Fagin also resembles Satan, with "red hair and beard...a hooked nose, [and] shuffling gait" (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 271). Finally, To Kill a Mockingbird tells the story of a girl whose lawyer father, Atticus, is defending Tom, a black man accused of rape. Though Atticus proves Tom’s innocence, the jury convicts him anyway because of his race.

When people object to the way someone is represented, like Fagin in Oliver Twist and Tom in To Kill a Mockingbird, they are jumping to the conclusion that the author did so in an attempt to insult the character's race or religion. However, that is usually not the case. More often, the author is simply trying to accurately represent the era of the novel. That can involve some unpleasant things that were common then but are now considered inappropriate, like racist and anti-Semitic comments.

Finally, books like Brave New World and Harry Potter have been censored because they show the bad side of the world, which people don't want to have to face. Brave New World by Aldous Huxley takes place in a futuristic society where technology has taken away pain and old age. However, people have objected to it, because it also shows the flaws in such a world (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 242). Books like Brave New World are necessary to avoid making the mistakes made by the characters. The book helps people understand that without hardships in life, people won’t appreciate their blessings.

In Brave New World they also use a drug called soma to relieve pain, or, in larger doses, to “go on vacation”. People who object to the book have claimed that it encourages drug use (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 242).

This is not the case, as the book shows how the drugs are a bad idea in that society. The lower classes work hard, but the only reason is that they get soma at the end of the day. One of the characters in the book tries to explain to them, and thus to the reader, that they should not let themselves be bribed by the drug everyday. The book speaks against drug use, even though it is a big part of the book’s society.

97 Similarly, Harry Potter by J.K. Rowling, which tells the story of a young wizard who attends Hogwarts School of Witchcraft and Wizardry to learn magic, has been banned by many churches. They have preached against Harry Potter because it will supposedly “encourage witchcraft” (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 242). However, people will not start practicing magic just because a fictional character does. Churches speak against any books with “good” magic in them (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 241), but the magic in the books is very different from the magic they want to discourage people from working.

Nevertheless, Harry Potter and the Sorcerer's Stone is one of the most banned books in the United States, as are all of its sequels. It was the most challenged book from 2000-2006 (Kennedy. "Harry Potter"); the second most challenged book in 2003; and from 1999-2003, there were 125 written requests for its censorship (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 241). The Harry Potter books have been objected to because they "promote the occult, Satanism and antifamily themes and encourage witchcraft and drug use" (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 242).

The first legal challenge against Harry Potter was in 2002. A student and her parents sued her school board, because the mother did not want students to have access to Harry Potter after she heard an anti-Harry Potter sermon at her church. She said that "the books show 'that there are "good witches" and "good magic" and that they teach "parents/teachers/rules are stupid and something to be ignored"'" (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 241). The case was dismissed in 2003, but it was only the beginning of the challenges against J.K. Rowling's books.

Harry Potter has even been the subject of book burnings. In the past, books have been burned because it was an effective way to stop people from reading them. When books were handmade, there were few copies, and burning a few could prevent most people from reading the book. Now, with printing, burning books does little to stop people from reading them, but it does make a statement and people still practice the custom. At a church group burning of Harry Potter, the pastor said that "'stories like Harry Potter that glorify wizardry and sorcery will lead people to accept and believe in Satan'" (Kennedy. "They're Burning Books Again"). Far too many people share those beliefs and wish to ban Harry Potter and many other books like it.

Fortunately, others try to fight these practices, speaking against the censorship of books like Harry Potter.

J.K. Rowling said that she thinks that trying to stop schoolchildren from reading books like Harry Potter is "shortsighted in the sense that it is very hard to portray goodness without showing what the reverse is and showing how brave it is to resist that" (Karolides, Bald, and Sova 243). According to Kimberly Keith, a Christian mom, "The Harry Potter books have all the elements of a classic fairy tale, but they speak to modern children in a way that classic fairy tales probably do not anymore". Similarly, Brave New World shows what some people, at first, think is the perfect world, but then it proceeds to show that no world is perfect. In a world with no hardship or challenges, no one can truly appreciate the good and easy things, without something bad to compare them to.

People are banning books for small, insignificant reasons. They say it is to protect everyone, especially children, from getting the wrong ideas, but where do we draw the line? Censorship has become more common, and the books being censored have become increasingly harmless and even beneficial to kids. As Judy Blume said, at the rate we are going, the next banned book is going to be Goodnight Moon, “for encouraging children to communicate with furniture. And we all know where that can lead, don't we?”.

98 Works Cited Blume, Judy. “Is Harry Potter Evil?”. New York Times. 22 Oct. 1999. 22 Jan. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/books/00/07/23/specials/ rowling-blume.html?_r=2&scp=1&sq=is%20harry%20potter%20evil&st=cse> Dickens, Charles. Oliver Twist. London: Penguin Books, 2003.

Elkins, Janet Yanosko. “Forbidden Library: Banned and Challenged Books.” 6 Mar. 2008. 19 Feb. 2009. <http://title.forbiddenlibrary.com/> Huxley, Aldous. Brave New World. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1946.

Karolides, Nicholas J, Margaret Bald, and Dawn B. Sova. 120 Banned Books: Censorship Histories of World Literature. New York: Checkmark Books, 2005.

Keith, Kimberly L. “Is Harry Potter Harmful to Children?” about.com. 2009. The New York Times Company. 31 Jan. 2009. <http://childparenting.about.com/cs/childrensbooks1/a/harrypotter.htm> ---. “Harry Potter: The Censorship Battles.” about.com. 2009. The New York Times Company. 31 Jan. 2009. <http://childrensbooks.about.com/cs/censorship/a/banharry.htm> ---. “They’re Burning Books Again.” about.com. 2009. The New York Times Company. 31 Jan. 2009. <http://childrensbooks.about.com/cs/censorship/a/burningbooks.htm> Lee, Harper. To Kill a Mockingbird. New York: Warner Books, Inc., 1960.

Lombardi, Esther. “Brave New World.” about.com. 2009. The New York Company. 11 Feb. 2009. <http://classiclit.about.com/od/bravenewworld/fr/aafpr_bravenew.htm> Orwell, George. Animal Farm. Orlando: Signet Classics, 1977.

Rowling, J.K. Harry Potter. New York: Scholastic, 1997.

Wright, Richard. Black Boy. New York: HarperCollins Publishers, 1945.

99 Virginia Cortland Craig Butz Feb 10, 2009 Research in the Community Fill Me Up With Vegi-Oil! The staff of Muni has recently developed plans in response to community concern about air pollution. In addition to reducing carbon emissions, the new plans are intended to benefit the community by improving service, while decreasing fuel and maintenance costs. These plans, called the Alternative Fuel Pilot Program, known as the AFPP, will replace all the diesel and old buses from the 1980’s. New buses will improve air quality and decrease costs. Some interested parties, including the mayor, have suggested that Muni should provide free transportation.

The resulting increase in Muni use and decreased private auto use would further reduce carbon emissions. The city government, however, would have to make up for the lost revenue.

As of March 2nd of 2004, Proposition One passed by two-thirds of San Francisco. It gives Muni the right “to replace [the polluting diesel buses] with clean buses that meet the same anti-pollution standards as other city vehicles” (Ditching Dirty Diesel). Although, it seems that Muni has not held up their agreement because criticism from “health advocates say [that] polluting buses are breaking the law” because Muni has not removed the oldest, most polluting buses that still run today. The reason for this criticism was because the proposition “mandated that all 144 diesel buses made before 1991 [were to] be retired.” (Roller). Over the next few years, Muni would phase out the old remaining buses, thus has not happened. Some of the older buses can not be retrofitted with any of the modern technology, and will lead to toxic pollution of human’s lungs from the exhaust. San Franciscans would prefer to switch over to electric buses over the diesel buses for one main reason: less air pollution (Roller).

“Through the efforts of the SF Department of the Environment, virtually all of San Francisco's diesel fleet will be running on B20 biodiesel by year's end…” (Smith 2007). Although this was not plan was not met by the end of the year in 2007, at the resent conference held at Moscone Center in San Francisco, “The City of [San Francisco] was honored appropriately and a few members of its biodiesel community [as well]” were acknowledged for efforts in finding a way to reduce pollution in the air (Smith 2009).

The goals of the Alternative Fuel Pilot Program are to get rid of the old diesel bus that have been polluting our city for a long time and to replace them with three new types of buses: hybrid buses, compressed natural gas buses, and exhaust after-treatment buses, also known as PM filtered buses. Utilizing these new buses will improve the atmosphere in San Francisco.

Why should we get rid of diesel buses? Diesel buses generate more power, are easier to steer and require less maintenance, than buses with wires. On the other hand, according to Jim Ball, author of Our Future Travel, “We need to reduce diesel bus use in the larger cities as we increase their use in the smaller cities and rural areas, because diesel buses are a strong contributor to air pollution” (Ball 55). We need to protect our environment with less global warming, so there is some benefit to electric buses which do not produce any air pollution, but produce much more carbon-dioxide. This is where biodiesel steps in. Biodiesel is a good way to replace diesel made from petroleum.

Although, it will not completely solve the problems, at least it is a step towards making the world less polluted (Ball, Jim). “Biodiesel, a non-petroleum-based diesel fuel made from vegetable oil or animal fat, [and] is now used in all of Muni’s non-electric coaches [as of 2007]” (Picture 10). Muni gets vegetable oil from the restaurants in the city and then mixes it with the non-petroleum based diesel. San Francisco is “one of the first cities in the country to offer biodiesel at a retail pump” (Picture 10).

To improve our air quality and to save energy, the Zero Emission Plan for 2020 states that Muni’s vehicles will be fueled with biodiesel. In the meantime, “Hybrid buses will replace Muni’s oldest diesel buses, some dating back to 1988. The hybrid buses emit 95 percent less particle matter [than regular diesel]” (Muni Hybrid Buses). By the year 2012, the goal is to reduce the greenhouse gas emission by 30%, and by 2020, to become 100% emissionfree. These new hybrid buses use a small diesel engine and a design similar to the Toyota Prius. Overall, use of these new hybrids will decrease fuel use and emissions. In addition, because they have fewer moving parts in the structure of the engine, there will be less wear and tear on the bus as a whole, which will reduce maintenance costs (Muni Hybrid Buses).

The Alternative Fuel Pilot Program, “was designed to provide recommendations regarding future Muni motor coach procurements.” (Alternative Fuel Pilot Program). Part of the plan is to “use [the] cleanest buses in [the most] polluted neighborhoods” (Clean Air Initiatives). Within this new program, six categories – emission, performance, operation, maintenance, cost, and safety – were used to compare the new buses to the old diesel buses; the buses that were tested were the ones listed above. In the first category, emissions, the CNG buses had the lowest emissions, but emitted the most CO2. In the second category, performance, the new hybrid buses were able to

100 accelerate the fastest. In the third, operations, there were mixed opinions. The “operators of the AFPP buses preferred the PM filter buses” while the “Hybrids were said to be smoother while performing just as well” (Alternative Fuel Pilot Program). The CNG and the hybrid buses have better braking, but the CNG buses do not do as well on hills or hold as many passengers. “Riders want dependable service first and foremost, but would prefer to ride clean-fuel buses whenever possible” (Alternative Fuel Pilot Program). In the forth category, maintenance, the hybrids are the best bet because they will reduce operating expenses (Muni Hybrid Buses). The fifth category, cost, on the other hand will be the lowest for the PM filter buses, and fuel per mile for the CNG buses is more costly.

“Muni conventional diesel buses with PM filters cost approximately $330,000 to purchase, while hybrids currently cost about $120,000-170,000 more per bus than a Muni diesel bus with PM trap. CNG buses cost approximately $45,000-60,000 more per bus than Muni diesel buses with PM traps” (Alternative Fuel Pilot Program). Finally, the sixth category, safety, seems to be similar to the older buses. “The preliminary results of the AFPP indicate that Muni should continue its testing program” (Alternative Fuel Pilot Program).

Carbon emissions are thought to be a major contributor to global warming. One plan to reduce carbon emissions has been to encourage Muni use by providing free fares, to reduce carbon emissions from privately driven autos. Therefore, it would be beneficial to all of us to make Muni free, but the government would have to make up for the lost revenue. San Francisco’s mayor, Gavin Newsom, talks about having free fares on Muni to try to get more people ride the buses to reduce carbon emissions. Studies have concluded that “the Metropolitan Transit Authority (MTA) only collects 18 percent of its funds through fares while spending the same amount on fare collection” (Lauterborn). A downside of making Muni free is that the riders on the buses would increase, and there would have to be an increase of buses and on a more frequent timely schedule. Another downside, fares would have replaced in order to pay for necessary maintenance on the buses. An example of this has been explored on such days called “Spare the Air” day. Large masses of people take advantage to this and board the buses. Overall, it would be beneficial if Muni could become free and the government could support it because it would decrease the air pollution significantly (Spare the Air).

Bibliography “Alternative Fuel Pilot Program.” Municipal Transportation Agency. May. 2002. 28 Jan. 2009. <http://www.sfmta.com/cms/rclean/altpilot.htm>.

Ball, Jim. Our Future Travel. Canada: Trafford Publishing, 2005.

“Clean Air Initiatives.” Municipal Transportation Agency. 21 May. 2002. 27. Jan. 2009. <http://www.sfmta.com/cms/rclean/airindx.htm>.

“Ditching Dirty Diesel.” Rampasthma. 29 Jan. 2009. 29 Jan. 2009. <http://74.125.95.132/search?q=cache:Jmk3vpO07iYJ:www.rampasthma.org/Local%2520diesel%2520stor ies.doc+where+does+muni+get+their+diesel+(san+francisco)&hl=en&ct=clnk&cd=8&gl=us>.

Gathright, Alan. “All Diesel Is Dirty, Critics Charge But transit agencies resisting natural gas.” SF Chronicle. 15 Jan. 2001. 3 Feb. 2009. <http://www.mindfully.org/Air/Diesel-Is-Dirty.htm>.

Lauterborn, Peter et al. “Keep Newsom’s Free Muni Discussion Moving.” Beyond Chron. 1 May. 2007. 5 Feb. 2009. <http://www.beyondchron.org/news/index.php?itemid=4462>.http://www.treehugger.com/files/2007/12/sa n_francisco_converts.php “Muni Hybrid Buses.” Municipal Transportation Agency. 23 Jan. 2009. 28 Jan. 2009. < http://www.sfmta.com/cms/mfleet/hybrids.htm>.

Picture, Bill. “Booming Biodiesel Industry to Hold Conference in S.F.” Bay Crossings. 10 (2009): 10-11.

Roller, William. “Muni's Smoggy Situation Lays Down Smoke Screen.” Xpress. 24 Feb. 2005. 6 Feb. 2009. <http://xpress.sfsu.edu/archives/news/002830.html>.

“Spare the Air on August 29.” Trans Bay Blog. 2009. 5 Feb. 2009. <http://transbayblog.com/2007/08/28/sparethe-air-on-august-29/>.

Smith, E. "Doc". “San Francisco and the Biodiesel Revolution” Beyond Chron. 21 Nov. 2007. . 29 Jan. 2009. <http://www.beyondchron.org/news/index.php?itemid=5132>.

“The 2009 National Biodiesel Board Conference in San Francisco.” Beyond Chron. 5 Feb. 2009. 5 Feb. 2009. <http://www.beyondchron.org/news/index.php?itemid=6574>.

101 Andreas DiGiorgio-Haag Research in the Community Rough Draft February 6, 2009 Professional Gaming: Sport or Lazy Excuse for a Job? Professional gaming is a very controversial topic in America and around the world; people view it differently in relation to sports, and in its respectability as a sport. Professional gaming’s credibility is debated on based on the fact that it does require a huge amount of physical skill and muscle memory but negatively looked upon due to the fact that it is not as physical as other mainstream sports.

Professional gaming is quickly becoming a very large industry. People around the world gather to watch the pro’s face off, “Indeed, competitive video-game leagues have contracts with ESPN, MTV, and DirecTV, draw as many as 80,000 paying fans to arena events, and boast dozens of formal teams that pay salaries of up to $90,000 a year, putting video-gaming on the cusp of mainstream competition” (Gloria). Despite the fact that many people are not even aware that it exists or has this rising potential. Starcraft is much more well known in some other countries such as Korea, “Its borderline mainstream, just about everyone has heard of starcraft and quite a few know the superstar players, although not much beyond that. Progaming got alot more popular and acceptable after big name companies like SKT1, KTF, CJ, and some others started sponsoring teams. But there’s still a big separation between the general public who knows about SC and accepts it as part of their culture and the hardcore gamers/fans that follow it religiously” (Idra). Starcraft and other professional games are very comparable to sports, “Equating it to sports in the west is a pretty good comparison. Almost every guy between the ages of 10 and 30 plays casually to some extent, the equivalent of a pickup game of baseball or something, a decent fraction of those will play somewhat competively, entering small amateur tournaments or playing courage tournament (where you get your semi-pro license), the equivalent of playing high school sports maybe. An even smaller fraction of those will pass courage or win some tournaments, the equivalent of playing college sports, and finally a tiny fraction, 250 people or so right now, actually make it to the pros” (Idra). Starcrafts difference with sports is in the amount of actual physical playing, “In my opinion there isn't much of a difference. People will scoff at that just because it strikes them as 'wrong' that people running around around a field plowing into each other could be equivalent to sitting at a computer, but both require a very complex set of physical skills that take thousands of hours to learn as well as an understanding of the strategies and tactics that make up the game. Obviously the skill sets are different, but it takes a different set of skills to play tennis as opposed to football. For those who question the physical abilities necessary to play esports, the average starcraft progamer executes around 350 to 400 actions per minute. Not the same as tackling someone, but still quite demanding” (Idra). With players having to go this fast in order to be top quality it takes just as much physical skill as something like football, but it doesn’t have the same limits that other sports have like body size. Gaming also appeals to the side of American competitiveness, “Gamers in America have a different place in society than in Korea, for example. You don't go hang out with your friends and play Starcraft like you would playing a sport or watching TV, which is absurd I know. You could talk about how American's are a challenge based culture and this is why they enjoy things like Baseball and Football prior to things like Starcraft or watching any video games” (Team Liquid). The fact that starcraft and professional gaming in general does appeal to the competitive nature of the American people. The other factor is that progaming fits the key parameters set up to describe a “sport”, “It was Bernard Suits’ playful dialogue The Grasshopper, however, that laid a serious foundation for sport metaphysics. Suits defined a game as the “voluntary attempt to overcome unnecessary obstacles,” and noted as its necessary components (1) a “precursory goal” also known as the “object of the game”; (2) constitutive rules which forbid the most efficient means toward the goal; and (3) a “cursory attitude,” that is the players’ conscious acceptance of rules which makes the game possible. In the game of basketball, then, the precursory goal is to score points by putting the ball into the basket, the constitutive rules prohibit such useful means as ladders and running without bouncing the ball, and the cursory attitude is what makes the players see this activity as a game” (Wikiversity). Progaming fits every one of these rules, also this text was written before pro-gaming arose so it could not have somehow been tailored to be written in favor of progaming.

Professional gaming however, does have a strong base of opposition particularly in America. The people who oppose professional gaming are generally hardcore sports fans, who see the benefit of athletics as predominately physical. There is also a group of opposition in non gamers just because they haven’t grown up with the concept of gaming as one that is legitimate, but this group is more easily persuadable. Many parents of older generations have an even harder time accepting this, “I get the impression that the older generation doesn't approve of it very much though, from all the stories of parents beating their children who intend to become progamers” (Idra). Parents don’t always accept the possibility of it being a legitimate job because it’s just not something that

102 there generation can accept as easily. The argument that my friend Shohei made was that, “It is just not a physical skill, your not there sweating and fighting with primal instinct against your opponent, physical competition is something that humans have been made to do since the dawn of time, wall this pro-gaming does not fit it”, upon asking him if he were to consider chess a sport he answered, “Yes chess is a sport but it Is different, in gaming there is a terminal between you and your opponent, its you them and the game, not you and them” (Shohei). The point I believe that Shohei was trying to make was that it goes beyond the basic straightforward strategy of chess and complicates things with the game, it is another level of depth. The other person who I interviewed speculated that, “because it has not been around it lacks the credibility, people have bias against gamers seeing them as the losers who sit in there mothers basements all day long, as it may be legitimate as a sport in theory, it just does not have the momentum or support that it needs to take over in America, America is a place were some things, change rather slowly, we are still arguing about gun laws set down 300 years ago, and the fact that women are equal to men” (George). The fact that it is so recent can serve as a viable answer as to why gaming is not reasonable as a sport, the point is that legitimacy does not always come from reason but from passion, and many people don’t understand the logical passion felt by a small amount of society that follows professional gaming, but identifies with the more common anti-gaming standpoint.

Gaming however is an activity which has many levels, in fact often more levels then any sport. Gaming combines the physical aspects that sports have, “For those who question the physical abilities necessary to play esports, the average starcraft progamer executes around 350 to 400 actions per minute. Not the same as tackling someone, but still quite demanding” (Idra). As I said before this creates a level of physical depth, it’s necessary for people to train and practice hard in order to achieve top notch skill. Its also important for people to have a good sense of strategy, in essence it’s a combination of the best of both worlds.

In my opinion professional gaming is a completely legitimate form of sport. It takes a ton of skill for one to be a professional gamer. It is a lot of fun as well and should be recognized as a sport. It also requires a ton of strategy and tactical genius, this is something that is not relevant in almost any other sport except chess which has some shortcomings in the physical area. Professional gaming has a very nice community and is much more user friendly then sports. In addition almost anyone can play games and play them well with practice and the right mindset, were as in sports it’s almost always luck of the draw.

Professional gaming is something that should be more recognized among the world, people need to better understand something that despite being a more recent phenomenon, people need to keep up with the pace of the world and try to understand professional gaming for what it really is a world sport.

Works Cited 3Lions. Im interview Feb 3. 09.

“An inside look at the rivalries, big money, and dirty business of competitive video gaming.” Penguin.com. 19 Jun. 2008. 25 Jan. 2009. <http://us.penguingroup.com/nf/Book/BookDisplay/0,,9780670018963,00.html> “Championship Gaming Series Appoints Commissioner.” 3 April. 2007 Business Wire. 25 Jan. 2009. <http://www.allbusiness.com/services/business-services/4301997-1.html> Goodale, Gloria. “Video-gamming strives for respect. Is it a sport?” CS Monitor. 4 Aug. 2008. 25 Jan. 2009. <http://features.csmonitor.com/innovation/2008/08/04/video-gaming-strives-for-respect-is-it-a-sport/> Hruby, Patrick. “So you wanna be a professional video game player?” 11 Oct. 2007. ESPN. 2 Feb. 2009. <http://sports.espn.go.com/espn/page2/story?page=hruby/071008> Idra. Feb 8. 09.

“Philosophy of Sports.” Wikiversity. 2 Feb. 2009. <http://en.wikiversity.org/wiki/Philosophy_of_Sport> Saltzman, Marc. “Professional Gaming: are we there yet?” Yahoo Tech Guide. 25 Jan. 2009<http://ca.tech.yahoo.com/experts/marcsaltzman/article/617> “Sophomore project” Team Liquid 2 Feb. 2009. <http://www.teamliquid.net/forum/viewmessage.php?topic_id=86812 >

103 Cindy Dzib February 6, 2009 Craig Butz Research in the Community Keeping Murals Fresh In museums, drawings and paintings are framed. Sculptures are under spotlights and some even have protective glass over them. There might be a security guard or two on the look out to make sure no one touches the art. Not only are there guards but in most museums there are security cameras as well. So much is done to protect paintings and drawings and it makes it easy to keep them existent, protecting public art such as murals is much difficult to keep extant in the streets.

Current issues are the defacement of murals by graffiti, a form of communication considered ‘vandalism’ (Broderson“Graffiti”); graffiti on a wall destroys what the mural is trying to portray. Murals have evolved to act as a medium of communication where different messages are conveyed. The only way the medium of communication works is if the artwork is viewable. Also, artists choose specific locations and themes for their murals but in places like Oregon, change in regulations restrict artists from conveying their message in a way they would like. When a muralist paints an image based on what he would like to convey in the art, not only does he have to be aware of the public viewers but he also has to be aware of the different obstacles that can interfere with the creativity of the artwork such as graffiti and city laws.

Murals are a form of public art that have been very crucial to many communities in cities like San Francisco, Los Angeles and Portland and have been used for centuries to communicate ideas to one another within the cities. Its roots travel all the way back to 1917 during the Mexican Revolution, when the Mexicans used wall painting to teach the illiterate. As the years passed, murals were used for different purposes, soon it turned into a way of protesting. In Mexico, Murals portrayed peasants attempting to liberate themselves from the ruling class (Cockcroft and Sanchez 6). Murals did not become popular in the U.S. until after Mexico started exporting acrylic paint. Acrylic paint contains chemicals, which when dry, harden like plastic; it’s perfect for painting outside because it’s durable. Artists in the U.S were then able to paint murals outdoors with this new acrylic paint (Rose). Chicanos, also known as Mexican-Americans, reintroduced murals during the Civil Rights Movement in the 1960’s. These murals were not well funded by the government; rather the murals were provided by the people and “were located in the ghettos of the inner cities, where the oppressed lived” (Cockcroft and Sanchez 9). As the movement began, murals started to appear everywhere: on market walls, buildings, restaurants and abandoned walls (Drescher “SF Murals”). Groups like Jamestown formed and created political murals about the Vietnam War, police harassment of the youth, and Native Americans. Another organization involved in the mural movement was Precita Eyes in San Francisco that in 1984 created 28 murals related to the Mission District culture. To the communities these murals “served as an inspiration for struggle, a way of reclaiming a cultural heritage, as a means of developing-self pride” (Cockcroft and Sanchez 9). Murals are vital to communities and because they have such a historical meaning to them, murals need to be well protected. Muralists try so hard to do what they can in order to keep murals clear from graffiti by creating a bond between the art and the people of the neighborhood.

Muralists have a similar goal in mind but each of them has their way of conveying the message to the audience in different locations. Muralists aim to transform a wall “to a message board for the internal and external community to see, read and learn from” (Delgado and Barton “Murals in Latino Communities”). Peter Quezada is a muralist in East L.A. who likes to refer to his art as a substitute for graffiti or “graffiti deterrent” (Kim 7). Quezada is aware of the graffiti writing that occurs in the area of East L.A. and purposefully selects sites that are frequently hit by taggers and graffiti writers. Not only is Quezada’s purpose to convey his message but as well as to decrease graffiti in attempt to create a better atmosphere within the violent neighborhood. Quezada grew up in the streets of East L.A. and would only paint his murals if he were familiar with the stories behind the abandoned walls. When working on a project, he “designs murals to appeal to the youth as well as to discourage them from participating in behavior he perceives as destructive” without being offensive (Kim). By inviting them to contribute to the mural painting, not only does it decrease the destruction of his mural but it also it calls for the involvement of youth which is a useful strategy.

Different artists like to paint their murals in different places; Quezada aims to connect with the youth involved in tagging and gangs. Other muralists believe the “appropriate locations usually mean highly visible ones"(Dreshcer “Street Subversion” 242). It is vital for the community to relate with the mural. “Communities don’t just see it as just artistic expression; it’s more like a description of the community” (Delgado and Barton “Murals in Latino Communities”). East L.A. was an area known for violence, gangs, vandalism and burglary but after 200 murals were painted, it changed the neighborhood for the better and the problems decreased (“The Mural Message”). Gang members didn’t graffiti the walls as much. The art brought life back to the empty dangerous streets

104 and filled them with color. Having highly visible murals causes the neighborhood to accept the art as part of the community and to create a connection with the art.

The more visible the mural is the better but in some cities like Portland, Oregon, size is a constraint that conflicts with the artist’s creativity. In San Francisco, murals have no size limit therefore muralists are able to create their piece just the way they like. In November of 2004, the city council of Portland “outlawed community murals as well in effort to censor large painted wall advertisements,” (Feldman “Outlaw Murals”). To the artist’s disadvantage, the law had categorized murals as billboards restricting them to be any bigger than 200 square feet (“First Amendment”). Many people from the community were devastated to hear about the new regulation. It affected many starting mural projects; muralists could no longer continue their plan. Laura Feldman gives her opinion about the situation and describes that “Murals are by definition architectural. A mural becomes part of the building's scope and design, and is as unique as the volunteers who painted it, the building which they paint it on, the street which the building stand, the neighborhood in which the street lies, in the city thus created.”

To Feldman, murals are essential to her community and she describes she feels the government is violating her freedom of speech. She and other community members are upset murals are categorized the same as billboards.

Philadelphia is another city who disagrees that murals should fall under the same category as signs/billboards. In Philadelphia, community members are against billboards that advertise alcohol and tobacco because they believe it’s inappropriate and it sends out a negative message. Although they are against billboards, they still support murals because they believe it creates a positive influence on the community. Muralists as well believe they can use their artwork to make the community a better one (Golden). To muralists, San Francisco is known as the “free” city because you are allowed to paint any picture you would like, there are very little to no restrictions (Rose) and that is what Feldman and the community are fighting for in Portland. Size restrictions should be abolished because artists should have the right to paint what they would like on any size wall. It’s unfair to restrict muralists to their creativity. Fortunately, Feldman and her community are aware of the regulations and aren’t giving up but not everyone is familiar with the laws of the state.

A lot of the time, murals are painted over without notifying the artists but many aren’t aware that federal and state laws protect the murals. It hurts the artists and the community to see their art painted over. The law says artist must be notified before artwork is destroyed and must give the muralist time to try to relocate mural if possible (Rose). Incidents of painting-over usually occur when the owner of the building changes and the new owner thinks the artwork is part of his property and he doesn’t have to notify anyone. Even though it might be on one of his building walls, he must alert the artist 3 months before hand. Some artists are glad to have federal protection and others aren’t so pleased. “Artists fought for the retention of copyright, which only allowed the city to use the artwork for non-commercial purposes” (Drescher 41). Some do not want to be involved with the legal system because their art will be used for the wrong purposes like profit making. Some also believe the artwork belongs to the community not just to one person and therefore credit shouldn’t be given to just one person. At times, federal laws may be convenient but artists are afraid of being restricted in the process of creating their masterpieces. In San Francisco, artists are free to paint whatever they would like; muralists gladly take advantage of their freedom of speech through art (Rose). Fortunately, places like Precita Eyes exist where you can paint anywhere as long as you receive permission by the building owner. Precita Eyes is an active organization concentrated around the Mission District in a street called Balmy Alley. With owner’s consent, muralists can ask for a place to paint through help from Precita Eyes.

Private organizations like Precita Eyes have the advantage of creating murals anywhere they would like with the permission of the property owners within the Mission District. Community members who decided to give to the community sponsored this organization. As a private group, they have the freedom to do what they like; residing in San Francisco also grants them more privileges. In Portland, public art has been banned but people are still fighting for the regulations to change. Up to this day, artists aren’t allowed to put up any murals bigger than 200 ft. squared. One solution muralists are working on is to try to change the regulations of what falls under the category of wall advertisements. Artists are determined to win their freedom of speech back and to be free to convey their message without any size restriction (“The First Amendment”).

Murals create a positive energy within the community and more needs to be done to protect them in order to keep them alive. Muralists try so hard to create art that will be acknowledged rather than destroyed with graffiti or tagging. Even though a layer of anti-graffiti varnish is painted over the murals, it still makes it difficult to remove the graffiti. Another reason muralists need to gain the audience’s acceptance is to help the community rise; they believe “the appearance of neighborhood walls can affect an area’s reputation, property values, and business…the general condition of life for those who live there” (Kim 13). Not only are murals effective by conveying messages but they also reduce disruptive actions such as graffiti. In 1993, LA Times reported that the city spends about $100

105 million dollars on graffiti removal. Many organizations use murals as a strategy to prevent graffiti or tagging by gang members (“The Mural Message”). Many streets that used to be very dangerous at night have turned into a gallery full of different murals, which represent the “barrio life” (“The Mural Message”). Since then, gang members have respected the pieces of art because they are able to relate to them. Muralists depend on the audience to create their art. They make sure their art is appropriate for the viewers and make sure they can relate to it. In certain places, there might not be any restrictions to the artwork or censorship but even so, artists have to plan beforehand so their mural won’t be destroyed later on. New expensive anti-graffiti cleansing solutions that utilizes nanotechnology can easily remove graffiti but “the artist is left with more satisfaction when he sees his masterpiece is untouched and respected” (Rose).

Muralist try to portray the truth through images but in order to do that the muralist must be dedicated, knowledgeable of the laws and community in order to keep the mural safe. Government should consent with Portland muralists about what falls under the category of a billboard. It would be devastating to know that murals are to be banned in any part of the country. These pieces of artwork show the character of the communities, the streets and the people. Murals are a way of creating closer relationships among each other and can even act as a way to speak out. Murals should not have restrictions and should be respected at all times. Muralists put a lot of effort and work into the pieces. Artists know their work is displayed in public space and it can be defaced by graffiti at any time but the strategy they use is to create close ties with the taggers and graffiti writers by involving them in the process or paint things, which relate to them. If muralists really wanted to, they would paint whatever they wanted on the walls, the most abstract painting but what they actually do is study the surroundings and with their creativity, paint murals with that talk to the people.

Works Cited Broderson, Deborah. “Graffiti”. St. James Encyclopedia of Popular Culture. Vol. 2. Detroit: St. James Press, 2000. p281-282. Gale Database. Bay School. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://go.galegroup.com/ps/generateCitation.do?pageType=DOCUMENT_PAGE&citationLevel=ARTIC LE&source=&actionString=DisplayFormatList&bucketId=0&inPS=true&prodId=GVRL&userGroupNam e=san58140&tabID=ARTICLE&contentSegment=&docId=GALE%7CCX3409001023> Cockcroft, Eva and Holly Sanchez. Signs From the Heart:California Chicano Murals. California: Social and Public Art Resource Center, 1990.

Delgado, Melvin and Keva Barton. "Murals in Latino Communities: Social indicators of community strength."

Social Work. 43.4 (1998): 346+.Questia Online Library. Gale Group. Bay School Library. 1 Feb. 2009 <www.questiaschool.com/reader/printpaginator/81>.

Drescher, W.Timothy. San Francisco Murals. Hong Kong: Pogo Press, 1991.

---. “Street Subversion: The Political Geography of Murals and Graffiti.” Reclaiming San Francisco History, Politics, Culture. Ed. Brook James. City Light Books. 1998. 231- 246. 24 Jan. 2009.

Feldman, Laura. “Outlaw Murals.” Culture Work: A Periodic Broadside for Arts and Culture Workers. 3 (1999) : 47. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://add.uoregon.edu/culturework/cuturework9.html> .

Golden, Jane. Interview. The Smiley Show. NPR. 21 Oct. 2002. 5 Feb. 2009 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=1151996 > .

Kim, Sojin. Chicano Graffiti and Murals:The Neighborhood Art of Peter Quezada.Jackson: University Press of Mississippi. 1995.

"L.A. Murals." Morning Edition.Guest Kitty Felde. KPCC Station. 18 Aug. 1999. NPR.4 Feb. 2009 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=1057252 > .

Rose, Patricia. Precita Eyes Organization. Precita Eyes Visitor’s Center, San Francisco. 7 Feb. 2009.

“The First Amendment.” Talk Our Nation. Host Neal Conan. NPR News. 24 Sep. 2004. 5 Feb. 2009 < http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=1150568 > .

“The Mural Message.” Time Magazine. 7 Apr. 1975.Time Inc. 2 Feb. 2009. <http://www.time.com/time/magazine/article/0,9171,917263-2,00.html>.

106 Elamar Hakim-Moully Craig Butz Research in the Community February 24, 2009 Colors around the Globe: How Do Different Colors Evoke Emotional and Physical Responses in Humans?

Everything humans perceive, from the smallest grain of sand to the vast sky, is manifest with color. Colors are an inseparable part of life; whether we are decorating a house, or just picking out an outfit, colors greatly influence our decisions. They evoke in us emotional and physical responses that either enhance or suppress life.

Most colors, however, are known to evoke contradictory responses that appear to clash with one another. A color may be said to evoke sadness, but also happiness, or energy, but also tiredness. Nevertheless, there is a clear link between these differences: culture. Colors are perceived differently in different cultures, and these perceptions greatly affect the responses colors evoke in individuals.

Black and white are the most culturally divergent colors, as black in the West is the equivalent of white in the East and vice versa. In Western cultures, black is the color of death and mourning; it is associated with “…darkness… [and] fear of the unknown” (Dee and Taylor 10). The color is worn in funerals, and in some cultures is even draped over walls, beds, and mirrors of a home during mourning (Eiseman). When it comes to fashion, black is regarded as sophisticated, elegant, and luxurious (Dee and Taylor). It is a common color for ceremonial gowns and tuxedos. Likewise, in Japan, black signifies “…the dignified and formal” (Hibi 72); it is the color of the robes worn by Buddhist monks as they undergo religious training. In China, black is a youthful color, and is considered the color of young boys (Bear). Black is everything white is not. In Western cultures, white is associated with cleanliness, purity, aspiration, and peace, and is thus worn by brides on their wedding day (Dee and Taylor). There are very few, if any, “…negative connotations with the color white in Western cultures” (Dee and Taylor 10). In contrast, in Eastern cultures, white is the color of death and mourning (“Color Symbolism”). This association derives either from the fact that one’s complexion turns white and ghastly upon death (Dee and Taylor), or from the fact that dead bodies are often covered with a white cloth. In China, the color is thought to bring bad luck, and is not allowed to be worn on the Chinese New Year. Black and white symbolize opposing ideas in Western and Eastern cultures.

Red holds many connotations and has the greatest impact of any color. In the United States, it is associated with the flag, Christmas, Thanksgiving, and Valentine’s Day; many people consider it a warm, passionate, and patriotic color (“Symbolism of Color: Using Color for Meaning"). However, it is also associated with fire and Satan, and can therefore be perceived in a less positive way. In some Eastern cultures, primarily Russia, red is associated with the Communist takeover—during which millions of people died—and is thus a negative color. Hitherto, red was a color of good fortune and national pride. In South Africa, red is the color of death and mourning (Kyrnin), presumably because it is the color of blood. In Japan and China, red is "...the color of the sacred" (Hibi 8); it is linked with prosperity and success, and is consequently the color of many religious shrines (Kyrnin; Hibi).

Moreover, it is commonly worn by brides and on other special occasions. Red maintains strong associations in every culture, regardless of whether it is perceived positively or negatively.

Yellow is pleasant for some, but the opposite for others, demonstrating the strong influence cultures place on color significance. In Western cultures, yellow is the cheeriest and liveliest. It is associated with the sun, blooming flowers, smiley faces, and summer time (Kaya and Epps). In China, yellow is “…symbolic of wisdom, civilization, and bright prospects” (Eiseman 44). It is the color of Buddha and his followers—both their monasteries and robes are yellow. In Indonesia, yellow has a special significance because “…as symbolic as the sun, it nurtures all living things and causes them to grow” (Eiseman 44). On the other hand, in Egypt, yellow is the color of mourning and death (Kyrnin). In fact, actors in the Middle Ages wore yellow clothes to represent the dead.

Furthermore, yellow also has a strong association with the Holocaust, during which Jews were forced to wear a yellow star in order to be identified in public (Taylor and Dee). Yellow represents two opposing concepts in various cultures.

The only two colors whose perception "...is shared by all mankind" (Hibi 46) are green and blue. Green is universally associated with nature, the environment, and growth, and thus symbolizes life (Wagner “Color Psychology-Green”). Being described as green most commonly suggests earth-friendly or environmental awareness—such are green parties, green products, etc (Dee and Taylor). The color “...seems to have no particularly unpleasant associations" (Hibi 46). Following green is blue. Blue is universally associated with the sky and the ocean, yet occasionally this association may lead to a fork in the road. The color may be linked to a clear sky and a calm ocean, or conversely to a dark sky and a stormy ocean (Kaya and Epps). Even so, blue is “...described as a

107 favorite color by many people" (Wagner “Color Physiology-Blue”), regardless of culture. Green and blue are universally perceived as earth-related colors.

Individuals affirm that colors evoke specific responses, yet they do not account for cultures where colors are perceived differently. In Western cultures, black is said to evoke unhappiness and depression. Even though this is true in many cases—predominantly in Western cultures—it is assumed that everyone perceives black in the same negative way. However, a study on the preference of color among Asian groups found that black elicited positive responses among many of the Japanese subjects, especially among young subjects. Moreover, another study on the relationship of colors and emotions found that several of the subjects, who were culturally diverse, were positively influenced by black because it reminded them of power, richness, and wealth (Kaya and Epps). Likewise, in Western color therapy—the therapeutic use of color for physical and emotional benefit—white is used to calm an anxious and unhappy individual because the color is said to evoke hopeful and peaceful emotions; yet in other cultures, it evokes loneliness, emptiness, and sadness (Kaya and Epps; “Live Naturally”). Individuals must acknowledge the fact that color perception is—most often—not the same in all cultures.

Red evokes culturally controversial responses that greatly influence every culture. Among Western individuals, red is a good “morale-booster” (6). It evokes feelings of warmth, excitement, and passion, and thus oppresses unwanted negative thoughts or emotions. It can increase one’s energy and willingness, and some even say that it "...encourages [one] to put [himself or herself] forward and to develop more self-confidence" (Dee and Taylor 37). However, red can also be unsettling, irritating, and agitating; this is usually the case when the association is a negative one. Similarly, in Russia and South Africa, red evokes anger and aggression, for it brings painful memories of death (Dee and Taylor). Among Japanese and Chinese, red evokes happiness and comfort, and—for the most part—evokes no negative responses (Hibi). Red’s responses highly depend on culture-based preference.

It is agreed that yellow is the brightest of the colors, yet its responses do not fall under the same category.

In Western cultures, yellow evokes happiness, excitement, and joy. Often in color therapy, depressed individuals will surround themselves with yellow because it turns “…the mind toward optimism and happy memories” (Dee and Taylor)—more so than other colors. The color also raises awareness and helps one cope with a difficult situation. In China and Indonesia, yellow evokes feeling of pride and delight. On the other hand, in Egypt, yellow can be very troubling, and thus evokes sadness and grief. Similarly, for some Jews, the color evokes anger and sadness because it brings back unpleasant memories and past pains—it can be the opposite of cheery.

The responses elicited by green and blue are generally the same in every culture. Green "...is regarded as the great harmonizer" (Dee and Taylor 71); it is calming, relaxing, and soothing (Hibi 46). A study on the relationship between colors and emotions—previously mentioned—found that out of 98 subjects, 95.5 percent indicated that green evoked in them"...feelings of comfort and soothing emotions" (Kaya and Epps). Blue commonly evokes coolness, calmness, and serenity. However, its one controversy is that it may sometimes cause depression because of its partially negative association. Especially in Western cultures, we "…often talk about 'the blues' meaning sadness" (Dee and Taylor 13), hence the soulful nature of blues music. In other cultures, though, this concept is less popular, and thus blue is only regarded as refreshing, beautiful, and bright (Kaya and Epps). Green and blue are regarded as the most positive colors worldwide.

Colors evoke emotional and physical responses, but the response highly depends on the way colors are perceived in a culture. If a culture perceives a color in a positive way, the responses evoked by the color in that culture will be positive. However, same is true for the opposite. If a culture perceives a color in a negative way, the responses evoked by the color in that culture will be negative. It is about the big picture; we must look at the whole in order to understand the huge impact colors have on our lives.

108 Works Cited Bear, Jacci Howard. “Black.” About.com: Desktop Publishing. 2009. The New York Times Company, 22 Feb. 2009 <http://desktoppub.about.com/cs/colorselection/p/black.htm>.

“Color Symbolism.” Nation Master.com. 2005. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nationmaster.com/encyclopedia/ColorSymbolism>.

Dee, Jonathan, and Lesley Taylor. Beginner’s Guide to Color Therapy. New York: Sterling Publishing Co., Inc., 2003.

Eiseman, Leatrice. Colors: For Your Every Mood. Virginia: Capitals Books Inc, 2000.

Hibi, Sadao. The Colors of Japan. Trans. John Bester. Tokyo: Kodansha International, 2000.

Kaya, Naz, and Helen H. Epps. "Relationship between color and emotion: a study of college students.” College Student Journal. 38.3 (Sep. 2004): 396+. General OneFile. Gale. The Bay School. 16 Jan. 2009 <http://find.galegroup.com/ips/start.do?prodId=IPS>.

Kyrnin, Jennifer. “Visual Color Symbolism Chart by Culture.” About.Com: Web Design/HTML. 2009. The New York Times Company. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://webdesign.about.com/od/colorcharts/l/bl_colorculture.htm>.

“Live Naturally.” U Healthy. Northwestern Health Sciences University. 23 Feb. 3009 <http://www.nwhealth.edu/healthyu/liveNaturally/gloss.html>.

“Symbolism of Color: Using Color for Meaning.” Princeton Online. 2009. <http://www.princetonol.com/groups/iad/lessons/middle/color2.htm>.

Van Wagner, Kendra. “Color Psychology-Blue.” About.com: Psychology. 2009. The New York Times Company.

25 Jan. 2009 <http://psychology.about.com/od/sensationandperception/a/color_blue.htm>.

---. “Color Psychology-Green.” About.com: Psychology. 2009. The New York Times Company. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://psychology.about.com/od/sensationandperception/a/color_green.htm>.

109 Tesia Hirsch Craig Butz Research in the Community February 20, 2009 Bleeding Pain: Self-Mutilation in Teens and its Effects on Interpersonal Relationships She has long black hair. The ends are frayed: a result of heat damage from the flat iron she uses every day.

Her bangs cover half of her face leaving only one of her thick black-rimmed eyes visible. Her clothes are always black. There are chains hanging from the belt-loop of her dark skinny jeans and her Doc Martin boots make heavy thumps as she walks. She sits in the back of the class, not doing anything. She cuts the insides of her wrists with scissors twice a week to make the pain go away.

She has blond wavy hair. She is constantly smiling as though nothing has ever gone wrong. Her hair is always pinned back out of her face, exposing her pink glossed lips and mascara-ed eyes. She is an A student, a star on her soccer team, and everyone wishes they were her. She wears bright tank tops and light colored jeans with flipflops. Each of her nails is a different color. She burns her thighs with a lighter when she gets home from school.

Self-mutilation is a rising issue among teens and young adults in this generation. This behavior is synonymous with self-injury or self-harm. It has been discovered that children as young as 9 have self-injure (Campbell). Self-mutilation, once diagnosed only in adults with borderline personality disorder (Campbell), is defined as an “act where a person deliberately inflicts injury to him or herself, but without suicidal intent" (Fish).

The most commonly known form of self-mutilation is cutting oneself on the arms or legs. Other forms of self-injury include burning, ripping, or carving skin, pulling hair, pinching or biting oneself, swallowing toxic substances, headbanging, pricking oneself with needles, or breaking bones (Brody). Self-mutilation is a generally taboo topic that has caused much controversy in the media and is not usually reported. For this reason, because of ignorance on the topic, people have many inaccurate notions in their heads about the act of self-injury itself, and its affects on the people that self-injure. The largely misunderstood behavior of self-injury, as a means of coping with emotional disturbances, can cause interpersonal relationships with the self-injurers to become strained or even impossible without treatment of the behavior and other psychological problems.

Usually psychological problems are a cause of the behavior of self-mutilation although not always. The psychiatric disorders that have been known to go along with self-injury include any sort of depression, obsessive compulsive disorder, anxiety and panic disorders, dissociative disorders, and impulse control disorders (“Selfinjury”). These psychological dysfunctions may lead to self-injury though not in all cases. Many cases of self-injury that have been reported are seen in the most normal teens. It has been shown that 15% of the adolescent population has self-injured though a small amount of the 15% engage in self-mutilation as a repetitive behavior of coping (Brody). In a study of 663 teenagers, 28% of them seriously injured themselves (meaning used self-injurious methods often or caused serious physical damage) (Campbell). In a survey given to 194 random students at the Bay School of San Francisco, 40.7% of the students reported that they had tried self-mutilation at least once and 10.8% reported using self-mutilation repeatedly in order to cope with emotional distress. The use of self-injury in seemingly “normal” teens is sometimes a cause of some sort of physical, sexual, or emotional abuse as a young child. It has been found that 50% of self-mutilators have been abused in these ways (Brody). Many self-injurers have very low self-esteem (Brody) and believe that their feelings are not valid (“Self-injury”).

Every person that self-mutilates has a different emotional reason for doing so. While psychological problems or abuse are more tangible causes, the emotional reasons are the trigger of the act itself. Certain emotions will lead to self-injury. In an article published in the New York Times in 2008 by Jane Brody, she describes some of the emotional triggers that can cause teens to feel the need to self-mutilate. The teens usually feel rejected or wronged by people they are closest to. This can be caused by childhood neglect, social isolation or unstable family situations. Many of the teens that self-injure, according to Brody, have never learned how to deal with or express difficult emotions such as anger and sadness because of the conditions of their past. In the words of four teens who participated in an interview about their self-injurious behavior, self-injury is “a way I have control over my body;” “It expresses emotional pain or feelings that I am unable to put into words;” “The emotional pain slowly slips away into physical pain;” “At least if I feel pain its better than [feeling] nothing.” An article published in the journal Current Psychiatry by Pamela Campbell puts self-mutilation into two categories: self-mutilation that is triggered by a need to regulate emotions and relieve tension and a more manipulative form that is used “as a threat to prevent loss.” Like Brody describes, Campbell says that the strong feelings that these self-injurious teens have is caused by a need to let out emotions without the knowledge of how to express these emotions. For these teens, creating pain and bleeding is used to “turn emotional pain into a more manageable physical pain, direct anger that cannot be expressed at others onto oneself, [or] punish oneself for perceived misdeeds.” Other sources say that the causes of self-injury

110 could be because of late development of the brain circuits that are involved with emotional judgment (Smith, Brian D.). Even more link self-injury to low levels of serotonin in the brain that make certain people more irritable and impulsive (“Self-injury”). Though researchers and psychologists have different theories on the triggers, most agree that the act of self-injury is ritualistic one. If the usual means of self-injury cannot be attained, usually the chance of the behavior being done anyway is lowered for the time being (Campbell). These are some of the many closely related triggers and reasons for self-injury to cope with difficult emotions.

Not only is self-mutilation hard on the teens who engage in the behavior, it is also difficult for those who are close with these people. It can be quite distressing for people to witness self-injury (Fish). When the self-injurer has a close relationship with someone, it is easy for the other person to want to stop the self-injurer but trying to prevent this usually makes the behavior much worse (Fish). The most helpful thing that someone can do for the selfmutilator is to listen actively and acknowledge the pain (Fish). Most self-injurers do want help but they do not know how to express it openly to their loved ones (Campbell). According to many experts, the most important thing for people that have relations with self-injurers is "Whether we are family, friend, or therapist, we need to convey to the victims that we understand that they are resorting to an unhealthy behavior in order to relieve psychological pain.

We must reinforce for the sufferer that the self-mutilating behavior is only a small part of who they are, not the whole picture" (Levenkron 63) This is the way for someone to help the self-mutilator the most.

Because of the difficulties that most people have with the act of self-mutilation and the ability to relate to the victims, and because of the self-injurers themselves and their emotional tolerance level, it is almost impossible to have a healthy relationship with self-injurers. Relationships are tricky and can either help or hurt the ability for people who self-mutilate to cope with their urges (Fish). The book Cutting by Steven Levenkron, describes interpersonal relationships with people who self-injure. As Levenkron states, self-mutilation is often described by the general public as “disgusting” or “grotesque” (59-60). The reason these words are used is generally out of fear of the self-mutilating behavior (61).

For the people who self-injure, the fear is of being rejected when their behavior is discovered (102). Most of the time their fear is rational because of the extreme emotions that this behavior brings up in many people.

Because of this, “[friends] may recoil in fear, or go to the other extreme and try single-handedly to rescue their friend from this self-destructive behavior” (62). According to Levenkron, there are two types of interpersonal relationships: healthy and unhealthy (94). Most self-mutilators are shameful about their behavior and have strange ways of concealing their fear and keeping people frightened of getting too close (66). Most self-injurers do not have the ability to form healthy interpersonal relationships with different people and to fill the emptiness left by isolation, they develop psychological and behavioral disorders (94). Though self-injurers have so much trouble with letting people become emotionally close with them, they are very good at getting other people to open up and trust them (100). Also, Levenkron describes self-mutilators to have very low self-esteem which can cause unhealthy and abusive attachments to be formed and maintained (101). To break the barrier put up by these people, Levenkron suggests that those in relationships with them try to indicate comfortability with the injurer’s pain (66). This is one of the only ways to get through to the person and help them because without healthy attachments, injurers can become even more unstable and develop mental health issues (93). For self-injurers, interpersonal relationships are hard to hold on to but key to their safety and stability.

When in a relationship with a self-injurer, friends can feel strained and unable to communicate feelings and tensions to the self-injurer. In a confidential and optional survey given to Bay School students, the teens were asked questions about their experiences with self-injury and how it affects their lives. One response stated that when a friend self-injures, their self-esteem is usually very low so “it’s hard to connect… they ask for attention and always need others to assure them of what they do.” This puts strain on the people in the relationships. Suddenly, these teenagers need to take care of another person’s well-being and happiness that is dependent on them. Often, this can alienate friends and cause them to back away more, resulting in the feeling of rejection for the self-injurer and an increase in their self-harming tendencies. Most responses to this survey given showed that friends of self-mutilators really did want to help but did not know how. They felt the need to tip-toe around their loved ones so as not to rile up their emotions. Any pains or scars became increasingly apparent and raised worries in friends. In a confidential interview done with a Bay School junior, he describes his relationships with people that self-injure as “definitely different” than relationships with people who do not. He feels as though he was to walk around them all the time in order to keep them from being hurt. Relationships with self-injurers put strain on both ends of the spectrum.

Self-injury is always a serious issue. When people inflict harm on themselves they are in need help with some sort of emotional issue they have. When caught early, self-injury can be stopped quickly, but after years of injury it can be as hard as quitting smoking. Self-injury varies in severity for different people so it is hard to generalize about the reasons and affects of injury. Because teenagers are still developing and have major fluctuation in hormones and emotions, self-injury is prominent in teen years but can fade as these people grow older. For the

111 majority of self-injurers, the injury is not repetitively used as a coping mechanism and can be avoided easily with help from family and friends. As a friend, the most important thing to do is listen to the self-injurer and help in possible ways. Not all relationships with self-injurers are unhealthy, especially with those that do not consistently engage in the behavior. Self-injury is serious but can be temporary and may fade.

Severe self-injury can be treatable in a few different ways. Sometimes certain medications can work with regulating emotions that may trigger self-injury (Brody). The only other proven way that self-injury can be treatable is through a therapy called Dialectical Behavioral Therapy (DBT) that was originally designed for women with Borderline Personality disorder (Campbell). DBT uses a combination of skills coaching and talk therapy. The point of DBT is for an individual with impulsivity problems (such as self-injury) to learn to cope with impulses and use other means of expressing their emotions. After therapy relationships with self-injurers can be completely normal.

Although the struggle to stop self-injuring is a long one, many people can succeed with support from family and friends even if the urges never go away.

Because of the misconceptions about self-injury, it is important that people are aware of the issue and its causes and affects. There are so many media portrayals of self-injury as a psychotic behavior, done by victims of severe mental disabilities and it is automatically assumed that self-injurers are “crazy.” The public should become more aware of this behavior as a rising issue just as obesity or diabetes. If you or someone you know self-injures, there is a way to get help. SAFE is an organization dedicated to aiding self-injurers and their families at www.selfinjury.com. In a crisis, you can call 1-800-DONTCUT. Works Cited Brody, Jane E. “The Growing Wave of Teenage Self-Injury.” New York Times. 6 May 2008: F7. ProQuest AP Science. The Bay School. 21 Jan. 2009 <http://proquest.umi.com/pqdweb?did=1473536691&sid=1&Fmt=3&clientId=71553&RQT=309&VName =PQD>.

Brown, Eric. Personal Interview. 30 Jan. 2009.

Campbell, Pamela A. “Evaluating Teen Self-Injury.” Current Psychiatry. 7.2 (2008): 69-75. Health and Wellness Resource Center. The Bay School. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/HWRC/hits?r=d&origSearch=false&o=&bucket=per&rlt=2&n=10&l =d&basicSearchOption=KE&items=0&c=34&tcit=0_1_0_0_0_1&docNum=A175950944&sgPhrase=false &locID=san58140&secondary=false&t=RK&s=1&SU=self+injury>.

Fish, Rebecca and Helen Duperouzel. “Just Another Day Dealing with Wounds.” Learning Disability Practice. 11.4 (2008): 12-16. Health and Wellness Resource Center. The Bay School. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/HWRC/hits?r=d&origSearch=false&o=&bucket=per&rlt=2&n=10&l =d&basicSearchOption=KE&items=0&c=26&tcit=0_1_0_0_0_1&docNum=A179677023&sgPhrase=false &locID=san58140&secondary=false&t=RK&s=1&SU=self+injury>.

Levenkron, Steven. Cutting: Understanding and Overcoming Self-Mutilation. New York: Norton, 1999.

“Self-Injury.” World of Health. Ed. Brigham Narins. Detroit: Thomson Gale, 2007. Science Resource Center. The Bay School. 21 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/SciRC?ste=1&docNum=CV2191501158>.

Smith, Brian D. “Adolescent Non-Suicidal Self-Injury.” Psychiatric Times. 25.7 (2008): 24. Health and Wellness Resource Center. The Bay School. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/servlet/HWRC/hits?r=d&origSearch=false&o=&bucket=per&rlt=2&n=10&l =d&basicSearchOption=KE&items=0&c=21&tcit=0_1_0_0_0_1&docNum=A180555453&sgPhrase=false &locID=san58140&secondary=false&t=RK&s=1&SU=self+injury>.

112 Jake Holtzman Craig Butz Research in the Community A-Block 20 February 2009 Local Food “We need to be the change we want to see in the world and we need to live that way. We can't imagine what it is to go out in that field and pick beans…I think Americans are very, very disconnected from this experience that our parents had” – Alice Waters (“Slow Food Nation Closing”).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ Where does our food come from? Who produces it? How do the farmers treat their soil and produce? How does the treatment affect us, the land, the water, the air? If you knew where the food you eat came from, would you still want to eat it? These are all questions that people are beginning to wonder about their food. For about the past 60 years, many Americans have not asked questions about the source and the treatment of their food. The average person would go to the supermarket, buy some chicken, for example, and walk up to the check out counter. The thought of the whole, live chicken would never cross their mind. They never wondered which farm it came from, where the farm was, or who the farmer was (Kingsolver 10). Although our food system has worked according to established standards, cheaply producing food for most of America and importing produce from other countries to provide different foods year-round, it is time for Americans to reconsider the food they eat and move toward a more locally based diet, including fresher produce, improved nutrition, and a healthier environment.

But what is ‘local’? The term ‘locavore’ was coined recently to create a term for somebody who eats locally grown food. This explanation is basic and open-ended; it does not specifically tell what locally grown food is. The definition of ‘local’ has multiple meanings that are left up to us to decide. Some people define ‘local food’ as produce from the farmers’ market. Others say that ‘local’ means within a few hours drive. Wilson Farms, a farm about three hours South of San Francisco, believes that ‘local’ could be anything within America: “If the food's grown in the United States we know what kind of pesticide or fertilizer is used on it, comparatively to in places like Mexico or Chile where the regulations are not as enforced like they are in California” (Wilson Farms). Even less specifically, Marin Roots Farm says that as long as you know where the food is coming from and how it is being treated, the food is ‘local’ (Marin Roots Farm). But the single most common definition used among Americans is food grown within 100-miles (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 2). This method of eating, called the 100-Mile Diet, was created by Alisa Smith and James Mackinnon. They were first inspired to create the diet by an amazing meal, in which everything they ate was grown locally (Plenty 3). Smith and Mackinnon went on to develop a diet where all the food was grown within the boundaries of their home, British Columbia. When they drew a circle on a map, that enclosed everything within mountains, ocean, and other boundaries, the radius was almost exactly 100 miles (Plenty 9-10). The various definitions of ‘local’ can be further explored through the advantages of local food, the experiences people have had eating and growing it, and the meaning of a local economy.

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ “When eating fruit, remember who planted the tree; when drinking clear water, remember who dug the well – Vietnamese proverb (Smith and Mackinnon, Plenty 15).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ There are many advantages of locally grown food that many Americans shopping in supermarkets do not realize exist. The main advantages include the freshness, taste and quality of produce, knowledge of what you are actually eating, and various environmental benefits.

The quality of food is a prominent feature that distinguishes it from average food Americans buy in a supermarket. The typical food item found on a grocery shelf traveled about 1500 miles – farther than most American families go on an annual vacation (Kingsolver 5). This food has also been stored for weeks, affecting the taste and the nutritional value (Maiser, “10 Reasons” par. 2). On the contrary, locally grown food at a farmer’s market is usually picked within 24 hours before it is sold (Smith and Mackinnon, “Why Eat Local” par. 1). Food that has been canned or frozen right after it was picked actually contains more nutrients than a ‘fresh’ food item which has sat on a grocery shelf for weeks (“Top 10 Reasons to Buy Local Food” par. 2). Picture a peach that is so ripe and fresh that it melts in your mouth when you bite into it. Local food has a longer time to ripen, which contributes to the freshness and taste. It is not shipped far and therefore can ripen until the final minutes before it is picked and sold, whereas the food found at a supermarket must be loaded with preservatives to withstand the long journey to the store (Maiser, “10 Reasons” par. 4).

113 One of the major components of local food is knowledge of what the food actually is: where it comes from and how it was treated. Barbara Kingsolver believes that when America “walked away from the land,” people’s knowledge of food production disappeared (12). She recalls a time when Steven, a biology professor, attempted to give a boy in his neighborhood, Malcolm, a small lesson about how food is grown.

The first time he watched Steven pull long, orange carrots out of the ground, he demanded: ‘How’d you get them in there?’...Starts with a seed, grows into a plant. Water, sunlight, leaves, roots. ‘A carrot,’ Steven concluded, ‘is actually a root.’ ‘Uh-huh…,’ said Malcolm doubtfully. A crowd had gathered now. Steven engaged his audience by asking, ‘Can you guys think of other foods that might be root vegetables?’

Malcolm checked with his pals, using a lifeline before confidently submitting his final answer: ‘Spaghetti?’

(Kingsolver 12).

By the late 1940s many Americans lost much of the basic knowledge about how their food is grown. “Buying food today is complicated,” James Mackinnon and Alisa Smith declare. “What pesticides were used? Is that corn genetically modified? Was that chicken free range or did it grow up in a box?” Any ‘locavore’ could answer these questions about their food. The explanation to this, in part, lies in the relationships that people build with trusted farmers (“Why Eat Local” par. 2). And this, to Barbara Kingsolver is one of the things that make up the definition of ‘local’. She says, “Local food is a handshake deal in a community gathering place. It involves farmers with first names, who show up week after week…Local is farmers growing trust” (123).

Knowledge of what is on the dinner plate can be taken to extremes, but sometimes extremes that help build an understanding of what truly local food is and how America’s food system does not encourage this knowledge.

Writer, Michael Pollan, had a dinner in which he hunted, gathered, and grew every ingredient (277). But why would he go through so much trouble for one meal? Pollan believed that the meal would teach him many things about the ecology and ethics of eating that are not apparent in a supermarket or a fast-food restaurant. He would learn about basic things; about what ties humans and their food together, how humans fit in the food chain, and the decisions of what is good to eat and what is not (280-281). Though these may seem like simple concepts, many Americans today, do not have much knowledge of them. Like Barbra Kingsolver says, Americans have become disconnected with the land and food, as “a natural consequence” of the shift towards industrialization and factories (13). “It is depressing, though not all that difficult to imagine” fishing for a living being non-existent in the future generations (Pollan 280).

‘Food miles’ is one of the huge existing problems with the current food system, as it has an impact not only on freshness, but also on the environment. ‘Food miles’ is distance that food travels to get to the store in which it is sold (McWilliams par. 1). ‘Locavores’ believe that “long-distance food, with its attendant petroleum consumption and cheap wages, is harming the planet and does nothing to help build communities” (Severson par. 7). James McWilliams provides convincing information about this argument. However, according to McWilliams, his statistics just “barely scratch the surface of the problem.” In Iowa, the average carrot travels 1,600 miles from California, and the average potato travels 1,200 miles from Idaho. In New York, 75% of the apples sold are from across the ocean or the West Coast, even though the state produces many more apples than the residents consume.

According to McWilliams, “the only reasonable reaction, it seems, is to count ‘food miles’ the way a dieter counts calories” (par. 3).

But perhaps the heart of the problem does not, in fact, go back to ‘food miles’. Lincoln University (in New Zealand) conducted a study in which they took into account not only ‘food miles’, but also water use, harvesting techniques, fertilizer outlays, method of transportation, carbon dioxide from photosynthesis, packaging, storage, and many more parts of the food system that could have a negative effect on the environment (McWilliams par. 4).

Normally, lamb from New Zealand is shipped 11,000 miles by boat to Britain, producing 1,520 pounds of carbon dioxide. On the other hand, lamb from Britain (local) produced 6,280 pounds of carbon dioxide per ton of meat, though partially because farmers on British pastures are poorer and are forced to use feed (McWilliams par. 5).

Landcare Research-Manaaki Whenua (environmental research organization in New Zealand) concludes that eating locally may not always be the best solution; moreover, it is not a good solution "if more emissions are generated at other stages of the product life cycle than during transport" (McWilliams par. 6).

Unlike the conclusion from study in New Zealand, research in America points more towards the idea that eating locally can improve the environment. In Iowa, researchers found that a local diet consumes seventeen times less oil and gas than a diet consisting of food shipped from far away (Smith and Mackinnon, “Why Eat Local” par. 7).

Barbara Kingsolver also believes that local eating can benefit the environment. Fossil fuels are used for food's transport, processing, and refrigeration (Kingsolver 4). Kingsolver did research on the use of fossil fuels in the typical American life. She found that Americans use the same amount of fossil fuels for their refrigerators as they do for their cars. Over a period of just one year, the average American citizen consumes about 400 gallons of oil.

114 Kingsolver concluded that if every citizen in the U.S. ate one locally produced meal per week, the country’s oil consumption would diminish by 1.1 million barrels every week (5).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ “When you eat that fruit, it wakes you up” – Alice Waters (“Slow Food Nation Closing”).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ ‘The economy’ – it is just another way to say, ‘What’s for dinner? Am I having any?’ This is a claim made by Bill McKibben, an environmentalist from Champlain Valley in Vermont. There are also statistics that show the reasonability and truth behind McKibben’s definition. For example, a Harvard Business School professor reported that “‘fifty percent of the world’s assets and consumer expenditure belong to the food system’” (McKibben 47). So clearly, food (specifically its locality) is a highly important part of America’s economy. The New Economics Foundation in London did a study about how local food makes a difference in the economy (Maiser, “10 Reasons” par. 1). They kept track of how much money spent locally stayed in the local economy, and how many times it was reinvested. The study concluded that a dollar spent locally had twice the value as it would if it were spent in a supermarket chain (Smith and Mackinnon, “Why Eat Local” par. 9). Why is this important? By the mid-20th century, nearly everybody stopped caring about where their food came from or how it was treated (Pollan 41). The American agricultural system moved towards efficiency and cheapness. With this, the economy shifted as well; large companies became dominant and the idea of a local economy began to disappear. Though perhaps it is still a possibility. Bill McKibben did an experiment about the concept of a local economy. He ate locally for a whole year, to see “how much was left of the agricultural infrastructure that once fed people here, and everywhere else, on local food”. McKibben’s experiment was not meant to change the current food system, but rather to attempt to persuade himself that another view about food, which incorporates a local economy, was even possible (McKibben 46-47).

By December, although many people eating locally would miss the fruits of summertime, McKibben missed oats more than anything. And the absence of oats, according to McKibben, “helps illustrate what’s happened to American agriculture, and what would be required to change it a little bit”. People used to use oats much more abundantly – for themselves and for their horses. But oats are difficult to deal with. Though wheat can just be ground up, oats have a hull that must be removed, and they must be steamed, dried, and rolled. Since the current food system is all about efficiency, this can only be done in places such as Saskatoon, Saskatchewan, where just one mill can produce a million pounds of oats every day. This large scale of production rapidly undercut local markets, as small farms simply cannot keep up with large businesses. And as a result, people stopped milling oats in Champlain Valley (McKibben’s home), just as nobody raised pork, canned tomatoes, or did any other things that a local economy requires (51).

America has achieved exactly what it wanted as a nation: consolidation and concentration; the current agricultural system is dominated by large companies. For example, 81% of America’s beef is slaughtered by only four companies. And 89% of American chicken is produced under contract to large companies, in broiler houses that can be as big as 500 feet long and which hold around 30,000 birds (McKibben 52). People assume that this sort of industrialized farming is the most productive (McKibben 66). But “if you are one guy on a tractor responsible for thousands of acres, you grow your corn and that's all you can do…But if you're working on ten acres, then you have time to really know the land, and to make it work harder” (McKibben 67). A farmer from Farming magazine says that a small farming system really causes farmers to gain “a keen awareness”. He continued to point out that “every spot or plant in the pasture…is trying to tell us something” (McKibben 67). As the population increases and amount of water and farmland decrease, the small farm structure this farmer discusses may become an essential component of the planet’s future.

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ “[T]here is value in any experience that reminds us of our dependency on the soil-plant-animal-man food chain, and of the fundamental organization of the biota” – Aldo Leopold (Pollan 281).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ Although there are many advantages to eating locally, some argue against the local food movement.

Commentator Amy Glass believes that ‘locavores’ should “just shut up and eat”. She claims she does not completely reject the idea of eating locally grown food, but that “we've all become a little too pleased with ourselves in our newly reformed eating habits.” Glass recalls a time when dinner conversations were about something other than dinner itself (“It’s Time for ‘Locavores’ to Shut Up and Eat”). But Amy Glass does not seem to acknowledge or even realize that there are multiple levels to the past in terms of food and how much people cared about it. Before

115 the early 1970s, when the local food movement began, there was a period when food was of lesser importance for many Americans. But just 40 years before the movement, there were still farmers with a deep knowledge of their crops who could make a living in a local economy (Pollan 41). A food system, based off of other values besides cheapness and efficiency, existed. People did care about their food, just as ‘locavores’ do now, but they did not have to worry about its locality and how it was grown. Amy Glass’ comments illustrate the ignorance that many Americans may have developed after the shift in purpose of the country’s food system. She sees no reason behind the importance of locality, because of her lack of understanding that locality is only a sub-category to a new method of growing and eating food. The only reason that people have, as Glass says, “moved all their fears and anxieties onto the dinner plate” is because the current agricultural system does not provide the general knowledge of how people’s food is grown (“It’s Time for ‘Locavores’ to Shut Up and Eat”). And the location of the farm has a large impact on this; the closer the farm is, the more people know about its produce.

Although Amy Glass poses an argument without much proof or research, there are valid disadvantages to the idea of eating an all local diet. But these disadvantages may not be as bad as people would first think. When on a strictly local diet, there are many limitations on what foods are available. Alisa Smith and James Mackinnon had this experience during the winter. They both agreed that “whether boiled, fried, baked, roasted, or mashed, potatoes just didn't have the caloric oomph of bleached white flour” (Plenty 35). But in these cases, people are just forced to be creative. During that same winter, Smith and Mackinnon were both craving a sandwich, but there was no bread available that was produced locally. So James Mackinnon decided to try and make a sandwich anyway, out of entirely local produce. Because there was no local flour available, Mackinnon decided to make the bread from turnips. And it still tasted delicious. “Layers of bright red greenhouse peppers and fried mushrooms peeked out beneath delectably oozing goat cheese” (Plenty 36-37). Unfortunately, the limited list of foods is not always solved by this sort of creativity. Some foods simply do not have a substitute, so ‘locavores’ must wait for the foods to come into season. On the bright side, the produce will be fresher and much tastier. A friend of Smith and Mackinnon, Ron, explained, “Think of how excited you'll be to see the first baby potatoes. They'll be like jewels to you. They'll taste like nothing you've ever eaten before” (Plenty 15).

Americans who are new to the idea of eating locally may find the price to be a complete negative. In general, locally grown food can cost an additional dollar or more per pound (Severson par. 7). The main farmer on Wilson Farms says, “I don't pay any attention to what the prices are. I set my prices and that's what I sell it for. I know what I have to have to make a living off of, so I set my own prices” (Wilson Farms).

But how willing are people to pay the higher prices? Gail Schmidt, a regular customer at the farmers’ market in Marin County, says, “The price doesn't matter very much...I'd rather spend my money on good, fresh food” (Gail Schmidt). Apparently, according to a study conducted by the Ohio State University, this same feeling is shared among many people. The research shows that farmers’ market shoppers will pay almost two times as much as an average supermarket shopper would (Ohio State University par. 2). In the study, shoppers were given a choice of two baskets of strawberries. The baskets included 80 different combinations of price, farm location, and farm type (Ohio State University par. 9). Overall, most shoppers made locality their priority. Supermarket shoppers were willing to pay up to 48 cents more (Ohio State University par. 10). On the contrary, farmers’ market shoppers were willing to pay up to 92 cents more – almost one third more than the base price of three dollars (Ohio State University par. 12). So although the price of local food may be higher than the price of food at a supermarket, the extra contribution for food does pay off – in the quality of the food, in the support of small, local farmers, and in the many benefits to the environment.

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ “It was a dinner that transcended the delicate freshness of the fish, the earthy goodness of the spuds that had sopped up the juices of the mushrooms and garlic” – James Mackinnon (Plenty 3).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ A perfect meal: it seems like an intangible concept; and definitely a debatable one as well. Could a truly local meal create a truly perfect meal? Michael Pollan might have the answer to this. Returning to his entirely local meal (in which he hunted, gathered, and grew everything), Pollan believes that it was a ‘perfect’ meal. Though for Michael Pollan, ‘perfect’ does not imply food cooked to perfection (391). ‘Perfect’ takes on a more metaphorical meaning in this situation. Many people might say that the completely local meal Pollan cooked is an extremely unreasonable idea. However in a sense, Pollan felt that the meal was more real than ever (392). Although the meal was somewhat unrealistic, its importance and perfection were in the ritual of the meal. The meal was “eaten in full consciousness of what it took to make it”. The ritual was in the connection with the food. It is a rare occasion that every single food item on the table had a detailed story that could be told in first person. Moreover, everything was truly ‘real’; this is what constitutes the ‘perfect’ meal for Michael Pollan (409).

116

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ "We live on efficiency. We're the country of efficiency and, of course, fast food" - Carlo Petrini ("Slow Food Nation Closing").

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ So how can Americans make the steps towards becoming a ‘locavore’? Jennifer Maiser provides a list of steps to becoming a ‘locavore’. First, as a ‘pre-step’, she claims that people need to determine their own definitions of ‘local’. An easy way to begin is by establishing a limit of within 100 miles. But what is really important is that the origin of the food is known (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 2). After creating a definition, people should visit a farmers’ market. “Rather than going through a middleman”, like may supermarkets, farmers’ markets do direct business (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 3). Secondly, show interest in where the meat and produce come from at the grocery store.

Ask how far the food is shipped, what farms it is grown or raised on, and other questions related to locality. It may be surprising how little some markets know about the source of their food (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 4). When taking the first steps to becoming a ‘locavore’, start small. Do not try to eat entirely local food; maybe just pick a few foods to buy locally, or eat only one or two local meals per week (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 5). Find out what restaurants use local ingredients and support small, local farms. Try to go to these restaurants as often as possible.

Ask either restaurants themselves, or ask farmers what restaurants support them. Find a local CSA (Community Supported Agriculture) farm and sign up. When you invest in a CSA farm, you are investing in a local farm which will deliver a weekly variety of vegetables to your door. So if it is difficult to find local food, a CSA farm provides an easy solution (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 6). Learn how to preserve local foods for the winter time, when the selections are much more limited. For example, find out how to make applesauce out of apples bought locally (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 7). If it is too difficult to find locally grown food, at least find locally produced food.

Many businesses locally produce jams, breads, and coffee. This may not mean that every ingredient is completely local, but the local economy is still supported when people buy the products (Maiser, “10 Steps” par. 10).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ “And when you talk about pleasure, I think you have to talk about awareness…that you can hear and see and touch and taste. This awareness is opened to anybody” – Alice Waters (“Slow Food Nation Closing”).

٠۰ ٠۰ ٠۰ America’s food system has, for a little over a half-a-century, been based off of efficiency, cheapness, and consolidation (McKibben 47). What is the future of food for America? Locality is a promising and convincing direction to turn in. There are so many clear benefits that will improve, not only the quality of the food eaten in America, but also the environment. If America does not act now, and take into consideration the abundant advantages local food can bring, people may lose the ability to “prepare and eat a meal in full conciseness of what [is] involved” (Pollan 281).

117 Works Cited “It’s Time for ‘Locavores’ to Shut Up and Eat.” All Things Considered. Perf. Amy Glass. NPR. 31 Dec. 2007. 31 Jan. 2009 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=17728965>.

Kingsolver, Barbara. Animal, Vegetable, Miracle: a Year of Food Life. New York: Harper Collins Publishers, 2007.

Maiser, Jennifer. “10 Reasons to Eat Local Food.” Life Begins at 30. Aug. 2005: 10 pars. 19 Jan. 2009 <http://www.lifebeginsat30.com/jen/2005/08/index.html>.

---. “10 Steps to Becoming a Locavore.” PBS. 11 Feb. 2007. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.pbs.org/now/shows/344/locavore.html>.

Marin Roots Farm. Personal Interview. 2 Feb. 2009.

McKibben, Bill. Deep Economy. New York: Times Books, 2007.

McWilliams, James E. “Food That Travels Well.” The New York Times 6 Aug. 2007. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nytimes.com/2007/08/06/opinion/06mcwilliams.html?_r=1&oref=slogin>.

Ohio State University. “Shoppers Willing to Pay Premium for Locally Grown Food.” Newswise 3 Jun. 2008. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://newswise.com/articles/view/541406/>.

Pollan, Michael. The Omnivore’s Dilemma: a Natural History of Four Meals. New York: Penguin Press, 2006.

Schmidt, Gail. Personal Interview. 2 Feb. 2009 Severson, Kim. “A Locally Grown Diet With Fuss but no Muss.” The New York Times 22 Jul. 2008. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/07/22/dining/22local.html?_r=1&ref=us>.

“Slow Food Nation Closing.” FORA. Host Corby Kummer. Perf. Wendell Berry, Vandana Shiva, Michael Pollan, Alice Waters, Eric Schlosser, and Carlo Petrini. 30 Oct. 2008. 7 Feb. 2009 <http://fora.tv/2008/08/30/Slow_Food_Nation_Closing_1_of_2#chapter_01>.

Smith, Alisa, and J.B. Mackinnon. Plenty: One Man, One Woman, and a Raucous Year of Eating Locally. New York: Harmony Books, 2007.

---. “Why Eat Local.” 100 Mile Diet. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://100milediet.org/why-eat-local>.

“Top 10 Reasons to Buy Local Food.” Maple Creek Farm. 7 Feb. 2009 <http://www.maplecreekfarm.com/topten.html>.

Wilson Farms. Personal Interview. 2 Feb. 2009.

118 Spencer Kirkwood Craig Butz Research in the Community Block A February 11 2009 Is Amtrak Doomed To Fail?

As the United States economy begins to fall, the effects on other government sponsored projects continue to suffer from its losses, like National Railroad System, also known as Amtrak, which has been going through its own problems, such as costs, maintenance, and funding. Ever since Amtrak was created, it was expected to fail. The current economy and government funding has caused Amtrak to make this expectation come true. There is also the problem of inefficient machinery and railways, which do not ease the already bad situation. However, if the national system is upgraded to the standards of the rest of the modern world, there still might be hope for Amtrak yet.

Early in U.S. history, passenger travel was often difficult and uncomfortable, due to the fact that people had walked or traveled by horse, generally on dirt roads. Travelers along the coast could go by boat, an option that was also available on some rivers and, later, on canals. “With the coming of the railroads, people gained the ability to travel farther and faster than most had ever imagined. Although the early passenger trains were not very comfortable, track and equipment gradually improved. The railroads helped to link different sections of the country and speeded the settlement of the western United States” (BNET). Amtrak was created by the Nixon Administration, with the belief that it would be “put to death” within a few years, before anything substantial could become of it. When the Nixon Administration created Amtrak it was originally called Railpax. Railpax was created during a time when there were two opposing factions in the United States. The first faction was the public who wanted to have train travel all over the country, and the second faction was made up of the railroads companies who believed that carrying passengers on their railways was a worthless and unprofitable burden on them.

In retrospect Nixon was not trying to save the passenger railroad, instead he was trying to make sure that the failures of the public passenger trains did not happen on his watch, and give him a poor reputation. However, this did not stop the dying of passenger trains in the United States. It was Nixon’s belief that nothing in his power would be able to save the passenger service for the pro U.S. rail citizens (Nice). His real reasoning for trying to save the railway was for presidential votes. This was due to Nixon not wanting to be accused of inaction by the rail passengers. However, on the other hand he did not want to force the issue with the nation's private railroads, due to fear that they may turn against him.

Nixon created Amtrak to finish the argument between these two fractions. The railroads wanted out of the unprofitable passenger rail business, and the rail passengers wanted an increase in its service, but the service that existed at the time was headed in an opposite direction. In the past, railroads were required to apply with the Interstate Commerce Commission (ICC) in order to discontinue any passenger train. The Interstate Commerce Commission is the part of each state that controls its money flow to and from businesses working in their states.

Many applications were accepted, and many were not. However the public was enraged by each rejection made by the ICC, even if these members of the public did not ride the train, "How dare they allow the corporate giant to refuse the common man service?" The railroads also became angered when discontinuances were not accepted as it cut into their profits (Rail Serve).

When Amtrak was created it relied purely on the support of the U.S. Congress which caused the company to have no room to progress, because the only money that was given to Amtrak was decided by Congress. Amtrak had been used by the government leaders after Nixon as scapegoat to put the people that supported them. The Board of Amtrak was used to be simply a corporation where important government officials put their most important supporters or executives that they wanted out of the way. These important people, whether or not they had any experience with running a transportation business, were placed as important members of the board (Trains). In the words of the critic and writer Rush Loving Jr. “…Amtrak’s name has been tainted since its birth by politicians who have used it to promote their own ends” (Train).In order for Amtrak to begin its road back to its recovery, the board must be made up of reliable, experienced, and well trusted members. This will help Amtrak make smarter decisions and help end the corruption and control from congress and the White House.

Management is not the one and only problem that Amtrak should be concerned about, there is also the issue of maintenance on all of the cars and engines. An extremely large majority of the Amtrak fleet is considered to be old, used, and out of date when compared with the standards of most of Europe and Asia (Nice). Due to Amtrak’s odd and sad history, it is not surprising that the state of much of its equipment is in poor condition. Also a majority of the engines that pull most of the trains are out of date or ineffective. These engines do not have the power that modern and more advanced engines can achieve. Many of the out of date engines are found in the Central United

119 States Corridors, while the Eastern and Western Corridors have slightly more advanced engines, due to the increase in population, range to the nation’s capital, and boosted the economies in these areas. The engines are not the only maintenance problems with the Amtrak fleet. There are also many issues with the passenger cars that run all over the country. In several cases, there have been reports of water dripping from the ceiling of cars when the trains move through storms, according to Trains Magazine. The passengers are also forced to sit in out of date conditions as drops of water inconveniently spill onto them. However, the water is not the worst part of some passenger cars. On some occasions the plumbing in many cars have been known to overflow or burst due to rusty pipes and or poor maintenance. This problem can cause entire cars full of passengers to be evacuated and moved to another car or even another train, causing even more incontinences for the passengers. This huge demonstration of poor maintenance has caused Amtrak to lose many customers and many of its stock holders. These stock holder fear that they will lose their money, even though Amtrak is owned and supported by the United States government. If Amtrak can hope to upgrade their fleet or even maintain their current equipment, the company needs to manage their finances and increase their profits through ticket sales or government loans; however, this increase in profit cannot be achieved through increased ticket prices due to the poor state of our economy The core roots of a majority of Amtrak’s problems are in its financing. Amtrak is required to pay for millions of different expenses each year. Last year Amtrak was required to pay at a little over 500 million dollars, just so that it could keep its system in working condition and up to acceptable standards. These costs included the small upgrades to the Eastern Corridor engines and passenger cars, supplies, and also employee pay check and benefits. These costs also included paying for new tracks that were laid around the country, but every year Amtrak has a hard time paying for all of these expenses. The problem is that Amtrak is having a hard time making money to pay for all of these expenses. (Train) It is the belief of some Conservative Politicians that the passenger trains should not receive any payments from the government and should be left to their own devises. This is an unfortunate belief, due to the fact that Amtrak will never been able to acuminate more money then what it needs to maintain operational standards. The operational costs each year make it so that Amtrak has a hard time upgrading any of its equipment, and paying for any additional costs, such as new engines. Amtrak relies on government funding to maintain itself in acceptable working conditions. In 2002 David Gun, the director of Amtrak, told Congress members that “Amtrak will never be profitable” and that the belief that Amtrak could be profitable was “an impossible goal” (Train).

The best way for Amtrak to succeed is to follow in the footsteps of the European railway system. Their high speed trains are able to move hundreds of people each day to many different locations in multiple countries, and are able to be maintained in excellent working conditions. This may be due to the fact that Europe is small compared to the United States. However this is no excuse for our lack in advances in more effective railways. The United States has already started many projects that may lead us to accomplishing our goal of having a transportation system that resembles the European design, but we are not there yet (BNET). An example of one of these projects is the high speed rail line that will span the distance between San Francisco and Los Angeles. This railway system is a large turning point in California’s, as well as in the rest of the United States’ look on high speed railway transportation. The idea of this system is a huge step forward for California, but the process that is preceding it is not as wonderful. The planning for the railway contains has hundreds of flaws that could cause the discomfort and disaprovment of hundreds of Californian citizens. An example of this is the fact that the engineers and planers want to run the high speed train through California’s heavily populated areas where it would wake up the surrounding people as it ran through. Another major flaw in the planning that connects back to the last flaw, is that this controversial issue has stopped the production of the high speed railway due the fact that the final funding is not in place yet for the project, which shows that there has been a lack of thinking that has gone into the project, and due to this, could take years before anything is put into action.

If Amtrak is ever going to be able to become profitable, it will need to improve its productivity, its financing, and its management. If Amtrak is not able to turn its spending around, and turn it into profit, then it will not be able to pull itself out of the hole in the economy. Amtrak needs a new management plan that controls all of its funding and makes sure that money goes where it is needed most. Amtrak also needs a new spending plan that will ensure it will gain more money, so that the Amtrak Fleet can be improved on a greater scale (FundingUniverse.com). This will help Amtrak get closer and closer to its final goal of having a larger more powerful fleet and possibly even a high-speed railway, comparable to Europe’s in the near future.

120 Works Cited Amtrak Magazine (trains) Amtrak California. Amtrak California Routes. 2009. 22 Jan 2009 <http://amtrakcalifornia.com/rail/go/amtrak/index.cfm> BNET. Amtrak and California and Transportation. 27 August 2008. 22 Jan. 2009 < http://resources.bnet.com/index.php?q=Amtrak+California> FundingUniverse.com. National Railroad Passenger Corporation (Amtrak). None. 26 Jan. 2009. < http://www.fundinguniverse.com/company-histories/National-Railroad-Passenger-Corporation-AmtrakCompany-History.html> John H. Kirkwood. Personal Interview. 24 Jan. 2009 Nice, David C. Amtrak: The History and Politics of a National Railroad. Lynne Rienner. Boulder, CO. 1998. 22 Jan. 2009<http://www.questiaschool.com/app/direct/SM.qst> National Association of Railroad Passengers (NARP). Keywords California. 23 Jan. 2009. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://www.narprail.org/cms/index.php/search/results/8740e13b59c8f165fca1b439e0234f4d/> Rail Serve. Amtrak News. 5 Sept. 2008. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://www.railserve.com/railnews/amtrak_news.html> Rail Ventures Staff. Personal Interview. (To be determined) Railway-technologies.com. California High-Speed Rail Network, USA. None. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.railwaytechnology.com/projects/california/> Mahoney, Michael. “California high-speed rail builders should learn French.” San Francisco Chronicle. 25 July 2008 < http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/07/25/EDUN11TU0F.DTL>

121 Grace McLaughlin Craig Butz Research in the Community 4 Feb. 2009 Yertle the Fascist Dictator and Other Stories: The Politics of Dr. Seuss Books Many kids in the United States grow up reading books by Dr. Seuss. They marvel at the bright, fun pictures and fantastic animals, and stumble over the flowing rhymes as they first learn to read. However, unbeknownst to them, these books are teaching them important messages about democracy and pressing political matters. Behind the vivid imagery and clever rhymes of Dr. Seuss books are insightful commentaries on political issues such as racism, pollution, individualism, dictatorship and nuclear battles; themes whose relevance transcends generational gaps and teaches important lessons to all children.

For all of his life Dr. Seuss has infused political ideas into his work. He began his writing career at Central High School in Springfield where he worked at their newspaper called The Reader (Morgan). He wrote short paragraphs for the paper as well as cartoons, using the pen name Pete the Pessimist and then T.S. LeSieg (Morgan).

He continued his writing in high school, doing short pieces and cartoons for the Dartmouth humor magazine JackO-Lantern, and becoming editor of this magazine in his senior year (Morgan). Upon his graduation he sought a career as a political cartoonist, getting his break on 16 July 1927 when The Saturday Evening Post published his cartoon about American tourism (Morgan). More jobs followed and his cartoons were published in magazines such as Judge, Life, Liberty and Vanity Fair (Morgan).

His first children’s book, And to Think That I Saw It on Mulberry Street was published in 1937, followed by a couple others, but that did not stop his involvement in political cartoons; he got a job at a liberal newspaper called PM in 1941 and wrote cartoons for them (Morgan). PM was “against people who pushed other people around,” and in his writing for them, Dr. Seuss bluntly criticized America’s involvement in World War II, Americafirst ideals, the government of Japan, Italy and Germany, the racism prevalent in Germany and mostly Adolf Hitler (Jenkins: Morgan). Although he eventually stopped writing political cartoons altogether, the liberal ideas that he expressed in these years stayed with him for his whole life and bled into his subsequent children’s books.

Dr. Seuss wrote many of his children’s books during the years after World War II, which proved the perfect time period for his ideas to be received. There was a dramatic increase in birthrates directly following World War II, when all of the soldiers came back home to their wives (Jenkins). During this time many people were writing books about a new trend in child-raising known as permissive parenting (Jenkins). Permissive parenting sought to prevent the “domestic fascism” which had been dictating households as well as schools and urged parents to introduce democratic ideas to their children at a young age (Jenkins). As Dorothy Baruch, who wrote many books about permissive parenting said, “To our children, democracy must not be something you-speak-of-but-do-not-live-by. It must assume reality. It must become a word associated and made real by many small but real experiences” (Baruch).

Previously, most households had heavy parental authority, where “father knew best” and schools were highly disciplined (Jenkins). However, under the new permissive parenting regime, families and schools were reinvented as places where children could politically experiment and socially transform, while maintaining a relationship as equals with their teachers and parents (Jenkins).

With this new method of raising children came a demand for new children’s literature (Jenkins). Children’s literature could be used as a way of teaching children and parents alike this new type of democratic thinking (Jenkins). Children were thought of as a clean slate, and in order for them to grow into politically responsible adults, the ideals of democracy and equality must be instilled in them from the beginning (Jenkins). Many writers, including Dr. Seuss were horrified at the way that the Japanese and Germans had used literature and schools to indoctrinate their citizens from a young age to submit to their authoritarian ways and sought to create new books in order teach their kids about the values of freedom and democratic society (Jenkins).

The most popular children’s books prior to Dr. Seuss’ arrival on the scene were the stories of Dick and Jane, who were two white, suburban children embarking on adventures such as watching dogs, playing board games and baking. These stories are simultaneously racist and classist, with Dick and Jane’s white bread, middle class life, as well as extremely boring to read. There is no fun in the books, and also, no messages of morals for children to learn from. People desperately needed to get away from Dick and Jane and be supplied new, exciting books with which to teach their children about reading and democracy and Dr. Seuss proved to be the perfect man for the job.

With books like The Cat in the Hat and Bartholomew and the Oobleck, Dr. Seuss depicted clear-minded children rebelling against irrational adult dictators. His other books also sought to teach children about democracy and other pressing political issues.

122 One of Dr. Seuss’ most clear promotions of democracy and attack on dictatorial behavior came in the form of Yertle the Turtle. Yertle the Turtle tells the story of Yertle, the king of a pond who wants to be able to see his whole kingdom. To do this, he orders all of the turtles to form a stack which he can sit on to survey his land. The turtle on the bottom, named Mack protests that “I know, up on top you are seeing great sights, but down on the bottom, we too, should have rights.” Yertle refuses to heed his requests, and tries to stack the turtles higher, until Mack burps, sending the whole tower toppling. The book ends with the lines “And the turtles, of course…all turtles are free, as turtles and maybe all creatures should be.” The story of Yertle is a clear tale about the dangers of authoritarian rule, and by making all of the turtles equal after Yertle is overthrown, he displays to the children reading the book the merits of democracy. Many people have drawn parallels between Yertle and Hitler, and the similarities are clear, but really, Yertle the Turtle is a cautionary tale about all dictators, and has as much relevance now as it did in the 1950s.

The Sneetches also encourages equality, but addresses racial tolerance as well. In The Sneetches, there are two types of Sneetches: those with stars on their stomachs and those without. The ones with the stars consider themselves superior and discriminate against those without stars. However, a man named Sylvester McMonkey McBean comes into the Sneetches’ community and provides a machine which can give the star-less Sneetches stars.

This upsets the original star-bellied Sneetches, so they go to McBean to remove their stars, in order to still have something to make them feel superior. However, the previously star-less Sneetches also remove their stars, and the cycle continues until all the Sneetches are broke and McBean leaves town. However, because of this, “Sneetches got really quite smart on that day. The day they decided that Sneetches are Sneetches. And no kind of Sneetch is the best on the beaches.” This story encourages racial tolerance by rendering the concept of racism absurd. The Sneetches are all so determined to feel superior and use some sort of discrimination that they end up too confused to remember who is elite and who is subordinate. Finally, in the end the Sneetches and the children reading the book learn the timeless lesson that racism is ridiculous, and no one should be discriminated against.

The adventures of Horton and the Whos in Horton Hears a Who! tell of a variety of social and political issues, including individuality, the plight of minorities and rebellion against conformity. The story follows an elephant named Horton who hears a small speck of dust that is in reality a planet speaking to him. On the planet is a city called Who-ville, which is home to a society of tiny people known as Whos. Horton vows to protect them, and in doing so becomes privy to the criticism and ridicule of the animals that live with him in the forest. The spiteful animals try to destroy the planet, which they do not think exists and are only stopped when every last one of the Whos makes a noise. Dr. Seuss was inspired to write this book when on a visit to Japan in 1953, on an assignment from Life magazine to speak to the children at the recently westernized schools (Morgan). Before World War II, the children had not been allowed as much freedom in their learning and their individuality had been suppressed by the school systems (Morgan). However, by the time Dr. Seuss arrived on the island, the children had started to express themselves more and show their individual identities, as was proven to him when they showed him their drawings depicting what they wanted to be when they grew up, and the pages were filled with pictures of aviators, astronauts, hostesses and engineers (Morgan). The trip gave him the inspiration to write a story about the Whos learning to be individuals and speaking up against their oppressors to achieve their dreams, just as the Japanese children were doing. Horton Hears a Who also shows Horton ignoring the views of those in his society to do what he thinks is right. His defense of the Whos despite the criticism of his peers shows a rebellion against an unjust society which is a common theme in Seuss books. In writing this book, Dr. Seuss hoped that the children reading it would learn from Horton and begin to stand up for what they believe in, and attempt to change their societies. Although Seuss had the Japanese children he met in mind when he wrote Horton Hears a Who!, the themes expressed speak to all groups of minorities and their supporters past and present who are trying to gain their rights in unjust societies. It can be applied to the struggle in the United States of black, Hispanic, Asian, Native American, and Middle Eastern people as well as women to gain equality in the workplace and in society as a whole.

Although Dr. Seuss himself told his friends that Horton Hears a Who! was inspired by the children in Japan, some people believe that it was written with a different theme in mind (Baram: Morgan). Since the 1980s, pro-life groups have taken the recurring phrase “A person’s a person, no matter how small” and applied it to the unborn babies that they are trying to defend (Baram). They have used it on their shirts, signs and stationary, and in their speeches they frequently quote it (Baram: Conradt). This was not the message that Dr. Seuss had in mind when he wrote the book, and he threatened to sue one group until they took his quote off their stationary (Baram).

However, despite Dr. Seuss’ protests, the misusage of his words continued. Even his phrase is still being used, and at the premiere of Horton Hears a Who!, the movie, in 2008, large groups of pro-life activists stood outside with signs displaying the quote (Baram).

One of Dr. Seuss’ most blatantly political books is 1984’s The Butter Battle Book. It was published in 1984 and is a depiction of the nuclear arms race between the Soviet Union and the United States during the mounting

123 tension leading up to the Cold War (Morgan). This book begins with a creature called a Yook telling his grandson about the Yooks’ battles against another group of creatures called Zooks, who live on the other side of a big wall.

The basis for their hatred of each other is that the Yooks eat their bread with the butter side up, and the Zooks eat their bread with the butter side down. The Yooks and Zooks go to war over this issue, each side building bigger and bigger weapons until they both emerge with a Bitsy Big-Boy Boomeroo, which is a tiny, powerful bomb. Both sides meet at the wall and the book ends with them facing each other, ready to drop their bombs. Dr. Seuss believed that Reagan’s handling of the situation was not adequate and that things were getting out of control (Morgan). He was inspired to write a book about his exasperation, and by reducing the differences between the two nations as a simple eating preference and using his trademark Seuss-ian terms to describe the weapons being built, he simultaneously showed how ridiculous the whole war was and made the book accessible to children. The inconclusive, uncharacteristically unhopeful ending accurately represented the situation and left the children to come up with their own conclusions and solutions to the rising conflict.

Although Dr. Seuss called The Butter Battle Book “the best book I’ve ever written,” it faced a large amount of controversy, as many great books do (Morgan). People were upset by its controversial topic and many sought to ban the book from libraries and bookstores (Morgan). One mother in Texas wrote to the publisher to express the feelings that she shared with many parents across the country. She called the book “the most blatant form of brainwashing I have ever encountered” (Morgan). Contrary to her belief, the book is not brainwashing at all, but rather is a realistic depiction of events in the world. It takes no sides and offers no solution, but rather encourages children to “start thinking and using the brain that God gave them,” as Seuss employee Janet Schulman wrote. The book was not banned and remains on the shelves of many bookstores and libraries as a cautionary tale about nuclear wars, in hopes that the next generation will not get into the arms race that the Reagan administration did.

Perhaps the most political and increasingly relevant of all Dr. Seuss books is The Lorax. The first pages of The Lorax show a boy visiting a deserted, polluted town and talking to a creature called the Once-ler. The Once-ler tells the little boy a story about how when he first came to the town, it was filled with beautiful, colorful Truffula Trees. The Once-ler immediately began chopping down the trees to use for a sweater-type thing called a Thneed, but a creature called the Lorax protests. The Lorax asks him to stop, but the Once-ler, who is consumed by greed, does not heed his request and builds factories to make his Thneeds. The town becomes increasingly polluted, forcing all of the animals to leave. Soon after their departure, all of the Truffula trees are chopped down, and the factories close, leaving the Once-ler alone with the Lorax, who flies away through a hole in the smog. Returning to the present, the Once-ler gives the little boy the last Truffula seed, and tells him to plant it, saying “Unless someone like you cares a whole awful lot, nothing is going to get better. It’s not.” The book has the unquestionable messages of environmental protection and anti-corporate greed. It paints a bleak picture of what the world could become if nothing is done to stop pollution. The story does not get bogged down with numbers and statistics, like so many environmental books do, but instead gives a representation of the dangers of disregarding the environment using bright pictures and simple words that kids can understand and be interested by. When it was published in 1971, sales for The Lorax were unusually slow for a Dr. Seuss book, leading many people to say that the book was ahead of its time (Morgan). This is true, but now, with the building concern about global warming and pollution, it is more relevant than it ever has been and is one of the most popular Dr. Seuss books. It has been used to support the Brazilian rainforests, the spotted owl, population limits, smog control and numerous other environmental ventures (Morgan).

When it was published, The Lorax received complaints from many loggers who claimed that it portrayed them negatively (Conradt). In 1989, after one California logger’s son came home from school after reading the book and questioned his father about his occupation, a campaign was started to attempt to remove the book from the second grade reading list (Morgan). This sparked controversy in the media, and the issue was ended with the schoolboard president saying “We are insulting our children! Who are we kidding?” As a rebuttal to the book, the Hardwood Forest Foundation and the National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association teamed up to write a book called The Truax, which tried to mimic Dr. Seuss’ illustrations and rhyme, while telling a story about a logger who convinces a creature called the Truax that loggers want the best for the environment and are not doing any harm (Birkett). Mysteriously, this book never became as popular as The Lorax. In response to all of protests from loggers, Dr. Seuss insisted that “The Lorax doesn’t say lumbering is immoral. It’s a book about going easy on what we’ve got. It’s antipollution and antigreed.”

The Lorax received different complaints fourteen years after its publication (Morgan). This time they were from the Ohio Sea Grant Program who took issue with the line “I hear things are just as bad up in Lake Erie” (Morgan). They wrote to Dr. Seuss about the cleanup of Lake Erie and the improvements made in water condition, asking him if he could change the line to past tense in future editions (Morgan). He respected their efforts and removed the line from all editions of the book printed after he received their letter (Morgan).

124 Dr. Seuss wrote great books for children. They have easy language for beginner readers to learn from, bright, fun illustrations, silly made up words and crazy characters. However, their importance goes beyond these things. In his books, Dr. Seuss simultaneously makes the boring Dick and Jane stories obsolete and gives his young audience an introduction to pressing political issues. The topics that he addresses, such as racism, pollution, war and equality were not only relevant at the time he was writing the books; their messages transcend generations and hold important lessons for current children, as well as children in the years to come.

Works Cited Baram, Marcus. “Horton’s Who: The Unborn?” ABC News. 17 Mar. 2008. ABCNEws Internet Ventures. 2 Feb. 2009. <http://abcnews.go.com/Entertainment/Story?id=4454256&page=1> Baruch, Dorothy. You, Your Children and War. New York, Appleton-Century, 1942.

Birkett, Terri. Truax. The Hardwood Forest Foundation and the National Oak Flooring Manufacturers Association1995.

Conradt, Stacy. “10 Stories Behind Dr. Seuss Stories.” CNN.com. 23 Jan., 2009. Cable News Network. 27 Jan. 2009. <http://www.cnn.com/2009/LIVING/wayoflife/01/23/mf.seuss.stories.behind/> Jenkins, Henry. “’No Matter How Small’: The Democratic Imagination of Dr. Seuss.” Hop on Pop: The Politics and Pleasures of Popular Culture. Eds. Henry Jenkins, Tara McPherson, Jane Shattuc. Durham, Duke University Press, 2002. 251-276.

Miller, John J. “The Good ‘Dr.’” National Review Online. 21 Nov. 2003. 20 Jan. 2009. <http://www.nationalreview.com/miller/miller200311210832.asp> “The Political Dr. Seuss.” Springfield Library and Museums Association. Traditional Fine Art Online Inc. 20 Jan. 2009. <http://www.tfaoi.com/aa/1aa/1aa291.htm> Seuss, Dr. Bartholomew and the Oobleck. New York, Random House Inc. 1976.

---. The Butter Battle Book. New York, Random House Inc. 1984.

---. The Cat in the Hat. New York, Random House Inc. 1986.

---. Horton Hears a Who. New York, Random House Inc. 1982 ---. The Lorax. New York, Random House Inc. 1999 ---. Sneetches and Other Stories. New York, Random House Inc. 1989.

---. Yertle the Turtle and Other Stories. New York, Random House Inc. 1986.

Lyon, Stephanie. “Politics in Children’s Literature: Ogden Nash, Shel Silverstein, and Dr. Seuss.” Associated Content. 18 Dec. 2006. Associated Content Inc. 20 Jan. 2009. <http://www.associatedcontent.com/article/101926/politics_in_childrens_literature_ogden.html?cat=37> Morgan, Judith and Neil Morgan. Dr. Seuss and Mr. Geisel: A Biography. United States of America, Da Kapo Press Inc. 1995.

125 Katie McLaughlin Craig Butz 20 February 2009 Research in the Community Record Labels vs. Artists & the Internet Radiohead: Lost the rights to 90% of their music to Capitol EMI. Coldplay: Released their two singles online for free, as a direct hit against EMI. Prince: Handed out his album with a Washington newspaper as an act of rebellion.

Record labels, such as Capitol EMI, continue to do sneaky and shocking things to their artists leading to Radiohead, Coldplay or Prince’s acts of independence. More and more label are prioritizing money over their clients, and artists are looking for ways to get their music heard independent from their labels, often turning to the internet. Sites like MySpace and PureVolume allow anyone to post their music, and allow anyone to listen. Unfortunately for record labels, this could put them out of business forever. As a result of record labels suppressing artists’ creative freedom, and the artists’ increasing ability to represent themselves on the internet, labels are becoming more and more obsolete.

When a record label such as Capitol EMI has over 45 artists signed, it becomes difficult for each individual artist to be heard (Capitol). Radiohead signed with Capitol EMI in 1991 and recorded their first six albums with them. In ’91, Radiohead was not their preferred band name, but Capitol EMI thought that Radiohead was catchier than their original name, On a Friday. This was just the beginning of a roller coaster ride of power struggle and creative restriction that Radiohead faced with their label (Solarski). The next ten years were very difficult for Radiohead, and although their music did not suffer, the band’s dynamic did. They fought so often, that they eventually split up for about a year in 2004, until they realized that the problem was with their label, not with each other. In 2004, Thom Yorke, the lead singer and songwriter of Radiohead, described the band’s frustration in their blog. “Today, myself, I was struggling, feels like we been trapped for a long time in La La land. Very frustrating.

And under pressure now it’s so slow. Enough to drive anyone loopy. I’m supposed to be positive” (Thom Yorke, Radiohead). Thom blogged this nearly a year before Radiohead broke their contract with Capitol EMI, which resulted in a cheap power-grab on the labels part. Because Radiohead broke their contract, they no longer owned the rights to any songs they had recorded and released with Capitol EMI. At that time, Radiohead was very popular, and only becoming more so, and Capitol took the opportunity to release all the songs they now owned, into two ‘best of’ albums. Along with the albums, four vinyl albums and a box set were also for sale, all profits going to Capitol EMI (Solarski). Unfortunately, because fans were not educated about the fact that these albums were not released by the band, they were huge hits, raking in money for the label. Radiohead took this opportunity to learn that their musical freedom and their fans should be top priority, and released their 2007 album In Rainbows free from a record label, and sold more copies than any of their previous albums (Tyrangiel). Radiohead’s controversy with Capitol EMI was no secret to the public. Thom Yorke often voiced every opinion he had about the label in interviews, or magazines.

Any fan knew that they were unhappy with the label. This may be why In Rainbows sold more copies than any previous ones had. Not only was this their first album in three years, but people who knew that the band was getting all the profit may have been more inclined to buy, rather than illegally download. Although Radiohead’s case was rather extreme, many artists face problems with their labels everyday, and are finding ways to deal with them.

Panic at the Disco is a band whose 2005 debut, A Fever You Can’t Sweat Out, quickly sold over 2 million copies. They became very popular not only for their sound, but for their good looks as well. Their label, Fueled by Ramen, took advantage of this by setting up interviews and appearances with teen magazines, in order to appeal to young teen girls (Hiatt). This disturbed the band, and they tried to break away from their teenage image. Spencer Smith, the drummer of Panic at the Disco, spoke about this at an interview with Sundance while at Abbey Road.

“This is way better than any interviews we ever did. Our own record label didn’t want us to do this show, but they want us to do every teenage magazine you could think of. So we said, we’re doing it, and if you can, come over here and physically stop us from walking in, and they didn’t” (Spencer Smith, Panic at the Disco). Over the few years that Panic at the Disco has been signed with their label, they have become unhappy with the direction that things have been going, and have been slowly breaking away from Fueled by Ramen. Linkin Park is a band that recently split from the label, Warner, because of creative differences. Warner asked the band to play at a show celebrating their big stock offering. Linkin Park, upset that their label asked them to play at the event, felt that Warner did not understand their wants at all. They split their contract with Warner later that year (Leeds). When bands like Radiohead and Linkin Park have the fan base and successful past to be able to leave a label where they are unhappy, this puts the labels at a huge disadvantage. Signing to a major label is starting to have a different meaning than it use to, and it seems that more and more artists are becoming unhappy with their labels.

126 The other main contributing factor of major labels’ decline is the internet. It has become easy to get music to the public; all it takes is a MySpace or PureVolume account (Butler). In 2004, Brendon Urie, the lead singer from Panic at the Disco, posted two songs their band had recorded on his PureVolume site. A few weeks later, Pete Wentz, song writer of Fall Out Boy, emailed Panic, telling them he was interested in signing them to his small label, Decaydance. Panic at the Disco already had a small following on their MySpace page, which really took off once their single was released in 2005 (Feldman). Their online success led them to a signing with a minor label. While many artists these days are starting their music career through the internet, many bands that got started before the internet, are now changing their ways, such as Radiohead. After their split with Capitol EMI, they spent three years writing and recording their latest album. During this time, the only promotion or advertizing for the release they had was through their website. On their blog, the lead guitarist, Jonny Greenwood, said in October 2007, “Hello everyone. Well, the new album is finished, and it’s coming out in 10 days. We’ve called it In Rainbows. Love from us all. Jonny” (Jonny Greenwood, Radiohead). Releasing their album without any long running advertizing or promotion was bold, but proved successful for them; In Rainbows sold more copies than any of their other albums (Tyrangiel). This is attributed to the fact that Radiohead put In Rainbows online at the price of whatever the customers choose. They gave their fans freedom to decide what the album was worth, the price averaging at 6$, which might be the most rebellious act against record labels they could have done. Coldplay released their single Viva La Vida and their music video Lovers in Japan for free on their website and on iTunes for the first six weeks of release (NME). When Coldplay decided to release them both for free, they were still signed to their label, Capitol EMI, which no doubt cost the label a lot of money. The internet has become a way for artists or aspiring artists to get their music out easily and successfully without the complications of labels or profit cuts.

Record labels have ruled the music industry for over fifty years, but they are starting to decline in today’s fast-paced internet world (Liebowitz). Although this transformation seems to be at beginning stages, meaning that not many major labels have gone out of business yet, it seems things are going in that direction. When popular bands like Radiohead, Panic at the Disco and Coldplay separate from their labels and manage themselves online, it sends the message to new aspiring artists that it is possible to be successful and make money in the music business while being independent from an oppressive recording label. If everyone wishing to make it in the music industry now can accomplish this through their computers, what is the need for the record labels? Self-promotion and alternate distribution have become the biggest fears of corporate record labels, and for a good reason. Because of the easy access of the internet, and because of unhappiness between artists and the labels, it seems that record labels will soon be obsolete.

127

Works Cited Butler, Elsa and Katya Soldak. “Record Labels Save Themselves”. 28 Mar. 2008. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://web.jrn.columbia.edu/newmedia/2008/masters/music/story_two.html> Capitol EMI Records. “Artists”. 10 Feb. 2009 < http://www.capitolrecords.com/home/artists.html#y> Dye, Davis. “Carbon/Silicon: Clash Guitarist Returns”. 17. Jan 2008. NPR. 29 Jan. 2009 < http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=18189749> Feldberg, Sarah. “Panic at the Disco joins the historic ranks at the Hard Rock”. 10 Oct. 2008. Las Vegas Weekly.

10 Feb. 2009 < http://www.lasvegasweekly.com/blogs/off-the-record/2008/oct/10/panic-disco-joins-historic-ranks-hardrock/> Hiatt, Brian and Evan Serpick. “The Record Industry’s Decline”. 28 June 2007. Rolling Stone.

22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.rollingstone.com/news/story/15137581/the_record_industrys_decline> Lamb, Bill. “Top 4 Major Pop Record Labels”. About.com. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://top40.about.com/od/popmusic101/tp/majorlabels.htm> Leeds, Jeff. “A Band Makes Its Case Against Record Label”. 9 May 2005. The New York Times. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nytimes.com/2005/05/09/arts/music/09linkin.html?pagewanted=print> Liebowitz, Stan. “Will Mp3 Downloads Annihilate the Record Industry? The Evidence so Far”. June 2003. Social Science Research Network. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://papers.ssrn.com/sol3/papers.cfm?abstract_id=414162> “Live From Abbey Road” The Sundance Channel. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sundancechannel.com/livefromabbeyroad/> “The Music Industry” 10 Jan. 2008. The Economist. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.economist.com/business/displaystory.cfm?story_id=10498664> “Coldplay Release Free ‘Viva La Vida’ Download”. 26 Dec. 2008. NME. 10 Feb. 2009 < http://www.nme.com/news/coldplay/41830> “Panic at the Disco, David Grey & Susan Vega” Live From Abbey Road. Spencer Smith. 25 Sept. 2008. The Sundance Channel. 24 Jan. 2009.

Paulius. “Record Labels Becoming Obsolete?” 20 Mar. 2007. Geekology. Blogspot. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://geekology-tech.blogspot.com/2007/03/record-labels-becoming-obsolete.html> “Radiohead: In Rainbows” 10. Oct. 2007. Dead Air Space. Radiohead.com. 4 Feb. 2009 < http://radiohead.com/deadairspace/index.php?a=292> “Ray LaMontagne, The Zutons, Shawn Colvin & Nerina Pallot” Live From Abbey Road. Ray LaMontagne. 5 July 2007. The Sundance Channel. 28 Jan. 2009.

“Record Companies Labels” 18 Sept. 2008. La Costa Music. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.lacostamusic.com/record-labels/recordcompany.htm> RIAA. “Who We Are”. 2 Feb. 2009 <http://www.riaa.com/aboutus.php> Solarski, Matthew. “Radiohead Best Of Details Revealed”. 3 Apr. 2008. Pitchfork. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.pitchforkmedia.com/article/news/49686-radiohead-ibest-ofi-details-revealed> Tyrangiel, Josh. “Radiohead Says: Pay What You Want”. 1 Oct. 2007. Time. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.time.com/time/arts/article/0,8599,1666973,00.html> “Why Record Companies Are Soon To Become Obsolete…” 29 Apr. 2008. AgencySpy. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.mediabistro.com/agencyspy/brands/why_record_companies_are_soon_to_become_obsolete_8 3467.asp>

128 Tommy Mitchel Craig Butz Researching the Community February 19, 2009 Disco: The Inescapable Escape Throughout history small unsung revolutions have occurred, led by the outcasts of society. Many of these revolutions succeeded in changing the society in which they took place, but some of them were eaten and consumed by popular culture, becoming what they so desperately wanted to change. Disco was one of these revolutions. Like many other counter cultures, disco was lead to its demise by its increasing commercialization and integration into pop culture; Disco was originally an escape for the oppressed members of society, but it eventually became inescapable.

The origin of the word disco comes from the French word, “Discotheque” meaning “record” which was also an underground club network in Paris in the late 1930s to 1940s. After World War II American soldiers brought discotheque culture back to America. During the 1950s in New York a few highly exclusive clubs sprang up that mixed the secrecy of the Parisian club world with a fusion of blues, early electronic synthesizers and beat looping.

These clubs were the original discos. These first few disco clubs were usually run out of apartments and houses and had extremely expensive fees and quickly became popular with the gay, African American, and Latino subcultures, all of which infused their flair into disco. (Oxford Encyclopedia of Music, Disco.) As disco gained popularity, exclusive disco clubs also sprung up in other multi-cultural and diverse cities such as San Francisco and Chicago.

The so called “golden age” of disco started in the mid 1960s. Disco had collected a strong and loyal fan base that revolved around its original members, the gays, Latinos, and African Americans and evolved into its own counter culture; a counter culture that was centered on long weekend nights, sexual promiscuity, and hard drug use.

The few discos that originally began the era morphed into a long chain of clubs that stretched across the major cities in the United States, all just as exclusive as the originals. White collar workers and what we would now call cubicle warriors lived double lives; they would spend the week working at their dead end jobs and would spend the weekends as an entirely different person. During those weekend nights one night stands, originating from the hippy movement in the 1960s, became common in the “wonderland of sexual promise” along with sporadic use of heavy drugs such as LSD and cocaine. (St. James Encyclopedia of Popular Culture, Disco.) Discos became an escape in which one could temporarily loose their regular identity, and don one of their own choice, enabling them to do whatever they please. Because disco offered this unique opportunity, it became a distinct counter culture.

This weekend night culture lasted up until the mid 1970s and was dubbed “The Decade of Saturday Nights” by its fans. Up until this time period, disco had been a counter culture that catered to a hardcore fan base but in 1975, disco exploded in pop culture mostly because of the movie “Saturday Night Fever” a popular movie about disco with a catchy disco soundtrack (Encyclopedia Britannica, Disco.). Suddenly disco was everywhere; It was on the radio, on TV, exploding in every club, and even in various advertisements; It was in, it was new, and most of all it was pop culture. It had slowly “saturated into the pop music market” and American culture. (Oxford Encyclopedia of Music, Disco.) All at once, disco was not exclusive anymore, and anyone could join in. The rapid advancement into pop culture was a shock that many of disco’s original fans couldn’t take. Disco was their own escape, their private world, and in a flash it had become inescapable.

As disco’s popularity increased, so did its enemies. Many white rock fans, feeling threatened by disco’s sudden rise to popularity, hated disco saying it “was gimmicky, banal and predictable” (The New York Times, Here’s to Disco, It Could Never Say Goodbye.) Since disco’s roots came from minorities and gays, racism and homophobia also threatened disco; it wasn’t straight and white, which made it stand out. As the disco hits started to wane, the anti-disco movement got bigger. On July 12 1979, an anti-disco riot erupted between the two games of a double header at Cominsky Field in Chicago. Hundreds of records were burned and 34 people were arrested. The disco craze was coming to an end. It had lost its original fan base and had become over commercialized. ''Disco was about escapism, but it became inescapable,'' said Barry Walters, a senior music critic at Rolling Stone. (New York Times, Here’s to Disco, It Could Never Say Goodbye.) Coupled with strong opposition, disco was on its last legs.

Fewer and fewer disco hits were recorded, and it slowly crept off the airwaves, out of TVs, and out of clubs. Almost as quickly as disco had become popular, disco died.

The saga of disco can be related to other counter cultures such as the emo culture of the early to mid 2000s.

Like disco, the emo trend started out as an escapeist counter culture, whose roots were in the oppressed members of society, namely gays and lesbians as well as other social outcasts. In the beginning it was an exclusive culture, with few members all of whom looked at emo as an escape for their persecuted lives. It existed on the fringes of society and was often made fun of by popular culture. It slowly grew by attracting other rejects from the fringes of society.

Gradually, it became commercialized just like disco, and lost its core fans while becoming part of pop culture. It

129 soon became fashionable and trendy. When its original base bled out, it eventually became an empty husk. It slowly lost popularity and faded away just like disco.

Disco was a unique and exclusive counter which was all about escapism. As it grew, it was eventually consumed by pop culture. As its original fans bled out, its enemies closed in and disco slowly died. Disco was a retreat for its oppressed members but eventually became inescapable.

Works Cited Binkley, Sam. "Disco." St. James Encyclopedia of Popular Culture. Ed. Sara Pendergast and Tom Pendergast. Vol. 1. Detroit: St. James Press, 2000. Gale Virtual Reference Library. Gale. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://go.galegroup.com/ps/start.d o?p=GVRL&u=san58140>.

Braunstien, Peter. “DISCO.” American Heritage. 2008. 22 Jan. 2009. <http:// www.americanheritage.com/articles/magazine/ah/1999/7/1999_7_43.shtml> David Brackett. "Disco." Grove Music Online. Oxford Music Online. 27 Jan. 2009 <http://www.oxfordmusiconline.com/subscriber/article/grove/music/46627>.

“Disco: A Decade of Saturday Nights” empsfm.org. 2008. Experience Learning Company. 27 Jan. 2009 <http://www.empsfm.org/exhibitions/index.asp?arti cleID=128> "Disco." Encyclopædia Britannica. 2009. Encyclopædia Britannica Online. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.search.eb.com/eb/article-9110265>.

“Disco Inferno.” The Independent. 11 Dec. 2004. 21 Jan. 2009. <http://www.independent.co.uk/news/world/americas/disco-inferno-6803 90.html> DiscoMusic.com 9 Jan. 2009. 22 Jan. 2009. <http://www.discomusic.com/101more/7124_0_7_0_C/> Discoguy. www.disco-disco.com 2003. 11 Jan. 2009. <http://www.discodisco.com/disco/history.shtml> Rietveld C., Hillegonda “The Body and Soul of Club Culture.” The Courier. 22 Jan. 2009. < http://www.unesco.org/courier/2000_07/uk/doss13.htm> Weinraub, Bernard. “Here’s to Disco, It Could Never Say Goodbye.” The New York Times. 10 Dec. 2002.

130 Caroline Muther Craig Butz Research in the Community 9 February 2009 Whole Foods in the Haight: A Battle for the Neighborhood They say you are what you eat. Is a neighborhood defined by the places it shops for what it eats? That’s a question raised by the controversy over bringing a Whole Foods store to Haight Street. In one sense, the conflict is about the grocery store. But in another sense, it is about who controls the neighborhood and what it will become.

Such fights are not unique to San Francisco. In Brooklyn, neighbors opposed the building of a Whole Foods store because of environmental problems (brownstoner.com). In Burbank, neighbors opposed a Whole Foods because the traffic would get in the way of their horses! As one horse lover stated, "We already see cars cutting off horses. It's dangerous. They're animals, they get spooked…. Mixing horses, bikes, and cars is a disaster" (Horse Sense).

While we do not have horses in San Francisco, we have had a bitter controversy over Whole Foods coming to the Haight. The story begins in 2006 when Cala Foods, located at the end of Haight Street across from Golden Gate Park, stopped operating. There are different explanations for why Cala closed. Calvin Welch, an activist a leader of the Haight Ashbury Neighborhood Council (HANC), believes that Cala closed because the owner of the property, John Brennan, steeply increased the rent. Ted Loewenberg, an activist in the Haight who favors development and is the president of the Haight Ashbury Improvement Association (HAIA), believes that Cala closed because there was new competition outside the neighborhood, and Cala was a “marginal business.” As Loewenberg explained, “Cala was used by street people as a 7-11 and to buy liquor. It was rare to see a family spend $150 on groceries” . In his view, the Haight needed a grocery store that would serve the new upscale neighborhood residents. According to Loewenberg, Whole Foods was the only supermarket to respond to the owner as a potential tenant. Welch told a different story: A local grocer approached Brennan, but Brennan was looking for an "equity partner," someone who would invest their money in the property. The local grocer didn’t have enough money to invest, according to Welch.

The different explanations given by Loewenberg and Welch reflect differences in the views and purposes of the two groups they represent, HAIA and HANC. According to Loewenberg, HAIA is “positioned as a resident group and merchant organization.” HAIA’s goal is to “create a better neighborhood environment” for families “in view of problems since the mid-60’s”. In other words, HAIA wants to clean the Haight of the street people and drug dealers to make it more family oriented.

HANC has a different purpose. According to Welch, HANC is a “community based organization that tries to run a service—recycling—and support other services,” such as the Boys and Girls Club and the library. Thus, HANC seeks to provide services for the people already living in the Haight, including poor families and street people. In a nutshell, it seems that one organization is trying to change Haight Street and the other is trying to preserve it.

The conflict between HAIA and HANC reflects an important change in the community. As C.W. Nevius wrote in his column in the San Francisco Chronicle, “Needless to say, the real issue isn’t groceries…. What’s really happened… is that the Haight has changed. It happened slowly, but in the last four or five years, everyone seemed to notice the change in the local demographic” (Nevius sfgate.com). For example, young families and professionals with higher incomes have moved into the Haight. Nevius quoted one such resident: “’When I bought my building here 22 years ago, there were no kids,’ Mike Holmes said. ‘Now there are 10 kids around me, and I love that.’ With the families and the homeowners comes an investment in the neighborhood” (Nevius. sfgate.com).

Loewenberg offered some historical background on the same phenomenon. He described how the Haight “went from a solid working class neighborhood to a near-slum in the span of 10 years,” the 60’s and 70’s. There was “an invasion of beatnicks from North Beach,” an “influx of drugs,” and over 25 years, “an overabundance of nonprofit service organizations dealing with homelessness, food, and medical issues.” In the late 90’s, “with the internet gold rush, many former apartment buildings reverted to ownership housing. People invested in housing.”

The neighborhood is in transition; Loewenberg and HAIA welcome and support these changes.

Viewed at a higher level, these changes show the effect of larger forces “in the city’s economic activity and employment base”: Blue-collar jobs are out, white-collar jobs are in… During the 1960’s and 70’s… jobs in the manufacturing and wholesale trade sectors dropped sharply in numbers… and were replaced by jobs in the real estate, insurance, retail trade, office, and financial sectors… By the mid-1990’s, only 15 percent of the city’s total work force of 513,300 fell into the category, “production, construction, operating, materials handling” (the blue-collar jobs). (Hartman 3)

131

Most of the other 85 percent were part of a “surge in white-collar employment” (Hartman 3). In other words, the changes in the Haight are part of the changes in The City, bringing in people who shop at places like Whole Foods.

With the gentrification of the Haight comes a conflict with the people who want to keep Haight Street as it is. To some neighborhood activists, chain stores are a threat to preserving a neighborhood’s personality. As Nevius wrote, “In 2006, voters passed proposition G, which states that before a chain store can move into a neighborhood, it is required to apply for a conditional use permit before the planning commission.” (Nevius). As part of the permit process, the law also requires an Environmental Impact Report (EIR), which “describes the environmental effects of the proposed project to allow the Planning Commission to make an informed decision on the project” (EIR 1).

The EIR on the Whole Foods project focuses on several issues, two of which are traffic and air quality. As to traffic, the EIR states that “the addition of project-generated traffic to the existing traffic on the network would result in a relatively small change in the average delay per vehicle at the study intersection…” (EIR 5). As to air quality, the EIR estimates that there would be 108 tons of green house gasses per year from new traffic and other sources. The EIR concludes that this amount is not damaging to the air quality because it is only 0.0001 percent of the Bay Areas total (EIR 10-11).

HANC and its allies opposed the conclusions of the EIR. For example, as to traffic, the Sierra Club criticized the EIR for basing their estimate of traffic on Cala Foods’ traffic peak. The problem they found was “that the project supermarket will bring in more traffic than the Cala Foods, being twice the size at 34,000 square feet” (Sierra Club 4). The Sierra Club also criticized the EIR for measuring the traffic estimates in November and December: “The highest levels of traffic at the project site are in the summer and early autumn months that are the season of large special events [in Golden Gate Park]” (Sierra Club 5). In addition, Bruce Wolfe, a neighbor, criticized the EIR about the emissions from the parking garage: “The EIR did not speak to the exhaust system that will be used to mitigate the carbon monoxide and other particulates that have nowhere to go from underground” (Wolfe 3). To address these issues, HANC and Welch proposed downsizing the building to keep it the same size as Cala was.

HANC and it allies’ opposition to the EIR did not succeed. On October 23, 2008, the Planning Commission gave Brennan a permit to go forward with the Whole Foods Project. Why did HAIA’s view prevail? Loewenberg gave this answer: “Overwhelming force and logic!” He explained that at the Planning Commission meeting, HAIA got 124 neighbors to show up in favor of the Whole Foods. According to Loewenberg, HANC only had 10 neighbors show up to oppose the Whole Foods. When asked, “What do you think of HANC’s proposal, keeping the building at its original size?” Loewenberg answered: “Financially, the deal would not make sense at 17,000 square feet. It would not be viable for Whole Foods’ business. In essence,” Loewenberg said, “HANC’s proposal was trying to kill the deal.”

Another alternative could have been a middle ground, halfway between Brennan’s proposal of 34,000 square feet and HANC’s proposal of 17,000 square feet: a building of 25,500 square feet. Making the store smaller than Brennan’s proposal would reduce the amount of traffic and the effect on air quality. At the same time, Whole Foods would still have a good size grocery store in order to have a viable business.

What does the conflict over Whole Foods mean? Loewenberg was clear: “The fight was not just about a grocery store, but about who controls the neighborhood. Since the old Haight Theater came down, Brennan has been in a battle to the death with Welch. If we won this battle, it would tip the balance of power in the neighborhood.”

Who knows whether Loewenberg is right? Welch believes that the economy is so bad that the Whole Foods project may not even be built. All anyone can say is that the battle between these competing organizations for the heart and soul of the Haight will continue.

132 Work Cited Farabee, Mindy. “Horse Sense.” 23 Nov. 2006 <http://www.lacitybeat.com/cms/story/detail/?id=4645&IssueNum=181>.

“HANC Hampers Whole on Haight.” SFist. 2006. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://sfist.com/2006/07/21/hanc_hampers_whole_on_haight.php>.

Hartman, Chester. City for Sale: the Transformation of San Francisco. Berkeley: University of California Press, Berkeley and Los Angeles, California. 2002.

Loewenberg, Ted. “Haight Street Activist.” Personal interview. 1 Feb. 2009 Nevius, C.W. “Old and New Clash over Supermarket in Haight.” SF Gate. 29 Jul. 2008 San Francisco Chronicle. 29 Jul. 2008 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2008/07/29/BARD120T84.DTL&hw=Whole+Foods+Haight&sn=005&sc=416>.

Nevius, C.W. "S.F.'s Metro Theater: Tired Preservation Tale." San Francisco Chronicle [San Francisco] 5 Feb. 09: B1.

Nevius, C.W. “Love the Clothes, Hate the Chain.” San Francisco Chronicle [San Francisco] 7 Feb. 09: A1 ‘No Love for Whole Foods in the Haight.’ 10 Aug. 2008 <http://earthfirst.com/no-love-for-whole-foods-in-the-haight/>.

San Francisco Planning Department, Draft Environmental Impact Report: 690 Stanyan Street. San Francisco, CA. 19 Jan. 2008 Shaw, Randy. ‘Haight Supermarket Fight Raises Bay Area-wide Issue.’ 12 Jul. 2006 <http://www.beyondchron.org/news/index.php?itemid=3473>.

Sierra Club. “Sierra Club Comments to EIR 690 Stanyan Street Mixed Retail/Residential Project.” 10 Mar. 2008.

(Obtained from Calvin Welch, 29 Jan. 2009) Welch, Calvin. "Haight Street Activist." Personal interview. 29 Jan. 2009 ‘Whole Foods Facing an Uphill Battle in Gowanus.’ 4 Jun. 2007 <http://www.brownstoner.com/brownstoner/archives/2007/06/whole_foods_fac.php>.

Wolfe, Bruce. Statement on EIR for 690 Stanyan Street, Submitter: Bruce Wolfe, 1951 Page Street. (Obtained from Calvin Welch, 29 Jan. 2009)

133 Michael Nadelman 2/12/09 Research in the Community The Nightmare Suffered by Many but Known by Few Homelessness is a horrible situation that 700,000 to 2,000,000 people find themselves in every single night in the United States of America (Homelessness). What’s even more disturbing is that most of the people who are homeless have an extremely difficult time improving their circumstances, because they commonly experience poor health due to many factors such as alcohol and drug addiction and the harshness of the outdoors.

Homelessness has been around almost all of human existence (Snow 10). It is most frequently found in large cities (Bender 19), which is most likely because of the public’s perception of higher abundance of jobs and social services available to help people. Homelessness is so widespread that during the five year span of 1985 to 1990, a grand total of 8.5 million Americans were homeless (Bender 17). People who are most at risk of becoming homeless and those who are already homeless are usually poorly educated and have low incomes (Bender 19). It is a vicious cycle, because a poor education is a result of a low income, and a low income is the result of poor education. Tragically, children are among those who suffer so deeply. Children can become homeless many different ways. They become homeless either because they run away, are rejected by their parents, or those who become too old to stay in foster care (Brickner 9). While they are homeless, they miss out on opportunities that are available to the average child. Homeless children are alienated from their families, and in the end lack job skills and education (Brickner 9). Job skills and education are both completely necessary to function in civilized society.

Without both of these skills, the homeless children cannot succeed, and will remain homeless. However, not all children that are homeless are completely alone. In many cases an entire family can become homeless. A homeless “family” usually consists of a woman with two to three children without a home because of fire, eviction, economic bad luck, or abuse (Brickner 9). What makes the situation more difficult is that often the woman is pregnant (Brickner 9). In some cases even the older children are pregnant (Brickner 9). It is a terrible tragedy to become homeless.

While people are homeless, they suffer through atrocious conditions. It is common to find homeless people wrapped in jackets and soiled blankets sleeping in weeds and dirt (Snow 75). These poor living conditions lead to other problems as well. For instance, untreated injuries are a huge problem. A description of a homeless man states that his “clothes are soaked, he’s shivering, and his right hand is wrapped in a bloody rag” (Snow 5). In addition, they are plagued by an extreme lack of hygiene. A homeless man named Hoyt Page described the cleanliness of other homeless people he came in contact with. He said “sometimes guys puke on themselves, or they shit on themselves” (Snow 73). This lack of hygiene is detrimental to their health. In fact, people who lack shelter are at serious risk (Brickner 3). The disease rate for homeless people is exponentially higher than for those who have a home (Brickner 3). This high rate of disease is most likely brought upon by the prominence of infection. Infection is a widespread problem for homeless people (Brickner 4). The constant exposure to the outdoors without any protection can bring disturbing results. A homeless woman was bitten by a brown recluse spider and suffered from two ulcerated sores (Snow 76). She also had to fight off fire ants while sleeping outside (Snow 76). Many are affected by the harsh outdoors. A homeless man was described to reek of stale urine and have a violent coughing fit that caused the other homeless people around him to fear that he would pass out (Snow 4). With all the infections and diseases going around it’s no wonder that the results of a study showed that the average life expectancy for a homeless person is fifty-one years, which is twenty years below the average life expectancy (Brickner 4).

Tragically, not only the health of homeless people is poor. They also live in a terrible environment. Their poverty forces them to steal, even from one another. Statistics show that thirty eight percent of homeless people have been robbed (Homelessness). A homeless man “winced as his bare feet hit the wet, cold pavement, and… vowed to find the bastard who stole his shoes” (Snow 5). His only pair of shoes had been stolen, leaving his feet prone to the miserable concrete, cold and heat. Many homeless people come to harm due to the lack of protection a home can give them. Twenty-two percent of homeless people have been physically assaulted, and seven percent of homeless people have been sexually assaulted (Homelessness). While they are stuck between a rock and a hard place, it is almost impossible to climb out. This is partly because most of them are unemployable due to various reasons such as addictions and untreated mental disorders (Baker 35). If they can’t make money, it’s impossible for them to live comfortably. For those who actually do have jobs, it isn’t much better. In a 1996 National Survey of Homeless Assistance Providers and Clients, it showed that single homeless people earned an average income of three hundred forty-eight dollars per month from various jobs (Homelessness). In a day that’s only about twelve dollars, and in a year it only adds up to $4176. On twelve dollars a day without any extras, it would mean breakfast, lunch, and dinner could cost only four dollars each. With extras, such as the need for alcohol or drugs, it would be even less money that could go towards food. With extras, such as the need for alcohol or illegal drugs, even less

134 money might be available for food. According to a 1996 National Survey of Homeless Assistance Providers and Clients, twenty-eight percent of homeless people don’t get enough to eat daily (Homelessness). The lack of protection, jobs, and income apparently are some of the reasons why thirty percent of all homeless people have been homeless for two or more years (Homeless). It would seem as if once you become homeless, it is almost impossible to escape.

Sadly, the conditions preceding their homeless situation are not much better. Some people become homeless because of natural disasters such as earthquakes, floods, and hurricanes. Others flee their home countries for political reasons (Snow 7). Although these seem as though they would be a major factor in homelessness, there is a more outstanding reason. Poverty is one of the most prominent reasons for homelessness. In 2005, thirteen and a half percent of Americans lived in poverty, which totaled up to 38,231,521 Americans living in poverty (Why are People Homeless). Thirty-six percent of those people that live in poverty are children (Why are People Homeless).

In the past twenty to twenty-five years, the rapid reduction in affordable rental housing caused an increase in poverty (Why are People Homeless). In fact 2.2 million low-rent units vanished from the market between 1973 and 1993 (Why are People Homeless). This lack of affordable housing has created much more difficulty in finding homes, which has resulted in an increase in the number of homeless people. Poverty also increased because of decreasing opportunities for employment and the reduction in public assistance (Why are People Homeless). With the increase in the cost of housing and the lack of jobs, it’s no wonder there is a large number of homeless people.

Unfortunately, poverty, natural disasters, and political unrest are not the only causes for homelessness.

Another reason people become homeless is because they cannot function well in society. There are many factors that contribute to this flaw, but the most prominent are ailments. Specifically, homelessness results from drug abuse, alcoholism, chronic illness, disability, and mental illness (Bender 31). These problems affect a large percentage of homeless people. It is calculated that sixty-six percent of all homeless people have problems with alcohol, drug abuse, or mental illness (Homelessness). As a result of these problems, many other problems appear.

While the person is focused on satisfying cravings for alcohol or drugs, they can’t focus on getting a job. If those with addictions have a job, all their money goes towards drugs and alcohol, instead of other useful items like toothbrushes or healthy foods. In addition, many people are unemployable due to their addictions(Bender 35).

Mental illness is also prominent in homeless people. Just about a quarter of all homeless people suffer from mental illness (Bender 35). If the homeless person’s mind is not functioning correctly, they cannot set priorities or take care of themselves. Any person who has an addiction to drugs or alcohol or who has a mental disability has a difficult time functioning in society, and to deal with that burden without a home must be intolerable.

Luckily for them, there are many who care about their well being. In places such as Washington, D.C., people have set up shelters that could house 11,000 single adults and 2,400 families for forty million dollars a year (Bender 30). Although some shelters seem to help, most emergency shelters appear not to work very well. Rather than centering their attention around shelters, a lot of organizations that focus on the homeless population work towards prevention (Preventing). For those who focus their abilities on preventing homelessness, research shows that they should involve local government, as well as public agencies that should help coordinate and refer people to homeless programs (Preventing). They should also perform gap analysis in order to determine the character of the homeless and potential homeless to find out the type of services that would be most needed such as rental assistance and employment opportunities (Preventing). Plus, they should hire people who have experience with coordinating various funding streams, especially federal grants (Preventing). On top of that, they should increase the number of providers of mainstream services like health clinics, public assistance offices, and food pantries that know how to integrate homeless awareness (Preventing). Finally, they should provide rural homeless families with short-term shelter and rental assistance funds because rural homeless are usually homeless for a shorter period amount of time (Preventing). This is because rural shelters have to go through more difficult outreach to find the families in need (Preventing). Hopefully with all of this help, the number of homeless people can drop significantly.

Homelessness is most often fueled by poverty, lack of housing and jobs, alcohol and drug addiction, and mental disabilities. It affects men, women, and children, and is equally detrimental to all of them. Once people are homeless, it is very difficult for them to get back on their feet. With help from others, it is possible to end the nightmare.

135 Citation Bender, David, Bruno Leone, and Tamara L. Roleff, eds. The Homeless. San Diego: Greenhaven P, 1996.

Brickner, Philip W., Linda Keen Scharer, Barbara A. Conan, Marianne Savarese, and Brian C. Scanlan. Under the Safety Net: The Health and Social Welfare of the Homeless in the United States. New York: W. W. Norton & Company, 1988.

"Homelessness." Homelessness. Almanac of Policy Issues. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.policyalmanac.org/social_welfare/homeless.shtml>.

"Preventing Homelessness in America." Homelessness in America: Statistics and Prevention Programs. 2003.

Solutions for America. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.solutionsforamerica.org/thrivingneigh/homelessness.html>.

Snow, David A., and Leon Anderson. Down on Their Luck. Los Angeles: University of California P, 1993.

"Why are People Homeless?" National Coalition for the Homeless. June 2008. National Coalition for the Homeless.

22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nationalhomeless.org/publications/facts/why.html>.

136 Abigail Nowell Craig Butz Research in the Community 20 February 2009 Sitting Still Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder and Attention Deficit Disorder is an obstacle that many teens and children face today. Now we have a greater understanding of what it is chemically, and we also have answers that help the minds of these people. Parents need to understand what ADD is, and how they can help their child if they are diagnosed. This is a symptom in so many children, and has to be taught, so there are no misconceptions about these children who are affected with this learning disorder. I have myself am one of them, and was diagnosed when I was eleven years old. This has created a great learning obstacle that I have had to overcome, but with help it has been effortless.

Before ADHD WAS discovered, these children were ridiculed and looked down upon because they could not focus, sit still, and in many cases were unable wrap their mind around the information. This made it hard for them to do well in school. In 1845 Dr. Heinrich Hoffman discovered signs of his disorder. This was the first glace of ADHD, and it really concerned him. At this time it was not called ADHD, it had not name. He saw his son unable to read a poem that he had just written, not because he was illiterate, but because he was one of the millions of unknown kids affected with ADHD. This caused great concern with Dr. Hoffman, and he wondered why his son could he not focus. He wrote a personal document about it, because there were too many possibilities that he could have linked it to. He happened to have stumbled upon this disorder simply unintentionally, and left it because it was such a difficult subject to explore. However the doctors at the time were finding information that was irrelevant to this disease. They believed that it was not to do with the brain, as well as thinking that these children were not intelligent. Not until the early twentieth century was it further explored, as it surfaced in so many more children.

New doctors began to realize that what had been discovered was false, because these children were in many cases brilliant and creative. At this point it was found that ADHD are located in the brain. Even then it was a sensitive subject that struck many people as a scam. Only today has it reached a global audience with the true meaning and concern (ADHD, NIMH).

It is very easy to jump to the conclusion that when someone is having trouble reading or learning a difficult subject that they are unintelligent. This is one of the most common misconceptions among children with ADHD. What so many people do not realize is that many of the children who are affected are creative and intelligent kids who are trying their hardest. For myself, I am so creative and love that personality trait in me, without it I would not be the same person. When I was first diagnosed at eleven years old I was laughed at because I had such trouble reading out load in class. I also had a difficult time with math and would look like an idiot trying to understand it.

What is so difficult about this learning disorder is that it holds children back from learning to their full potential, creating a huge obstacle that they all have to overcome with help.

Many young parents and teachers worry that their child is affected with this learning disorder, but what they don’t realize is that it is not a destructive disorder, but rather something that is very treatable. Parents detect false signs of ADHD in their children when they hear they have a child that is disruptive as well as a distraction to others in the class. Charles Roth says “In many cases these kids are doing this because they want attention, and in other cases it happens because they have the disorder”(Roth). When teachers detect these signs it is easy for them to shift their behavior towards that child. This can mean treating them differently so that they feel dumb or unintelligent, causing them to stop trying. Teachers need to realize that ADHD is dangerous and that these children need to be treated the same way around their friends. This leads to so many problems, such as being disliked by friends, hurt by the teacher, giving up and so much more. In my case I felt personally attacked for having something that beyond my control and I felt just the same as other kids. I was really frustrated at the fact that my friends were being treated better then I was and I had not done anything intentional. ADHD is already such a huge educational road block, that adding in something else onto that is too much for children to handle.

We all know that we can dose off, not pay attention, and have a hard time focusing, but for many children this is a daily habit that is uncontrollable without help. "Your child has a persistently high activity level that interferes with relationships or causes personal injury or injury to others"(Teens with ADHD). Children with ADHD can harm other children unintentionally because of their hyperactive active behavior. This is what can cause disruption within friends, teachers, family and classmates. On the other hand children without the ADHD may not physically hurt another child, but would say something to a friend inadvertently that could deeply affect his or her emotional feelings (Teens with ADHD). The most common symptoms of ADHD are Inattention, Impulsivity, Impatience, Fidgeting, distractibility, Interrupting and Hyperactivity. Children are usually acting with one of these symptoms most of the time (National Youth Network). This can really hurt children’s friendships because of their

137 unintentional words. As friendships are extremely important, they are also a great tool of encouragement and losing them is never easy.

Millions of children, teens and adults are affected around the globe with this learning disorder. As school becomes much more demanding in junior and high school children with ADHD are put to the test. Emily Algire is a high school student who all of her life has struggled with the pros and cons of ADHD. “Emily didn't act out or cause problems. She was shy and creative” Says Betty Overby, Emily’s mother. Like many teens with ADHD, Emily is extremely creative. It became apparent to Emily’s mother in the sixth grade when she failed to turn in two large projects that she had labored over for hours on. Her teachers were also noticing that she understood most of the material but was unable to complete the assignments. Emily just could not sit down, focus and plow through her school work. Betty Overby says “Emily's behavior was such a mystery to her own detail-oriented mind. Betty had a bright child, who just couldn't keep it together academically”. So Emily resorted to an answer that many children with this disorder do, try medication. This had a negative affect on her, making her very nauseous as well as not eating. Emily had to over come her ADHD by working with a counselor and therapist for tips and ways to talk to teachers. Today she living with her condition and excelling in college (National Public Radio).

The answer for many children struggling with ADHD is a stimulant or non stimulant drug. Medications such as Adderall, Ritalin, Dexedrine, and Concerta help so many by calming down their mind. These drugs are taken either once or twice a day and are out of your system by the end of the day. The other type of drug is a non stimulant and that usually takes about two weeks to take affect. These were originally designed to help with children with depression. Studies in the mid 1980’s showed it helped ADHD as well. However, these medications need to be prescribed by doctors who understand the chemistry of that individual, because too high of a dose can tamper with the child’s activity level. These medications are not tranquilizers or sedatives; however many people perceive them to be. I know how much I have benefited from this drug, and how much it has helped me. I have learned how to control my actions as well as learning how and when to say things (About Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder).

I myself have been affected first hand with ADD, and understand what millions of children experience everyday. Without a doubt this has been an obstacle, and something that I have been ridiculed and laughed at for.

However it also adds to my bubbly personality, I give it credit for my outstanding creative talent, and for more reasons that I can explain I would not change it for the world.

138 Works Cited "About Attention Deficit Hyperactivity Disorder-ADD/ADHD in Children - causes, treatment, parenting. "Child Development Institute - Keeping Parents Informed on child development, psychology, parenting. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.childdevelopmentinfo.com/ADHD/index.shtml>.

"ADHD: What Parents Should Know -- familydoctor.org." Familydoctor.org Home -- familydoctor.org. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://familydoctor.org/online/famdocen/home/children/parents/behavior/118.html#ArticleParsysMiddleC olumn0007>.

"ADD and ADHD attention deficit hyperactivity disorder." National Youth Network - Wilderness Therapy Boarding Schools - Residential Treatment - Help for Troubled Teens. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nationalyouth.com/add.html>.

"ADD & ADHD in Children: Recognizing the Signs and Symptoms." Helpguide.org: Mental Health, Relationships, Healthy Lifestyles, Aging. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.helpguide.org/mental/adhd_add_signs_symptoms.htm>.

Hallowell, Edward M. The Childhood roots of adult happiness. New York City: Random house, 2002. "attention-deficit/hyperactivity disorder n." A Dictionary of Psychology. Andrew M. Colman. Oxford University Press, 2006. Oxford Reference Online. Oxford University Press. The Bay School. 26 January 2009 <http://www.oxfordreference.com/views/ENTRY.html?

Hallowell, Edward M., and John J. Ratey. Delivered From Distraction. New York City: Random house, 2005.

Jost K. "Learning disabilities." 10 Dec. 1993. CQ press. The Bay School Library, San Francisco. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://http://library.cqpress.com/cqresearcher/document.php?id=cqresrre1993121000&type=hitlist&num= 6>.

"Teens with ADHD — CONCERTA®." CONCERTA approved by the FDA for the treatment of ADHD in children and adults. CONCERTA. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.concerta.net/concerta/pages/teens.jsp>.

"NIMH · ADHD · Complete Publication." NIMH · Home. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nimh.nih.gov/health/publications/adhd/complete-publication.shtml>.

"The Effect of ADHD on Educational Outcomes." National Bureau of Economic Research. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nber.org/aginghealth/summer04/w10435.html>.

"Learning To Thrive With Attention Deficit Disorder : NPR." NPR : National Public Radio : News & Analysis, World, US, Music & Arts. 18 Sept. 2008. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=94727139>.

139 AJ Parr Craig Butz Research in the Community February 12, 2009 From the Streets of Haight-Ashbury; To the Use of Psychedelic Drugs Before the present, clean and hip, new-age movement, there was the hippie culture with sex, psychedelic drugs and rock and roll. Nothing represents the hippie movement more than the Haight-Ashbury district. Why are people attracted to Haight-Ashbury? The answer is, to experience the culture of love, drugs, and freedom from the “real” world. The hippie culture of Haight-Ashbury dates back to the 1960s. Haight-Ashbury has a very distinct culture consisting of love, sex, long hair, psychedelic clothes with tie dye and peace sign accessories, and lots and lots of drugs. But, the real question is: why Haight-Ashbury, why does this district of San Francisco have this crazy reputation? Haight-Ashbury is home to many famous musicians, historical festivals, as well as a place for people to relax and be accepted unconditionally. “Tune in, Turn on, Drop out”, coined by Timothy Leary in the 1960s, was their motto (History). This phrase was very important to the young, mainly white hippies who shared a hatred of middle-class values and authority such as valuing eastern religions such as Buddhism, but the hippies of HaightAshbury had their own belief and spiritual minds. In Haight-Ashbury drugs were, by no means, uncommon, but that is not what it was all about. The Grateful Dead’s Bob Weir described Haight-Ashbury in the 1960s as “…a ghetto of bohemians who wanted to do anything—and we did, but I don’t think it has happened since. Yes, there was LSD. But Haight-Ashbury was not about drugs. It was about exploration, finding new ways of expression, being aware of one’s existence” (Lenzbreaker). Although Weir’s assessment of the Haight-Ashbury District was right, in that, the experiment that flourished in the 1960s is now a mere echo, the evolution of the Haight-Ashbury district offers insight into the ebb and flow of drug culture in modern American society.

Many people came to Haight-Ashbury, not just for the drug culture, but for the culture of love and to protest the Vietnam War. In the 1970s young people were beginning to get more and more involved with the antiwar movement, with picketing and protesting. They played music, used art and street theater to influence the sayings “Tune in, Turn on, Drop out” and “Make Love not War” to all the people (History). Drugs were still a big part of Haight-Ashbury’s culture, and they still are. Although, back in the 60s it wasn’t hard to get away with smoking joints, now teenagers can’t even legally smoke a cigarette. There was a completely different scene back then and it will always be what Haight-Ashbury is known for. Originally, people didn’t come to Haight-Ashbury for the culture and the drugs, but once those things evolved, people fell in love and became attached and didn’t want to leave.

There were several different occasions and reasons that people came from all over to the Haight-Ashbury district.

Many people migrated to Haight- Asbury after 1906 earthquake and fire because Haight was undamaged. (Nelson W). People also came from other places, but mainly North Beach; looking for cheap rent and a place to live (Nelson W). The hippie movement attracted anti-establishment types of people from around the world (Nelson W). In 1967 the Haight-Ashbury district became one of the most popular growing areas for the tens of thousands of American youths known as “flower children” (Christensen). Haight-Ashbury was the center for the 60s hippie counterculture.

There were several icons of the hippie era. Jerry Garcia, The Grateful Dead, Janis Joplin and Jefferson Airplane. All of these musicians were very well known in the Haight-Ashbury district because they considered it their home. Janis Joplin lived on Haight Street, where she took her last drop of acid. Now her house is turned into a rehabilitation center. Janis Joplin was a major musical influence to today’s society; her bluesy style attracted the hippies of Haight-Ashbury. The Grateful Dead, also known as the Warlocks, made a big impact on the hippies of Haight-Ashbury; they have been the focal point for acidheads in 1965 (Cohen). But this reputation was not intentional. The only reason that Jerry Garcia got into hard drugs was because he couldn’t leave his hotel room because of all of his publicity (Vulliamy). But other wise the Grateful Dead was known as the “San Francisco Sound”.

Between 1965 and 1975 an estimated 10 to 30 million people had taken LSD on average around six times (Cohen). When people think of Haight-Ashbury they think of LSD and the most common and frequently used, illegal drug, marijuana. Today marijuana is all over the streets of the Haight-Ashbury district, with many smoke shops just in the Haight-Ashbury district, several cannabis clubs, and hundreds of dealers and smokers. HaightAshbury was nicknamed “Hashbury” because of the psychedelic music and drug scene. Now, drugs are very commonly used in the Haight-Ashbury district, but are not necessarily known for people using drugs throughout the streets. The people who do drugs are not as out in the open. Now, it is more of an underground drug scene. In 1967 most common drug was marijuana, many also used hallucinogens, which are drugs or chemicals that causes a person to have hallucinations. (Christensen). Another drug that was very commonly used in 1967 was anti-depressants; this was the most used drug in 1967 (Christensen). Then, Haight-Ashbury was very calm and quiet, but it wasn’t until methamphetamines were introduced that the peaceful nature and profile of Haight-Ashbury would change. In 1970

140 the use of hard drugs increased. Failure to maintain property, and number of homeless people increased (Christensen). Even though there are many drugs that people used during this time the drug scene started with pure LSD (Vulliamy). After LSD, the main drug was Acid. Joel Selvin, a writer for SFGate said, “As the party began the drugs of choice changed”. Speed was the next epidemic. Speed is what started the new culture of Haight-Ashbury, other whys known as, Summer of Love.

Summer of Love was thousands of people dancing and grooving to the bands that were playing. Selvin said that is seemed that most of the audience was on LSD, even the musicians. Even though speed is what started this epidemic, LSD was still highly used. LSD was the secret ingredient to Summer of Love. The Summer of Love became a historical moment of the 1960s. This gathering of young people is often considered to have been a social experiment, because of alternative lifestyles that became common, both during the summer itself and during other years. In 1967 Summer of Love brought lots of “flower children” to the Haight-Ashbury district (Christensen). On the other hand, there were also some negative aspects of Summer of Love. It was not all love. A few years after the first Summer of Love Haight-Ashbury started to become unsafe. It became unsafe to walk on at night because the streets were filled with drug addicts. Other people just considered Summer of Love as kids getting hooked on drugs and getting easy access to them. Some people thought that Summer of Love was a scary and traumatic experience from having bad drug trips, being raped or abused, or having drug overdoses (Christensen). Because so many people came to the Haight-Ashbury district there was overcrowding which resulted in “Death of a Hippie” protest parade (History). This parade occurred in the 1970s as the hippie culture began to fade.

Most of Haight-Ashbury’s drug culture occurred on Hippie Hill. Hippie Hill is located at the very end of Haight Street on Stanyan and Kezar Dr. in Golden Gate Park. . It is a hill where people go and relax and are free spirited and open minded. Hippie Hill is home to San Francisco’s ‘alternative’ lifestyles (Lenzbreaker). This is because almost every lifestyle is accepted on Hippie Hill, home-less, drug addict, musician, gay, straight, transgender, hippie, rapper, stoner, anything (Lenzbreaker). Drug use and drug dealing on Hippie Hill is very common and frequent. Even though drug use is illegal police very rarely arrest anyone on Hippie Hill. Lenzbreaker feels that this is because this is a place where boundaries and borders do not exist.

The Haight-Ashbury district has changed in lots of ways but is still very similar to back in the 60s and 70s.

People still walk down the street wearing psychedelic clothes, tie dye, peace sign accessories, with long hair, and tripping out on many drugs. Back then freedom of choice was a luxury of the past (Pringle). The Haight-Ashbury is not filled with your typical hippie any more. Yes, there as some remains of the 60s but now there are lots of tourists, and touristy stores, more wealthy people and people are not as open minded. Because of Summer of Love the Haight-Ashbury area still shows signs of drug use, violence, and prostitution (Christensen). Now Haight-Ashbury is just a shadow of what it was like in the 1960s and 1970s.

141 Bibliography Cohen, Allen. Summer of Love. Rockument.com. 2008. Tony Bove. 28 Jan. 2009/ <http://www.rockument.com/sumlove.html> Didio, Joan. Slouching Towards Bethlehem. New York: The Macmillan Company. 1924 Ellis Christensen, Tricia. Why is Haight and Ashbury well known? Wise Geek. 2003. Conjecture Corporation. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://www.wisegeek.com/why-is-haight-and-ashbury-well-known.htm> Harrison, Hank. Dead. Los Altos, CA: The Archives Press. 1972 History. Hippies. History Made Everyday. 2008. A&E Television Networks. 27 Jan. 2009. <http://www.history.com/states.do?action=detail&state=Hippies&contentType=State_Generic&contentId= 56748&parentId=1968 Lenzbreaker. SF Oddities: Hippy Hill. Lenzbreaker’s Web Log. 1 May 2008. WordPress.com 28 Jan. 2009. <http://lenzbreakr.wordpress.com/2008/04/15/sf-oddities-hippy-hill/> Nelson W., Lee. San Francisco’s Haight-Ashbury District. iNaTours.com. 2001. 26 Jan. 2009. <http://www.inetours.com/Pages/SFNbrhds/Haight_Ashbury.html> Perry, Charles. The Haight Ashbury. New York: Wenner Books. 2005 Pringle, Colin. Colin’s Haight Ashbury Archives. wild-bohemian.com. 1995. 27 Jan. 2009 <http://wildbohemian.com/archives.htm> Selvin, Joel. Summer of Love 40 Years Later. SFGate. 21 May 2007. Hearst Communications Inc. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2007/05/21/DDG0MPU2OS1.DTL> Virtual Tourist. Haight District. Virtualtourist.com. 31 July 2008. VirtualTourist.com Inc. 27 Jan. 2009. <http://www.virtualtourist.com/travel/North_America/United_States_of_America/California/San_Francisc o-755471/Things_To_Do-San_Francisco-HAIGHT_District_Ashbury-BR-1.html> Vulliamy, Ed. Love and Haight. The Observer. 20 May 2007. Guardian News and Media Limited. 27 Jan. 2009. <http://www.guardian.co.uk/music/2007/may/20/popandrock.features8>

142 Deahna Scobie Craig Butz Research in the Community February 5, 2009 Graffiti: A Therapeutic Art You’re casually walking down the street and you suddenly hear the click of a spray can and then the sound of running feet. You turn the corner and see the fresh, almost illegible marks of a black spray can on the white wall of your local grocery store. Is this vandalism or a cry for help? A destructive act or therapeutic art? Although a great majority of people look at graffiti as vandalism, it is also a form of self-expression and can be therapeutic for those who do it.

The stereotypical graffitists are often described as rebellious, lost, ignorant, defiant, and maybe even dangerous. A news report in the New York Times headlines their article in a fashion that describes a bridge as a battlefield and a spray can as a type of weaponry. “The battlefield? The newly completed Spruce Street Bridge in Paterson, where battle lines were drawn before traffic lines. The weapon? The ubiquitous spray can.” This editorial introduces the graffiti as “scribbling” and “ugly”, but does the author stop to think of what may have caused the graffitists to make their marks on that particular bridge? (DeLuccia A. 28). In most news, it is assumed that graffiti artists do what they do simply to anger the store owners and the government, or simply to create uproar and destroy property. What if there is something other than the need of destruction and ignorance underneath the rebellious surface of a graffiti artist?

There have been many theories which explain why classic artists create art; these theories can be analyzed to draw conclusions about the reason of a graffiti artist’s art. According to Freud, the artist gains pleasure from representing unrealistic ideas through real art to release the pressure on their natural instincts (Dalley 73). Freud also stated that art comes from “a primitive psychic apparatus which had the function of regulating states of tension, by discharging instinctual impulses” (Dalley 22). Freud believed that people have a subconscious function which regulates tension by following instincts, which for some means creating art. “All art is symbolic by its very nature and it is a symbolic expression of the artist’s phantasy life” (Dalley 78). The artist grasps important ideas from their imagination and abbreviates those ideas into a symbol, or a work of art. Melanie Klein, a psychoanalyst, believes that “an artist’s aim is always, even if he is not quite aware of it himself, to create a new reality” (Dalley 79). This repetitive theme of creating a new reality or fantasy world can be applied to the art of graffiti. Graffiti artists can use their spray can or marker to escape their current reality, and to make images from their imagination real. This type of treatment can be categorized as therapeutic.

Art therapy is the process by which a patient uses a variety of art media to express ideas or feelings that are difficult to express verbally (Dalley 1). Many types of patients participate in art therapy, such as the chronically ill, people with AIDs, people with physical disabilities, people in rehab, and numerous others. Even in history, art has been used as a self-expression and communication tool. “Making marks is an activity common to all human beings.

Since ancient times, humans have drawn, carved and scratched as forms of individual expressions and communication” (Dalley 50). In art therapy, the process of making art and the final product are equally important.

The therapist and patient use the process and product to distinguish personality traits of the patient. Therapy also provides a means by which a patient can “reveal what they’re feeling and don’t consciously know” (Kobren 8). Art therapy embodies the thoughts and feelings of ones mind, consciously and subconsciously, and allows a positive form of self expression.

Similarly, through graffiti artists can express their inner emotions. With a spray can and wall, or marker and canvas, feelings and ideas can are poured from the mind of the artist into something visual and tangible. They use their ability to create art as a method of channeling their emotions in a constructive way, as opposed to a destructive activity. “The graffitists have this opportunity to communicate and express their emotions in some way other than blowing up. They feel better about themselves and the world around them” (DeLuccia A. 28). Graffiti provides therapeutic results in allowing the artist to express their feelings. People who find their circumstances dull or unsatisfying can brighten their living conditions by doing graffiti (Felten A. 15.). Helen Landgarten, who studies art therapy, believes that “young people who do it are expressing themselves” and that “there is a therapeutic component to drawing, painting—even doodling” (DeLuccia A. 28). Each of these professionals believes that graffiti is a means of expression, as art therapy is therapeutic.

Graffiti, like more classic art forms, includes drawing and painting. The difference between graffiti and art used in art therapy is that graffiti artists use public spaces and walls to be heard and express themselves when they have no where else to do it, while art therapy has more of a structure and is normally not public. However, there have been instances when art therapy has been made public. “Harborview burn unit patients began painting panels or two murals that will grace nearby metro bus shelters” (Blanchard B. 1). This example is a form of legal graffiti

143 that is used as a therapeutic technique. With more opportunities like this one, there would be much less illegal graffiti. Graffiti artists are generally looking for a place to express themselves when they do not have a voice.

Graffiti is a beneficial art form for the artist. It can give the artist a boost in self-esteem and an outlet for their thoughts.

People find pleasure and self confidence in doing what they love. For some, graffiti is their component to happiness and confidence. Creating a piece of art that is shared with great numbers of people and easily recognized by others can bring a great joy to the graffiti artist. “One says that a ‘tag’ does wonders for a youngster who has a poor self-image, that it gives the graffitist an identity” (DeLuccia A. 28). Having a well-known tag can lead to fame in the graffiti world. Being recognized by people in a common community can boost self-esteem and make the artist feel better about themselves. Not only does it provide self confidence, but it gives the artist control over an aspect of their lives, which is especially beneficial if they feel that they don’t have control over other aspects of their own lives. “Art is believed to be empowering: if you make something, you can control it—and then you can use it” (Kobren 8). Graffiti artists use their graffiti to post a message about themselves. They want to be heard.

Though graffiti benefits the artist, there are repercussions to doing this illegal art. The government must pay to remove or go over the art from angered store owner’s windows and walls. This money comes from the taxes that the citizens must pay. In New York for example, the Transit Authority spends $10 million a year to clean up the graffiti (DeLuccia A. 28). There is a constant battle between store owners and graffiti artists. In Newark there was a conflict between a particular artist and store owner. This artist kept writing on the door to the store, and the owner kept painting over the artist’s work. Finally the artist resorted to writing: “Why do you keep painting the door when you know we’re going to keep on writing?”(DeLuccia A. 28). If the artists were given an area to create art, there would not be disputes such as that one. There is obviously a need for a legal place to perform this art. If the artists were given areas to express themselves, there would be more graffiti art, not simply vandalism. There would also be more people who would have the ability to express themselves without the fear of getting arrested or punished for wanting to release their emotions. Prevention against graffiti has also taken place. In a Los Angeles newspaper, a few measures are listed: “Mural art produced by local artists or groups; anti-graffiti paint; plant material; impervious street furniture; water features; public art; razor wire and security devices such as cameras and police surveillance” (“Graffiti Analysis”). If the graffiti was simply left alone, the city or area could be viewed as dirty, or an area with minimal up keeping. If the artists were given an area to create their art, people would view cities as much cleaner places. Specifically recalling the first prevention measure listed, which was providing an opportunity to create mural art, is a great benefit to the local graffiti artists. Artists should have the ability to express themselves legally, because their art might be the only source of therapy that they have.

There are many real life stories about how graffiti has helped common people. For example, T. Magic, a graffiti artist from London uses graffiti to escape his everyday issues. “I use my artwork as therapy. When there’s a shooting or whatever, I won’t be there, I’ll be at home creating art” (Jackson 21). Instead of getting into trouble, he stays somewhere safe and performs his art. The article goes on to describe T. Magic: “Defending his dreams through an aerosol can, the young ‘aristocrat’ painted pictures of a forgotten community fighting to be heard” (Jackson 21).

This is a clear example of how people can use graffiti to express themselves. T. Magic was not out to create trouble or destruction, he just wanted an outlet for his emotions. Another example is Commander Barnes, a recovering drug addict. “Commander Barnes pulled out a worn black notebook. ‘What I feel, I express,’ he said as he began flipping through the colorful graffiti-style images drawn on the card-stock pages.” He goes on to explain his history with drugs and getting into trouble. He says that art gives him a release for his problems instead of using drugs (Haskell B. 6). Both of these examples show the impact that graffiti art has on people’s lives. It is clearly therapeutic for people who do it.

Graffiti benefits the artist through therapeutic release of inner thought and emotions. It is not just vandalism. It can help the artist’s self esteem, confidence and pride. It can create an environment for self expression and it can make a person well-known. Even though public graffiti is illegal, it will not stop because of how important it the artists. It provides therapeutic results for artists and can change their outlook on life.

144 Bibliography Blanchard, Jessia. “A Big Dose of Art Therapy; Patients Creating Murals for Bus Shelters.” Seattle Times. 24 June 2004: B.1. US National Newspapers. Proquest. Bayschool Library. 26 Jan. 2009 Dalley, Tessa. The Handbook of Art Therapy. New York: Tavistock/Routledge, 1992. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.questiaschool.com/read/110138535> DeLuccia, Isabel M. “Another Graffiti Battle Lost.” New York Times. 12 Jan. 1986: A. 28. New York Times.

Proquest. Bayschool Library. 26 Jan. 2009 Felten, Eric. “More Than X Marks the Spot.” Wall Street Journal (Eastern Edition). Bayschool Library. 22 Jan. 2009.

“Graffiti analysis.” San Gabriel Valley Tribune. 5 Apr. 2009. California Newspapers. Proquest. Bayschool Library.

26 Jan. 2009 Haskell, Kari. “Hope After a Lost Life Haunted by Drugs.” New York Times. 17 Dec. 2003: B. 6. New York Times.

Proquest. Bayschool Library. 26 Jan. 2009 Jackon, Sophia. “Can Art Be the New Catalyst for Change?” New Nation.15 Dec. 2008: 21. 22 Jan. 2009 <http://proquest.umi.com> Kobren, Gerri. “Patients’ Feelings Leak Out in Their Artwork Therapy: To the trained eye, the colors and shapes and themes of the drawings speak volumes.” Los Angeles Times. 2 Mar. 1990: 8. Los Angeles Times.

Proquest. Bayschool Library. 26 Jan. 2009 Lyng, Stephen ed., Edgework: The Sociology of Risk Taking. New York: Routledge, 2004. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.questiaschool.com/PM.qst?a=o&d=108842669> Rahn, Janice. Painting without Permission: Hip-Hop Graffiti Subculture. Westport, CT: Bergin and Garvey, 2002.

26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.questiaschool.com/PM.qst?a=o&d=101310676> Walker, John. Art in the Age of Mass Media. Boulder, CO: Westview Press, 1994. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.questiaschool.com/PM.qst?a=o&d=27161883>

145 Andrew Seaman Craig Butz Research In The Community – Block A 8 February 2009 It’s A Bittersweet Symphony: The Basis Of Musical Stereotypes Walking down the streets of San Francisco brings you across a great variety of people. Each of these individuals is unique, every one of them thinking differently, acting differently, valuing differently, and carrying themselves differently. But how much of this is affected by their musical taste? It is easy to take a stab at someone’s musical preference by how one dresses, but is it right to take it one step further, to assume someone’s personality traits and values from their preferences? Stereotypes towards hip-hop, emo, and metal music culture perpetuate assumptions about the fans of these musical genres that are not necessarily true, and, because of this, should not be made. Everyone knows about these stereotypes that are made, sometimes agreeing, sometimes not, but how these stereotypes are formed is often pushed aside, which is a very important part of the reliability of them. They have always been around, and are always coming and going.

Daniel Levitin writes about his childhood in the 1960’s, in his book This Is Your Brain On Music: The Science Of Human Obsession, and the beliefs that people had during the time. He writes about how some parents only let their children listen to classical music, or sometimes only religious hymns because of the “dangerous rhythms of rock and roll.” Many of his friends’ parents believed that the rhythms contained in this particular genre of music would permanently corrupt the innocent minds of their children. A lot of people at the time were not able to be open-minded about the music that they listened to. At the Newport Folk Festival, in 1965, there was a controversy around one of the festival’s main performers, Bob Dylan. This particular year, Dylan was very popular from his previous performances from the last two years, and for this year, wanted to try something new. He came out to perform as usual, but this time, with an electric guitar. Despite his popularity, the great majority of the audience did not accept the new style Dylan was attempting to pursue. Robert Shelton describes Dylan’s and the audience’s reaction to the performance: “I saw Dylan twice in New York the week after the festival. He still seemed stunned and distressed that he had sparked such animosity. He was shaken that people had yelled ‘Get rid of that electric guitar!’” Dylan was surprised by the reaction from the people about this type of music. He did not realize how solid a lot of the people were with their views against rock music, even to the extent that many people ended up walking out on the concert, and the people who stayed had booed. These are some views that were around over 40 years ago, but clearly show the assumed beliefs that people had on music. Now, however, assumptions like these are less obvious, but how far have we gotten past these old stereotypes? Or have we just shifted them to relate more to the music we are now more associated with?

Metal, a musical genre known for its thick, strongly distorted songs, is very often stereotyped in very negative ways. It is frequently believed that this genre is completely about violence and hatred towards one another and the messages the music is portrays are all downbeat and harmful. From these assumptions that are made on the music, further assumptions are made on the people. Andrew Pauling writes about his thoughts on this subject, and shows his views against the stereotypes made on the music. He talks about how people generalize the people that listen to metal music, and says that “people seem to think it is only for the frightening, deranged, devil-worshiping people among us.” He, unlike a lot of people, realizes the complete untruths that are assumed about the fans of this specific genre of music. The association metal fans with violence or evil is reflected by how many of the people that are fans of this music are treated by society. Because this connection is being made, fans of metal are thought to always be violent people. Andrew Pauling also has something to say about this: “One person comes to mind—Steven. He has one-inch gauged ears, snakebite lip piercings, a piercing through the septum of his nose, a tongue ring and dressins in nothing but band T-shirts and Dickies. It took me a couple of days to get over his strange appearance, but after betting to know Steven, he became one of my best friends. I know he’s a good person and wouldn’t hurt a fly, but he gets dirty looks from passers-by and even from my own mother. Everyone seems to think he’s some sort of freak. But he is not. People should just accept him as he is and not judge him simply because he looks different.”

One of Pauling’s best friends, Steven, is a follower of metal, and shows it through how he dresses, and people that don’t know him very well usually assume that, because of the music he listens to, he is a freak. They give him dirty looks solely based on how he dresses. It is true that many followers of metal are seen by some as intimidating, because of their musical tastes, which should not be the case, as no one should have information assumed about them; however, this is not the only musical genre that has stereotypes.

Another arising genre in teenagers, emo, or emotional, music is constantly getting stereotyped. The amount of assumptions made against people that enjoy this genre of music is very extreme, and the outcomes of the stereotypes sometimes made are severe. In 2008, a 13 year old, Sam Lesson, after being constantly bullied at his

146 school because of his music taste and how he dressed, committed suicide. He almost always wore black or dark clothes, as a stereotypical emo kid would, and because of this, was seen as different from the other children. The bullies picked him out; they assumed he was emotionally unstable because of his music choice, and for this, harassed him. However, despite the fact that he followed an emotional genre of music, his family told about how he was a very cheerful teenager. They mentioned that he was usually seen smiling and they had no idea he was being bullied, especially to the point where he made the decision to end his own life. This incident shows the intensity of the subject, as he was being picked on because of the musical genre he listened to and because of their assumptions about his personality (Woodward, James). They found him an easy target, because he was seen as different; however, stereotyping also affects music genres that are very popular, and have many followers, such as hip-hop.

Hip-hop music has become one of the most popular music genres over the years and with this, has also become one of the most stereotyped music genres. Stereotypes around this musical genre normally are related to the gender or race of the listeners. Author Michael Eric Dyson writes in his book Know What I Mean? about how a lot of people view followers of this music genre. He says, “I don’t want to make this a feminist tale, because it takes place within the context of a pimp-ho relationship.” Dyson is showing a stereotype that is inflicted onto the followers of this kind of music. He mentions what he calls a “pimp-ho relationship,” which shows the stereotypical separation between the two genders: males being pimps, and females being hoes. Because of the hip hop musical taste of an individual, people may classify them into one of these categories, depending on their gender. An issue from Dartmouth Free Press reflects these exact thoughts: “The lyrics in many hip-hop songs sexually degrade women, especially black women.” It also says, about the topic, that “Black women are tired. Tired, they say, of being portrayed as everything but a woman” (Granit). In addition to this gender related stereotype, fans of this genre of music are also stereotyped about their actions and intentions. Beth Oliver talks about this in her article about hiphop and the relationship to their stereotyped personalities. She says, “…they are tall thugs, women beaters and druggies. This is what hip hop music is teaching them about the black community.” She knows about the ideas that are portrayed to people with little knowledge about hip-hop music. It is often assumed that the followers of hip hop music are violent people, as their music often reflects these images, but even so, this does not reflect how the listeners to the music will act.

As stated before, hip hop fans are frequently stereotyped as violent people, and people that should be avoided. The people are stereotyped in this way probably because the music itself is violent. One of songs on iTunes’ top hip-hop charts is Dead and Gone by T.I., featuring Justin Timberlake, contains the following lyrics: “Now you gushin', ambulance rushin' You to the hospital with a bad concussion Plus you hit four times but it hit yo spine Paralyzed waist down and ya wheelchair bound Never mind that now you lucky to be alive Just thinkin' it all started fussin' wit three guys Nigga pride in the way but your pride is the way you can fuck Around get show down any day” These lyrics clearly show a lot of the violence that is portrayed through hip-hop music, and what a lot of people base their stereotypes on. In addition, stereotypes based on hip hop are also sometimes created because of the artists of the genre. Dyson talks about this point in his book as well, he says that “some artists in hip hop play with stereotypes to either subvert or reverse them" (Dyson, Michael Eric). This shows how many hip hop artists use stereotypes that have already been formed, and either support them or oppose them to send messages to the listeners.

The reasoning behind the lyrics for each song mainly depends on the artist, as some might be completely against the use of stereotypes, and, seeing that some people support the stereotypes through their lyrics, some use the stereotypes to their advantage. Unlike in hip hop, the other types of music are less able to control the assumptions that are made on their music genre and the people that listen to them.

Emotional music is very often stereotyped by society; however, unlike in hip hop, the stereotypes are more widespread. With all stereotypes, there is at least a little bit of truth behind them, which is how a lot of the emo stereotypes are started or backed up. In 2008, Hannah Bond, a fan of music under the emo genre, committed suicide. She is believed to have done this solely because of the music she had listened to, and, in this case, this could have been a possibility. An article said that Hannah had been conducting self-injury in order to join a social group, and had ended up hanging herself. Andrew Levy wrote about this incident in a British online newspaper, and, it is easy to see that he is a prominent believer of the emo stereotypes. To introduce what emo is, to the reader, he says that “emo fans wear dark clothes, practise self-harm and listen to ‘suicide cult’ rock bands…The emo phenomenon began in the U.S. in the 1980s. It is a largely teenage trend and it characterized by depression, selfinjury and suicide. Followers wear tight jeans with studded belts and wristbands. Their hair is dyed black and worn

147 in long fringes to obscure their faces” (Levy, Andrew). From these sentences alone, his belief in the stereotypes is very obvious, as he simply characterizes all followers of “the emo phenomenon” into one group and has one simple description for all of them. He gives the reader one specific way that an emo should dress, and how they should act, which is constantly spreading the idea of this stereotype. When people that are uneducated about this emotional music genre read this, a lot of the times, they find this source as completely credible, and would believe the stereotypes portrayed in the article. One of the most popular emo bands, My Chemical Romance, was greatly blamed for Hannah’s death, and it was said that the lyrics to their songs pushed this on to her. An article wrote about what was said in their defense: “Their statement added: ‘My Chemical Romance are and always have been vocally anti-violence and anti-suicide. As a band, we have always made it one of our missions through our actions to provide comfort, support, and solace to our fans’” (“My Chemical Romance Defend Emo”). Despite this, people tend to not look to see themselves if stereotypes are true, instead, they believe what they are told, and in some cases, believe the worst. A very large scale example of this is the Columbine High School Massacre, which greatly affected the beliefs about the metal music.

The Columbine High School Massacre was a shooting performed by two students at the school, Eric Harris and Dylan Klebold, which killed 12 other students, 1 teacher, and ended in the suicide of the two perpetrators. The true motives for the killings are still unknown, but there are speculations on what brought them to actually commit to this act (Rosenberg, Jennifer). The killers had been fans and followers of metal and gothic music. The media made this connection, and led people to associate and sometimes blame the incident on the genres of music they had listened to. They especially associated Marilyn Manson to the incident, and Alex Keshen speaks about what Manson had to say about this: “As put by Manson, he believes that he represents what people are afraid of. Moral panics tend to thrive off of this. Often based from stereotypes, panics are spread thus pinpointing a specific group, often unrighteous in doing so. Since panics and fears often tend to be derived from what we are afraid of (and that is often what we’re uncomfortable with), blaming a subgroup often seems like the easiest, but not necessarily the correct, thing to do.”

Keshen is saying that the public, when in panic, finds something that may be related to the cause of the panic and associates it with the blame. The thing they single out is normally used in reflection of the stereotypical images of it, and because little is known about it. In this case, there had already been a notion that followers of the metal genre are violent, deranged, or evil, and people had based their beliefs about the shooting on this assumed information.

Overall, stereotypes are a very poor way of attempting to understand how other people are. There are stereotypes for almost everything. Whenever there is a group, connected by a certain interest, people tend to assume information about all of them, using information they know about a few of them. It is very easy to see how believing stereotypes about people is very likely to result in misguided information, and should be avoided. The problem is that now, stereotypes have been used for so long, that they have slowly meshed themselves into the lives of everyone to a point that they are being thrown around everyday. They are so often used, and believed, that ridding of them is nearly impossible. This is especially true because practically all stereotypes being made are based on some true information. In the sense of music, however, there is often less truth behind the stereotypes, and a lot more assumptions because of the lack of information. One of the largest problems reflects this, and Andrew Pauling wrote about it in an article of his. He says, about people who stereotype metal music, that “they immediately disregard it because they cannot understand the profound messages behind the yelling.” This represents how people, when not given enough information to satisfy themselves, they assume, which is where a potential solution may take place. Seeing that there are so many stereotypes already floating around society, and some of these are almost solidified ideas, it would be best to prevent new ones from starting. Pauling’s statement greatly connects with that of Manson’s: that people single out something that they do not know very much about, and assume the worst about it.

Instead of doing this, people should begin to learn information about what they don’t know, for themselves.

Andrew Levy’s article about the teenager following emo music shows a very straightforward example of what not to do. His description of a stereotypical “emo kid” has been read by a great amount of people, and a lot of them probably have little to no information about emo music and the followers of this type of music. Because of this, they may believe what they read about Levy’s view on the subject, and pick up the stereotyped notion of how a fan of emotional music should act. The readers should keep the information they read, but should not completely believe it. Instead, they should try to find out for themselves if what they read is true or not; however, this solution will not be able to work for everyone, seeing that some people want to believe what they first hear.

Even though a preconceived notion of something or someone very often leads to untruths through stereotypes, some people like having a stereotype to rely on, when they don’t really know the complete truth. They are often seen as helpful when first learning about something, to get a broad view of the subject. Also, a lot of

148 people believe these stereotypes without even knowing that what they are learning may not be true and that it is just a generalization. People who do this may pass it on to others, hereby causing the spread of assumed information, which is what should be avoided.

There is a diversity of people everywhere. Everyone presents themselves differently, their own musical tastes, and their own personality. Although it may be possible to guess someone’s musical tastes through how they present themselves, it is not right to attempt to learn about someone’s personality through their musical tastes.

Stereotyping because of the belief that this is possible, does not solve any problems, it create them, as it, itself, is a problem. It makes people believe things about groups of people that do no reflect how each individual is, just how some of them are, and it is very often a negative thought that is assumed about them all. If people continue to associate good people with negative events solely because of their musical tastes, true information will get mixed with assumed information, and it will become even more difficult to see the truth behind someone.

Works Cited Azerrad, Michael. Our Band Could Be Your Life. New York: Little, Brown and Company. 2001.

Balke, Jeff. “Study Looks at Music and Stereotypes.” Broken Record. 25 Feb. 2008. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://blogs.chron.com/brokenrecord/2008/02/study_looks_at_music_and_stere.html> Dyson, Michael Eric. Know What I Mean? New York: Basic Civitas Books. 2007.

George, Nelson. Hip Hop America. New York: Viking Penguin. 1998.

Granit, Maya S., Christopher Z. Desir. “Hip-Hop In The Hood Controversy: Not All Is Good In The Hood.”

Dartmouth Free Press. Dartmouth. 15 Feb. 2009 <http://www.dartmouth.edu/~thepress/read.php?id=1566>.

Kim, Ronald. “Bias Of Music Is Not New.” The Daily Pennsylvanian. 12 Sept. 2000. National College. 3 Feb. 2009. <http://media.www.dailypennsylvanian.com/media/storage/paper882/news/2000/09/12/Opinion/BiasIn.Music.Is.Not.New-2161080.shtml> Levitin, Daniel J. This Is Your Brain On Music: This Science Of Human Obsession. London, England: Penguin Books Ltd. 2006.

Levy, Andrew. “Girl, 13, Hangs Herself After Becoming Obsessed With Emo ‘Suicide Cult’ Rock Band.” Mail Online. 9 May 2008. 6 Feb. 2009. <http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-564611/Girl-13-hangsobsessed-Emo-suicide-cult-rock-band.html> Munger, Dave. “Do Musical Tastes Help You Get To Know Someone?” Cognitive Daily. 14 Mar. 2006.

ScienceBlogs LLC. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://scienceblogs.com/cognitivedaily/2006/03/do_musical_tastes_help_you_get.php> Munger, Dace. “Do Our Stereotypes About Music Fans Match Their Actual Preferences?” Cognitive Daily. 20 Feb. 2008. ScienceBlogs LLC. 23 Jan. 2009 <http://scienceblogs.com/cognitivedaily/2008/02/do_our_stereotypes_about_music.php> “My Chemical Romance Defend Emo.” BBC Newsbeat Music. 16 Feb. 2009. <http://news.bbc.co.uk/newsbeat/low/music/newsid_7421000/7421328.stm>.

Pauling, Andrew. "Metal Music Stereotypes Incorrect Unfounded." Online 49er. Daily Fourty-Niner. 29 Mar. 2006.

6 Feb. 2009. <http://www.csulb.edu/~d49er/archives/2006/spring/opinion/v12n97-metal.shtml> “Rap Music Blamed For Teen Pregnancy.” Mail Online. 23 Aug. 2006. Associated Newspapers Limited. 3 Feb. 2009. <http://www.dailymail.co.uk/news/article-401684/Rap-music-blamed-teen-pregnancy.html> Rosenberg, Jennifer. “Columbine Massacre.” About.com. The New York Times Company. 6 Feb. 2009. <http://history1900s.about.com/od/famouscrimesscandals/a/columbine.htm> Shelton, Robert. No Direction Home: The Life And Music Of Bob Dylan. New York. 1986.

Woodward, James. “Bullies Blamed After Suicide Of ‘Emo’ Music Fan.” The Independent. 23 June 2008. 3 Feb 2009. <http://www.independent.co.uk/news/uk/home-news/bullies-blamed-after-suicide-of-emo-music-fan845135.html>

149 Tahirih Skolnik Craig Butz Research in the Community A-block February 19, 2009 High Incidence of Breast Cancer in Marin County: Is it a REAL problem?

Marin County, an affluent and educated community of 250,000 residents, has suffered through the publicity and fear of having the largest incidence of breast cancer in the United States. The correlation between income, lifestyle and breast cancer has captured the imagination of many researchers as they determine the lifestyle and habits that could lead to the high breast cancer incidence in Marin County. An article written by “Our Stolen Future Online Magazine” says that Marin County's, "250,000 residents are predominantly white [educated] and well-off financially, characteristics long associated with higher rates of breast cancer.” Factors impacting the breast cancer that have potential bearing on why the incidence is so high in Marin County include health education and awareness, age of childbearing, and alcohol consumption. Health education and awareness can be seen as positive factors in Marin’s high incidence rates because we see the death rates decreasing as a result. On the other hand, late childbearing and alcohol consumption are negative risk factors that arise from the Marin County lifestyle.

Breast Cancer stretches much further then Marin County and its impact has been felt worldwide. Globally, breast cancer is the most lethal form of cancer for women. An estimated one million cases will be identified this year, and about 500,000 new and existing patients will die from the disease. In the U.S., breast cancer will be diagnosed in 1 in 8 women according to Kathleen Kingsbury of the New York Times. France, with similar demographics to Marin has the second highest breast cancer incidence rate in the world (Imaginis). The French per capita income is $38, 800 (Country) which is fairly close to the per-capita income of Marin County and higher than the US national per capita of $30, 941 (Personal). Marin Institute’s article: The French Paradox, Health and Alcohol Use in France states, “The French drink one-and-a-half times more per capita than Americans” and can legally drink at the age of sixteen. Alcohol changes the way that the body is able to metabolize estrogen (a hormone that fuels many breast cancers) and therefore, a regular alcohol consumption increases the rick of breast cancer by increasing blood estrogen levels (Alcohol). If women begin drinking at earlier ages they are increasing their risk of developing breast cancer. A French study written up in the Oxford Journals shows that there is a direct correlation between the amount of alcohol consumed and breast cancer. When comparing drinkers to non alcohol consumers a French study resulted in a 47% higher incidence of Cancer for women who drink versus the non-drinking French women. The French have national health care and breast cancer screening is routine procedure for all women. 93% of French women have routine Mammography’s (SpringerLink). The incidence and detection are easy to measure and early detection has saved lives and improved overall breast cancer management. In contrast to France, Zimbabwe—an extremely poor nation with a per capita income of only $500 (Country)—has the lowest measured breast cancer incidence in the world (Imaginis). Most women in Zimbabwe are not alcohol consumers. According to a Global Status report, 90.3% of Zimbabwe’s female residents are abstainers. The health system in Zimbabwe is almost bankrupt because of the economic hardship and political instability. “With the economy in free fall, Zimbabwe is desperately short of even basic drugs and medical equipment” (Global). Zimbabwe’s failing healthcare system makes breast cancer screening inaccessible. Without screening, knowledge of breast cancer incidence is not able to be determined and breast cancer is discovered in later stages of the disease. The childbearing age in Zimbabwe usually is before the age of 21 (FHI) which makes them less susceptible to breast cancer because childbearing after the age of 30 raises breast cancer rick to 63% (Early).

Marin County is one of the wealthiest counties in the nation, with a per-capita income of $44, 962 (Marin County). Marin County’s residents have a uniquely high education level in comparison to the rest of the country with 51% having a bachelors degree or higher as compared to the 27% statewide (Educational). Marin County, has suffered through what doctors describe as an "alarming" rate of breast cancer. Marin's breast cancer rate is 20 percent higher than the national average and about 15 – 16% percent higher than the rest of the rest of California (Research).

Dr. Hal Sadowy, an expert on health care delivery and advocate for national health insurance indicated that Marin County has a very low rate of uninsured residents as compared to the rest of California. “Marin County is alone in percentage of insured families and access to health care is not a problem.” Access to health care services leads to much higher screening for breast cancer and other chronic conditions. “The ability to catch breast cancer with early detection is quadrupled when women receive annual breast exams. Although detection will be higher due to shear numbers being screened, the chances for survival increase exponentially.”

Globally and in Marin County breast cancer is more prevalent amongst white women versus the rest of the population. African American women in Marin have higher mortality rates with 34 per 100,000 black women dying from breast cancer in comparison to the 25 per 100,000 white women (American). An interesting comparison can

150 be seen with recent figures from St. Louis, Missouri. In a recent study done at Washington University, Dr. Mario Schootman in the St. Louis American reports that “the difference in mortality rates between African American and White women has increased from 1990 to 2005. This is due to a significant decline in breast cancer mortality among White women and no decrease in mortality among African American women.” Bernard Dickens, FACHE, former Vice President of the American Hospital Association and speaker on poverty and health, said, “African American’s are less likely to be insured in Marin County and many are living in poverty in Marin City. It is very difficult to gain access to credible health care and early screening if you are poor and routinely denied care. This leads to late detection and a greater chance to die from the disease.”

The average woman in Marin County, similarly to France, consumes close to four glasses of alcohol per day. People who drink over two drinks per day are 37% more likely to develop breast cancer than those who do not drink as much and menopausal women who only drink half of a glass of wine increase their chances by nearly 18% (Alcohol). There is little public education regarding the strong association between drinking and Breast Cancer.

There will need to be additional studies to support educational programs that push alcohol abstention.

“In Marin where average household income tops $80,000, almost $30,000 more than national average— women often delay having children or do not have them at all" (Our). About 31 percent of Marin’s breast cancer incidences have resulted from late childbearing (Study) There are numerous theories as to why the incidence of Cancer in Marin is so high but many pieces of the puzzle have yet to be found. We have identified a few independent variables that have strong associations with Breast cancer. In France and Marin, alcohol consumption correlates with breast cancer. Yet there is not a campaign to begin educating women on the association of alcohol and breast cancer. Income impacts detection and those with lower incomes seem to have less chance of early detection. The incidence of breast cancer is lowest in Marin County with African American women. This same result is echoed in Zimbabwe. Yet in both Zimbabwe and Marin the death rates for breast cancer are very high and early detection and screening is lower then for their white counterparts. Screening seems to be the factor that determines when a person is diagnosed and the later the diagnosis the greater the chance to lose the battle with Cancer.

We can learn a lot from the knowledge already at our disposal about breast cancer. The ability to prevent and remain cancer free is still a long way from being a reality. Research is being conducted by the Center for Disease Control on 20,000 women in Marin to determine lifestyle and related factors that could cause breast cancer.

The Buck Institute is working with the same data to study the environmental factors that might impact breast cancer.

Hopefully we will find a cure for breast cancer in the near future and stop the epidemic of Breast Cancer in Marin. .

151 Works Cited "Alcohol and Breast Cancer Risk." WebMD - Better information. Better health. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.webmd.com/breast-cancer/guide/20061101/alcohol-breast-cancer-risk>.

American Cancer Society :: Information and Resources for Cancer: Breast, Colon, Prostate, Lung and Other Forms.

10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.cancer.org/downloads/STT/BCFF-Final.pdf>.

"Breast cancer incidence and mortality trends in an affluent population: Marin County, California, USA, 1990&#8211;1999." PubMed Central Homepage. 4 Feb. 2009 <http://www.pubmedcentral.nih.gov/articlerender.fcgi?artid=137932>.

Breast Cancer Screening in Marin County. Rep. 4 Feb. 2009 <http://www.co.marin.ca.us/breastcancer/pdf/aff/BreastScreeningReport02-03.pdf>.

"The Changing Face of Breast Cancer - Global Breast Cancer - TIME." Breaking News, Analysis, Politics, Blogs, News Photos, Video, Tech Reviews - TIME.com. 20 Feb. 2009 <http://www.time.com/time/specials/2007/article/0,28804,1666089_1666563,00.html>.

"Country Profile and Demographics: Per Capita Income." Free Resources provides free information of all types to the general public worldwide. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://siakhenn.tripod.com/capita.html>.

"Demographics of Zimbabwe -." Wikipedia, the free encyclopedia. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Demographics_of_Zimbabwe#Health>.

Dickens, Bernard. Telephone interview. 2 Feb. 2009.

"Early periods and late childbearing increase risk of breast cancer, study confirms." PubMed Central Homepage. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.pubmedcentral.nih.gov/articlerender.fcgi?artid=1172033>.

Educational and Demographic Profile: Marin County. Rep. Feb. 2004. California Postsecondary Education Commission. 7 Feb. 2009 <http://www.cpec.ca.gov/completereports/2004Profiles/County21.pdf>.

"FHI - Zimbabwe: The Impact of Family Planning on Women's Participation in the Development Process." FHI Family Health International. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.fhi.org/en/RH/Pubs/wsp/fctshts/Zimbabwe1.htm>.

"The French Health Care System." Medical News Today: Health News. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.medicalnewstoday.com/articles/9994.php>.

"The French Paradox, Health and Alcohol Use in France." Marin Institute. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.marininstitute.org/alcohol_policy/french_drinking.htm>.

"Global Challenges | Zimbabwe's Public Health System 'Dissolving,' Running Out of Medications, Supplies, Including HIV Test Kits - Kaisernetwork.org." Kaisernetwork.org - Health Policy, News Summaries, Webcasts, Interviews & Public Opinion - Kaiser Family Foundation. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.kaisernetwork.org/daily_reports/rep_index.cfm?DR_ID=22048>.

Global Status Report on Alcohol. Rep. 2004. World Health Organization. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.who.int/substance_abuse/publications/en/zimbabwe.pdf>.

"Imaginis - Breast Cancer: Statistics on Incidence, Survival, and Screening." Imaginis The Women's Health Resource. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.imaginis.com/breasthealth/statistics.asp>.

"Marin County." Wikipedia. 15 Jan. 2009. Wikipedia. 15 Jan. 2009 <http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Marin_County,_California>.

"MedlinePlus: Hormone Replacement Therapy." National Library of Medicine - National Institutes of Health. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/hormonereplacementtherapy.html>.

"Our Stolen Future: High breast cancer rates in Marin County, CA." Our Stolen Future: Home. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.ourstolenfuture.org/commentary/News/2002/2002-1023-WashPost-CAbreastcancer.htm>.

"Personal Income Per Capita in the United States - Table - MSN Encarta." MSN Encarta : Online Encyclopedia, Dictionary, Atlas, and Homework. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://encarta.msn.com/media_701500948/Personal_Income_Per_Capita_in_the_United_States.html>.

"Research Project Focuses On Breast Cancer In Marin - News Story - KTVU San Francisco." Oakland, San Jose & San Francisco Bay Area News, Weather & Traffic - KTVU California. 19 Feb. 2009 <http://www.ktvu.com/news/17337484/detail.html>.

Sadowy, Hal. Telephone interview. 30 Jan. 2009.

"SpringerLink - Journal Article." SpringerLink Home - Main. 19 Feb. 2009 <http://www.springerlink.com/content/k4v4110583366552/>.

The St. Louis American. The St. Louis American. 19 Feb. 2009 <http://www.stlamerican.com/articles/2008/10/22/your_health_matters/health_news/health03.txt>.

"Study on breast cancer / Marin County rate blamed on lifestyle, demographics." San Francisco Bay Area &mdash; News, Sports, Business, Entertainment, Classifieds: SFGate. 10 Feb. 2009 <http://www.sfgate.com/cgibin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2003/05/30/BA70131.DTL>.

152 Madeline Spolin Craig Butz Research in the Community 09 February 2009 The Innocuous Cure: The Effects of the No Child Left Behind Act A free public education is one of the cornerstones of our country, and nothing is more valued than ensuring the next generation’s success through learning. The public education system is considered an invaluable way to provide equal opportunities to all children across the United States. Recently an education initiative called No Child Left Behind Act (NCLB) was passed by U.S. Congress, with the goals of having every child proficient in reading and math by the year 2014 (Archived: Executive Summary of the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001). The act aimed to achieve the high standards in education through annual standardized testing, while placing more responsibility on the individual schools themselves (King, J. S.). NCLB is the center of much controversy among educators and politicians who are debating whether or not the measure is successful and a viable method to achieve the goal of national literacy in math and reading. NCLB was intended to improve the quality of the flawed education system on its quest for a more engaging and successful pedagogy. Despite the admirable goals of the act, the costs strongly outweigh the benefits, and the act results in an all together negative effect on the atmospheres of schools, and the learning experience of all attending.

Prior to NCLB’s passage the federal government had a limited role in educational policy and implementation, controlling budgets of states and other larger matters, while leaving the educating itself to be done by teachers (The Federal Role in Education Before No Child Left Behind). On the secondary level, differences in education between pre-NCLB teaching and post-NCLB education are minor and problems existing today were still occurring before NCLB. Specific pre-NCLB positives include the fact that schools were not forced to bear the giant load of student proficiency on their shoulders, and did not take the fall when a student was not successful. Also positively, prior to the No Child Left Behind act, teachers were not forced to “teach to the test”, which requires that they conform their lesson plans to make sure their schools exceed proficiency rates (No Child Left Behind). Before NCLB teachers could be creative and develop lesson plans that accommodated different learning styles. Though NCLB changed the face of education, before it, education was still run in the traditional way it is today. Traditional education policies promote instruction and dictation, sometimes called, “skill and drill.” On the other hand, the progressive movement’s defining values are facilitation and inference (The Circle School). Schools were faced with high drop out rates, and students were not receiving a high enough education quality, all of which led to the passing of NCLB. Educator Karin Chenoweth believes that “… Long before No Child Left Behind far too many classrooms were boring dull places where children were forced to do endless worksheets…” Even with the issues prior to NCLB, the act did not improve the quality and atmospheres of schools, despite the goals. NCLB was proposed to fix all issues remaining with education, but it created more problems than it solved.

The No Child Left Behind act was passed in an effort to improve the quality of the nation’s public school system. It was signed into law by George W. Bush in the year 2001, (First, P. F.) and it was a revision of the Elementary and Secondary Education Act. George Bush spent 200 billion dollars implementing reforms outlined in NCLB. He believed that it was necessary because, as he said in 2001 “too many of our neediest children are being left behind” (Archived: Executive Summary of the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001). Bush believed that the act would diminish the achievement gap, which is the problem schools face where students of color receive lower results on standardized testing (Achievement Gap – Stronger Accountability – No Child Left Behind). Bush wrote the act to value many things, mainly the proficiency of students in math and reading, valuable under any circumstance.

The noble attempts of the act are admirable from all viewpoints. The main goal of the act is for each child to achieve proficiency in math and reading. In addition the act aims to have all limited English proficient students, reach the standards set for native English speakers. Limited English Proficient students, or LEP’s are often children of immigrants, and they are students that lack fluency in the English language. It also hoped to have all students taught by “highly qualified teachers” by the year 2006 (No Child Left Behind Act). This means that, every teacher must be deemed highly qualified by the state. The act also emphasized the importance of teaching students in a safe and comfortable place of learning. The final cumulative goal is to have every student graduate from high school.

Although the goals themselves do not reveal negatives; it is in its implementation where the bill is flawed.

The government hopes to achieve the goals stated in the drafts of NCLB mainly through “increased accountability for schools”, or making the individual schools or districts responsible for the academic proficiency of the students attending. It tests student’s academic performance through annual tests starting in second grade and continuing onward. The bill also implements a schoolwide measure of proficiency called AYP, or academic yearly progress, which requires schools to improve every year in testing scores (What is NCLB? And Ten Other Things

153 Parents Should Know About the No Child Left Behind Act). Schools that fail to meet the guidelines provided by NCLB are then called Title I schools, or failing schools. The intent of NCLB on schools is positive, but it results in a wide array of both positive and negative effects on learning.

The positive effects of NCLB arise from the valuable goals. According to Denise Pope author of Doing School, “the only positive effect of NCLB is on schools that are just so horrendous; it forces the schools to look at themselves and to see that it’s unjust to their students.” In addition, test scores have been raised since NCLB has been implemented, although many educators question the validity of these results. Also, as per the main goal of the act, the achievement gap has been slightly diminished, because the act mandates lower quality school districts to take specific action to improve their scores or they will receive less funding. On the other hand, the negative effects are endless.

The negative effects of NCLB stretch far beyond what would be predicted. It affects a variety of different demographics such as immigrant population, special education students, and even administrators. Although the goals are positive, and the measures taken to achieve goals seem like a plausible implementation, NCLB is placing a dark cloud over education. First of all, the dropout rate has greatly increased, although a main driver of the act is to have every student graduate from high school. “Each year Texas public high schools lose at least 135,000 youth prior to graduation,” (McNeil, L. M.) which has risen since the enactment of NCLB. This is a result of the accountability, stemming from test scores to judge proficiency. When students aren’t found to be academically proficient, they see an option in giving up, since school is focused solely on passing the test.

In addition, children of immigrants face many consequences resulting from the enacting of NCLB. Currently, immigration is record high, and the public school system has more immigrants than ever before. (Capps).

The No Child Left Behind Act requires schools to improve the performance of Limited English Proficient students, but its attempts to do so fail to help immigrant populations.

The issue remaining with teaching Limited English Proficient students is the government mandated way of assessing English proficiency is through standardized testing, and often that does not accurately represent the results.

It does not look at other measures such as grades, participation in the school community, or mastery of other subjects such as science or history. In order to test proficiency the Limited English Proficient students are held to the same standard as English proficient students, which almost ensures they fail. This leads to higher immigrant drop out rates because the immigrants feel that they are failing their parents when they cannot pass the tests and decide that they should join the work force. The bill also states that all improvements in curriculum for LEP students would be made to solely improve test scores (Mathis, W. J.). Issues with immigrant education start as early as pre-school.

Author of A New Demography of Americas Schools Randy Capps states “over half of Limited English Proficient students attend elementary and secondary schools where over 30% of their classmates are also Limited English Proficient students.” This demonstrates how, when many peers are also struggling with the challenge of overcoming the language barrier, it is easy for them to give up, because of the focus on testing rather than teaching and learning.

No Child Left Behind, also negatively affects school districts with high immigrant populations, not only LEP students. Limited English Proficient students are held to the same standard of testing of fluent English speakers, which almost ensures they fail annual testing. When there are many struggling students, many students fail. Other factors, such as the literacy and educational level, as well as their English proficiency of the parents can influence the test results, especially in schools with high immigrant populations. In turn, the schools will not reach adequate yearly progress, and become known as a bad school district. Schools are then labeled Ttitle I, or get the reputation of being a failing school, which, in turn, continues the cycle of children receiving a lower quality education than they are entitled to.

The No Child Left Behind act also shines a negative light on the schooling of special education students.

Like Limited English Proficient students, the act holds special education students to the same standards of the general student population. This results in standards set for them that can be unattainable and they often give up, because they feel like they have little hope of receiving a high school diploma if they cannot pass the standards.

According to a special education teacher from Georgia the law does not give special education students enough to work with. “New accommodations are being written that allow special education students to use a calculator for math; therefore, it will be allowed on the state test. This is not what the NCLB law should mean!” The combination of the high standards and the lack of accommodations made for special education students to have a very negative experience with education under NCLB. In addition, NCLB proves to have a negative effect on more than students. Even administrators and teachers are affected. It forces teachers to teach straight to the test, which removes most ingenuity and fun added to curriculum. The administrators themselves feel so much pressure to ensure that students achieve adequate yearly progress, that they often will not allow anything to be taught that does not relate back to the standardized testing directly. Barb Mitchell, member of the Palo Alto Board of Education speaks out her opinion about why NCLB

154 negatively affects educators. “The No Child Left Behind policy has a noble purpose, but its application is problematic as it adds paperwork and takes up more time and resources”. Finally, although the bill was passed in the hopes that it could achieve many things, it did not include all of the necessary recourses to do so. Denise Pope, education expert, states that “the government is not providing enough funding for teachers to achieve the goal….

Training, money, programs, they need it all, and they are being given none.” Teachers spend more time focused on the tests and administering practice tests and testing strategies, that they lose a lot of instructional time teaching their content area. All in all, educators daily face hardships and obstacles created by the bill passed to help them.

Lastly, the general student population is constantly feeling the pressure of NCLB. First of all, NCLB lowers the quality of education the average student receives and their interest level. It forces teachers to conform lesson plans to standardized material, and stops educators from adding new and interesting material to spark children’s interest (Rothstein, R.). Along with the diversity of teaching methods diminishing, the students have to deal with curriculum narrowing. Because standardized testing promotes proficiency within math and reading, other subjects such as sciences and history and languages often are forgotten as the teachers race to ensure proficiency in math and reading. Margot Parker, a counselor at a Title I school in California, identifies the issues with NCLB, “With so much focus on testing there is a take away from overall student growth and development. Students in Title I schools are virtually unable to go on field trips, to experience assemblies or do innovative projects as the teachers fear losing instructional time.”

Also NCLB focuses on short term gains. Though testing may be an accurate representation of current knowledge, it is very important for children to learn the skills of learning beyond the content area with which to tackle other things. With the focus on short term learning, the students lose out on a very crucial education whereby they develop the necessary skills set of research, class discussion, and group projects. This kind of learning gives students life skills in communication, cooperation, problem solving, and resolving conflicts that cannot be gained through “skill and drill” instruction and rote learning.

Mainly though, the No Child Left Behind act has a huge negative effect on a school’s atmosphere and learning environment. For weeks in preparation of standardized testing, children feel nervous and stressed out, an environment that makes it impossible for young children to perform their best (NEA – NCLB Stories: Georgia). It does not help the children that the teachers, the ones they look to guidance, are also stressed and must make sure their students achieve highly on a standardized test. Another issue surrounding NCLB deals with the accuracy of achieving proficiency through testing. Since other obvious ways to test academics are not often used, this is not questioned much, but education experts are not in favor of standardized testing as the only means of assessment.

Denise Pope, Ph.D. in education, said “The way the Bill goes about implementation puts too much emphasis on tests, which is not a fair way to measure accountability.”

NCLB comes hand in hand with negative effects doled out to students and administrators alike. The implementation and criteria of the bill turns school into a more stressful environment, and does not give necessary help to LEP’s and special education students. The small positive effects, namely bestowing horrible schools with the knowledge that they must repair their schools, are greatly outweighed by the vast number of negative effects.

In conclusion, as has been shown by the goals of The No Child Left Behind Act, everyone wants children to learn. The future of education is in the hands of decision makers such as George Bush. Both schools prior to NCLB and schools under the rule of NCLB value education being taught in very traditional ways. Testing, teaching to the book, and lecturing were common occurrences found in both times. NCLB was intended to be the medicine, to fix the problems the original school system was facing, but it turned out the effects of the medicine were worse than the effects of the illness. NCLB has negatively affected the thousands of students across America, and in turn negatively affected the future of the United States of America. Through both experiences in traditional education, it can be determined that obvious flaws exist within the public school system being taught in traditional ways.

Progressive education offers the extra push needed to cure the illness. The added benefits it will provide of both inferential and collaborative learning will change the atmospheres and decrease stress levels of schools in a very positive way. Progressive education has the power to fix both the effects of the sickness, and the effects of the NCLB medicine.

Works Cited "Achievement Gap - Stronger Accountability - No Child Left Behind - ED.gov." U.S. Department of Education Home Page. U.S. Department of Education. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.ed.gov/nclb/accountability/achieve/edpicks.jhtml?src=ln>.

"Archived: Executive Summary of the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001." U.S. Department of Education Home Page. U.S. Department of Education. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.ed.gov/nclb/overview/intro/execsumm.html>.

155 Capps, Randy, Michael Fix, and Julie Murray. "The New Demography of America's Schools: Immigration and the No Child Left Behind Act." The New Demography of America's Schools: Immigration and the No Child Left Behind Act (2005): 1-44. Education Recources Information Center. Department of Education. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://eric.ed.gov/ERICWebPortal/custom/portlets/recordDetails/detailmini.jsp?_nfpb=true&_&ERICExt Search_SearchValue_0=ED490924&ERICExtSearch_SearchType_0=no&accno=ED490924>.

Cortiella, Candace. "No Child Left Behind and School Choice Opportunities in Special Education GreatSchools.net." Great Schools - Public and Private School Ratings, Reviews and Parent Community. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.greatschools.net/cgi-bin/showarticle/2778>.

Development Laboratory, 2002. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.sedl.org/connections/resources/evidence.pdf>.

First, Patricia F. "NCLB and Questions of Validity and Reliability | Journal of Law and Education | Find Articles at BNET." Find Articles at BNET | News Articles, Magazine Back Issues & Reference Articles on All Topics.

Business Network. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://findarticles.com/p/articles/mi_qa3994/is_/ai_n9483732>.

Henderson, Ann T., and Karen L. Mapp. A new Wave of Evidence The impact of family, School and Community Connections on Student Achievement. Southwest Educational Jennings, Jack. "Ten Big effects of the No Child Left Behind Act on Public Schools." The University of Iowa College of Education. Center on Education Policy. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.education.uiowa.edu/cea/documents/NCLB-TenBigEffects.pdf>.

Kim, James S. "Measuring Academic Proficiency Under the No Child Left Behind Act: Implications for Educational Equity." Educational Researcher 34 (2005): 3-13. Sage Journals. American Educational Research Association. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://edr.sagepub.com/cgi/content/abstract/34/8/3>.

Linn, Robert L. "Accountability Systems: Implications of Requirements of the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001."

Accountability Systems: Implications of Requirements of the No Child Left Behind Act of 2001 31 (2002): 3-16. Educational Researcher. Sage Journals. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://edr.sagepub.com/cgi/content/abstract/31/6/3>.

Mathis, William J. "No Child Left Behind: What Are the Costs? Will We Realize Any Benefits?" No Child Left Behind: What Are the Costs? Will We Realize Any Benefits? (2003): 1-15. Education Recources Information Center. Department of Education. 28 Jan. 2009 <http://eric.ed.gov/ERICWebPortal/custom/portlets/recordDetails/detailmini.jsp?_nfpb=true&_&ERICExt Search_SearchValue_0=ED477646&ERICExtSearch_SearchType_0=no&accno=ED477646>.

Meier, Deborah, and George H. Wood. Many Children Left Behind : How the No Child Left Behind Act Is Damaging Our Children and Our Schools. New York: Beacon P, 2004.

"NCLB Policy Letters to States." U.S. Department of Education Home Page. U.S. Department of Education. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.ed.gov/policy/elsec/guid/stateletters/index.html>.

"NEA - NCLB Stories: Georgia." NEA - NEA Home. National Education Association. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nea.org/home/nclbvoices_Georgia.html>.

"No Child Left Behind." Waukegan Public School District 60. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.wps60.org/parents/nclb.php>.

"No Child Left Behind Act." LAUSD Human Resources Division. Los Angeles Unified School District. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.teachinla.com/nclb/nclb_act.html>.

Rothstein, Richard. "No Children Left Untested in Math and Reading." CSEWI Homepage. Economic Policy Institute. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://csewi.org/stem/images/STEMdocs/NCLBarticle.pdf>.

"Strategies for Surviving School Stress Maintaining a positive outlook amid NCLB and budget cuts." MSTA: Maryland State Teachers Association. Maryland State Teachers Association. 29 Jan. 2009 <http://www.mstanea.org/survivingstress.php>.

Tsao, Vivien. "All Aboard For Education." The Oracle - Gunn High School Newspaper 7 Nov. 2005. Palo Alto Unified School District. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.gunn.pausd.org/oracle/web/articles/2>. â&#x20AC;&#x153;What is NCLB? and Ten Other Things Parents Should Know About the No Child Left Behind Act." Wisconsin Department of Public Instruction home page. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://dpi.wi.gov/esea/pdf/parents.pdf>.

"What No Child Left Behind Means to Families, Teachers, Community Leaders - Wrightslaw." Wrightslaw Special Education Law and Advocacy. 30 Jan. 2009 <http://www.wrightslaw.com/info/nclb.parents.teachers.leaders.htm>.

156 Skye Strachan Research in the Community February 8 2009 How the American Dream Turned into a Nightmare: Home Ownership and Financial Crisis of 2008 At a benefit for home ownership on October 15, 2002, President George W. Bush said in a speech that, “We can put light where there’s darkness, and hope where there’s despondency in this country. And part of it is working together as a nation to encourage folks to own their own home (Becker, Stolberg, and Labaton).” This was the dream of Bush’s administration but little did they know that what seemed like a helping hand would turn out to be a leading cause of one of the greatest economic meltdowns in the US since the infamous Great Depression. The Bush Administration’s stance that every American family should have the right to their own home was well intentioned but because of this philosophy, relaxed lending standards allowed more subprime mortgages, and the effects of these policies had the opposite result of what the government foresaw, an increase in foreclosures which lead to the financial crisis.

In early 2002 the Bush administration decided that homeownership in the US would become one of its top priorities to help dig the country out of the post 9/11 recession. President George W. Bush had a philosophy that homeownership would not only boost the economy but it would also benefit many American neighborhoods. He believed that when more people were incentivized to buy homes, the housing industry would prosper which would lead to economic recovery. He also believed that people who actually owned their homes take better care of their property and that scenario creates healthy neighborhoods. Thus new and improved neighborhoods could be established where home owners lived in communities with far more benefits than those who rented. For him this was the American dream, a dream that he wanted to help citizens fulfill. During his speech in October of 2002 at George Washington University, Mr. Bush talked about a homeownership gap in the U.S. In His speech he stated, “Twothirds of all Americans own their homes, yet we have a problem here in America because fewer than half of the Hispanics and half the African Americans own their homes (Bush).” These minorities were exactly who he targeted in the bid for universal homeownership in America. The goal he wanted to achieve was to give at least 5.5 million families a better chance to be homeowners, but in order to achieve such a goal he needed the backing of the housing industry (Becker, Stolberg and Labaton). With the huge rise in homeowners that would buy homes, if he achieved his goal, it was predicted that about $256 billion would come from these transactions to stimulate the economy therefore providing more job opportunities (Bush). However, all of this could not be achieved without the help of mortgage brokers and lending institutions. To entice these lenders Bush proposed low interest rates. Interest rates play a major factor in the lending business. They are the basis for how much money financial institutions are willing to borrow from each other. Banks are able to make a huge profit when they can borrow money at low interest rates and then lend that money at an even higher rate.

Lower interest rates and relaxed lending standards really opened up many opportunities to mortgage lenders. These new lending practices meant that banks could go on a lending spree and increase their bottom line by lending to less creditworthy borrowers by issuing subprime loans. Alan Greenspan, the Chairman of the Federal Reserve during the early 2000’s, had decided to keep the federal funds rate, the interest rates for which banks borrow from each other, at a record low reaching 5.25% in June of 2007 (St. Louis Federal Reserve Bank). This allowed banks a great deal of borrowing power. Banks welcomed the Bush Administration’s housing philosophy, seizing it as a great opportunity. This encouraged banks to start relaxing their standards. Lending standards are based on things such as the borrower’s income, credit, whether or not they are employed and if their employer is reliable.

In an ordinary situation a bank or mortgage lender would look at these credentials and based on these items, which create a credit score, the bank can determine the risk of loaning to the individual. The most risky individuals would qualify as subprime borrowers. Once the bank’s standards were lowered subprime borrowers such as immigrants and first time homeowners were welcomed as a new market opportunity to lending firms. During this time mortgage lending began to boom. Now that it was easier to own a home, everyone wanted to be a part of the “American Dream” so the demand for houses grew daily. This was mostly due to Alan Greenspan, the then Chairman of the Federal Reserve, who kept interest rates low. After the tragedy of 9/11, the consumer markets in the US froze. The stock market dropped, consumers stopped buying and people were in a state of shock, fearing what the future had in store. Alan Greenspan realized this and believed that in order to jump start the American economy he had to lower interest rates (Jacoby and Farber). This helped ease the markets and break the ice that had accumulated when the markets froze. This, in addition to Bush pushing individuals to become consumers, helped bring the economy of the United States back from the dead. The low interest rates were key in Bush’s plan to broaden the housing market to help fulfill the American dream. As people began to buy more homes, housing prices began to rise very rapidly and banks only contributed to the inflation by creating more risky loans.

157 The housing boom that ensued after 9/11 was extremely beneficial to the US economy. More job opportunities sprang up, many of which went to constructing new neighborhoods to meet the demands of the growing housing market. From November of 2001 to April of 2005 the housing industry contributed approximately 800,000 jobs which was almost 40% of the all the new jobs in the US at that time. This staggering number is a great example of how housing was changing America (Jacoby and Farber).

There were other players in this game. Wall Street and two government sponsored enterprises or GSE’s, Fannie Mea and Freddie Mac. During the early beginnings of the housing boom, Fannie Mea and Freddie Mac were responsible for buying mortgages from banks and mortgage companies and selling them to investors as mortgage backed securities. They themselves decided what kinds of loans were put into securities, rarely buying any subprime mortgages. Early on in the housing boom Fannie Mae and Freddie Mac began losing profitable opportunities to Wall Street because of their own accounting scandals. Now that Wall Street was competing with Fannie and Freddie to buy loans from mortgage firms, the two government sponsored enterprises had to lower their standards to keep up with Wall Street’s insatiable demand for the packaging of subprime mortgages. These mortgages were often bought from smaller mortgage companies that were in direct contact with the new home owners. To satisfy the demand for mortgages on Wall Street, mortgage companies resorted to turning to the new subprime mortgage market, advertising to the common subprime buyer by luring them in with low teaser interest rates and subsequent refinances. Without many regulations, quite a few of these lending firms were consumed with the lust for money and mortgages were created without any thought about security, then sold to Wall Street. Wall Street also saw a market in the new growing countries of the world, most prominent among them being China and India. Mortgage backed securities were auctioned off to these developing countries, hundreds at a time, scattering the riches of America’s housing boom all throughout the world.

After resolving their accounting scandals, Fannie Mea and Freddie Mac, dove deeper into the subprime mortgage market in the mist of the newly successful housing expansion. Banks were gobbling up subprime mortgages and flushing them into the stock market in the form of mortgage backed securities. All the standards that Fannie and Freddie had once enforced had been forgotten and in their stead were the millions of subprime mortgages the mortgage brokers were scrambling to make.

The consumer greatly welcomed the rise in housing values due to the increase in demand. This demand was created by the increase in subprime mortgages in what was thought to be a time of economic plenty. Many individuals were for the first time, able to buy into the American Dream of owning a home even if their credentials didn’t match up with the standards that in earlier times were very important to financial institutions. Where once acquiring a loan for anything took a great deal of effort, good credit and a down payment, now people were getting loans and mortgages without giving any money down or sometimes even without having an income. The process for attaining a mortgage from a bank once took a great deal of time but during the housing boom people could literally walk into a bank and in a matter of about 30 minutes walk out with a mortgage loan having paid zero money down (Jacoby and Farber). Mortgage brokers, who wanted to satisfy the demand for loans on Wall Street, were enticing consumers with low teaser interest rates and promises of refinancing. This gave people even more incentive to borrow. These teaser rates and refinances went hand in hand, creating an elusion that individuals would be paying less for their mortgages. A teaser rate loan starts with a very low interest rate such as 5 percent. However after a period of time, this rate dramatically increases. This is where the refinance comes into play. A refinance is actually a new loan altogether. Before a teaser rate expires, the borrower would decide to refinance their loan. This means that they no longer have to pay back their original loan but, now they have a new one with a low manageable interest rate. Borrowers also often got an extra sum of cash that they could use to do anything they wanted with. However this additional sum of cash would eventually have to be paid back with interest just like the original loan. During the housing boom house values were increasing at dramatic rates each year. Mortgage brokers were happy to refinance loans because they collected thousands of dollars worth of fees every time they did. People were spending large amounts of money that they had attained from their refinances and vast amounts of money were being flushed in the economy. Businesses were flourishing, jobs were plentiful and the housing prices were ever increasing.

Unfortunately what comes up most go down. The brief economic utopia that had sprung up from the booming housing values lasted until early 2006 when people began to wake up from their dream world and realize the foundation of the house they had built was unstable and had begun to collapse (Jacoby and Farber). For the first time in history housing prices were rising faster than people’s incomes. Homes were becoming too expensive to afford, fewer people began taking out mortgages and many people began defaulting on their loans (Jacoby and Farber).

Mortgage firms began to lose customers. Financial institutions began to see default rates rising and began tightening standards on mortgage applications. This meant less people were able to acquire loans. These events created the beginnings of the economic downturn.

158 Mortgage money started to dry up and new home buyers could not get new loans. Without new buyers houses were not being bought and eventually housing prices started to dip. With housing prices no longer rising people could no longer refinance their existing mortgages which meant that consumers began to slow their spending.

At the same time the mortgage backed securities that were being held by most financial institutions and sold to investors throughout the world, began to decrease in value because the mortgages that made up these securities were being foreclosed on. People were also not able to pay back debts which ended up resulting in the biggest factor in the economic downturn, foreclosures. Many of the risky subprime mortgage borrowers that had flourished during the unregulated times of the housing boom, were no longer making enough money to pay for their ever growing mortgage expenses. Unable to pay their debt back they had to give up their house, back to the bank. This resulted in disaster for all the banks that had lent money to subprime buyers. Financial institutions around the world began taking on huge losses and because of these losses they stopped loaning money to businesses. Credit around the world started to freeze up. Companies could not borrow money and consumers were not spending. The perfect storm was in the making. Without consumers, people begin to lose jobs from lay offs and without jobs people have no money. Without money people can’t buy things which affected all the other businesses of the US and it reverberated around the world creating an international crisis. Faced with the fact that the housing bubble was beginning to burst and people were either unable to afford a house or were unable to take out a loan, banks could not sell off all the houses that they were acquiring from foreclosures. This sequence of events is a perfect explanation for how everything in the economy is connected. Once one sector fails the rest of the building comes tumbling down after it.

President Bush’s home ownership plan might have seemed harmless in the beginning and Alan Greenspan’s lowered interest rates may have been important to America’s recovery after 9/11 but both these decisions contributed to the catastrophic outcome of the economic downturn of 2008. These proposals happened to come to form at the wrong time. The housing crisis cannot be blamed on one specific person or group of people because in fact everyone had a hand it. Government policy, businesses, banks, home owners and consumers all played a role in the rise and fall of the housing bubble, some playing larger roles than others. In the end everyone who contributed was responsible. The government may have spurred it into being by creating low interest rates and dampening the regulations on lending, but their intentions were good and they just happened to do the wrong thing at the wrong time (Jacoby and Farber).

This has become an event of historical proportions that will probably not be seen for generations to come.

159 Works Cited: Becker, Jo, Stolberg, Sheryl Gay and Labaton, Stephen. “The Reckoning: White House Philosophy Stoked Mortgage Bonfire.” 20 Dec. 2008. nytimes.com. New York: The New York Times. 4 Feb. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/12/21/business/21admin.html> Bettelheim, A., & Ives, B. 7 July, 2008. The housing gamble. CQ Weekly. CQ Public Affairs Collection. 3 Feb., 2009. <http://library.cqpress.com/cqpac/weeklyreport110-000002911199> Bush, George W. “790 KABC: 2002 President Bush Speech Offering Road to Home Ownership."

FreeRepublic.com. 30 Sept. 2008. 17 Feb. 2009. <http://www.freerepublic.com/tag/*/index> Christie, Les. “Mortgage Rates Hit Fresh 37-Year Low.” 31 Dec. 2008. CNNMoney.com. CNN News. 4 Feb. 2009. <http://money.cnn.com/2008/12/31/real_estate/Freddie_mortgage_rates_hit_new_low/index.htm> "Economic downturn and dampened consumer confidence caused house prices to dip during fourth quarter." CNW Group. 26 Jan. 2009. Gale. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://find.galegroup.com/itx/start.do?prodId=ITOF>.

Ely, Bert. “Don’t Push Banks to Make Bad Loans.” 2 Feb. 2009. Opinion. New York: The Wall Street Journal. 5 Feb. 2009 Goodman, Peter S. “Taking Hard New Look at a Greenspan Legacy.” Nytimes.com. 8 Oct. 2008. New York: The New York Times. 4 Feb. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/10/09/business/economy/09greenspan.html?_r=1> Irwin, Neil. “Economic Downturn Expands Countrywide.” Washingtonpost.com. 6 Mar. 2008. Washington DC: The Washington Post. 26 Jan. 2008. <http://www.washingtonpost.com/wpdyn/content/article/2008/03/05/AR2008030501053.html> Krugman, Paul. “Home Not-So-Sweet Home.” 23 June 2008. Nytimes.com. New York: The New York Times. 2 Feb. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/06/23/opinion/23krugman.html?_r=1&scp=3&sq=home%20ownership%2 0Bush&st=cse> Jay, Dennis. "Driven to desperation. (Investigative reports)." Risk Management 56.1 (Jan-Feb 2009): 18(1). Expanded Academic ASAP. Gale. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://find.galegroup.com/itx/start.do?prodId=EAIM>.

Jacoby, James, and David Farber. House of Cards. Prod. James Jacoby. CNBC. San Francisco, California. 12 Feb. 2009.

Jost, Kenneth. “Financial Crisis.” CQ Researcher. 9 May, 2008. CQ Press. 26 Jan. 2009. <http://library.cqpress.com/cqresearcher/document.php?id=cqresrre2008050900&type=hitlist&num=25> Shultz, George P. “‘Think Long’ to Solve the Crisis.” The Wall Street Journal. 30 Jan. 2009. New York.

"The Financial Crisis Timeline." Federal Reserve Bank of St. Louis. Feb. 2009. 17 Feb. 2009 <http://www.stlouisfed.org/timeline/timeline.cfm>.

160 Megan Tom Craig Butz Research in the Community A Block February 4, 2009 A Tainted Childhood: Preventing Child Abuse and Reactive Attachment Disorder Jessie is only 6 months old, but she is already scared of her mother. She is sitting in her crib, staring at the ceiling, when hears the stomping steps of her mother. Instead of being able to look up lovingly at the mother who is now standing over her, Jessie’s eyes are wide and full of terror. Jessie is grabbed her out of the crib, carried her into the kitchen, and thrown roughly onto the table. Her mother wants to teach her a lesson today. She turns on the stove.

At this point Jessie is screaming, crying, and kicking.

“Shut up!” her mother screams.

She turns up the gas and picks up Jessie by the shirt. She holds the little baby’s hand over the scorching flame until it burns. She does the same with the other hand. Her mother is emotionless as she tortures the innocent child. Jessie lets out an earsplitting scream. She is helpless; she can’t defend herself. How is any 6 month old to defend themselves against an infinitely stronger adult?

Jessie’s mother wanted to teach her to be afraid of fire, but instead, Jessie is afraid of her mother and any other adult figure. Sadly, abuse in infants is surprisingly more widespread than one would think.

When infants under the age of 1 are abused, many develop a disease called Reactive Attachment Disorder or RAD. The theory of RAD comes from the evolutionary idea that childhood is a crucial learning period where children learn future social skills predominantly influenced by their parents. Infants who do not bond with or have their parents to look up to never develop these social skills that they need in the rest of their lives. Once a child has RAD, it is difficult to cure them of it depending on the severity. The process for overcoming the disorder is different for every child depending on their situation, extent of abuse, and their own personality. Many children go through the first 10 years of their lives with no intervention or diagnosis. These infants spend most of their time with their parents, which makes preventing child abuse and as a consequence, RAD, much harder. Children who develop Reactive Attachment Disorder because they are physically abused by their parents can be helped through more widespread awareness in prospective parents, abused children, and in the greater community so that the rest of their lives are not negatively affected by this disease.

Child abuse is an underlying problem in all societies; it is a hidden problem that few people detect going through their normal lives. Families who abuse their children almost never stand out in society as different or troubled. This makes it even harder to stop and prevent. Most victims hide that they had been abused. The difference with babies is that they have very subtle ways of telling others that they are being abused. Most of these hints go unnoticed as they have no effective way of expressing their internal pain (Hyde). Child abuse can happen in all ethnicities, social classes, and neighborhoods imaginable (Stephens). Any parent can abuse their child, as one can see through statistics – about one in twenty children are physically abused each year (Stephens). The statistics for abuse in babies will never really be known. Abuse in babies is easily hidden. For example when parents take their children in to a doctor for help, they can use excuses such as that they fell down the stairs, fell out of the crib, got hit in the head by a toy, reached into hot water, etc. Secondary people in the babyies’ lives almost never suspect a thing (Hyde).

How could a parent ever hurt a little, innocent baby? There are many reasons that parents abuse their children including substance abuse, anger, and simply that they have no proper model relationship to base their own parenting on. These three reasons are the most common of reasons, but there are many others. Parents who abuse substances such as alcohol or drugs tend to handle problems in an unhealthy way. They lose their ability to make decisions and if confronted with a situation, such as a crying baby, they can lash out in a violent manner (Rench).

Other parents are inclined to let out their anger or stress at their children. Rather than having an appropriate way of stress relief, they hurt their children (Rench). Another group of parents were victims of abuse as children. They have no proper parenting relationship to base their own parenting on. Because they were abused as children, their model relationship of a family was altered or eliminated completely (Rench).

It is common for parents to believe that teaching their child with fear is the best form of discipline. Their mistake is that discipline and abuse are different. Parents who abuse do not have the best interests in mind for their children. Parents who discipline their children are trying to teach acceptable behavior. The biggest difference is that abuse causes physical pain (Rench).

Awareness can also take the form of more proactive measures to preventing the maltreatment of children. A step to take before the child is even born is encouraging new parents to enroll in prenatal support programs. Prenatal support programs cover the health related aspects of pre-birth and also the mental preparation for the responsibility

161 of a child. Making sure the baby will be healthy is an important aspect in preventing abuse as babies with low weight, who have been exposed to drugs, or are otherwise sick are at a much higher risk of being abused. The support of new families is also based upon creating a central support system for the family. An at-risk family will most likely become a violent one if they are socially isolated. That is why prenatal support builds upon giving the family medical, social, and psychiatric contacts if they ever need help as a parent (Donnelly). These contacts will help the parent let out parenting stress or stress in their lives in a productive place rather than through physical abuse of their child.

After the birth of the child, similar prevention measures can continue. Parents could go to organized classes to learn proper procedures and methods for raising a child. There are several programs that address specific risks of mistakes in parenting. As mentioned earlier, a parent attempting to discipline their child can end up taking it too far and abusing him or her. These classes will address issues such as these and teach proper ways to deal with them in a healthy, non-violent manner. Continued in these programs is a web of support for the parents to go to for help (Donnelly). A therapist, doctor, or simply a fellow new parent seems like a small and insignificant support, but it can be just what the new parent can turn to instead of hitting a blameless child.

The most prevalent cause of Reactive Attachment Disorder is a broken bond between parent and child because of pathogenic care giving (Drisko). The root of this lies in the three fundamental needs of infants: food, the knowledge of physical safety, and an emotional bond with a parent (Kaneshiro). Of these two, researchers base their theory of RAD on physical safety which directly relates to their parental emotional bond. A parent is a child’s secure base. The child and parent attach to each other. A healthy child will trust the parent physically and mentally. When a child is abused by the parent, it breaks this relationship which is their primary attachment. Even if an abusive parent provides for a baby's needs, they are denying the baby of a safe place when they are abusive; the child will cease to trust the caregiver (Lubit).

Once this imperative bond between child and parent is broken, the victimized child develops a form of depression. Children with Reactive Attachment Disorder have many symptoms of this disorder. If one knows what to look for, society would be one step closer to preventing the abuse of infants. The main symptom one would see is inappropriate social skills (Buckner). A child lacking social skills will typically avoid their caretaker and physical contact, won’t make distinctions between strangers and known individuals, and will prefer being alone (Stephens).

A lack of social skills eventually causes the infant to lose all confidence in themselves and others (Lubit). The infant becomes resigned to the fact that they have no one to love them and protect them, which leads to baby to use psychological and physical defenses to avoid more disappointment.

A child with Reactive Attachment Disorder will also show physical symptoms and signs of health problems. These small symptoms are the hints one must look for if one suspects child abuse. One of the simplest signs to look for is facial expression. Healthy babies have a range of facial expressions: smiling, frowning, grinning, or appearing wide-eyed. On the other hand, a baby with RAD will always look sad or expressionless (Fassler). The next symptom a baby with RAD will have is decreased motor activity. A baby that was able to form attachments will wiggle their feet, clench their fists, put things in their mouths, grab at objects, and attempt to crawl, versus an infant who tends to sit in one place for long periods of time (Fassler). Another common sign of RAD is an infant who cries too often or not at all. A healthy baby will most usually cry a few times a day (Fassler). Health wise, a baby with RAD is at risk for long term physical damage. Many babies with the disorder have difficulties being fed, so they will lose weight or suddenly stop gaining weird (American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry).

These physical, mental, and health related problems in a child are not good for his or her development. That is why it is so important for Reactive Attachment Disorder to be recognized and cured.

The next preventative step that can be taken is targeting the abused child. Helping the child through therapy can put a stop to a continuous cycle of abuse. Abused children are more likely to abuse their own children as adults because it is the model they grew up with. An abused child may have the appearance of just being shy or sad, but these outer appearances most always mask more severe internal psychological problems and challenges. These psychological tendencies could lead them to abuse their child if they are not helped (Donnelly). Preventing child abuse at its source early can prevent a never-ending cycle.

The varying nature of Reactive Attachment Disorder makes it a really hard disease to recognize, diagnose, and cure. Abused children under the age of 1 year are the most susceptible to the disease (Lubit), but if action is taken, most children are not diagnosed until close to the age of 5 (Buckner). Recognizing the disease is the hardest part, but once it is suspected, curing it has several steps involved. The first step is early recognition, the most important step in curing a child (Kaneshiro). An abused child needs special help, support, and treatment as soon as possible. Professional help should not be delayed under any circumstances because signs of abuse ware off with time. If signs of abuse are found, a doctor’s appointment should take place within 72 hours (Stephens). Early action is the best way to catch the disease before it causes negative consequences in the child’s life.

162 Experts have found very few effective ways of curing Reactive Attachment Disorder. The disorder varies so much from case to case that a treatment that works with one child will not necessarily work with another. The basic procedure starts with investigating the history of the child, a physical examination, and a psychiatric evaluation (Kaneshiro). After a child is diagnosed by a doctor and psychiatrist, the recovery process can start.

Initially, the child must be living in a safe environment where abuse and neglect cannot occur. The first cure tried is simply to change the relationship between the child and the caregiver. If the caregiver is abusive, they must go through therapy or parenting classes. If this doesn’t work, the child must be relocated to a relative, adoptive family, or foster home (Kaneshiro). To do this, social services might have to repeatedly follow up on the child to make sure his or her parents are doing a proper job of caring for the child, or make sure the child has a stable, protective home to live in. "These children may be frightened of people and find physical affection overwhelming at first, and parents should try not to see this as rejection" (Kaneshiro). Treatments based on building relationships naturally should not be forced upon the child, this will cause them to become overwhelmed and go back into their mental shell (American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry). For many children, this treatment is successful and they can go on to forming relationships on their own and improving their social behaviors (Drisko).

If the more independent route is not successful, more personalized, intensive action can be taken by caregivers, doctors, and psychiatric therapists. The most effective cure is known as Behavior Management Training or BMT (Buckner). BMT starts with introducing a psychiatric therapist into the child’s life. This therapist then works with the child individualy and then in groups to overcome the fears and social difficulties he or she is experiencing. The therapist models his or her treatment on the individual child’s behavior. This therapist becomes a crucial part of this child’s life, as this might be the first adult that the child can fully trust and bond with (Wood).

The other more common cure is relationship based attachment therapy. This direction of recovery centers on forming attachments as a starting point for recovery. If a child can form attachments with a new caregiver or friends, they might be able to partially undo the mental damage abusive parents inflict (Drisko). Curing Reactive Attachment Disorder is always a gamble with all of the factors involved. It is important to start curing a child as soon as possible because “the younger the child is and the closer the child's relationship to the abuser, the more serious the emotional damage will be" (Stephens). The symptoms of RAD can last throughout childhood, adolescence, and adulthood and flare up at unexpected times or situations.

Infants who develop Reactive Attachment Disorder at this young age are vulnerable of having lifelong consequences. Most often, the effects are long term emotional damage rather than physical damage (Stephens).

Drastic lifelong effects are usually an indication that the victim of abuse was not helped or cured as a toddler or young child. As a direct result of RAD, an adolescent or adult will have no model of how to act in relationships with friends and strangers. As a child, one develops an internal model and idea of relationships which serves as a template for relationships as they grow up. The relationship model can be positive: people can be trusted, confided in, and helpful. Or the model can be negative, which is the case with RAD children: no one can be trusted, people aren't caring, and they are all alone in the world (Charles). This worldview can carry on all the way through adulthood as a child’s relationship with their parents plays the most critical role in determining how to child makes future attachments (Lubit). An adult with RAD will not follow cultural procedures for interaction, including not knowing body language, not pursuing, initiating, or following up on cues that someone wants to have an interaction, will not go to other people willingly, and avoids eye and physical contact (Lubit). Attachments are most commonly known to us as relationships, friendships, and social interactions. Not only are there effects regarding external variables in the RAD victim’s life, but also internal, personal struggles the adolescent or adult must deal with.

Even once the abuse has stopped, the effects of Reactive Attachment Disorder still prevail in a victim’s life.

These personal struggles may be pushed to the side as another problem by the rest of society. For example, poor hygienic cleanliness may be put off as laziness or rudeness. On the contrary, these struggles and consequences cannot be helped by the person with RAD. These victims cannot help what they are going through and deal with it in the best way they can. The overlying effect is insecurity for the rest of the victim’s life (Lubit). This insecurity changes how they deal with their personal and external struggle. In reference to their appearance, an adolescent or adult with RAD can have poor hygienic condition, under development of motor coordination, and blank facial expressions with no joy or happiness in their eyes (Lubit). The personal negative effects are similar to the symptoms of depression. A victim can grow up with impulsivity, aggression, mood swings, oppositional behavior, emotional withdrawal, and self injury (Wood). In fact, patients who are not treated have a higher mortality rate than patients who have been through treatment and have been helped (Lubit). This demonstrates the importance of recognizing, curing, and treating RAD and more significantly preventing child abuse.

Fast forward 15 years in Jessie’s life. She is now attending high school. Throughout her elementary and middle school years she had been bounced from foster family to foster family, never knowing of a place to actually call home. As a child of merely 2 years old, she was pulled out of her abusive family after a neighbor inquired about

163 the constant screaming in their home. For the next 13 years, the foster system was her only home. She had no one constant in her life that she could rely on. Throughout her childhood, she was always quiet and withdrawn. Other children at school just thought she was shy when she wouldn’t come over to play or talk with her classmates. The teachers dismissed it as shyness throughout the years as well. In truth, Jessie had been struggling with an undiagnosed case of Reactive Attachment Disorder for almost 15 years. The disease that she had no idea existed had affected her life in so many ways; and because she didn’t know about it, throughout the years, she had hated and blamed herself for the way her life was. As RAD sets into one’s life, it takes on a form of depression with the same symptoms. If Jessie had been diagnosed and helped as a young child, she wouldn’t be having the same problems making friends, socializing, and going through her everyday life.

The most difficult part of this disease lies in the fact that the victims are always small, innocent babies. The longer that the baby is abused for lowers the likelihood of the child making a full recovery (Stephens). These children are the reason that normal people can and need to help. The simplest solution may slip peoples’ minds because of its obvious nature, but widespread publit awareness can save countless infants and children from physical abuse. If schools, hospitals, and community agencies are aware of the problem, then as a result, other families in the community can help shoulder the burden of protecting these children (Donnelly).

Reactive Attachment Disorder is a serious issue that starts at the root of a child’s life if preventative measures are not taken. It is caused by the lack of attachment with a parent that defines relationships throughout the rest of one’s life. It affects social relationships throughout life which both leads to and is a result of depression.

Innocent children do not have to suffer this unfair life if child abuse is prevented and reduced throughout society.

Actions taken against child abuse include parental training, child therapy, and community awareness. Why should a child have to ensure such a misfortune when they haven’t done anything except live their life the best they can?

They shouldn’t. As Amy Madden, a victim of child abuse herself says: No child should have to live a life of stolen innocence, a life of stolen beauty. No child should have to live with fear on a daily basis; no child should have to feel shame, humiliation, or guilt for something he or she had no control over. It is our duty as adults to protect our children. Not just our own children, but every child.

164

Works Cited Boeree, C. George. “Abraham Maslow.” Personality Theories. 2006. 9 January 2009 <http://webspace.ship.edu/cgboer/maslow.html>.

Buckner, Julia D, Lopez, Cristina, Dunkel, Stephanie, Joiner, Thomas E. "Behavior Management Training for the Treatment of Reactive Attachment Disorder." ProQuest. Platinum Periodicals. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.proquest.com/>.

Carlton, Peter L. "Phychopharmacology." Access Science @ McGraw Hill. 2008. 29 January 2008 <http://www.accessscience.com/content.aspx?id=554800>.

Charles, Zeanah H., and Nathan A. Fox. "Temperament and Attachment Disorders." Informaworld. 1 Feb. 2004. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.informaworld.com/smpp/content~db=all?content=10.1207/S15374424JCCP3301_4>.

Donnelly, Cohn. An Approach to Preventing Child Abuse. Chicago, IL: National Committee to Prevent Child Abuse.

Drisko, James, Zilberstein, Karen. "What Works in Treating Reactive Attachment Disorder: Parents' Perspectives. " ProQuest. Platinum Periodicals. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.proquest.com/>.

Fassler, David G., and Lynne S. Dumas. Help Me, I'm Sad. New York: Penguin, 1997.

Hyde, Margaret O. Know About Abuse. New York: Walker and Company, 1992.

Kaneshiro, Neil K. "Reactive attachment disorder of infancy or early childhood." National Library of Medicine National Institutes of Health. 30 Apr. 2008. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.nlm.nih.gov/medlineplus/ency/article/001547.htm>.

Kemph, John P, Voeller, Kytja K S. "Reactive attachment disorder in adolescence. " ProQuest. Platinum Periodicals.

25 Jan. 2009 <http://www.proquest.com/>.

Lake, Peter M. "Recognizing Reactive Attachment Disorder: Early Intervention is Essential to Prevent Lifelong Consequences." Sept.-Oct. 2005. Gale. Health and Wellness. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/>.

Lubit, Roy H., and J. M. Maldonado-Durán. "Child Abuse & Neglect: Reactive Attachment Disorder." EMedicine. 2 Aug. 2006. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://emedicine.medscape.com/article/915447-overview>.

Madden, Amy. Stolen Beauty. Minneapolis: Syren Book Company, 2007.

Pelzer, Dave. A Child Called "It" Deerfield Beach: Health Communications, Inc., 1995.

Pelzer, Dave. A Man Named Dave. Deerfield Beach: Health Communications, Inc., 1999.

Pelzer, Dave. The Lost Boy. Deerfield Beach: Health Communications, Inc., 1997.

Practice Parameter for the Assessment and Treatment of Children and Adolescents with Reactive Attachment Disorder of Infancy and Early Childhood. 2005. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry.

25 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/>.

"Reactive Attachment Disorder." American Academy of Child & Adolescent Psychiatry. May 2008. 26 January 2009 <http://www.aacap.org/cs/root/facts_for_families/reactive_attachment_disorder>.

"Reactive Attachment Disorder." Nov. 2008. Gale. Health and Wellness. 25 Jan. 2009 <http://galenet.galegroup.com/>.

Rench, Janice E. Family Violence How to Recognize and Survive It. Minneapolis: Lerner Publications, 1992.

Stephens, Laura. "Child Abuse." Psychology Today. 15 Apr. 2008. 26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.psychologytoday.com/conditions/childabuse.html>.

Teicher, Martin H. "Scars That Won't Heal: The Neurobiology of Child Abuse." Scientific American March 2002).

Scientific American Archive Online. 24 Jan. 2009 <http://search.ebscohost.com/login.aspx?direct=true&AuthType=&db=sfh&AN=14326976&site=ehostlive>.

Theodore, Wayne. Wayne An Abused Child's Story of Courage, Survival, and Hope. Gig Harbor: Harbor P, 2003.

Wood, Maureen E. "Reactive Attachment Disorder." Great Ideas in Personality Theory and Research. 25 Mar. 2005.

26 Jan. 2009 <http://www.personalityresearch.org/papers/wood.html>.

165

Research in the Community Volume 1 Issue 3 June 2009 The Bay School of San Francisco

166 Table of Contents Falling Economy Dogs Shelters and Pets…………………………………………………………… Shohei Burns 167 The Ongoing Race between Bike Messengers and the Internet………………………………… William Caldwell 171 Dealing with Depression: How Parents Affect Their Depressed Teenager………………………… Clara Cardillo 174 The Presidio or the New Downtown………………………………………………………………… Casey Harper 177 The San Andreas Fault: A Gift, Not a Curse……………………………………………………………Alex Kinsella180 Housing Built by Hope……………………………………………………………………… Tyler Langenbrunner 184 The Trouble with Isolationism…………………………………………………………………... Kelsey MacLeod 188 Spotlight vs. Do Right……………………………………………………………………………...Mary MacLeod 192 Homelessness……………………………………………………………………………………. Thomas Pritchett 195 Just Knowing Can Save Lives………………………………………………………………………..Hayley Smith 198 Procrastination: A Researcher’s Worst Nightmare…………………………………………………… Daniel Stuff 201 Fixed Gears and the Bike Industry…………………………………………………………………... Will Topham 204 Bay School Laptops: Helpful Learning Tools or Devious Distractions……………………………. Noah Tuchow 206 Making a Difference for Kids with Learning Differences…………………………………………. Benjy Wachter 211 Whales: Man’s New Best Friend? ……………………………………………………………………. Thea Walsh 215 The Curious Culture of Cults……………………………………………………………… Emma Williams-Baron 218

167 Shohei Burns Craig Butz Research in the Community 11 Apr. 2009.

Falling Economy Dogs Shelters and Pets.

Since the economic crisis of 2008, millions of people have lost their jobs; thousands have lost their homes, and consequently abandoned their pets to take care of their families. These abandoned animals usually end up in overcrowded shelters and killed while a search is made for better solutions to help save money, space, and especially, the animals. Without support and help, many shelters will be forced to shut down, leaving millions of animals on the street to fend for themselves, creating more suffering, disease and death all over the streets of the United States.

On April 8th, 2009, a locksmith stumbled upon a foreclosed house in New Jersey with 68 dead, rotting animals inside. The owners had fallen behind on mortgage payments months before and left their home and the 68 animals to starve (The Associated Press). Even though this huge scale of abandonment is rare, many smaller cases of abandonment happen everyday. Ever since the start of the economic recession, abandoning animals seems to be the new trend. Many people have been losing their homes and jobs since the economic downturn and thus been unable to support the family pet, leaving them to die or anonymously dropping them off at overcrowded shelters. Pets who suffer the worst case of abandonment are usually left behind in the house “without food, water or the comforts of a temperature-controlled environment” (Weintraub). If the pets aren’t found within five days by neighbors or real estate agents, the animals die and rot in the house until someone is unlucky enough to find them. More sympathetic pet owners abandon their pets at a local shelter and are able to give the pet a better chance at life. However, the chance of survival is not high. An estimated six to eight million animals are abandoned by their owners in animal shelters and approximately three to four million animals are euthanized every year, giving the animal a 50% chance of surviving in a shelter located in the United States (Common Questions).

All over the country, shelters are feeling the increase in animals and many report that this growth is caused by the failing economy. Sacramento California SPCA PR director, Leslie Kirrene, reports that they’ve “seen an increase of about 1000 animals in 2008 over 2007” and attributes “the large increase of pets to the economy” (Kirrene). This shelter isn’t the only one to blame the failing economy for the increased number of abandoned pets.

Anne Irwin, executive director of Bucks County SPCA in Lahaska, Pennsylvania, said that, “We definitely have gotten animals from people who lost their houses and had to scale back” (Bergeron). In Boston, the primary reason people surrendered their pets to shelters was having to move to smaller apartments with landlords that permitted pets (Moyer). Over in Pennsylvania, Irwin adds, “It's not a question of not being able to afford feeding Fido or Fifi, but rather owners who are moving in with relatives or moving to apartments that don't allow pets” (Bergeron).

While some owners try their best to care for their pet and properly surrender them to the shelter, many owners are simply abandoning them in front of the shelter. The Sacramento SPCA, says Kirrene, had “almost 600 animals in 2008 that were just abandoned at the shelter and they are attributing a number of those to the economy too” (Kirrene). The reason most people don’t properly surrender the animals is because they don’t want to deal with the surrendering process and have to pay a surrender fee (Kirrene). However, spending an extra 30 minutes to surrender the pet can save its life. Abandoning pets at shelters lessens their chance at survival at a shelter because “It's always better for animal shelters to know the pet's name and history so it's more likely to be adopted” (Bergeron). Sadly, if a pet isn’t adopted in a certain number of days or weeks, most shelters will be forced to put them down because of the lack of space and food for the increasing amount of pets in shelters.

In the late 1980’s, 17 million dogs and cats were being euthanized in shelters every year. Since then, the number of animals euthanized was brought down to 5 million a year. Unfortunately, the number of animals euthanized in shelters has been slowly increasing the economic crisis. Shelters all over the United States are simply euthanizing thousands of animals because the sudden rush of abandoned animals has maxed out their kennels (Common Questions). Many pet owners believe that, “Animal shelters are safe havens for the millions of dogs, cats, bunnies, and other animals that are carelessly tossed aside when people don't want them anymore” (Heller).

However, while pet owners are dropping their animals off one by one, shelters are quickly becoming full and are forced to put down their animals. In California, one source estimated that out of the 800,000 dogs and cats abandoned, roughly half of them are euthanized in shelters (Animal Crusader Takes on Overcrowded Animal Shelters). Las Vegas, Nevada also has an enormous problem with over crowded shelters as the number two city for home foreclosures in 2008. One shelter in Las Vegas called Lied Animal Shelter receives around 138 animals every day and has maxed out their living space for the animals. In order to lessen this influx of animals, they have accepted a new policy that gives them permission to euthanize “unclaimed” pets after 72 hours (Seltzer). Before this

168 method, they tried other methods of conserving space by putting multiple pets in one cage but “it created a high risk for disease, injuries due to fighting and struggles over food” (Seltzer).

It is hard to imagine that shelters all over the United States are simply putting down thousands of animals a day because of the lack of space. While many shelters can resort to euthanization to reduce the number of animals they have, no-kill shelters are also running out of space and food for the animals, but cannot resort to killing to minimize the flood of animals they receive everyday. One famous no-kill shelter called Best Friends, located in Utah, is able to keep from killing their animals by having acres of land and shelter for the animals to play and stay (Best Friends). Smaller no-kill shelters, on the other hand, have a limited amount of space for the animals and have reached their maximum capacity. Since they are bound by the promise to not kill any animal, they do not know how to take care of the growing number of pets outside their doors. Many no-kill shelters are simply closing their doors to more animals while others are bringing more animals in, keeping many of them in one cage for months and even years, until they are adopted out. Ironically, they even transport some animals to a euthanizing shelter which takes the animal and alleviates their problem by euthanizing them anyway (Animal Rights Uncompromised: ‘No-Kill’ Shelters). If there were more no-kill shelters like Best Friends, who have hundreds of acres, thousands of volunteers, and donations to provide food and shelter, less animals would be killed or have to suffer inside cages for years, waiting to be adopted. Sadly, there simply isn’t enough money, cages, and good homes to take these animals away from both suffering and death found at both no-kill shelters and euthanizing shelters.

While numbers of euthanized animals, animals abandoned, and animals taken in by shelters has increased, so have the number of adoptions in many shelters. While most shelters report a steady rate of adoptions, some shelters, such as the Orange County Animal Shelter, are seeing fewer adoptions. In the Orange County Animal Shelter, adoptions “are down three percent compared to last year” and shelter officials are blaming it on the economy (Frere). On the other hand, in many other counties and states, shelters are giving the failing economy credit for the increase of adoptions in their shelters. Kate Shivlock, director of development and marketing of Pets Unlimited in San Francisco said, "It seems like more people are looking to adopt animals” from their shelter, giving the failing economy credit for the increase in adoptions (Chang). The Sacramento SPCA was able to create several large adoption events where they lowered their adoption fees to appeal to a greater public. The Sacramento SPCA, revealed Kirrene, “has seen more people coming in because of the combination of all the adoption specials we’ve offered and the good publicity in the community” (Kirrene). She also gives credit to the failing economy for an increase in adoptions because, “during these tough economic times, it’s a ‘feel good’ thing for people to adopt an animal” (Kirrene). While the adoption rates are keeping steady and even increasing at times, the adoptions aren’t enough to save even the smallest handful of animals. Rocking County Animal Shelter, located in North Carolina, has gratefully seen a 9 percent increase in adoptions since last year but the 72 percent euthanization rate overshadows it completely (Davis). Sometimes, even lowered adoption fees are futile. In one example, The Community Animal Shelter of Hampton, despite the lowered adoption and spray/neuter fees, was only able to adopt out 68 animals and had to euthanize 485 out of 620 animals , roughly 78 percent, that were brought in that year.

Adoption is the best way to give pets another chance to live but while every pet needs a home, not every home needs a pet.

Luckily, there are alternative ways of helping shelters and pets in need. Ever since the economic crisis, shelters have been in need for volunteers, supplies, and especially, donations. Since the economy is landing more pets into overcrowded crates in shelters all over the country, many of these shelters are looking to expand so they can increase their threshold of animals. In North Carolina, Rockingham County Animal Shelter plans to build another shelter to house the surplus of abandoned animals. However, their enthusiasm is overrun by the lack of money that is needed to build it. Out of the $1.7 million dollars needed to build the shelter, $900,000 has to come directly from donations and the needed “money has trickled in: $25 here, $50 there”, only filling up a margin of their total cost (Davis). Without the needed donations to build a new shelter, Rockingham County Animal Shelter won’t be able to support the growing number of abandoned animals and as a result, landfills will grow larger every year with thousands of dead, innocent animals (Davis).

While many shelters are calling for money donations, some are also in need of food, blankets and other materials that could save money for spaying/neutering and adoption events. Surprisingly enough, animal shelters “can go through thousands of blankets and towels each month” and are always in a constant need of blankets and towels to keep the animals comfortable and warm because they completely depend on the public for these (Maroff).

One of the best ways to help out a shelter is to volunteer, either by helping out at the shelter or by fostering an animal. Most pet shelters are non-profit and count on the work of volunteers to help run the shelter well. These shelters allow volunteers to dog walk, help run errands, and simply play with the animals to bring happiness and friendship back into the heart of the abandoned (Mason). For no-kill shelters, fostering is perfect because it allows fewer animals to be turned away and gives animals more time to get the help they need (Brantely). Shelters are in

169 need of donations the most, and donating anything- money, supplies, food, even time, can bring life and happiness back into a pet that has suffered from a broken heart and a dying soul.

On August 18, 2005, citizens from New Orleans evacuated, leaving their animals in their homes, believing to be back in only three or four days. The next day, almost 85% of New Orleans was submerged and thousands of animals died or ended up on the streets. Luckily, many of those animals were saved because people all over the country donated gave their support, time, and money to help the animals survive until they found their owners again.

Through reaching out to the American public for help, animal shelters were able to raise $3.5 million dollars online and use this money to save thousands of animals that didnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t have any food or shelter (Manning). Now, the animals are again facing another crisis but this time, millions of animals are at stake all over the United States, not just New Orleans. Without help and support from America, both landfills and streets will be filled with the bodies of innocent animals as shelters close down and people are forced to leave their unwanted pets in the street. Even though America is struck by an economic crisis and many people will not be able to adopt or foster an animal, the smallest act of kindness can save a pet and maybe even a shelter. If the people of America come together again and donates just a little bit of their time or money, shelters will survive and pets will be able to find a home where they are loved instead of euthanized in over crowded shelters.

170 Works Cited “Animal Crusader Takes on Overcrowded Animal Shelters.” Dogtime. Dogtime.com, N.d.. Web. 30 Apr. 2009. <http://dogtime.com/spay-neuter-bill-end-to-homeless-pets.html> “Animal Rights Uncompromised: ‘No-Kill’ Shelters.” Peta. Peta.org, N.d. Web. 1 May. 2009. < http://www.peta.org/campaigns/ar-nokillshelters.asp> “Animal Shelter Euthanasia.” N.s. American Humane, N.d. Web. 29 Apr. 2009. <http://www.americanhumane.org/about-us/newsroom/fact-sheets/animal-shelter-euthanasia.html> Bergeron, Chris. “Poor Economy Dogs Pet Owners.” The Milford Daily News. The Metrowest Daily News, 10 March. 2009. Web. 19 March. 2009. <http://www1.phillyburbs.com/pb-dyn/news/111-040920081516169.html> Brantley, Amy. “How to Donate to a Pet Shelter.” N.s. eHow, N.d. Web. 1 May. 2009. < http://www.ehow.com/how_4506563_donate-pet-shelter.html> Chang, Elizabeth. “Shelter Adoptions Rise With Number of Animal Surrenders.” The Daily Californian.

DailyCal.org, 9 Apr. 2009. Web. 30 May. 2009. <http://www.dailycal.org/article/105183/shelter_adoptions_rise_with_number_of_animal_surre> “Common Questions about Animal Shelters and Animal Control.” The Humane Society of the United States.

Hsus.org, 4 Feb. 2009. Web. 9 May. 2009. <http://www.hsus.org/pets/animal_shelters/common_questions_about_animal_shelters_and_animal_contro l.html> Davis, Jonelle. “Euthanasia rates rise as animal shelters struggle.” News & Record. News-record.com, 8 Feb. 2009.

Web. 1 May. 2009. < http://www.newsrecord.com/content/2009/02/07/article/euthanasia_rates_rise_as_animal_shelters_struggle> Dewitt, Michael, Jr. “2008 CASH report: 485 animals euthanized.” N.s. The Hampton Country Guardian, 30 Apr. 2009. Web. 1 May. 2009. < http://www.hamptoncountyguardian.com/news/2008-cash-report-485-animalseuthanized> Frere, Eileen. “Pet Adoptions on the Decline in O.C.” KABC-TV. ABC7, 24 Sep. 2008. Web. 1 May. 2009. <http://abclocal.go.com/kabc/story?section=news/local/orange_county&id=6412426> Heller, Rachel. “Overcrowded Animal Shelters: Protective or Frightening?” N.s. Accociated Content, 11 Aug. 2008.

Web. 28 Apr. 2009. <http://www.associatedcontent.com/article/49428/overcrowded_animal_shelters_protective.html?cat=9> Kirrene, Leslie. Personal Interview. 8 Aug. 2009.

Manning, Anita. “Animal Welfare Groups Rescue Abandoned Pets.” Gannet Co. Inc. USA Today, 3 Sep. 2005.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://www.usatoday.com/news/nation/2005-09-03-katrinapetrescues_x.htm> Maroff, Melissa. “How to Donate Blankets and Towels to Animal Shelters.” N.s. eHow, N.d. Web. 1 May. 2009. < http://www.ehow.com/how_4748486_donate-blankets-towels-animal-shelters.html> Mason, Ann. “Dog Walkers: Volunteer to Walk Dogs at Animal Shelters.” Issue Marketing. Charity Guide, N.d.

Web. 1 May. 2009.

Moyer, Sandra. “Economy Affecting Pets, Too.” PhillyBurbs. Courier Times, 9 Apr. 2008. Web. 19 Mar. 2009. <http://www.milforddailynews.com/state/x792885269/Poor-economy-dogs-pet-owners> The Associated Press. “Couple Arrested in Barnegat Dead Animal Case.” New Jersey Real-Time News. Nj.com, 8 Apr. 2008. Web. 28 Apr. 2009. <http://www.nj.com/news/index.ssf/2008/04/barnegat_township_police_make.html> Weintraub, Elizabeth. “Abandoned Foreclosure Pets.” N.s. About.com, n.d. Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://homebuying.about.com/od/4closureshortsales/qt/10208_ForclPets.htm> Wynn, Eliza. “Help Pets Survive the Economics Crisis: 10 Things You Can Do”. LifeStyle. Associated Content, 16 Mar. 2009. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.associatedcontent.com/article/1569677/help_pets_survive_the_economic_crisis.html>

171 William Caldwell Craig Butz Research in the Community March 18, 2009 The Ongoing Race between Bike Messengers and the Internet It’s 6 o’clock and rush hour traffic is horrendous as you’re leaving downtown San Francisco when you see a ragged bike messenger zoom by you, almost hitting your car. As the man weaves in and out of cars you think to yourself, “That guy is insane!” as he continues on, with his beat up sling backpack across his back, filled with packages. The bike messenger is the same person that seems to be a lifesaver for delivering a last minute package, but he is also the same person who you find yourself constantly yelling at for cutting you off while driving downtown. Couriers are truly amazing beings, but they are a dying breed. Recent technological advances (such as the internet), have lead to the decline of urban messengers. But, because there will always be a demand for the rapid delivery of hard goods and original documents, couriers, with the help of the rapidly growing fixed gear community, will be able to sustain their lives delivering packages.

Bike messengers are men or women who rapidly deliver packages in the urban areas of cities, where heavy traffic makes cycling much faster than driving. There are three types of messengers: runners, bikers, and drivers.

Running messengers only deliver small packages short distances between office buildings, using public transit and running on foot as their only means of travel. Bike messengers deliver an array of items, anywhere from a few blocks to miles away. Austin Horse, a messenger in New York city, says he mostly delivers things like blue prints, DVDs, clothes, and food along with the a diminishing stack of legal documents. Finally, driving messengers are used to bring large, bulky packages across long distances.

Messengers were the first people to use the fixed gear track bikes for street purposes, seeing that track bikes were originally designed for velodrome use. Fixed gears have one speed, no gears, no freewheel and usually no brakes. Braking is achieved by either slowing down your pedaling or by locking up your legs and skidding. Track bikes became the choice bike of messengers back in the 1990’s, and some messengers still use them. Fixed gears have grown in popularity among the messenger crowd, and they have become popular with the “hipster” culture, creating a fixed gear subculture. Messengers chose to use them because of their extreme simplicity. There are very few parts on a fixed gear, which is appealing because there are fewer parts to break and fewer parts to be stolen.

They are generally cheaper, and much lighter than standard derailleur equipped road bikes. Because of their minimalist nature, fixed gears are low maintenance, which means messengers get to spend less time fixing their bike and more time delivering packages and making money. Many messengers consider fixed gear bikes the purest form of cycling, because there is a certain connection felt with the bike, since your legs are always spinning.

If messengers have to work so hard, while not making a lot of money, than why do people get into couriering? People become messengers because it’s a profession that does not really conform to the rest of society.

Trujillo a messenger from Austin Texas, said that, "The only reason I'm doing this is because it's cool to get paid to ride your bike all day” (qtd. in Dille). A messenger does not have to sit at a desk all day, or work at a factory, to make money. A messenger is free to make decisions and is not restricted to anything. There is something about the image (real or imagined) of strength, speed, simplicity, and freedom that highlights the messenger lifestyle and attracts our attention (Rob). They choose their own routes to get to destinations; they determine how much they will make in a day. A businessman might work incredibly hard for weeks, and still receive they same amount of pay, regardless of their effort. Since messengers are paid by the package, the amount earned in one day fluctuates. Since couriering is such an out of the ordinary job it has attracted lots of young people to it. Fixed gears have become extremely popular with the “hipster” population, and movies like Mash SF, have sparked further interest in messengers. There are many college age kids that have gotten into fixed gear riding, and heard about couriers and decided to try it out. This trend has risen greatly in the past few years, and according to Andy Van Wart, “’After I had been couriering for about 4 months, I realized that this was an absolutely insane job’. I thought, ‘Hey, I’m getting paid like 3 dollars per package to haul *** around the city, this can’t be right.’” Andy is a great example of a person that tries couriering, then quits, realizing that it is a low paying, and high risk profession. However, messenger companies are able to pick and choose messengers since couriers are readily available because of the trend.

Being a messenger is not all fun and games. Couriering is an extremely dangerous profession, which has created a low supply of bike messengers, which in turn has lead to the decline of messengers. Messengers must deliver packages as fast as possible, in order to make the most money. This puts messengers in a bad position because they have to ride dangerously to make a decent amount of money. Messengers like Trujillo have to deal with the constant dangers their work poses. "The more time you're out here, the higher your risk for getting hurt," Trujillo says, underlining the point that it's not a matter of if, but when. "I'm an independent contractor and I don't

172 have health insurance. I haven't had a serious accident yet, but that could change at any second" (Dille). The Immortal Class does an excellent job explaining the main danger of being a messenger; exposure. The longer a messenger works the dangerous urban streets, the higher the chance he will be hit. One of the scariest statistics Culley references is, “An average biker should expect to have a serious accident every two thousand miles—about a month’s work for me” (Culley 126). The dangers of couriering don’t end there; messengers have to deal with road rage stricken drivers and police officers who hate messengers along with the chances of getting hit. Austin Horse has seen many of his messenger friends get tickets for outrageous offenses, such as riding outside of the bike lane. The monthly Critical Mass ride is just one example of how messengers and other cyclists have dealt with the injustices they experience on the road.

Since messengers have to deal with road rage stricken drivers and biased cops regularly, they have felt the need to exercise their rights as cyclists and started the monthly event; Critical Mass. Critical Mass was started by San Francisco messengers had the first official Critical Mass ride took place on September 25, 1992. The aim of critical mass is to raise bicycle awareness, especially in urban cities like San Francisco and New York, where bicyclists are constantly denied their rights to the road. By gathering a large portion of the bicycling community and having everyone ride together, it shows that motorists are not the only ones on the road. Some believe that Critical Mass has helped drivers become aware of bikers, like 34-year-old Craig Traver, who said, "Back (in 1986), when I first started as a bike messenger, drivers were a lot more aggressive toward pedestrians and bikes," who has ridden in several Masses and now works in a rental car agency. "That's mellowed a lot since then" (qtd. in Garofoli). The messengers that started Critical Mass have been able to achieve what they initially wanted; a change in attitude of drivers, in order to make the streets safer for bicyclists. Critical Mass along with the San Francisco Bike Coalition has convinced the city to pay for the addition of several much needed bike lanes in the heart of downtown San Francisco in 1997. The infamous July 1997 ride, when 5,000 cyclists rode to show up Mayor Brown and mostly wandered where they pleased, prompted plenty of ill will among those trapped in their cars. But that event got City Hall's attention, said the Bicycle Coalition's Shahun. Within a year, the coalition had won at least three new bike lanes in San Francisco, a then-unheard-of achievement (Garofoli). This single event was able to prove that cyclists had the power to keep traffic from budging, showing that the cycling community holds a strong place on the streets.

Critical Mass rides continue to this day, and until cycling awareness is achieved, critical mass will continue.

During the 1990’s being a messenger was a fairly well paying job. Messengers did not have to compete with the internet like they do today because the internet was not used to transfer documents like it is today. So instead of transferring documents electronically, messengers were heavily used by law firms and small businesses.

In fact, the internet actually helped messengers during the 90’s because companies acquired large sums of money through the dot com bubble, and with their excess money, would pay a lot to rush packages across the city. In fact, the main threat back in the 90’s was the fax machine. With the invention of the fax machine, messengers thought that they would loose their jobs because businesses could simply fax documents over instead of paying a messenger to deliver it. However, the fax machine did not seem to have a large effect on couriers because electronic signatures and faxed signatures were not legal. Full time messengers like Patrick Newell said, "A great day [in the 90’s] used to be $300; $200 days were regular. Now, for most of the guys, $150 is really good" (qtd. in Dille). According to Flores, who is one of the owners of the San Francisco based courier company Wheels of Justice, said that his top runner earns only $50,000 a year, now days (qtd. in Kravets). Unfortunately, around 2000, the days of making two to three hundred dollars a day ended. Things got worse for messenger companies after the dot-com collapse in 2000, and much worse after the terrorist attacks in 2001, which caused stocks to fall even further and companies of all kinds to pare their spending (Pender). Many businesses that regularly hired messengers went out of business or stopped using messengers in order to save money. Also, the U.S. legalized electronic signatures, so companies did not have to send original hand sign documents by hand. With the heightened security that 9/11 brought, messengers had to spend a lot more time making deliveries, in turn making even less money. After the attacks, major businesses, especially those in New York, stepped up their security measures requiring messengers to sign in and out when making a delivery. Some businesses even installed metal detectors which further impeded the progress of messengers.

The internet has become more and more important and because of this, most legal documents and papers are being sent via the internet; the major cause of the decline of couriers. Since the turn of the century, bike messengers have been trusted to carry massive amounts of legal documents, but according to Newell, “The main factor inhibiting the amount of work is the proliferation of electronic documents. In the filing room of the Public Utility Commission, Newell points to the stacks of paper piled high in every corner of the office. ‘The amount of paper that comes through here is unbelievable,’ he says. ‘It's not hard to understand why they're moving to efiling.’” No company likes to file thousands of paper documents, which computers can easily organize and contain

173 safely, allowing users to access them instantly. This eliminates the space and time needed for filing thousands of documents and the need to keep the files organized.

Bike messengers have been relied upon for over a hundred years and are valued for their ability to deliver packages quickly, especially in urban areas with heavy traffic. Evidence has shown there is no way messengers will be wiped out because oversized documents and original papers will always need to be hand delivered, rendering the internet useless. Even though the number of working bike messengers has declined greatly, urban areas will continue to create a demand for messengers in the years to come. The fixed gear subculture, on the other hand, has lessened the decline of messengers by making couriers readily available in large cities like New York and San Francisco.

Works Cited Balzar, John. “One Gear, No Brakes.” The LA Times Magazine. 2 Oct. 2005 Web. 20 March 2009. <http://www.cicle.org/cicle_content/pivot/entry.php?id=66> Culley, Travis. The Immortal Class: Bike Messengers and the Cult of Human Power. Villard: New York. 2003.

Print.

Dille, Ian. “Courier Culture.” C.I.C.L.E. 12 Aug. 2006. Web. 20 March 2009. <http://www.cicle.org/cicle_content/pivot/entry.php?id=899> Garofoli, Joe. “Critical Mass Turns 10; A Decade of Defiance.” SF Chronicle. 26 Sept., 2002. Web. 6 May, 2009. < http://www.sfgate.com/cgi-bin/article.cgi?f=/c/a/2002/09/26/BA133774.DTL> Kravets, David. “Internet Endangers Big-City Tradition: The Bike Messenger.” C.I.C.L.E. 25 July 2008. Web. 21 March 2009. <http://www.cicle.org/cicle_content/pivot/entry.php?id=1984> Pender, Kathleen. “Bicycle Messengers are Pedaling Uphill Against the Internet” The San Francisco Chronicle. 17 July 2007. Web. 22 March 2009. <http://www.cicle.org/cicle_content/pivot/entry.php?id=1451> Rob. “The Bicycle Messenger.” C.I.C.L.E. 11 Feb. 2008. Web. 23 March 2009 <http://www.cicle.org/cicle_content/pivot/entry.php?id=1727> Horse, Austin. Interview. “The Bryant Park Project” The Internet Thins the Ranks of Bike Messengers. 28 Feb. 2008.

Radio.

Van Wart, Andy. Personal Interview. 27 April 2009.

174 Clara Cardillo Craig Butz Research in the Community May 15th, 2009 Dealing with Depression: How Parents Affect their Depressed Teenager Almost every parent agrees that children are most difficult to manage when they are teenagers. With stress from school, friends and other life changes—including hormones—their moods change often and unpredictably.

Most parents assume these moods are normal and that they just have to deal with them. If parents react in this way, they could overlook a serious possibility: depression. Today, millions of teenagers are suffering from this mental illness with one out of every twenty adolescents diagnosed with clinical depression (Chakraburtty). It can be a daunting problem for the entire family with varying complex causes and treatment (with the parents often at the basis of both). While parents may be a contributing factor in the causes of teenage depression, their role in helping the teen overcome their illness is much more significant. As malleable adolescents about to take the leap into college and then the rest of their lives, how their parents react to their depression can affect their emotional state for years to come.

Because depression is so widespread among teenagers, the characteristics that define it often vary among the millions diagnosed, and therefore can easily be overlooked by parents. The common belief is that it is a prolonged sadness. Those who have suffered from it or known those who have walked its dark path would explain that it is much more than that. Jeremy Marshman, the guidance counselor at the Bay School of San Francisco, articulates it as a profound sadness accompanied by a deep sense of hopelessness and a feeling that nothing will ever improve (Marshman). Depression also affects the day-to-day lives of the diagnosed. Teenagers with depression may spend hours alone in their room, lose interest in activities they used to enjoy, have a hard time in school and interactions with friends. Depression may take a toll physical health as well. Some kids may experience a change in eating and sleeping habits and even drug and alcohol abuse (Chakraburtty). Parents will pick up on these noticeable symptoms very quickly and will be able to address the problem. But a large number of teenagers with depression don’t show any signs of their illness at all and may even act energetic. Margie Wright, the director of the Suicide and Crisis Center in Dallas explains that teens who are depressed are “doing well in school, [and] doing well in sports. They may be popular kids. Some kids are beautiful, but they don't see themselves that way” (Hosanky).

These teenagers have strived for success and the sense of happiness that come with it, only to receive the opposite feeling; they just don’t express it in their demeanor.

Wright continued on to say that these kids might not be living up to their parent’s expectations, who have expected them to succeed (Hosanky). Pressuring from parents to succeed is one of the many causes of depression.

Parents seem to be at the root of the majority. Family life (such as divorce or moving to a new town), neglectful parenting, over-parenting or financial situations are all parental oriented factors causing the illness. But parents are not all to blame. Sexual orientation, grades, friends, or a traumatic event can also cause depressed feelings.

(Chakraburtty and Denkmire 59-61).

Parents not only affect their child’s mental state via determining the environment their child is raised in, they also contribute to the biological aspect of depression: the chemical make up in the brain. Parents pass on genes to their child, and if the parent had a chemical imbalance in the brain, these genes can be passed on to their children.

Neurotransmitters in the brain convey information from one nerve cell to another. An imbalance in theses transmitter, especially dopamine and serotonin (which control mood and energy levels) can disrupt the flow of the messages and the entire central nervous system, and can cause the feelings associated with depression (Hosanky).

Kids with parents who have experienced difficulties that have caused mental problems are more likely to have mental problems themselves. A study done by Dr. Mark Olfson of Columbia University found that, “children of parents with depression were approximately twice as likely as children of parents without depression to have a variety of mental health problems” (Olfson 718). Without even knowing it, parents can increase the chances of their child being depressed right from birth.

Fortunately, depression is a treatable illness and there are many things that parents do to help their child.

The most common and most effective approaches are psychotherapy and antidepressants. Cognitive Behavior Therapy (CBT) is a widely utilized and highly effective form of therapy used among teenagers because it avoids giving teenagers direct instructions; they might not listen to the specific directions given by a therapist because teenagers tend to disassociate themselves from adults. CBT consists of two steps. The first is to eliminate the patient’s negative beliefs about themselves and situations they find themselves in. These thoughts are called “automatic thoughts” that the patient immediately believes is true, but are in fact false. CBT works to help the patient realize the distortion of their thinking. The second step is to change the patient’s actions by helping them come up with their own solutions to problematic situations to prevent them from happening again. Teens undergoing

175 CBT may also be asked to participate in enjoyable activities or keep a log of their feelings, negative thoughts and coping strategies they used to overcome the situation (“Treating Depression”). Psychotherapy does have some drawbacks: it is very expensive and takes a considerable amount of time before there are any signs of improvement (12-16 weeks with CBT). For this reason, parents with financial difficulties might shy away from the therapeutic option and turn to the cheaper, quicker solution of antidepressants. Even though 2 million prescriptions are being written each year, some doctors often hold back on recommending these drugs to their teenage patients because of their possible side affects. Selective serotonin reuptake inhibitor (SSRI) antidepressants act as regulators of serotonin and dopamine to improve moods and energy level, but in some cases have the opposite effect and can increase thoughts of suicide (Rose). In 1997, 13 year old Matt Miller of Kansas committed suicide after taking his 7th Zolof pill (Hosanky). Because of incidents like this among teenagers, the US Food and Drug Administration (FDA) have recommended that doctors avoid prescribing antidepressants similar to Zolof to their teenage patients (Hosanky). Prozac is the only drug approved by the FDA for adolescents because it does not have the negative side affects of the other SSRIs (Rose). Even if the doctor believes it is best for the patient to be taking anti-depressants, it is ultimately the parent’s choice because they are going to be spending the money. Another drawback to antidepressant use among teens is that it only addresses the chemical problem of depression, and not events or situations in the patient’s life that could have possibly caused the depression. This leaves the possibility for the symptoms of depression to reemerge later in their life (Marshman). In the case of Elizabeth Wurtzel, author of the memoir Prozac Nation, her psychiatrist did not prescribe anti-depressants until she attempted suicide, believing that rigorous therapy would be more successful. Once she did begin taking the medicine (along with continuing her therapy), the pills led her on her way to eventual recovery (Wurtzel 235-236). A combination of persistent therapy and antidepressants produces the most significant results compared to either method by itself (Chakraburtty). Even though it is the most stressful solution on the parents, it is their responsibility to support their child.

Because of a parent’s financial situation or neglectful parenting, teenagers might not have access to the necessary resources to help fight their illness. If that is the case there are other options they can take. If a parent cannot afford therapy or antidepressants, they can take some stress off the situation by lightening the atmosphere their child lives in. They can do this by not overly punishing them and allowing them to explore what they are interested in. A more open environment where the teenager can make mistakes and the parent is not telling them what to do is also helpful (Chakraburtty). In some schools, counselors are there to help if the parent’s efforts at changing their attitude towards their child are failing. Jeremy Marshman’s job as counselor is to discuss grief problems with students who come to him and then possibly refer them to other possible methods of help. Often times the issue involve the family and he suggests the entire family seek a way of help (Marshman). In some schools where there is no guidance counselor, outside organizations such as TeenScreen come in to asses students on their emotional states, to help potentially suicidal depressed teens. They answer a series of questions on a computer and if their results show any signs of them being at risk for suicide, they suggest to the parents that they seek help. The problem with TeenScreen is that parents are not obligated to take their child to a counselor at the suggestion of the program. Also, the screening can not even happen if a parent does not sign a consent form (“Teen Depression”). In dire situations where a students parents have no money for help, are not supportive of their mental state, do not take the advice of the counselor or refuse to sign the forms for a mental assessment, the teenager can always call a help hotline. The San Francisco Suicide Hotline is run by thoroughly trained volunteers who are available to talk 24-7.

Their main job is to listen and talk to callers and help them find their own solutions. They are available as a free, easy form of outlet for teenager to simply express what they are feeling (Cerreta).

If parents (or adolescents) don’t take actions towards improving the situation, there can be major long term repercussions. If left untreated, depression can develop into a more severe mental illness such as mania or schizophrenia that can last a lifetime and may even require hospitalization (Chakraburtty). Suicide or attempted suicide is a more common development of depression than schizophrenia or mania. When their depressed feeling and thoughts are not disappearing and treatments are not working, teens look to suicide as an escape from it all.

According to the Center for Disease Control, 1/5 high school students seriously consider ending their life, with thousands committing suicide each year (“Teen Suicide”). In the United States, more “teens die at their own hands than from cancer, heart disease, AIDS, birth defects, stroke, pneumonia, influenza and chronic lung disease — combined” (Hosanky). The suicide rate in America has increased so extremely in the past 50 years that Joseph Woolston, the chief of child psychiatry at Yale-New Haven Hospital, stated if suicide “were an infectious disease, we would call this an epidemic” (Hosanky). When suicide began reaching staggering statistics in the 1990s, U.S. Surgeon General David Satcher addressed the nation about the issue. He declared suicide caused by depression a public health problem and proposed several initiatives to reduce the statistics (Hosanky). Part of the problem was that parents were not taking advantage of these initiatives to help their child who were not able to access them on their own. Their depression grew, and suicide was the result.

176 One of the reasons suicide is so devastating to hear about is the fact that the mental illness of depression is curable; if in severe cases it is not completely curable, it is at least treatable to a point where suicide is not a thought.

But without the parents stepping up and taking charge of helping their child, treatment is difficult. They are the ones who will schedule doctor appointments, sign forms, and pay for any medical expenses that the child needs. If a parent is not able or willing to do so for whatever reason, the teenager may be left by themselves with no available resource and the severity of their mental illness will undoubtedly swell. Their unwillingness to support their child may even have caused the depression. Even if the parent lies at the root of the depression, they must forget about the harm they caused and focus on the recovery process, so that their teenager can eventually continue a healthy life.

Works Cited Cerreta, Sally. Phone interview. 27 Apr. 2009.

Chakraburtty, Amal, MD. “Teen Depression.” WebMD. Webmd.com. 26 Jan. 2006. Web. 25 March. 2009.

Denkmire, Heather. The Truth About Fear and Depression. Ed. Mark J. Kittleson, Ph. D. New York. Facts on File, Inc, 2005. Print.

Elizabeth, Wurtzell. Prozac Nation: Young and Depressed in America. New York: Riverhead Books, 1995. Print.

Hosanky, David. “Youth Suicide: Should Government Fund More Prevention Programs?” CQ Press 14.6 (2004).

CQ Researcher Online. Web. 20 Mar. 2009 Marshman, Jeremy. Personal Interview. 20 Aug. 2009.

Olfson, Mark “Parental Depression, Child Mental Health Problems, and Health Care Utilization.” Medical Care.

Vol. 41. 716-721. New York: Lippincott Williams and Wilkins, 2003. JSTOR.org. Web. 26 Mar. 2009.

Rose, Ava. “Prozac.” St. James Encyclopedia of Popular Culture. Ed. Sara Pendergast and Tom Pendergast. Detroit: St. James Publication, 2000. Gale Virtual Reference Library. Web. 26 Mar. 2009.

“Teen Depression Watch Draws Mixed Reviews.” Morning Edition. Narr. Joanne Silberner. 9 Jan. 2006. Public Radio Online. npr.org. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

“Teen Suicide”. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. American Academy of Child and Adolescent Psychiatry. May 2008. 25 Mar. 2009.

“Treating Depression in Adolescents.” All Things Considered. Narr. Michelle Trudeau. 4 Jun 2004. Public Radio Online. npr.org. Web. 25 Mar. Web. 2009.

177 Casey Harper Craig Butz Research in the Community May 1, 2009 The Presidio or the New Downtown The Presidio Trust wants to redevelop the Presidio with their “revitalize” plan because they want the Presidio to have more amusements and places for people to enjoy. These plans of revitalizing the Presidio include the redevelopment of the Main Parade Ground to make more attractions that would interest visitors and native San Franciscans to go to the Presidio. These would include a bowling ally, a movie theater with two to three screens, a lodge, the Fisher Museum of Modern Art, and a Walt Disney Museum (which is already built and ready for its opening in the fall of 2009). The Presidio Trust’s “revitalize” plan is the renovation of the Main Parade ground, and this includes the clearing of the parking lot and the addition of these attractions. This plan includes taking out the cement parking lot on the Main Parade Ground and adding a grassy lawn that would go all the way down to the water, over Doyle Drive. The Presidio Trust will put Doyle Drive underground in order to have the grassy lawn span from the Main Parade ground to the water.

The Presidio Trust should not add the attractions, such as the Fisher Museum, Presidio Theater and the Lodge because it would take the attention away from the historic buildings and nature sites, which is the reason why the Presidio is a National Historic Park- to protect and admire the natural and historical aspects of it. If these buildings are added, it will also attract more people to the Presidio, which would increase traffic and congestion in the area. These projects would bring more enjoyment to the Presidio, but it would also create a hectic and populated area, in a site where it is supposed to observe, respect and admire the buildings and nature. With all these people coming to visit these attractions, the Presidio would make more money; therefore, making the Presidio more financially stable, but at the cost of having buildings that don’t fit in with their surrounding. The increase of people would make the Presidio a much more occupied area, such as our downtown, and this would make the Presidio a much louder and busier area. While these plans of the Presidio Trust to redevelop the Presidio by adding modern buildings, such as a museum, a movie complex, and a hotel seem to accomplish bringing people back to the "heart" of the Presidio, these attractions would instead take away from the historical and natural aspects, threatening the culture and integrity of the Presidio.

In the “revitalize” plan, the Presidio Trust wants to keep some of the current attractions, such as the bowling ally and Presidio Theater, and add other attractions around them. The plan is to have the lawn next to the current Presidio Theater become another movie theater which they would connect to the old theater to have a two to three screen movie complex (Penn). This theater would be just next to the bowling ally and basically across the street from the lodge. The lodge would be a small motel-like building that would be directly on the Main Parade ground. The Walt Disney Museum is on the Main Parade grounds and is already built, so I am not focusing on that since it is opening this fall. But the Disney museum kept the original building and did not make changes to the outside so it blends in with the buildings around it. Unlike the Disney Museum, the Fisher Museum wants to be located right on the Main Parade ground and have the architecture of the building not it in with its surroundings.

The changes to the Presidio are no surprise considering it has undergone many changes in the past. Since its first inhabitants the Ohlones, a Native American tribe, the Presidio has faced many changes in ownership and structure of the buildings. It is important to be aware of the historical background of the Presidio to understand why the Presidio Trust wants to make these changes. Throughout its history, the Presidio has been changed due to religious, political, military, natural and historical reasons. Now, the Presidio wants to be changed for the amusement of the public and for financial stability, and I don’t think that is a sufficient reason to redevelop the Presidio. There is no need for the Presidio to continue this pattern of drastic changes due to what the environment is like around them. The Presidio is a National Historic Park, which should be promoted as such- to observe and enjoy the nature, but at the same time respect and learn about the historical aspect of the Presidio. If they add attractions such as the Fisher Museum, the Presidio Theater, and the Lodge, on top of the current attractions such as the bowling ally and Disney Museum, the Presidio will be known more as an urban hang-out spot to enjoy amusements instead of to enjoy the park’s historical and natural aspects. Of course these attractions would still allow people to focus on the nature and historical buildings and sites of the Presidio, but these aspects would come second to the new and modern attractions in the Presidio.

The first changes of the Presidio started in 1768 when the Ohlones, a Native American tribe inhabited the Presidio. They lived in about thirty to forty permanent villages along the shore of the Bay Area. They resided there until 1776 when the Spanish arrived. There were many reasons why the Spanish wanted to occupy the Bay Area, but only two were important: religious and political reasons. For religious purposes, the Spanish wanted to set up missions and begin the "spiritual conquest of the indigenous peoples of Alta California" (Benton 7). The political

178 reason was to increase their revenues and fortify the defense against the British and Russians, who were trying to make the Bay Area an outpost for fur trade (Benton 7). In March 1776, Captain Juan Bautista de Anza and 250 soldiers and colonists colonized the Bay Area and it was officially under Spanish rule. "On March 28, 1776, de Anza erected a cross to mark the site for the Presidio, an action that marked official possession of this land by Spain" (Benton 9). For forty-five years, the Spanish had control over the Presidio and during this time period, they established "three independent institutions- pueblos, missions and presidios- to ensure the secular spiritual, and military conquest of the indigenous peoples" (Benton 9-10). The Presidio was the Spanish's "defensive arm" and was the place of both civilian and military complexes (Benton 11). As well as protecting the Spanish, the Presidio was also the center of government and the social and economic activity in the area.

In 1820, the Spanish empire in Mexico had collapsed and one year after that, "Mexico took advantage of Spain's increasing weakness, declared independence, and took possession of the San Francisco Presidio along with all Spanish land in North America" (Benton 17). Mexico had no plans to redevelop the Presidio and it remained essentially unchanged throughout their rule. Mexico occupied the Presidio for twenty-four years, from 1822-1846, and those years have been described as disorganized and full of discontentment (Benton 17). When Mexico was in charge, all the Presidios in California were left without developments and there was no funding to pursue the development of the Presidios. The troops were still using ancient weapons and equipment, and were still wearing the Spanish uniforms.

On July 9, 1846, the Mexican rule over the Presidio came to an end when the American Flag went up on the Presidio grounds. The Presidio would continue to be an Army Post until 1906, and still under American control.

Changes happened after the switch of power, and they were beneficial. They increased military presence-for two reasons: to "maintain law and order and to protect a highly valued resource--gold" (Benton 22). Many years later, some people wanted a nice park in the city so they thought the Presidio would be a good spot, and once it was approved to be a park, people werenâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t sure if it would still be under Army control. People debated whether or not the Presidio should belong to the city or to the army and negotiations took almost a year to figure out the deal between the Army and National Park Service. Many years later, a transfer of ownership from the Army to the National Park Service occurred. They came to a conclusion that "the Presidio would be a new model of a park, run through a public-private partnership" (Benton 121). The Presidio, on September 30, 1994, was deactivated as an army base and at midnight, it became a National Park.

In the past, the changes that the Presidio has gone through were a reflection of who had control over it and what was needed in their circumstances. There is no need to continue this pattern; the Presidio does not need to be changed due to its surroundings. The Presidio Trust is not being pressured by anyone to change the Presidio nor is there an urgent need to change the Presidio due to the environment around it. Changes are not a bad thing and the Presidio should make changes that would benefit the community, but not drastic changes that are made just to change things up.

If the Fisher Museum, lodge, and Movie Theater were added to the Presidio, it would have major repercussions in its surroundings. One effect is the increase of people in the area. These buildings will attract people to visit them; therefore, increasing the visiting population in the Presidio. This increase in people would do two things: bring in more money and bring excessive traffic to the Presidio (Rosenfeld). By people visiting these attractions, the Presidio would be making a large profit which would increase their financial stability. This is not a main priority since the Presidio has been financially stable for some time now. The second result of the increase of people to the Presidio is that traffic will get more congested (King). Due to the location of these attractions, people would most likely drive instead of walk or bike because the museum would be so far away from the entrance gates, resorting people to use automobiles. With the construction of the Fisher Museum, lodge, Movie Theater and the Presidio Trusts' "revitalize" plan, current parking lots and spaces would be destroyed, causing parking spot issues.

These issues include congestion and lines waiting for parking spots. Along with the congestion, these amusements also create a â&#x20AC;&#x2DC;un eco-friendly' environment. By attracting two million more visitors a year, most of whom will be traveling by vehicle, this will increase the carbon footprint (Save the Presidio). On top of the museum, the inclusion of a lodge will attract tour buses, cabs, and delivery trucks, which will add to the current traffic of the Presidio and at the same time, not helping with the pollution in the area (Save the Presidio). While the increase of people is beneficial, in which it increases the income for the Presidio, it is also unproductive because it increases the traffic and congestion, and the carbon footprint in the Presidio. This unproductiveness outweighs the incomes in this situation because the Presidio is already self-sufficient and financially stable, so there is no urgent need for more income, but a greater need for a low carbon footprint and less congestion (Pirelli).

Another huge effect of the construction of these attractions is that they will take the attention away from the historical buildings and sites on the Main Parade Ground and bring the attention to themselves. The area where the Presidio Trust is planning on adding these attractions is on the Main Parade Ground- a site with many old Spanish

179 style buildings (red roofs, off-white/cream colored buildings) and these attractions would not fit in (King). In order to help keep these attractions from taking over the whole Main Parade Ground, the National Park Service warned the Presidio Trust that they do not want the Fisher Museum to stick out, draw attention from the other historic buildings, or be an eye sore (King). The Presidio Trust has to be careful about what attractions they add because if they make the Presidio too urban or disrespect the historical aspect of it in any way, the Presidio would face consequences. If the Fisher Museum, or any other attraction detracts from the historical aspect of the Presidio in the view of the National Park Service, the Presidio could lose its status as a National Historic Landmark (King). This means that the Presidio Trust just wants the buildings not to be ostentatious or be the main piece or focus point of the Main Parade Grounds. The director of the National Park Service's Western Region states that the challenge the National Park Service puts "to the Trust was that if you're in the middle of the parade ground and sweep your eyes across the scene, you don't want the museum,” or any other attraction nearby, “standing out" (King). The main focus at the moment is making sure the Fisher Museum doesn’t go overboard on the design since the other attractions, the lodge and the theater are in historic buildings which blend in. The Fisher Museum's designs have been nothing that looks like anything near it and that would draw attention away from the other historic buildings. So far, the Fisher Museum design has been "inconsistent with the natural environment and open setting as well as the Main Post's existing buildings" and this is exactly what the National Park Service doesn’t want (Save the Presidio). The Museum is not adjusting to fit in with the other buildings and this is making it so "radically out of place in terms of design, materials and scale," putting the Presidio on track to losing its status and a National Historic Landmark (Cart).

With the additions of these modern attractions, the Presidio would turn into an 'urban hang-out' spot, similar to the San Francisco downtown district. The Presidio would have a movie theater, bowling ally, a lodge, and two museums- the Fisher and Walt Disney- and this is similar to what we have downtown: the Metreon and Century theaters, the Yerba Buena bowling ally, multiple hotels and art galleries, and the MOMA. Although downtown is larger than the Presidio, it still has the same effect. People don’t go downtown to observe and respect the historical aspects of it; no, people go there to socialize and hang out, and this is what will happen to the Presidio if these buildings are added. These additions would create a "city within a city," and with the sudden visitor population increase and the additions of modern buildings, an urban setting would be created instead of the historic setting that is currently there (Save the Presidio). I don’t think the benefits of adding these buildings outweigh the negative reasons because the benefits are only miniscule to the potential loss of the National Historic Landmark status, congestion and loss of the historical aspect in the Presidio.

The Presidio should enact parts of their “revitalize” plan, such as moving Doyle Drive underground and making the parking lot into one big grass promenade, but not add the Fisher Museum to the Main Parade Ground.

Although having a major museum would be beneficial for everyone to educate themselves and enjoy art, the Presidio is not the right place for it. The Fisher’s should add this Museum to another part of town, where traffic wouldn’t be a huge issue. If the Presidio kept smaller attractions in the Presidio, they would still make their income which would keep them financially stable, and this would help preserve the nature and historical aspects of the Presidio.

Works Cited Benton, Lisa M. The Presidio: From Army Post to National Park. Austin, Texas: Northwestern University Press, 1998. Print.

Cart, Julie. "In San Francisco, some fear assault on Presidio; Critics say a proposed art museum on a prominent spot on the former military post would degrade the site." Los Angeles Times. Los Angeles Times, 10 Sep. 2008.

Web. 20 Mar. 2009. ProQuest. Web. King, John. "A museum proposal stirs debate in San Francisco." ProQuest. Architectural Record. 197.1 (2009): 26.

ProQuest. Web. 20 Mar. 2009.

Penn, Frederick. Personal Interview. 27 Apr. 2009 Pirelli, Joe. Telephone Interview. 20 Apr. 2009 Rosenfeld, Seth. “New Plans for Presidio’s Main Post Available.” San Francisco Chronicle. Np. 27 Feb. 2009.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Save the Presidio. Np. 25 Mar. 2009. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

180 Alex Kinsella Craig Butz Research in the Community 4/26/09 The San Andreas Fault: A Gift, Not a Curse When one hears the words “San Andreas Fault,” the first thing that comes to mind is almost always “earthquakes!” This makes sense, because earthquakes are the most obvious effect of the fault, and they present a serious threat to our communities, but this emphasis on earthquakes causes most people to ignore all of the benefits that the fault gives us. Residents of the Bay Area should properly prepare for earthquakes, but they should also realize that the San Andreas Fault and related plate tectonics are actually what created the beautiful and comfortable climate of the Bay Area that makes it such a luxurious place to live and has drawn so many people.

Part of the reason that people see the fault as negative is that many do not fully understand what it is. But to understand what the fault is, one first has to understand how the inside of the Earth works. The Earth is made of three layers: the core, mantle and crust. The mantle is the thickest part of the Earth, and it is made up of flexible rock that flows instead of fracturing. The crust is the rock that covers the surface of the Earth, and it is much more rigid than the mantle, as well as extremely thin. The crust is made up of separate plates, such as the Pacific Plate and North American Plate, which move very slowly (only 2-10 cm per year) in different directions, creating all kinds of effects, including mountains and earthquakes (Tewhey). The movement of plates together with their effects is called plate tectonics. Scientists believe that the plates move because of convection currents in the mantle. Convection currents are created by the heat of the Earth moving from the core out towards the crust. Once they reach the crust, the currents take one of two actions: they either start moving sideways and then back down towards the core, or they erupt through the crust in what are called spreading centers. You can see this process in Figure 1, where the convection currents are notated by red arrows, and the spreading center is labeled “ridge.” One cycle of this process takes millions of years, but that is a very short time in geologic terms. The part of this process that creates the plate movement is the magma that erupts through the crust at the spreading centers. This magma solidifies as new land on the plate, and it pushes the preexisting land outwards. In Figure 1 the outward movement is represented by the black arrows in the crust. This outward movement continues until the land collides with another plate.

Figure 1: The inside of the Earth with convection currents notated by red arrows At this point, one of the plates must go underneath the other, an event (Kious) known as subduction. The thinner of the two plates will subduct, and this further aids the plate movement, because the plate is now being both pushed by the spreading center and pulled by the subduction (Kious). These subduction zones are labeled in Figure 1 as “trenches.” They are what created the San Andreas Fault, and they play a significant role in shaping the Earth’s terrain.

All of this movement and collision of plates creates cracks in the Earth’s crust called faults. A fault is a fracture in the Earth that has movement of one side relative to the other (Bero). The San Andreas Fault is a transform fault, which means that it accommodates lateral motion of plates. The plates slide next to each other instead of into each other. The fault is also called a right lateral strike-slip fault. This is a very complicated name, but all it means is that if you stand on one side of the fault, the other side will be moving to your right (Schulz). The two plates involved here are the Pacific Plate and the North American Plate. You can see the two plates along with the fault in Figure 2. The Pacific Plate is to the west of the American Plate, and some parts of the Bay Area are located on it, including Point Reyes. The rest of the Bay Area and the United States is on the North American Plate, which is to the east (Collier 28). The San Andreas Fault vaguely separates the two plates, but it is not the official division between them. There used to be other plates in the area as well – the Farallon and Kula plates were small plates in between the Pacific and North American plates, but they have since been subducted Figure 2: The San Andreas Fault under the west coast of the North American plate (Boucher). Now only a tiny throughout California, with the remnant of the Farallon plate remains, and it will soon be subducted as well. plates to either side (Sanders)

181 The formation of the land of the Bay Area is both the most noticeable and the least noticed effect of the San Andreas Fault. We are surrounded by giant mountains and beautiful bodies of water, but to most people, that is just “how things are.” Not many people really think about where all of this amazing terrain came from. The reality is that much of this beauty was created by plate tectonics and the San Andreas Fault. Without the fault, we would have no Mt. Tamalpais, no Mt. Diablo, no Tomales Bay, no San Bruno Mountains, the list goes on and on. Not only are these landmarks what make the area beautiful, they are also cherished by outdoor enthusiasts and fans of hiking all over the Bay Area. The beauty that we see out every window has encouraged the development of a much more outdoor-oriented culture in the Bay Area. Recreational hiking and jogging is very popular, and many people spend the majority of their day outside. We should thank the plates and the fault for what they have created in our community. As geologist Michael Collier puts it, “Without the subduction of the Farallon Plate beneath the North American Plate, the American West would be every bit as geographically exciting as Kansas” (Collier 28).

The Coast Range, which includes Mount Tamalpais and Mount Diablo as well as many other local mountains, was created long ago by plate subduction and further developed by the San Andreas Fault (Bero). These mountains were created by 140 million years of continuous subduction (Bero).

The Farallon and Kula Plates began subducting beneath the North American Plate long ago, and as they descended, they scraped against the edge of the North American plate and left mass amounts of sediment. This sediment was then uplifted by the plate subduction and became the Western Coast Range (Boucher). This subduction process ended about 25 million years ago, and the San Andreas Fault is what is left of that geologic episode (Bero). Now, the fault continues the uplift created by the subduction of those plates. The fault is not quite parallel Figure 3: A subduction zone and related processes (“Earth Movements”) with the motion of the Pacific and North American plates, and this causes large amounts of compression. This compression uplifts the area, just like the ancient subduction did (Mookerjee). In fact, the Bay Area is being uplifted as we speak, and it will continue to be uplifted for a long time (Collier 59). These mountains created by the fault are much of what make the Bay Area so beautiful.

The San Andreas Fault has also created numerous lakes and bays throughout the Bay Area, including the Crystal Reservoirs and Tomales Bay. Movement along the fault creates huge amounts of compression, and this compression breaks up the rocks that lie along the fault, sometimes turning them into clay. When rocks are pulverized like this, they settle lower than other rocks, and they end up forming a basin. If the rocks are broken up enough, they will be impermeable to water, and it will therefore form a pond. Bodies of water created like this are called sag ponds (Collier 57). Examples of this type of formation are Tomales Bay and the Crystal Reservoirs.

These bodies of water develop ecosystems and therefore bring more plant and animal diversity to the Bay Area (Bero). They also are perfect places for water activities like kayaking and scuba diving. Having accessible lakes and bays like this has made these water activities popular in the area and has added to the outdoor culture. Without the San Andreas Fault, we would not have these stunning bodies of water in our community.

One of the reasons that the Bay Area is such a popular place to live is its temperate and warm environment.

This comfortable climate can be directly attributed to processes of the San Andreas Fault. The Bay Area is a part of a Mediterranean system, meaning that it should have stormy, wet winters and extremely dry summers. The Bay Area does have this type of weather, but most areas that are Mediterranean systems are deserts (Fiszman). In other words, we should be living in a barren desert. The reason that we are not living in a place like this is because of the way that the topography channels the air flow (Null). When the sun beats down on Mt. Diablo, it heats up the mountain and therefore also the air around it. The air then rises and this movement draws in cooler air from the mountain’s surroundings. The only place for this air to come from is the opening at the Golden Gate, where it passes over the Pacific Ocean and then the San Francisco Bay. When the air flows over this cool water towards Mt. Diablo, it condenses the water into the fog that is so prevalent in San Francisco. This fog keeps moisture in the air and allows certain plants and animals to survive and thrive, such as palm trees, which could not live here without the fog

182 (Fiszman). Without Mt. Diablo, which is a product of plate tectonics and the San Andreas Fault, the Bay Area would be a dry desert with a much less comfortable climate and also less of its unique plant life.

Although the fault has all of these beneficial aspects, it also creates destructive earthquakes. It is ironic that everyone worries about them but many do not properly prepare themselves. One example of an earthquake that the Bay Area was certainly not prepared for was the 1906 earthquake, which killed at least 3,000 people in total and damaged $350,000,000 worth of property (“The San Francisco Earthquake, 1906”). The 1906 earthquake was the worst natural disaster in the history of California, a similar earthquake could be in the near future. Geologists have estimated a 66% chance of a 6.7 magnitude or greater earthquake within the next 25 years (Mookerjee). Although this prediction says “within the next 25 years,” it could be in 25 years, or it could be tomorrow; this quake could strike at any time. It is likely to be centered on the Hayward fault, which goes right underneath the East Bay, a very densely populated area (Bero). It will be extremely disastrous and there is no way to completely avoid its destruction, but there are many things that everyone can do to prepare for the earthquake and lessen the damage. As Professor Mookerjee, a geology professor at Sonoma State University, puts it, “We really need to learn to live with [earthquakes] because they are not going away; you can’t stop plate tectonics” (Mookerjee). There are some good websites with lots of information on how to prepare and react, including 72hours.org and quakequizsf.org. Every resident of the Bay Area should visit these websites and prepare themselves for natural disasters.

First of all, you should prepare your home for a quake. Large appliances or cabinets should be secured so that they will not fall during a disaster, and working smoke detectors and fire extinguishers need to be installed on each floor. Also, you should make a plan with your family of what you will do in the case of an earthquake, which should include where you will meet up and who you should call. Another necessary preparation is to keep emergency rations in your house, such as canned food and bottled water. There should be enough rations to support your family for 3 days, which means at least 3 gallons of water per person and the proper amount of food as well. In addition to these emergency rations, every member of your family should have a “Go-bag”. This is a backpack with all the essential items for a disaster, including a flashlight, a pocket knife, ID, etc. (“Are You Prepared?”). More information can be found on 72hours.org.

There are also preparations that should be taken on a larger scale. Many buildings can be better prepared for earthquakes. Cities should check their building codes and make sure that they are up to date, as well as ensure that every building is being built in the safest ways possible. One suggestion that has been made is giving tax breaks to anyone who refits their homes or offices to better withstand earthquakes (Mookerjee). This would provide a huge incentive to refit buildings and make our cities safer. Overpasses and bridges also need to be better prepared for a quake, because they are likely to break in the next big earthquake. This would be disastrous, because it would mean that no one could get out of the area and all the highways would be completely clogged with traffic (Bero). If cities refitted their buildings, bridges, and overpasses, everyone would be much safer in the event of an earthquake.

Residents of the Bay Area should take all of these safety precautions for earthquakes, but they should also enjoy the other aspects of the fault, like the beautiful mountains and bays that we live right next to. Professor Michael Bero of College of Marin, someone who is very aware of the threat of earthquakes, said, “I’ve traveled all over the world and [the Bay Area] is where I live by choice; I love it here”. The reason that people love it here so much is because of the natural beauty that we are surrounded by, as well as the comfortable climate that is so hospitable. People should view the San Andreas Fault as a gift to our communities instead of as a curse. And with proper preparation for earthquakes, our area can be both beautiful and safe: a true paradise.

183 Works Cited Bero, David. Personal Interview. 30 Apr. 2009.

Boucher, Virginia. “Quail Ridge Reserve – Geology.” Quail Ridge Reserve. UC Davis, 23 Jun. 2005. Web. 24 Apr. 2009.

Collier, Michael. A Land in Motion: California’s San Andreas Fault. Berkeley: University of California, 1999. Print.

Fiszman, Nic. Personal Interview. 16 Apr. 2009.

Jan Null. “Climate of San Francisco.” National Weather Service Forecast Office. US Department of Commerce, Jan. 1995. Web. 20 Apr. 2009.

Kious, Jacquelyne W. and Robert I. Tilling. This Dynamic Earth. USGS. USGS. 5 May 1999.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Mookerjee, Matty. Phone Interview. 29 Apr. 2009.

Sanders, Robert. “Quakes Along Central San Andreas Fault Peak Every Three Years.” Map. UC Berkeley NewCenter. UC Regents, 9 Jan. 2004. Web. 29 Apr. 2009.

Schulz, Sandra S. and Robert E. Wallace. The San Andreas Fault. USGS. USGS, 6 Jun. 1997. Web. 20 Mar. 2009.

“The San Francisco Earthquake, 1906.” EyeWitness to History.. Ibis Communications, 1997.

Web. 13 May 2009.

Tewhey, Deborah. “Plate Tectonics.” Forces of Nature.. Wentworth Intermediate School, 2002. Web. 23 Apr. 2009.

184 Tyler Langenbrunner Craig Butz Research in the Community 14 May 2009 Housing built by Hope San Francisco has long been renowned as an industrious city on the cutting edge, attracting people from far and wide to work and especially to live here. San Francisco also has a reputation for being one of the most expensive places to live. The United States Census Bureau states that the average household income in San Francisco is $65, 519 (United Sates Bureau of the Census). One would not think this, looking at all the expensive condos and old Victorian houses around the city, but the low income statistic comes from concentrated pockets of poverty that exist in isolated areas throughout San Francisco. One simply doesn’t see the real urban poor until one ventures further in, out to Hunter's Point or Potrero; places where most people will advise one never to visit. A New York Times article states that the median price for a home is more than 6 times the median income in San Francisco, which stands second only to New York City in this category (Leonhardt, David). Because San Francisco is such an expensive place to live, many people of lower incomes are forced to live in the city's public housing, which is notorious for high crime rates and other social issues, making the quality of life unsuitable to the needs of families for which the projects were originally built. Unfortunately, the housing that has been created for these people in the last few decades was poorly designed and even more poorly maintained. Replacing the old projects, currently managed by a massively underfunded Housing Authority, with new mixed-use and mixed-income housing will reconnect those neighborhoods to the city by making them safer, more sustainable, and a place that people of all walks of life can call home.

The most striking historic example of public housing gone wrong is the case of Pruitt Igoe. Pruitt Igoe, built in St. Louis in 1954, was built with the vision of creating a positive living environment for people, especially families, who did not have the money to afford houses of their own. Though the idea was well intentioned, Alexander von Hoffman of the Joint Center for Housing Studies at Harvard University, reports that after a few short years, "The project's recreational galleries and skip-stop elevators, once heralded as architectural innovations, had become nuisances and danger zones. Large numbers of vacancies indicated that even poor people preferred to live anywhere but Pruitt-Igoe" (Von Hoffman). Before it was abandoned, Pruitt-Igoe was overflowing with people.

Originally designed to be high-rise condos for families, it housed mostly junkies and the severely poor, creating a dangerous atmosphere, especially for raising young ones.

Pruitt-Igoe's problem was that it was too dense; San Francisco’s issue was the opposite. David Prowler compares Pruitt-Igoe to San Francisco's public housing slums, describing San Francisco's problem as a paradox: "The problem in San Francisco is not too much density, its lack of density." What it lacked was something that developers call Defensible Space. Defensible space is the area around a property that can be viewed from multiple angles, space that can be viewed and monitored by residents as well as people on the street. In the projects, buildings are pushed up off the street and often turned at odd angles. There are many dark alleyways and corners which no windows look out on. These dark corners are havens for drug dealers and gangs who congregate there. Without visibility from the street and no windows to allow neighbors to supervise them, most crime goes unnoticed, creating an atmosphere of fear and paranoia. "By creating defensible space" says Fred Pollack, a senior architect at the firm Van Meter Williams Pollack in San Francisco, "neighbors are able to watch over each other." If the projects were denser, then it would be less of an issue. With more people on the street, the dark alleyways become less secluded, theft on the street becomes much more difficult. Unfortunately, the projects have not only huge spaces, but also too few people to occupy them, making it even more difficult for neighbors to keep an eye on one another. Defensible space and lack of lighting are logistical issues on the outside; the reason for the projects’ dangerousness is concerned with the inside. Projects are not located in the heart of the city, near the historical landmarks and civil offices; they are on the outskirts, in isolated communities. The most isolated neighborhoods in San Francisco, made that way by the dense concentration of poverty and tense boundaries controlled by roaming gangs are Potrero, Bayview Hunters Point, and Visitation Valley. These are the neighborhoods where one finds the highest concentration of poverty, but there are also blocks of public housing throughout the city, for instance in the Western Addition, that sit near more traditional neighborhoods. They are isolated from the rest of the neighborhood by an ominous shroud of fear and crime that lays over it. The urban poor are most often forced out of the center of the city and into these isolated public housing projects. They all live together coping with a wide range of mental and physical problems. “[S]chool delinquency, school dropout, teenage pregnancy, out-of-wedlock childbirth, violent crime, and drug abuse rates are all greater in these communities than would be predicted by a linear extrapolation of poverty effects," says Goetz J., Edward (Petersen, Rachel), just to name a few. These people are not getting the help they need, and in these crimefilled areas, bad habits picked up earlier in life will come up again and may become more severe.

185 Just 15-20 years ago, San Francisco was widely considered to be home to some of the worst slums in the country. The projects were poorly maintained. Rodents and insects prowled the floors and scurried around in the plumbing. Gangs took over the neighborhood, spreading the influence of drugs and violence, which were more corrosive than the chips of lead paint showering from the ceilings. "Residents of the Plaza East housing project in central San Francisco have a nickname for their crumbling high-rises: 'O. C.', for out of control" (Goldberg, Carey).

In fact, O.C. is a good description for how the housing authority was as a whole. Kevin Marchman, head of the National Commission on Severely Distressed Public Housing, a federal team sent in to investigate the state of San Francisco’s housing commented: “'San Francisco is broken at the heart of its operations,'” (Goldberg, Carey). In the early 1980’s, police and government officials labeled the projects as the most dangerous areas in the city. Yerba Buena, located in the South of Market, was nicknamed “the Den of Thieves” by police; hundreds of small time crooks lurked in and around the projects, committing a range of crimes against those inside and casual passers-by.

However, for all that out of town tourists suffered, those inside the crumbling danger zones were in the gravest peril. “'The overwhelming majority of victims [are] not people who live outside of the Western Addition,'' Mayor Feinstein said. ''They [are] the people who live there.'" (Turner, Wallace). Comments from residents were universally dismal; "The building isn't livable," said Cora Washington, head of the tenants' association at Plaza East.

Washington was quite right; these places were not even originally built to support the urban poor, they were set up as temporary housing for soldiers and iron workers after WWII. The original masterminds never dreamt that the barrack-like buildings would ever be more than very temporary shelter, not long term lodging that would support a family. (Fulbright, Leslie) Washington’s statement is mirrored by almost every tenants’ association member in nearly all projects across the city today (Goldberg, Carey).

Then things changed. On the advice of the National Commission on Severely Distressed Public Housing, the HOPE VI program was passed by the U.S. Congress in 1992, with a mission to "improve public and affordable housing opportunities and living conditions through modernization, reconstruction, innovative revitalization proposals and implementation programs, development of financial strategies and aggressive pursuit of legislative and funding opportunities" (Housing Development and Modernization Department). The HOPE VI program removed the San Francisco Housing Authority (SFHA) and gave The U.S. Department of Housing and Urban Development (HUD) full jurisdiction over San Francisco’s housing (HOPE VI). HOPE VI was funded by the federal government and helped to transform 5 San Francisco projects, including Bernal, Hayes Valley, North Beach, Plaza East, and Valencia Gardens along with many others throughout the U.S. This occurred during the Clinton administration. Of course after Clinton left office, he was replaced by President Bush, who had a different approach to housing in America.

President Bush, following one of the principal philosophies of his party, that everyone should buy their own home, ended the project in the early days of his administration. “He basically said that, ‘We've had this tremendously successful project, this HOPE VI. It’s been so successful that we are now stopping the program because there is nothing left to fix,’” says an outraged Pollack. Of course there was plenty left to fix; 7 projects were already being scheduled for redevelopment as the axe fell on HOPE VI. Pollack adds disparagingly, “Yeah, it was just like Bush took our hope away.” In addition to cutting the program that had up until that point “been the most far-reaching tool for applying new urban planning and design ideas to distressed city neighborhoods” (New Urbanists urge Uncle Sam: ‘Don’t abandon HOPE’), he also gave rich businesses large tax cuts which seemed to Pollack to be an obvious sign that they truly did not care for the public housing struggle. Giving tax cuts to the wealthy meant that few would be tempted by the tax credit system which gave companies and donors minor tax breaks for their support and donations to non-profits. Without them, the SFHA seemed to have lost its final support beam; the boat was sinking.

When assessing the problems with San Francisco’s Public Housing today, it is necessary to look backwards and investigate the SFHA’s reputation. Throughout the numerous fiascos that the SFHA has been involved in over the last 30 years, residents of the housing developments maintained by the SFHA have developed a highly sensitive bias against anything related to development. “They get very scared and defensive when we first approach them,” says Pollack. “The situations that they are in now are so dire, that most of them simply refuse to believe that we can help them and that it must all be a scam. These people have been calling for aid for years, but the SFHA, being so underfunded, has not been able to help them.” Carey Goldberg reported on the state of the SFHA in 1996 saying: "The San Francisco authority, which has 30,000 tenants and has been called by some critics the worst slumlord in the city, has been bad for as long as anyone can remember." The SFHA has seen its budget cut repeatedly, all by Republican administrations, harboring the same views of President Bush.

When it seemed like all hope had gone, San Francisco stepped up and took responsibility for its own crumbling housing system. A short while after the removal of HOPE VI, a demolition not greeted with cheers and roars from weary project residents, San Francisco created a program called HOPE SF. It has virtually the same goals

186 as HOPE VI, but it is not funded by the federal government; since the program is funded locally, it also means that the president cannot tamper with its budget. The program absorbs funds mainly from city and state taxes, as well as any donations that they can get their hands on. The initiative is “to rebuild 2,500 public housing units in 8 neighborhoods, while also installing 1,000 new affordable housing units and 2,500 new market rate units” (Mayor’s Office of Housing), no small feat, but the city feels that with perseverance and ample funds they should be able to get it done. Along with the redevelopment of all public housing units, one of the most progressive concepts of the new program is to integrate income levels by adding affordable and market rate housing to the mix. By adding mixed-income housing, the neighborhood will attract a greater diversity of incomes, eliminating the concentration of poverty that has been festering like an open wound for thirty years.

The Mayor’s Office of Housing, in collaboration with the police department, has identified the most urgent projects in need of redevelopment as Sunnydale, Alice Griffith, Hunters View, and Hunters Point, or “The Big Four”—all located inside the Bayview Hunters Point neighborhood (Mayor’s Office of Housing). There are 20,000 residents between the four: the average income for a family is less than $13,000, and 60% of families are involved with City Child Welfare, Juvenal Probation and Mental Health Programs (Mayor’s Office of Housing). Residents of Sunnydale, San Francisco’s largest and most abysmal project, speak matter-of-factly about their home saying “[Sunnydale] is like a concentration camp. There is no way out unless you die” (Fulbright, Leslie). This dismal attitude expressed by Keith Perry is one shared universally around Sunnydale and the other projects as well. The people feel like they are literally in a living hell.

While the quality of life is ghastly, the urban poor have nowhere else to live. The vast majority of houses in San Francisco range in price from $500,000 to $999,999; the average price for a home being $789,400 (United Sates Bureau of the Census). The median family income in the “Big Four” is less than $13,000 (Mayor’s Office of Housing), making it virtually impossible for them to reside anywhere in the city besides the projects. “Though the housing is designed to be temporary, residents stay for decades. A combination of factors - geographic isolation, extreme poverty and a lack of access to social services - make it virtually impossible to leave” (Fulbright, Leslie).

The cost of housing in San Francisco is much higher than other American cities, even those much larger. Cities like Arlington, Texas and Atlanta, Georgia, two of the largest cities in America have much lower costs of living. Atlanta has average housing costs of $235, 200, and Arlington’s houses go for an average of $127, 200 (United Sates Bureau of the Census). Resident of the Big Four cannot afford to move, so San Francisco is doing its best to help them at the source.

Once these projects are redeveloped, residents will live in a safer community. They will have open contact with law enforcement which will join forces with the tenants’ associations. On-site counseling programs will be installed and be free of charge to help people with their mental health problems; new technology will become available to them; their lives will become more privileged. Redevelopment in Potrero and Hunters Point have already begun, with five or six more on the way. When Bush cut down HOPE VI, it was working. This claim is backed up by the San Francisco Planning and Urban Research Association which reported: "research reveals improvements in the quality of life in neighborhoods where HOPE VI projects have been built, including per-capita income increases, drops in unemployment and crime, and downward shifts in the concentration of poverty."

(Petersen, Rachel). HOPE SF aspires to do just that.

The rebuilding process helps the community to strengthen and provides job opportunities to members, thus making the final product all the more exceptional. It will provide them not just with a home, but it will lift their spirits and give them new hope. Construction provides job opportunities for residents and gives them the feeling that real change is happening, and that it is because of them. This gives them a stronger sense of community and confidence. They know that after the building process is finished and they are allowed to move back into their homes, they will find clean beds, a full-service kitchen, with polished steel glinting in the sunlight, well-insulated walls, insect-free, and an atmosphere of tranquility. Life will be better; if the architects have succeeded in their mission, no one would recognize a project as foreign territory; it will fit right into the city again, and residents will be safe and well taken care of in their new, more cohesive community. They also receive the assurance of better maintenance for their futures; after the construction is over, the developments are passed into the jurisdiction of private companies, not the Housing Authority, to manage them (“HOPE SF”) When interviewed by the San Francisco Planning and Urban Research Association about how we ought to tackle the public housing problem, Greg Fortner, executive director of the San Francisco Housing Authority said: "You improve the human condition when you improve the homes that people live in. You also improve the human condition when you improve the surrounding neighborhood conditions" (Petersen, Rachel). In other words, when the housing is improved, the people’s lives will be improved. Better housing reconnects the neighborhood to the city, making it fit in once again so that residents won’t feel like outcasts. On the contrary, the interiors of many of the homes are so elegant that one might well think the residents paid a fortune to live there. San Francisco remains one

187 of the most expensive places to live; the waiting list for public housing stretches on for generations. It is future generations that the redevelopments ultimately seek to accommodate. It is a widespread ideology that if one grows up in a city, that one should be able to afford to live there; in San Francisco that is rarely true. This is a tragedy that redevelopment seeks to address. The housing that is being created for those in need is sustainable, and should require little maintenance for many years. The resulting neighborhood provides support and gives each individual self-confidence in their future, with the assurance that they will always be able to have a home in the houses that Hope built.

Works Cited "HOPE SF." San Francisco Housing Authority. San Francisco Housing Authority, 28 Apr. 2009. Web. 30 Apr. 2009.

"HOPE VI." U.S. Department of Housing and Unban Development. U.S. Department of Housing and Unban Development, 5 May 2009. 28 Apr. 2009.

Von Hoffman, Alexander. "Why They Built the Pruitt-Igoe." Department of Sociology, Iowa State University. Iowa State University. Wed. 22 Aug. 2002.

Goldberg, Carey. "San Francisco Housing Authority Serves as a Model of Decay." New York Times 24 May 1996: A15. Print.

Leonhardt, David. "For Housing Crisis, the End Probably Isn’t Near." New York Times 21 Apr. 2009: B1. Print.

Turner, Wallace. "SAN FRANCISCO TACKLING 'DEN OF THIEVES' PROJECT." New York Times 30 Jul. 1981.

Print.

Goldberg, Leslie and Marinucci, Carla. "HUD official: S.F. can't handle housing." The Examiner 14 Sep. 1995: A. Print.

Petersen, Rachel. "HOPE VI in San Francisco." SPUR. SPUR. Mar. 2005. 28 Apr. 2009.

"New Urbanists urge Uncle Sam: ‘Don’t abandon HOPE’". New Urban News. New Urban News. Mar. 2003. Web. 28 April 2009.

Pollack, Fred. Personal Interview. 26 Apr. 2009.

Prowler, David. Personal Interview. 21 Apr. 2009.

Mayor’s Office of Housing. Mayor’s Office of Housing. Web. 7 May 2009.

United Sates Bureau of the Census. "San Francisco County, California." United Sates Bureau of the Census.

United Sates Bureau of the Census. "Arlington city, Texas " United Sates Bureau of the Census. "Atlanta city, Georgia" Fulbright, Leslie. "Life at the bottom: S.F.'s Sunnydale project." San Francisco Chronicle 3 Feb. 2008: A1. Print.

188 Kelsey MacLeod Craig Butz Research in the Community – E Block 15 May 2009 The Trouble with Isolationism In the face of this economic crisis, commercial isolationism - the inclination to only support domestic industries instead of foreign goods, might appear to be an insignificant topic. It isn’t a breaking news headline, or much less on many citizens’ minds, but it is very much relevant. Select policy makers and the government are pushing for American citizens to buy American goods until the economy is strong again, while many others like America’s foreign trade partners urge citizens to stay with the global market. A “buy American” clause that was put in a draft of the stimulus bill caused outrage from the many that believe American should continue to support the global economy, on the grounds that we need to maintain balanced trade and good international relationships. We live in an interconnected world that we cannot abandon. People who support isolationism are making a protagonist of the global economy that they believe started America’s financial crises, but it is imperative to realize that we rely on it for economic stability, and it delivers more affordable products. If we desert it, our trade partners will retaliate, and in these hard times, economic recovery will be a global effort. Although some countries affected by the current economic crisis believe that isolationism will be the best method for economic revival, it is important that all governments foster cooperative participation in the globalized commercial system by preserving the multilateral industry that has allowed so many nations to thrive.

Because this system involves rich and poor countries, America must set a good example by continuous participation, to ensure that hindrance of cooperation by any nation does not have any negative affects; all countries must participate. According to the CIA World Fact Book, The US only imports $1.377 trillion worth of goods per year, while exporting $2.19 trillion annually. Many widely available products that are assembled by Americans are made from imported goods: “many clothing items that were accompanied by a sign that proudly boasted ‘Made in the USA’ also detailed on the labels – ‘…from imported goods’ … although the product was assembled in the United States, it was not an American product in that all the manufacturer had to do was manage the sewing machine, while the material for more of that product were being produced in some remote part of the globe where cheap, sweat shop manufacturing is prevalent, which may not be something to have pride in” (MacLeod). Especially because we rely so heavily on imported goods, every up and down of the global market affects us; pulling out of it would kill us. It is not a bad thing that we import more than export, because America is a wealthy nation that doesn’t need to produce all of its own goods. But if we were to stop trading, we would have to start manufacturing everything we need. This would be quite impossible due to the economic crisis: there is simply not enough time or money to start revamping American manufacturing. The European Commission’s trade department has said recently that the “Buy American” clause was “the worst possible signal” that could be sent to world trade. A spokesman said: “We are particularly concerned about the signal that these measures could send to the world at a time when all countries are facing difficulties. Where America leads, many others tend to follow.” Especially as a leading economic figure, we not back out of this intricate coordination which maintains our economic stability and success, because only when we make headway towards balancing and developing our trade as a means of reviving our economy will other nations follow suit.

Some people who favor isolationism claim that the problem all started outside America, yet that is not entirely the case. It was our post cold war era loaning world that sparked economic crisis. “The 1980s were the start of ‘three profligate decades,’ when the expansion of mortgage credit and the invention of financial instruments like collateralized debt obligations (C.D.O.’s) led to a fiasco of leveraging and irresponsible speculation. The Federal Reserve kept the bubble afloat with easy money, while regulators and ratings agencies looked the other way. By 2007 total indebtedness was three times the size of the gross domestic product, a ratio that surpassed the record set in the years of the Great Depression. From 2001 to 2007 alone, domestic financial debt grew to $14.5 trillion from $8.5 trillion (Gewen). Insufficient loaning practices were not the only element to fuel the turmoil. Other parts of the problem are coming from what economists call “America’s ‘calcified’ political system,” in where “we may need new regulations to deal with the debt mess… but Washington has become dedicated to ‘the politics of evasion,’ reluctant to pass dramatic reforms or to call for sacrifice from the public…” (Gewen). On another note, it is not correct to assume that all jobs losses are attributed to the competition in the global market, as some isolationists claim. “In 1960, the U.S. ran a small trade surplus and enjoyed an unemployment rate of 5.5%; there were just about 65 million civilian jobs. In 2005, the U.S. ran a large trade deficit and enjoyed an unemployment rate of 5.1%; there were more 140 million civilian jobs” (Levy). Evidence exhibits only loose correlation between trade deficits and our own prosperity and jobs; most of the time these are not at all directly proportionate.

189 In the $819 infrastructure stimulus bill, some legislators on Capitol Hill wanted to make sure that only American products were used. This was their attempt to sell the idea that global commerce is the antagonistic force behind economic decline. Therefore, they hoped to ensure that no international commerce was involved in supplying America with necessary stimulus goods, namely steel. This is their hypocrisy: the extremist legislators such as those who proposed this element don’t really believe that the commercial isolationism that their bill includes will deliver us from the current economic crisis. They only continue to support and campaign for this movement solely to attract support and votes from citizens who let their national pride blind them from any better solution. The “buy American” movement is impractical, superficial, and unaffordable. According to one economist, “A new pair of shoes or even a new TV isn’t going to rescue the economy from its malaise. Saving as much as possible should be your primary concern when things get tough" (Fish). Isolationists say that buying American will create more US jobs. However, it is not worth the ultimate cost; that is not the way our market functions. American corporations don't exist to just create new jobs. That is something they do when they need to, not in direct response to increased consumerism. Educated people believe that the anti-China consumerist motto that has arisen is only because people want others to buy American, which is in part true. Some policy makers that promote the ‘buy American’ movement are creating a falsely elitist perception that anything foreign is inferior to American made, to discourage consumers from purchasing anything but domestic products. A reporter for the New York Times, Alex Williams recounts an interview with a consumer that admits: “Even though it is not always justified, there is a perception that because it is made overseas, things are produced to the lowest common denominator - there is not the attention to detail.”

Williams then adds that “with so many mass-market goods made off-shore, American-made products, which are often more expensive, have come to connote luxury” (Williams), but what, in this crisis, is our priority – luxury or stability and growth? If we, a nation that is constantly out to save the world, don’t put any mind to fostering international growth, we only point out that our ‘buy American’ movement is mere propaganda and superficial.

Plainly stated, isolationism will cost us big time, and as we are struggling to get our economy back on its feet, putting ourselves in our own commercial bubble will only remove more footing from under us.

Moreover, isolationists want consumers to believe that they will gain immense pride in buying American products, because Americans are helping other Americans. They hurrah consumers that buy American just to look good and feel proud, while they know that their new sponge and bleach make but a microscopically immeasurable difference in the whole economic scheme. Those who only buy American just to be patriotic are: "flag-waving, protectionist, even a little xenophobic" (Williams.) This type of consumer tries to rally others to support this movement by saying, let’s not make any more mistakes that come with supporting international industries, without the understanding that potential adversaries can be made of our largest creditors and that we will become our own adversary if we only support American made products. Commercial isolationism is inevitably set up to backfire on helpless consumers that only wanted to feel proud. Supporters of this movement believe that the American consumer’s spending money intended for an ailing economy should go to American products only. They also believe that the rising tide of imports with the possible instability that comes with international trade will devastate the economy and hurt everyone, which is why they are inclined to support isolationist policies.

If we care about our pocketbooks and our fellow humans, we would realize that it is our obligation to uphold the system and support one another in the global market. It is true that we cannot abandon or support our industry less in this economy, but nor can we abandon the billions of people abroad that rely on our investments. To do such would be immoral, impractical, and narcissistic. Our foreign trade partners do not want to suffer because we are not buying the goods we agreed to trade by engaging in multilateral commerce thus far. The wrong mindset is the one in which we convince ourselves that we shouldn't have to support the world market if we don't want to. The international market is too big and too important for consumers that base participation on petty things such as mere desire. Consumers must therefore see past the growing myth that the global market causes our problems. Especially now, we cannot victimize or retaliate against our best way to pull through economic crisis: cooperating effectively with the global market. The international market is not to blame for our problems, so why would we take out our anger on something that wasn’t the cause? US consummation of Chinese goods has declined recently, and so “since the financial crisis happened I have had no foreign business at all,” Mr. Liu, a Chinese shopkeeper, laments. As Chinese merchants attempt to compensate for the loss by selling their goods at home and “not wasting time with foreign business,” they are faced with the reality that “the short term domestic consumption cannot make up for the loss of exports,” says Xiang Songzuo, an independent Chinese economist, who goes on to explain that “Exports have fallen quickly and consumption will grow more slowly. Chinese exports are in free fall… dropping by 26 percent in February from a year earlier, after a 17.5 percent drop in January.” Today’s global market shows us that we cannot afford to be protectionist for our sake or the sake of other countries. We must learn to deal with the international market because we have built up this trade system so much that we can’t change it without terrible cost to ourselves and the world. Obama has also called for the nation to work together for the global cause by urging

190 Americans to look “beyond our own short-term interests to the wider set of obligations we have to each other. I agree that we can’t send a protectionist message...I think it would be a mistake, at a time when worldwide trade is declining, for us to start sending a message that somehow we’re just looking after ourselves and not concerned with world trade.” We must be open to others in order to maintain healthy multilateral relations.

Although the international market is not currently at its best, investors ought to still participate, because without support it will fail. After all, experts agree that America played a big role in catalyzing the current situation; now we need to repair the damage we have done by supporting international commerce. Warren Buffett analyzes past economic bumps to promote a fearless and wide investing attitude by stating that “You might think it would have been impossible for an investor to lose money during a century marked by such an extraordinary gain. But some investors did. The hapless ones bought stocks only when they felt comfort in doing so and then proceeded to sell when the headlines made them queasy. Again, in the early 1980s, the time to buy stocks was when inflation raged and the economy was in the tank. In short, bad news is an investor’s best friend. It lets you buy a slice of America’s future at a marked-down price. Over the long term, the stock market news will be good. Just because everyone is scared to invest doesn't mean you can't still support your country and yourself by taking a risk: a simple rule dictates my buying: be greedy when others are fearful.” An investment in a bad time in the market can be good news for the investor: when the market rebounds because of the continuous support, the investor will reap the benefits. Those not quite comfortable in investing and buying abroad must realize that it is worth it.

Without the competition of the global market, many of America’s citizens would not be able to afford necessary goods. One Economist article details that “In 1929 Willis Hawley and Reed Smoot, two protectionist Republicans in Congress, sponsored a bill to raise tariffs to the highest levels America had ever seen. And in the midst of economic distress, the protectionists won. The result was a round of reciprocal tariff hikes elsewhere, and a disastrous collapse in international trade. This was exactly the sort of thing the ministers of the G20 sought to avoid when they met in Washington late last year, agreeing not to devise new trade barriers as the world economy fizzles.”

America should not be looking to the international commercial scene through a selfish, what-can-we-get-out-of-it lens, but seek to maintain the healthy, generous, and reasonable trade relations with all countries which will end up benefiting us as well. After all, “Openness and economic integration have been prerequisites for economic growth and prosperity” (Levy). This openness allows citizens that can’t afford the more expensive American goods to afford what they need, which is why the “buy American” movement is impractical: everyone, even those that can’t afford it, will have to participate in order for it to work. A free international market is good: it creates healthy competition, which guarantees that the best products will vie for consumer dollars. Smart consumers would be purchasing what is best, not what makes them feel good just because of where it is made. If healthy competition itself is not a guarantee, “investors are right to be wary of highly leveraged entities or businesses in weak competitive positions,” as stated by Warren Buffett. Competition is essential to the current system: it is the system. Moreover, it helps societies and technology to progress, and pushes manufacturers to put their best foot forward. Consumers want the best bang for their buck, which thanks to a free market, they can take from anywhere, and not just down the road.

This competitive system is the multilateral commerce which our pocketbooks, 401k’s, stock market investments, and very livelihoods cannot survive without.

The biggest problem with the “buy American” fallacy will not come from American actions, but from the fact that retaliation from our foreign trade partners will have the greatest cost. According to the Christian Science Monitor, “If trading partners strike back on steel, the US industry could lose exports equal to or greater than the number generated by the stimulus. The gain in US jobs will not be worth the ultimate cost.” When confronted with the idea of isolationism, “The European Union warned the US against plunging the world into depression by adopting a planned ‘Buy American’ policy, intensifying fears of a trade war. The EU threatened to retaliate if the US Congress went ahead with sweeping measures in its $800 billion (£554 billion) stimulus plan to restrict spending to American goods and services” As reported by the BBC, “Germany's Economy Minister Karl-Theodor zu Guttenberg (Christian Social Union) has warned of protectionism and criticized the ‘Buy American’ clause in the US economic stimulus package...Guttenberg said that the clause could set a bad example to others when hammering out their stimulus programmes. It was important to keep markets open particularly in a crisis...Trade between the United States and Europe was the backbone of global trade.” If we don't buy what we paid for from other countries, they will be reluctant to do business deals, and if we don’t set an example of openness, we are sure to get the short end of the stick.

While much dispute has arisen as to the best method of economic revitalization, it is clear that whatever our leadership does, it cannot turn from the vital system of the global market. The best way to reduce our deficit in the long run, as Obama would say, is “with a budget that leads to broad economic growth… where we save and invest.”

We must take action to not let crisis be our future, it is now upon us; it is the responsibility of the whole world to come through together. Quoted from the American ambassador to the EU, John Bruton: “Open markets remain the

191 essential precondition for a rapid recovery from the crisis, and history has shown us where measures taken contrary to this principle can lead us.” Future problems will come from the blind following of an orthodox, dogmatic localtrade-only policy: this dogma is the unbeneficial extremism that is the isolationism movement. As former Vice President Hubert H. Humphrey said, “National isolation breeds national neurosis.” Commercial isolationism is not an applicable or practical remedy for the financial stress in this modern world.

Work Cited Buffett, Warren E. "Buy American. I Am." nytimes.com. New York Times. 17 Oct. 2008. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/10/17/opinion/17buffett.html?pagewanted=print> "Buying American." economist.com. Economist. 29 Jan. 2009. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.economist.com/world/unitedstates/displayStory.cfm?story_id=13031019> Charter, David, Rory Watson and Philip Webster. "President Obama to water down 'Buy American' plan after EU trade war threat." times.co.uk. Times Online. 4 Feb. 2009. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.timesonline.co.uk/tol/news/world/europe/article5655115.ece> Ford, Peter. "China tries peddling its wares…in China?" csmonitor.com. Christian Science Monitor. 12 Mar. 2009.

Web. 17 Mar. 2009. <http://features.csmonitor.com/economyrebuild/2009/03/12/china-tries-peddling-itswares-in-china/> "German minister warns USA about resorting to protectionism" BBC Monitoring Europe 18 Mar. 2009, Proquest.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Gewen, Barry. "What Ails the American Economy? Everything, and there's Worse to Come." nytimes.com. New York Times. 21 pr. 2008. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2008/04/21/books/21gewen.html> Masch, Vladimir A. and Phillip I. Levy. "U.S. Trade Policy Needs Revamping." businessweek.com. McGraw-Hill.

Feb. 2007. Web. 17 Mar. 2009.

Obama, Barack. “Transcript: Obama’s News Conference.” Natl. Public Radio. NPR.org. 24 Mar. 2009. Web. 26 Mar. 2009.

Williams, Alex. "Love It? Check the Label." nytimes.com. New York Times. 6 Sept. 2007. Web. 21 Mar. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2007/09/06/fashion/06made.html?_r=1&pagewanted=2>

192 Mary MacLeod Craig Butz Research E Block May 15, 2009 Spotlight vs. Do Right The basics of charities: Does Lindsey Lohan working along side Angelina Jolie in Africa strike you as odd? When you see materialistic stars working in poor countries, do you wonder why they are there? Such questions have fueled the debate over what celebrity charities are legitimate and which are only there for media attention. There has been speculation if celebrity charity work is only to improve public relations, and no longer has the benefit of the needy in mind. Although some celebrities will selfishly establish foundations just to get in the spotlight, an elite and compassionate few actually can make a difference by using their charities and abundance of recourse to inspire others into doing good. Such charities have the ability to make vast differences in the world, but only if they are fueled by good intentions. However, to analyze the difference an organization can make, one must first fully understand how non-profits and foundations work, as well as learn how to measure the success of that particular cause. Only after this process can one fully determine and divide “good” charities from “bad” ones.

The first step of comprehending celebrities and their impact is understanding the world of how charitable organizations operate. Cate Muther, who works most notably for Three Guineas Fund is an expert in this subject.

Her foundation works mainly to change society by investing in women and girls, and is very successful. She states “Charities have to get their funding somehow. This is why there are foundations. They provide the monetary services to whatever cause they choose to support. Usually the mission of the foundation and the charity they give to are in line” (Muther). For example, the Three Guineas Fund is a foundation that would give money to other organizations working along side women and girls. Their relationships with each other’s cause strictly dictates if they are funded or not. This describes the basics of the groundwork involving how charities are funded, and what exactly some foundations do.

The second step to understanding celebrity charities is knowing how to evaluate the difference a specific charity is making. Everyone, from those who want to give away a few dollars, to sponsors who want to donate millions to a specific cause, need this ability. Without the proper tools or skills to determine if a cause is worth donating to, one might be putting their money in a fruitless charity. To be able to measure if celebrity charities are impacting their causes, one has to be able to measure if any charity is successful. Ms. Muther advises people to “Look at their overview costs, and then compare what their mission statement is to what work they are doing. If the costs are low, and they work a lot with whomever they are trying to reach out to, then they are probably doing a good job” (Muther). For example, to compare the LIVESTRONG which has a 22% overview cost (the amount of money which goes to the management of the charity); to the Will Smith Foundation which has at 72% overview cost, one can easily see which foundation on principle is better (Tru Tv). To find out if a charity is completing their mission, all one has to do is compare their mission statement to the work they are doing. Websites like Charity Navigator have even been formed to help people rate charities and choose where to put their time and money. These are the basics of understanding the world of charities.

Lesser celebrity charities: By evaluating charities, one can see that there are some that are far inferior or worse that some of the other examined. One will find that there are organizations run that make little to no difference. People have proposed that these stars are so focused on boosting their public relations, that they aren’t really invested in their causes. In other words, their intentions might just be to get noticed, not necessarily to do good. New York Times said “you’ve got to have something for People magazine to shoot you at. You can’t just get $20 million a picture; you’ve got to serve turkey to the poor too” (Traub). Our society demands that our celebrities exhibit care for our communities, and in extreme cases finance non productive charity work. "In those days stars were shaped by the studio system before being delivered to the public. Now, in the era of People and the E! channel and the global swarm of paparazzi, stars shape themselves, and their brands, through their own public acts" (Traub). The general public might be the reason why they feel compelled to participate in charitable deeds without interest in what they are doing. In fact, a business has been made around making charities. Traub says that "An entire industry has sprung up around the recruitment of celebrities to good works. Even an old-line philanthropy like the Red Cross employs a 'director of celebrity outreach'" (Traub). Because of all of these pressures, it’s no wonder why so many celebrity charities are fundamentally flawed.

Some of the lesser charities are founded by celebrities who are known for partying, that have suddenly turned to volunteer work. However, one cannot help but wonder if they have really changed or not. When Paris

193 Hilton decided to take on volunteer work people couldn’t help but question her motives. As said by a columnist "Some are questioning Hilton's motives for linking up with a humanitarian aid organization, wondering if she's only doing it in effort to revive her tarnished reputation or if she is truly involved in the charity Playing for Good's cause" (Soden). People are no doubt concerned that celebrities use volunteer work to get back into the spotlight. Such famous stars like Hilton really damage volunteer work’s credibility when they steal the spotlight for their own benefit. Questions like “Are celebrities lending more than just their names to a cause, or is it all about the photo-op?

(Soden), have hurt the cause for everyone. Power hungry celebrities have given the whole Hollywood charity work craze a bad name, harming even those who fundamentally want to do good.

Productive celebrity charities: Although there is speculation fueled by rumors of misguided motives for being charitable, there are undoubtedly a good hearted few that truly want to serve. Some stars are capable of using their influence to make the world better. A journalist for New York Times has said “In recent years, stars have learned that their intense presentness in people’s daily lives and their access to the uppermost realms of politics, business and the media offer them a peculiar kind of moral position, should they care to use it” (Traub). Celebrities have discovered that they can use their influence on the population to inspire people with their actions. Other Times articles have also said that “Celebrities may not exactly be the prophets of our age, but they have a strong grip on people's imaginations and on their wallets” (Salamon). They might not necessarily be the best people in the world, but they influence the majority of it. They are also described as “major recruiters to the humanitarian cause”, and people that can “certainly increase the number of people and donors interested in the cause” (Soden). Theses are the most notable benefits that stars can bring to a cause, just because they are famous. Among most people, there is a general consensus that celebrities do the world some good when they used their abilities and spotlight to help others in need.

The celebrities who are true to their causes have found that their most powerful weapon is their capability of bringing awareness and money to a charity. People believe that “…despite, or because of, their aura of glitz and glamour, they can provide a moral example for us to follow when they do something good” (Salamon). This is what makes them so important to foundations and other organizations. “Celebrities have the ear and attention of the public. They tend to command more attention than talking heads from our organization” (Soden). Celebrity power might extend to more than just what we wear, but also to what we support. Ms. Muther has said “Celebrities are one of the best ways of getting peoples attention, they are naturally suited to do so” (Muther). This is an example showing why celebrities are important “resources” that if use correctly, can have excellent results.

Apart from just inspiring people, and bringing support to a program or charity, an elite number of stars go above and beyond their call of duty. The spoke persons for the more “important” and globally involved issues tend to be the more dedicated ones. “The more deeply committed figures, like Angelina Jolie, retain firms like the Global Philanthropy Group, which, according to a representative, offers ‘comprehensive philanthropic management’” (Traub). This proves testament to the fact that some famous stars are also dedicated to something other than their careers. They have the ability to be deeply committed to a charity, and make them work. In important global situations, when the goal is to increase public receptivity, people say that, “…it seems clear that celebrity advocacy can make a crucial difference. When the goal is to change policy in Western countries highly sensitive to public opinion, as is the case with debt relief, foreign aid or (increasingly) global warm, stars can, and have, helped tip the balance” (Traub). One will find that celebrities can no doubt be helpful in political and universal problems in such a way that no other person could be.

In addition, celebrities are capable of doing work that they seek to inspire others to participate in. Some stars are actually willing to get their hands dirty by digging wells, or shoveling dirt. When talking about Natalie Portman, reporters described that “… In her eight years at Unicef, she’s never refused to go where they were asked to go. And the places they’re asked to go certainly don’t come with luxe accommodations” (Soden). Of course Natalie is one of the more empowered celebrities, but nevertheless is an example of how far some will go to support their causes. Her actions speak for themselves about her dedication to helping underprivileged Israelis and their struggle to survive. In fact, New York Times testifies “Celebrities sit through classes to learn about Unicef and all the various issues that threaten children’s survival around the world” (Soden). They are even willing to take time out of their “busy” schedules and learn about what they are doing, before they even begin their fundraising. In 2004, fresh out of college Natalie “went to Capitol Hill to talk to Congress on behalf of the Foundation for International Community Assistance, or Finca, a microfinance organization for which served as ‘ambassador’” (Traub).

Celebrities can prove useful as more that publicists for a charity, but as hard workers and diplomats too.

Overall, celebrities have two motives for being charitable. There are those like Paris Hilton who are under speculation for taking advantage of the good nature of volunteer work, in efforts to increase public relations, and keep them on the headlines. On the other hand, Natalie Portman stands for those who have a genuine interest in their

194 causes, and are involved because they want to actually help people. The latter categorization of celebrities is often forgotten, overshadowed by the attention the media gives people like Paris. Even people might have disputes over which motive drives the most stars to charity work, there is one point that cannot be argued. In the right situation and with the right people, celebrities can be the most valuable assets charities can have.

Works Cited "Celebrity Charity Review." The Smoking Gun. Tru Tv, Turner, n.d. Web. 17 Mar, 2009 Salamon, Julie. "Weighing the Benefits of Celebrity Charity." New York Times. New York Times, 8 Jan, 2005. Web. 25 Mar, 2009.

Soden, Blair. "Paris to Rwanda: Socialite Becomes Latest Star Hitched to Charity." ABC NEWS. ABC, 10 Oct, 2007. Web. 20 Apr, 2009.

Traub, James. "The Celebrity Solution." New York Times. New York Times, 9 Mar, 2008.

Web. 25 Mar, 2009.

195 Thomas Pritchett Research in the Community Professor Butz April 28, 2009 Homelessness Over the last decade, San Francisco has become known as a city that with of the largest homelessness problems in the United States; however, the problem is still on the rise, and San Francisco’s government is not addressing the crisis. It’s a problem that San Francisco focus’ only on helping the chronically homeless instead of all the homeless people in the city is a major issue. Also, San Francisco has many flawed aids to homelessness, such as expensive health clinics, bad homeless shelters, and overwhelmed programs that help the homeless, which have lead to a city with so much homelessness that the problem seems unsolvable.

In San Francisco’s plan to end chronic homelessness, the government of San Francisco details the extent of the homelessness problem. There are about 15,000 people in the city who are considered homeless, and about 3000 are chronically homeless, meaning that they have been homeless for over a year; this is more than the 2700 chronically homeless people currently living in New York (Alioto, Smith, and Guzzetta 7). These 3000 chronically homeless members of our society are only 20% of the population of the homeless living in our city, but they consume 63% of our $200,000,000 annual budget being devoted to the homeless (Alioto, Smith, and Guzzetta 7).

This is an astounding $42,000 per person. A person could live off of this amount of money annually, and this money is focused on helping just one homeless person get by. This is one of the main reasons that San Francisco has such a large homeless problem; we don’t have enough money in the budget to help all homeless in the city. San Francisco is spending its time focusing solely on the chronically homeless, and too little on the poorest, non-homeless members of society that can barely support themselves.

Another problem with the homeless people is that the cost to treat all of them who want to be treated for alcoholism, mental illness, and other illnesses like that is far too high for San Francisco to afford. According to San Francisco’s plan to stop homelessness, “the average age of a homeless person who dies on the streets of San Francisco is 41 years,” and 70% of the homeless people who die on the street are intoxicated with a harmful substance (Alioto, Smith, and Gazzetta 10). This is because the homeless people in San Francisco more often than not have lost their bearings and their sense of right and wrong. Even though this is the case, San Francisco is not doing all it can to help the people that need the most help. According to San Francisco’s plan, hospitals see “74 inebriates every two days” (Alioto, Smith, and Gazzetta 10). This is problematic for our city because treating the homeless people that come in for care is a very expensive process, and is estimated to cost roughly 12.3 million dollars annually to support all of these people (Alioto, Smith, and Gazzetta 10). If San Francisco’s governing body is going to try and stop homelessness once and for all, they are going to have to step up their health care, or create cheaper health care made especially for the homeless.

Another problem with homelessness is the fact that on a frequent basis, “90% of our 3,000 chronically homeless individuals rotate through the jail system on a weekly or monthly basis. At any given time, approximately 40% of the jail population is homeless people "(Alioto, Smith, and Gazzetta 11). Because of this fact, our city spends extraneous amounts of money keeping the homeless incarcerated when we could be using it to help them get their footing and get by in the world. Also, because so many people in jail are homeless, there is not enough room to actually have dangerous criminals locked up.

In the book, Criminal of Poverty: Growing up Homeless in America by Lisa Gray-Garcia, there is an instance where she is incarcerated in jail with many other homeless people, which is problematic, as she was in jail for no reason. The book is an autobiography about a child who at a very young age faced the pressures of being poor and homeless. Starting at age 11, Lisa has to take care of her physically and mentally challenged mother, and of all the duties a 30 year old would have to take on; this includes selling artwork on the street without a license to do so, and applying for a house. In the book, Lisa is incarcerated for just sleeping in her car in a university parking lot, and in her cell with her are multiple other homeless people that are incarcerated for just living on the street. While in jail, she explains what she was thinking: For the first time in my life, I felt at ease, no longer a wannabe fraternizing with people outside my reality.

These women wouldn’t think I was scum because I couldn’t pay my rent and got evicted, because my car was rickety and filled with junk, because my jeans weren’t the perfect brand and my shoes were wrong…I no longer cared that I could never overcome these problems (Gray-Garcia 148-149).

This is good summary of what homeless people feel when talking to people that are not homeless, or have never experienced what it is like to be homeless; they feel that they are mistreated by the common people because they are

196 poor. She says that when she was among homeless people in that jail cell, it gave her a chance to be with people who saw her for who she was on the inside instead of judging who she was based on her external appearance.

I also observed this kind of behavior while doing community service at Glide Memorial Church in San Francisco. The homeless don’t want to communicate their needs to the common public. Glide is an organization that provides food, shelter, healthcare, and many other necessities that people need to live (Glide: Work). When I first arrived, many homeless people were outside of the front door socializing with each other, but when they got inside, they were much more reserved about who they talked to (although they did talk to their caretakers because they were so nice to them). This further illustrates the point that homeless people in San Francisco feel much more comfortable around people who can actually understand their hardship rather than people who don’t know what they feel.

Organizations similar to Glide such as St. Anthony’s are getting overwhelmed by the still rising homeless population in San Francisco, and it’s problematic that homeless aids in the city cannot support all of the homeless who need help (Knight). St. Anthony’s is another service to the homeless that provides the necessities of life to them, as well as health care and rehabilitation that helps them get back on their feet (St. Anthony’s Foundation).

With the rising homelessness population, this group is stressed to keep up, and is struggling to assist all of the people, but there are just too many homeless to help at one time.

Another major problem with homelessness in San Francisco is that homeless shelters do not function how they should. It is a problem that “Homeless people must be fingerprinted in order to receive a shelter bed in San Francisco. San Francisco spent over a million dollars on this system that frequently breaks down” in an attempt to keep track of the homeless in them (Factsheet on Homelessness). San Francisco spends superfluous money on flawed systems, which prevents them from actually helping the homeless. Also, “Within the city, there are approximately 1,840 emergency beds in permanent shelters” (Factsheet on Homelessness). This is a substantial amount, but only accounts for a little less than 2/3 of the city’s chronically homeless population. If the city is really going to be able to stop homelessness, they are going to need to make more beds in homeless shelters to accommodate not only the 3000 chronically homeless people living San Francisco now, but also the people who are homeless on and off, and need shelter and care on occasion.

An example of a bad solution to the problem was in 2005; a program called Care not Cash was put into place to try and stop homeless people from using the welfare given to them for alcohol or drugs, and to get them to go to a shelter for help (Newsom). The four core principles of this program were 1. People are better served in shelter/housing than on the streets.

2. Services should be tailored to meet individual’s needs.

3. Length of time in shelters should be minimized.

4. Affordable housing options should be expanded. (Newsom) This program originally aimed to: 1. Expand affordable housing units and services for CAAP clients 2. Decrease the number of CAAP clients who are homeless 3. Increase accountability throughout the public assistance delivery system for homeless indigent adults.

(Newsom) The main thing that Care Not Cash did was “[cut] the welfare checks to homeless people from a high of $410 a month to $59 a month, giving them either a shelter bed or a permanent room instead” (Fagan). This program seems like it might be successful, but according to a survey given to homeless people, “30% responded they had been displaced from shelter due to Care Not Cash, on an average of three different times. In a survey of 50 front line service providers, 52% reported that a negative outcome from Care Not Cash was displacement from shelters,” (Factsheet on Homelessness). If San Francisco is just going to throw the homeless people out of the shelters, what is the point of putting them there in the first place? This is just another example of a flawed solution to the problem that wasted a large sum of money that could have been used to assist the homeless in the most important areas.

Over the last decade, homelessness in San Francisco has risen to uncountable levels, and San Francisco is not doing everything it could to help. The defective homeless shelters, overwhelmed homeless care facilities, and flawed attempted solutions have not improved the crisis, but have detracted from the success of finding a solution that works. In the future, if all San Franciscans band together and assist the homeless in any way we can, which includes donating money to homeless shelters, organizations like Glide, soup kitchens, and any other places that support homeless people. If San Francisco, does not start addressing the problem soon, it is possible that a solution to homelessness will never be found, as the government will keep putting flawed programs into place in futile attempt to stop the crisis. If we do not address the problem soon, homelessness will morph from being a problem to being an epidemic.

197 Works Cited Alioto, Angela, Reginald Smith, and Tim Guzzetta. The San Francisco Plan to Abolish Chronic Homelessness. San Francisco: Interagency Council on Homelessness, [2004]. Interagency Council on Homelessness. Web. Mar. 25, 2009.

Factsheet on Homelessness – Coalition on Homelessness, San Francisco. Coalition on Homelessness, San Francisco. Web. 26 Mar., 2009.

Fagan, Kevin. “Fewer homeless people on streets of San Francisco 28% drop since fall of '02, but other counties report higher numbers.” NY Times. The New York Times. 15 February, 2005. Web. 7 May, 2009.

Gray-Garcia, Lisa. Criminal of Poverty: Growing up Homeless in America. San Francisco: City Light Books, 2003.

Print.

Glide: Work. Glide Memorial Church. Web. 7 May, 2009.

Knight, Heather. S.F. making strides to solve homeless problem. San Francisco Chronicle, 3 May, 2009. Web. 7 May, 2009.

Newsom, Gavin. Care Not Cash – Overview and Progress Report. Human Service Agency, 9 Feb, 2005. Web. 26 Mar, 2009.

St. Anthony Foundation. St. Anthony Foundation. Web. 7 May, 2009.

198 Hayley Smith Craig Butz Research in the Community 5/12/09 Just Knowing Can Save Lives Everyone, no doubt, has heard of epilepsy, but do they really know what it is or how they can help. Most of the people who really know anything about it are epileptics, or they have a relative who is epileptic or their field of work is related to epilepsy. Just because epilepsy doesn’t get as much publicity as other conditions, doesn’t mean it is of lesser importance or not as life-changing. Funding for epilepsy is difficult because of the lack of knowledge and without funding, new treatment technologies can not be explored. Not only would knowledge help with the medical arena, it would also drastically improve the society’s opinions and understanding. By increasing awareness of epilepsy it can lead to a larger appreciation for those affected and lessen the fear and stigma of this condition; this reaches out to people on a more personal level. However, on the grander scale, this would increase funds for treatments and medications, while also making it possible to research for newer and better options.

Epilepsy is in no way a small issue; about 50 million people in the world have it and the World Health Organization explains that “although the social effects vary from country to country, the discrimination and social stigma that surround epilepsy worldwide are often more difficult to overcome than the seizures themselves” (World Health Organization). Also, in some cases, this stigma and embarrassment may result in people to not seeking the appropriate help because they don’t want to officially label themselves as epileptic.

Epilepsy is a condition where someone has recurring seizures and this person could be of any age or from any life style. Because there are around forty different types of seizures, someone’s diagnosis could be drastically different than another’s. The most common types of seizures are the grand mal and petit mal (or absence). A grand mal seizure is when convulsions take place, and a petit mal (or absence) seizure doesn’t involve convulsions, but actually when someone has frequent lapses of consciousness. An epileptic can have 30+ seizures in a day, which really hinders this person’s development (socially, academically, mentally, and sometimes physically), and on the other hand a person can have a very minor case of epilepsy, leaving them with lesser long-term issues.

What people don’t understand is that “the vast majority of people with epilepsy can take part in the same activities as everyone else, with the help of simple safety measures where appropriate” (Epilepsy Action). Having epilepsy does not disable you, but sources show that “many people with epilepsy are still discriminated against due to ignorance about the condition” and the lack of media exposure; in reality, people are fearful of what they don’t know or understand (Epilepsy Action).

Epilepsy has so many unanswered questions and this shouldn’t be the case with such a serious condition.

Some common mistakes with epilepsy are that it is labeled as a mental illness/retardation, and that epileptics make bad employees. Another common perception is that people think that seizures are something to be feared, but if you know what to do, then there isn’t anything to be scared of.

As I emphasized before, “public education is needed to eliminate these misconceptions” (Epilepsy Information Page). The sad truth about epilepsy is that although it is normal for people with epilepsy to go live a normal life, “it is not uncommon for people with epilepsy, especially children, to develop behavioral and emotional problems, sometimes the consequence of embarrassment and frustration or bullying, teasing, or avoidance in school and other social settings” (Epilepsy Information Page).

People who are diagnosed with epilepsy say that one of the most difficult parts is dealing with how people react and treat them because people always want to be accepted. It’s completely unfair for people to ignore or bully someone, who has a condition that is so out of their control. This is where knowledge can save people from embarrassment and abandonment, but until then epileptics have been encouraged to just focus on their own abilities and not the things that give them trouble (Schachter, Steven C., M.D.). Because people have been too afraid to ‘come out’ of the epilepsy closet, conferences have been held to educate the public and encourage the epileptics that they can and should lead a normal lifestyle. One example is the Living Well with Epilepsy I conference, which is a national public health and epilepsy conference that started in 1997. Their key messages--"take seizures seriously, do it early, do it right the first time, be systematic, efficient and effective, and empower the patient"—stress that epilepsy should not go unseen and that efficient and effective ways must be found to ‘save’ the patient (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention). Another organization stated their priority concerns, which include “improving care; improving communication and combating stigma; self-management; surveillance and prevention research; increasing public awareness and knowledge about epilepsy; and strengthening partnerships” (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention). There is evidence that people are realizing what needs to be done, but it doesn’t look as though enough people really want to take initiative and help the effected live a life that should have already been outwardly normal.

199 Not only would awareness reach out to the epileptics’ social lives, but it would also benefit their medical standards as well. There are so many options to control epilepsy from therapies to diets, but most of them seem to work only for short periods of time and not in the long run; even medications give patients trouble.

Scientists are still looking for a cure because right now, doctors can, usually, control epilepsy, but they have yet to prevent it.

Modern medicines and surgeries can control seizures for about 80 percent of those diagnosed, but what happens to the other 20 percent? (Epilepsy Information Page) Also about three fourths of the world doesn’t even have enough money to treat people with epilepsy. Even though epileptics can lead a normal life, they still have to be cautious. Who wants to live the rest of their life worrying that at any moment they could have a seizure? Doctors are trying to find new therapy options, including fetal pig neuron transplants into patients’ brains to see if this technique could help control seizures (Epilepsy Information Page). This has not been finalized, and even when it is finalized, this doesn’t prevent seizures, but instead detects them. This would be helpful, but not necessarily life saving.

Two other common options are VNS, which stands for Vagus Nerve Stimulation, and the ketogentic diet.

VNS is a surgical option that sends more energy to the nerves, and the majority of the side effects deal with discomfort in the muscles and nerves, and doctors caution that the “tightening of the throat and increased hoarseness during stimulation” is common (Vagus Nerve Stimulation). Usually the reason why people choose a surgical treatment is because they don’t respond well to the medications. The ketogentic diet is “high fat, adequate protein, low carbohydrate diet”, but like any other treatment it has side effects and some include hypoglycemia, a 30% increase in cholesterol, and the possibility of developing a kidney stone (Ketogentic Diet). It is good to have options, but it seems that there can be better ways to control epilepsy than with a diet, which would doubtfully help the patient in the long run.

The main way people control their seizures is with medications, and even though they have improved since the last 15 years there are still a lot of issues concerning quantities and cost. The main problem with medications is that the person has to keep switching between different drugs throughout their experience with epilepsy. This is because scientists haven’t found a drug that can really help a person throughout their whole experience with this condition. People don’t like having to switch medications all the time, so this is why they usually just stick with the drug that they are most comfortable or familiar with even if it isn’t helping them as much anymore. Orrin Devinsky, MD, a professor of neurology and the director of the NYU Comprehensive Epilepsy Center at New York University's Langone Medical Center discusses commonalities with epilepsy medication: "I see people who have been on the same medication for 10, 15, or 20 years, and they don't realize that they're having side effects anymore," Devinsky tells WebMD. "They think that sleeping 12 hours a day and always being exhausted is normal. They don't remember what it was like before they went on the medication" (Epilepsy: Living and Coping).

Once someone finds a drug that works well enough for them, they feel uneasy about switching, even though there is a drug out there that could work even better for them.

Also it is important to know that medications work very differently with different people. Also it is incredibly hard finding the medium; you want enough to stop the seizures, but you don’t want too much or else there will be a lot of side effects. It would be tremendously helpful if scientists could create or find a drug that doesn’t need any follow up drugs. This would save a lot of the patient’s money and when someone is taking several different drugs, the side effects are multiplied. By increasing awareness, scientists would be a lot closer to finding solutions to these and other issues (Nikki Wolfe).

Image from People have been trying all different kinds of ways to spread http://www.purpleday.org/ awareness and stop the stigma and the list of fundraisers will only grow.

Organizations have not only created awareness bracelets, but a whole month has been dedicated to epilepsy awareness: November. Epilepsy foundations have created a good amount of opportunities for people to learn about epilepsy and what really is going on, but the main problem is publicity. I doubt most people know that November is epilepsy awareness month; I sure was not aware of this.

200 Another example is the worldwide fundraiser, Purple Day where people around the world are asked to wear purple on March 26 (Purple Day). This isn’t a very well known fundraiser versus the Breast Cancer Walk that is held every year. Epilepsy has its own walk too, but it is referred to as a stroll, which doesn’t have the same feel as the word walk. The main issue with epilepsy fundraisers is not the amount or variety or regularity, but the media exposure. In this generation, they way people/things/events get noticed and are successful is through ads and interviews; epilepsy needs more air time if it is going to get the respect it deserves.

Funding for epilepsy is probably harder and higher than most people expect; the organization known as the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention illustrate that “epilepsy affects about 2.5 million Americans, and results in an estimated annual cost of $15.5 billion in medical costs and lost or reduced earnings and production” and a large portion of the world probably doesn’t even have half that (Centers for Disease Control and Prevention). This is why we need the support of the community; support of their wallets and the support of their hearts.

Image from http://www.epilepsyontario.org/client/EO/EOWeb.nsf/web/E pilepsy+Awareness+Bracelets Works Cited Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. 14 Apr. 2009<http://www.cdc.gov/epilepsy/ >.

Epilepsy. World Health Organization. 2009. WHO Media Centre. 14 Apr. 2009 < http:// www.who.int/mediacentre/factsheets/fs999/en/index.html>.

Epilepsy Facts, Figures and Terminology. Epilepsy Action. Epilepsy Action. 14 May 2009 < http://www.epilepsy.org.uk/press/facts.html>.

Epilepsy Information Page. National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke (NINDS). 23 Mar. 2009.

National Institute of Neurological Disorders and Stroke. 14 Apr. 2009 <http://www.ninds.nih.gov/disorders/epilepsy/epil epsy.htm>.

Epilepsy: Living and Coping. Epilepsy Guide. WebMD. 14 Apr. 2009 <http://www.webmd.com/epilepsy/guide/epilepsy-living-coping> Ketogenic Diet. Epilepsy Action. Epilepsy Action. 14 May 2009 < http://www.epilepsy.o rg.uk/info/ketogenic.html>.

Purple Day. Purple Day. Epilepsy Association of Nova Scotia and the Anita Kaufmann Foundation. 14 May 2009 < http://www.purpleday.org/>.

Schachter, Steven C., M.D. Social Effects of Epilepsy. Epilepsy.com. 2 Nov. 2007. Epilepsy.com. 14 Apr. 2009 < http://www.epilepsy.com/epilepsy /social_effects>.

Schachter, Steven C., M.D. Vagus Nerve Stimulation. Epilepsy.com. 15 Dec. 2006. Epilepsy.com. 14 May 2009 <http://www.epilepsy.com/epilepsy/vns>.

Wolfe, Nikki. Personal Interview. Apr. 4, 2009.

201 Daniel Stuff Craig Butz Research in the Community April 28, 2009 Procrastination: A Researcher’s Worst Nightmare In the world today, 15-20% of people have been estimated to have extreme cases of procrastination which can lead to failing in school or losing a job (Pringle). To some people, procrastination means putting off assignments or taking a break during a project. Procrastination has always had some influence on children and adults when doing an assignment for either school or work. For some, procrastination can be harmless, because it can mean taking a small break. But for others, it can represent the beginning of many hardships to come; researchers who try to help procrastinators have almost given up, because of how tough it is to deal with procrastination. Although procrastination is difficult for researchers to study due to stubbornness and denial of patients, they have created four working methods and should continue to try to help because procrastination can result in students failing in school or adults ruining a career.

Procrastination can become a habit that can continue into adulthood. Adults who procrastinate have more at risk then students who procrastinate. Adults have many more responsibilities than students. Instead of school, adults have jobs which are essential for them to be able to pay for food, shelter, and other supplies needed when trying to live a healthy life. Procrastination prevents these efforts because it prevents adults from functioning. Adults who procrastinate usually have a lack of control (Milgram, Dangour, and Raviv). If this happens, job assignments may be avoided, and in the end, the adult might get in trouble for not completing the task. Heather Pringle, a freelanced writer, said that it is necessary to “make a firm commitment to your boss or partner to finish a task by a certain amount of time.”

Taxes are another important task that adults are responsible for, and some procrastinate paying them (O’Donoghue, Rabin). Taxes are a big problem if not paid on time. Some procrastinators believe that all of their future problems will just go away after time has gone by (O’Donoghue, Rabin). These false beliefs encourage an adult not to pay their taxes, which can result in receiving a big fine or going to jail. However, these issues will not be addressed with a teacher, like when the adult was in school, but with the law, which is a much more serious problem and which can involve jail time.

Procrastination not only causes a lot of problems with an adult’s job and the law, but some severe cases of procrastination have led to death (O’Donoghue, Rabin). Procrastination can kill when it comes to quitting unhealthy habits, like drug use. Similar to procrastination, drugs are a very dangerous habit because of their unhealthy effect.

In the end, these could and probably will ultimately result in death. In some cases, the effect of the drugs can emphasize the problem of procrastination by making someone feel as though deadlines and commitments do not really matter. It clouds their judgment and can lead to some dire consequences.

Even with all of these different reasons why adults should not procrastinate in life, there are still some reasons why adults procrastinate. Some adults say that procrastination is caused by some rebellious feelings they have towards their boss. Any type of “negativism” towards the person they are working for can be seen as a reason to procrastinate (Milgram, Dangour, and Raviv). This excuse is often used with the law and jobs. There always seems to be some type of excuse that makes it necessary to procrastinate. One adult procrastinator says that: "Lots of people probably procrastinate and block more than I do. I couldn't have gotten through all my schooling if I had real problems. You [referring to me] might do better to study and help those homeless people pushing their carts around aimlessly" (Boice 4). However, even with these excuses, procrastinators need help and only researchers are able to help them.

Procrastination usually begins when one is a student, and it can initiate serious issues. It usually occurs among teenagers because teens go through many changes (Roth). Students are given lots of work and assignments which they must complete before a deadline. However, the majority of procrastination takes place when a student is under a large amount of anxiety when working on a project or a major assignment (Thomson). Everyone does occasionally postpone an assignment in order to get some rest (Pringle). But for those who procrastinate and block (also known as Pbers), postponing an assignment can become a habit. The name Pbers is the abbreviated word that researchers have created to classify those who procrastinate or block (Boice xx). The P is for procrastination and the B is for blocking. Blocking, like procrastination, also has to do with being too self-conscious and postponing assignments. For some students who procrastinate, it is the result of low motivation and laziness (Lee). These sorts of issues can be seen mainly in college students, because of the huge quantities of work they must complete. Eunju Lee, a researcher of procrastination, states that “procrastination is a behavior that is endemic in the academic domain…” Procrastination is a huge issue when it has to do with academics. However, procrastination is not only caused by laziness and low motivation; many different factors can lead up to procrastination.

202 Students who procrastinate are in danger of many things, like failing classes and anxiety from their parents.

For students, procrastination leads to the tendency to not work at all. (Lee). Failure to complete work in school can lead to failing a class and not getting the proper education needed for adulthood. A student must be determined to work if they want to succeed. “The more important a person’s goals, the more ambitious are her plans.”

(O’Donoghue and Rabin). However, if they are too determined, they undermine themselves by stressing themselves too much. Students need to learn that when they decide to follow through with a task, they must be determined to finish it (O’Donoghue and Rabin). Some students who procrastinate feel that if they do not they will not have any fun. However, a consequence of procrastination is that students will end up “Sacrificing freedom and creativity” (Boice 13). They will not only lose out on many freedoms but, also they will experience many problems when they become an adult. Students must, while they are still young and in school, be determined to break the habit of procrastination in order to solve this problem (Thomson). If students become adults and still have not stopped procrastinating, life can become difficult and almost unbearable, because it could prevent adults from enjoying the privilege of living a functional life (O’Donogue and Rabin).

There are several factors that lead up to procrastination, but the most serious cases of procrastination, according to Charles Roth, a psychologist, are the result of learning differences like dyslexia and ADHD. Dr. Roth is in charge of helping those with learning differences succeed in class. These learning differences can cause a student to be distracted, which can also be a result of the student not understanding the lesson (Roth). The impact of learning differences vary from person to person depending on how severe the problem is. However, with the proper guidance, students with learning differences can be helped which will allow them to understand the material more clearly.

There are still many other factors that can lead up to students procrastinating on assignments given out at school. Researchers have been able to come up with a list of factors that result in procrastination (Procrastination).

One factor that leads up to procrastination is perfectionism. Perfectionism is when “A student's standard of performance may be so high for a task that it does not seem possible to meet that standard.” (Procrastination).

Unlike trying to complete an assignment perfectly, the student sets the standard for perfection to an extreme level which is impossible to reach. Perfectionism can also result in anxiety problems which will also lead to procrastination. Fear of failure is another factor that leads to a student procrastinating. Fear of failure is when a student is worried that he or she will fail an assignment, so they put it off for as long as they can (Procrastination).

Fear of failure is usually caused by the lack of understanding an assignment. Other factors that have been noted for causing procrastination are poor motivation, lack of priorities, difficulty concentrating, and task unpleasantness.

Procrastination can be caused by students’ reluctance to work, or many other reasons which all make procrastination a very serious phenomenon (Procrastination). Also, delayed gratification is one of the main reasons why students procrastinate. Delayed gratification is being able to put off something you want to do, in order to finish your work.

Researchers who have observed those who procrastinate have said: “…that each period a person tends to pursue immediate gratification more” (O’Donogue and Rabin). Students want to have immediate gratification other then doing their work and this leads to procrastination.

Procrastination is a huge issue involving both students and adults, many of whom need help in order to get rid of their bad habits; help is especially necessary for those with learning differences. Researchers are the main group of people who can help Pbers. Researchers could come up with ways and methods for those who procrastinate and have learning differences to still do well in school. Methods that have already been created have shown some great results. However, even with these results, when it comes to procrastination, the road is full of obstacles (Boice 1).

Only a few researchers have actually studied procrastination (Lee). However, it is seen that further study is clearly needed to study procrastination in order to get a better understanding on how procrastination habits actually develop in the first place (Ferrari and Olivette). This lack of information is partially the researchers fault, but can also be seen as the fault of those who procrastinate; this is because those who procrastinate do not tell the entire truth to researchers. A stubborn procrastinator responds with “Oh dear. Well! Don't even ask about that. I don't like to be reminded of that! Besides, I'm too busy already to be able to deal with everything right now” (Boice 5). This is an example of a Pber reluctant to give information to a researcher. Some procrastinators completely deny that they procrastinate at all: "Yeah. I thought I would only have one beer and play one game and get back to work. I didn't.

Now, I guess, I have to pull an all-nighter. I hate that. Or maybe I'll just take the test cold. Maybe law school isn't right for me anyway." (Boice 7). These small but important bits of information are essential for researchers, but they are always stopped short, because of the stubbornness and denial of those who procrastinate. Also, researchers fear that they might run into dead ends along the way, or that the work will be too hard for them. A researcher explains that his study on procrastination: “…may occasion unusual amounts of discomfort and defensiveness and it may be unusually difficult to depict constructively and tolerably.”(Boice 13).

203 So far, researchers have come up with four very important methods for those who procrastinate. These four methods show signs of improvement for most of the procrastinators out there, as long as the procrastinator tries to enforce these methods on themselves first (Thomson). These four methods are Automaticity as well as Analytic, Humanistic, and Objectivist Approaches. These approaches show a high amount of promise (Boice 18). The analytic approach is when teachers make “the capacity to learn adaptive delays in affective discharge and action…not only meant conquering procrastination” (Boice 22). Teachers will try to adapt their ways of teaching to help procrastinators, but still this can be very hard to do, because it forces the teacher to change their ways of teaching.

The humanistic method is when researchers “prescribe behavioral sorts of planning and goal defining as a solution.”

(Boice 23). The objective approach is when procrastinators are given the chance “each day to gain access to rewards (for example, reading the newspaper) or to avoid punishments” (Boice 26). This method fell short, however, because many procrastinators still refused to stop procrastinating. The Automaticity approach is the best one that the researchers have tested so far; it has made severe procrastinators into very successful people. Automaticity involves splitting large projects into smaller pieces and tackling each one step at a time (Boice 18). This can also include making a schedule to decide when each piece of the project should be done. Results from this method are excellent and if researchers continue to keep on studying procrastination, they may be able to invent even better ways to help procrastinators.

What researchers know so far is mainly that the brain and learning differences play a large role in procrastinating Learning Differences are a huge contributor because they make learning hard for people. ADHD and dyslexia are seen as two of the largest differences that lead to procrastination (Roth). The brain is the main place where procrastination takes place because it is in the brain where all of the information is processed. However, researchers have a long way to go before they can fully understand those who procrastinate.

For researchers to clarify their understanding of procrastination, they must continue to study it and gather information to create new methods. The methods the researchers have created so far have shown hope, but more research could lead to even better methods which would provide even better results. Procrastination is a huge problem that affects so many people; researchers know very little about it and are reluctant to study procrastination.

Procrastination has many horrible consequences like failing at school, losing jobs, getting in trouble with the law, and in a worst case scenario, causing death. Researchers must continue to research procrastination in order to prevent these consequences.

Work Cited Boice, Robert. Procrastination and Blocking: A Novel, Practical Approach. Westport: Praeger, 1996. Questia School. Web. 23 Mar. 2009.

Ferrari, Joseph R., and Michael J. Olivette. "Perceptions of parental control and the development of indecision among late adolescent females." Adolescence 29.112 (1993): 963-71. Gale General Onenote. Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

Lee, Eunju. "The relationship of motivation and flow experience to academic procrastination in university students."

Journal of Genetic Psychology 166.1 (2005): 5-15. Gale General Onefile. Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

Milgram, Norman A., Weizman Dangour, and Amiram Raviv. "Situational and personal determinants of academic procrastination." The Journal of General Psychology 119.2 (1992): 123-34. Gale General Onefile. Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

Pringle, Heather. "The thief of time: resisting the temptation to procrastinate is easier when we understand what makes us prone to postpone.” New Scientist 196.2634 (2007): 34-38. Gale General Reference Center Gold.

Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

“Procrastination.” Study Skills. Mangrum-Strichart Learning Resources, 1 March 2009. 15 April, 2009.

O’Donoghue, Ted, and Matthew Rabin. “Choice and Procrastination.”Quarterly Journal of Economics 116.1 (2001): 121. Gale General Onefile. Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

Roth, Charles. Personal Interview. 15 April 2009.

Thomson, Willeta. “Tomorrow and tomorrow; procrastination interferes with recovery today.” Alcoholism and Addiction Magazine. 9.5 (1989): 22-26. Gale General Onefile. Web, 25 Mar. 2009.

204 Will Topham Craig Butz Research in the Community April 28, 2009 Fixed Gears and the Bike Industry The bike industry is an interesting economical situation, as a second “bike boom” is currently happening.

There is currently a high demand for road and fixed gear bikes, thus making the bike industry soar. Companies are making these bikes more than ever before as they have taken charge of the Urban Culture, and a large portion of the general public. To clarify, a Fixed Gear Bike, also known as a “Fixie,” is a single gear bike that is meant for paved roads such as city streets. On a Fixie, the pedals are always moving as the chain attached to the gear is never able to be switched to a lower or higher gear to help adapt to the terrain (Art of Cycling). If one’s feet are pedaling, the gear is moving, so there is no such thing as coasting in the world Fixie riding. Also, Fixie bikes are typically lightweight and durable, but also expensive (Art of Cycling). A Fixie typically weighs about 15-30 pounds, and costs anywhere from 200-4200 dollars (Kahney). The Fixie Culture is intriguing in many ways, but people should really investigate it before they start to experiment with the culture itself.

The Urban culture is not looked upon as a subculture of daily life, but more its own culture than anything else. The urbanite way of living is modernistic while it strives to stay alive through multiple fads in many of its own subcultures. It has been said that the urban culture has many subcultures such as Fixie culture or hipster culture.

Some of these people are said to be called “hipsters” themselves. A hipster is commonly recognized as a person who is constantly up to date with the latest fads (Karp). People say that hipsters are always fashionable and extremely trendy, and that these people make the Urban culture what it is today. The hipsters have changed the urban culture into a way of life that constantly relies on being trendy and cool while remaining different from the “norm”.

This fixed gear craze started because people wanted to get back into the old school, retro, and vintage look.

As time went on, people started saying, “Yeah, I like Fixies because they’re lightweight, durable, and low maintenance,” instead of, “I like Fixies because they’re cool.” People originally liked Fixies because of their looks, and how “cool” they were. Now, people have changed their opinion on the matter, and in the end, everything works out for them because the bikes are indeed low maintenance, durable, and lightweight.

There are multiple people who ride Fixies, such as hipsters, and the people who just want to be cool, also known as novices. Usually the people who just don’t ride bikes are called novices. It’s extremely hard for a novice to start riding a Fixie, because of how different they are from regular “all terrain bikes” (ATB) that novices would usually ride. A troubled beginner on a Fixie could possibly go flying over the handlebars while braking, as that has a high accident rate for novices (Karp). A different group of people who would ride Fixies are doing it for the health and fitness part. Because the pedals never stop moving, one must constantly pedal because there’s no such thing as coasting on a fixed gear. Once the riders start riding for exercise, it becomes a great source for working out because it even takes a lot of energy to stop, by resisting the continuum of the wheels on Fixies. Another great thing about riding Fixies is all the tricks. A classic trick on a fixed gear is the skip stop. A rider must lean forward, lock his or her legs to make the wheels stop spinning, and cause the bike to skid to a stop. This is a classic move used by riders all the time (Karp).

A true hipster is Tarek Latouf, who works at Ocean Cyclery on Ocean Avenue in San Francisco. Tarek had explained during an interview that the highest sale times during the year are right before the summer and right before college starts. People start purchasing and spending money on bikes year round, however, there are times of the year that have the higher sales than others. People usually get their old bicycles out of their garage, and bring them into the shop for a tune up or two before they start riding during the summer. For college, people will come in and buy a bike or get it in top condition before lugging it off to school as a source of transportation. The high sales during these times have helped the industry because a lot of high school graduates end up going to college, and even if they don’t, many people bring their bikes in for a tune up before they think they will get hardcore about riding in the summer. Tarek doesn’t believe in the second “bike boom,” right now, as the first one was in the 1970’s, when bikes made their first major breakthrough with the highest production of sales than ever before (National Bike Dealers Association). Because of the high demand with Fixies, people say that we are currently in the second “bike boom.” Unfortunately, not all bike stores are soaring with sales, but it doesn’t change the fact that people want bikes today more than ever before. The feeling of being cool, trendy, and in style definitely helps customers recruit others to join them in the bike world, which will just make the biking population grow and the industry climb.

Tarek has been working in Ocean Cyclery for about 4 or 5 years, and unfortunately, he has not seen too much variety in customers, so most customers are called “repeat customers.” The main source for the stores income is Tune Ups, so Tarek is very knowledgeable about how to construct a bike, and how to fix one. Tarek knows so much

205 about bikes, he can look at one and say, “Oh that’s, (X) amount of dollars.” What makes Tarek a hipster isn’t the fact that he works in a bike store, but the fact that he knows all about major and minor trends going on right now, and the fact that he embraces the culture to such an extent he’s crazy about the lifestyle.

The culture of Fixie bikes is a true trend right now, but that could potentially change in the future. A trend is typically defined as a popular style that will eventually become un-popular. If the current trend of Fixie Bikes continues at such a string rate, the Fixie culture will become a modern way of living; for good. People will continue to buy these bikes and continue to be economically and environmentally friendly, while staying hip and in style.

The mass production of Fixie bikes has caused the bike industry to constantly increase (Kahney). The bikes consist of many expensive parts; this depends on brand, but in the end, they sell for more than they are actually worth. When these sales occur, the bike industry makes more money than spent, so with all the bikes being produced and purchased the bike industry is doing great. Unfortunately, bike retailers usually just slap together the final touches of the bike after they are constructed in basic form. Due to the lack of care and attention, the bike industry makes bonus money when they sell the bikes, and the consumers bring the bike right back into the shop for a tune up after the purchase (Art of Cycling). If the retailers put the time and effort into putting together the bikes, then the consumers wouldn’t have to spend their extra dough on getting an unnecessary tune up. The stores who usually sell bikes don’t mind the lack of variation in sales unless of course they run out of the products before they receive a shipment. For example, if Ocean Cyclery sold 100 Fixies in 25 days, and they got a new shipment of 100 bikes on the 30th day, then, they would be frustrated because they would be in the hole for 5 days, waiting for the popular product to arrive in their store.

For the retailers themselves, they always have a target for whom to sell their products to. Retailers must always to enthusiastic about his or her job because if they overwhelm the customer with knowledge, then they will be more apt to buy a bike, however, there is a catch for retailers. This trick of overwhelming the customer will only work on non enthusiastic bikers. It is common sense to retailers that they must be enthusiastic about their job if they intend on making sales and making money. If they are not, then it is likely that the customer will lose interest in the subject matter, and leave without spending any money. Also, when making sales, retailers can also benefit from offering expert coaching on athletic performance and nutrition, offering spinning classes, and supporting group rides, particularly those raise money for medical research (Bikes Belong).

The biking industry has become phenomenal over the past years because the gas prices have gone up, and people are riding their bikes more instead of using their cars for transportation. Many companies are still hoping the gas prices rise even more because then a lot more people will start riding their bikes instead of using their cars.

Obviously, the more people who ride their bikes, the more the bike industry will soar because of all the money they will put into biking and not their motorized vehicle. Recently, the gas prices have become extremely high, so some companies have seen more than a 50% increase in sales from last quarter (Kahney). If gas prices continue to go up even more, and this is what happens to bike companies, one can only imagine what it will be like in a year.

The Fixie Culture has caused a large impact on the biking industry because of how everyone is buying into the Fixie Culture. Even for the people who don’t ride Fixies, they are intrigued to check out other biking things seeing that riding is one of the most popular things right now. People have adapted new lifestyles because of this fad and changed as people. Businessmen to hipsters, and school kids to novices, it doesn’t really matter who is affected by these fads, but why it’s affecting these people, and for how long this new way of living will stay in fashion.

206 Noah Tuchow Craig Butz Research in the Community 5/15/09 Bay School Laptops: Helpful Learning Tools or Devious Distractions?

We use them in school everyday, yet nobody ever seems to think twice about why we use them. Providing every student with a laptop computer has been utilized by secondary schools as a means to gain an advantage over other schools, but have they actually been found to strengthen students’ education? Do they positively affect the students? These questions hover in the minds of people wanting to start a new school, but they are strangely absent from the minds of many Bay School students. We take it for granted that we use laptops, and we have become so accustomed to using them that we have forgotten what its like to learn without them. Many people however, have begun to question whether these one-to-one laptop programs actually help students learn. In the case of the Bay School however, the answer is fairly clear: although one-to-one laptop computer programs have several disadvantages and, in many cases, do not work for other schools, they are a fundamental component of the curriculum at the Bay School, and should not be removed.

Laptop programs started off with a bang in the late 1990s and early 2000s. People heard success stories from the earliest schools to use laptops, yet they didn’t have any confirmation for these claims (Greaves). As a matter of fact, the results of all the schools that used laptops were so mixed that it was hard for educators to make any clear conclusions about them. Some schools found significant increases in student’s grades and participation, while other schools found the exact opposite. To this day, the supposed ‘achievements’ of laptop programs are still heavily disputed because of the wide range of results.

One of the few advantages of laptops which can not be disputed is the issue of portability.

This portability allows laptops to be moved much more easily than traditional computers. William Beasley, former coordinator of the Educational Technology Program at Cleveland State University, and other researchers explain that one of the main reasons schools have a laptop program was to enable students to use their computers anywhere they wanted (Beasley). This seemed much more convenient for educational institutions than moving all the students into a computer lab in order for them to type assignments during class. Another aspect which Beasley and his colleagues liked about laptop labs were the increased options which they offered by being portable. He explains that “the flexibility a mobile lab offers is invaluable” (Beasley). As a result of the laptop lab system, the students at a school Beasley and his fellow researchers observed could take their laptops anywhere they wanted and submit an assignment online without having to meet with a teacher or print out a hard copy. In the Bay School of San Francisco, the portability of laptops allows them to actually have personal ownership over their laptops, which they are allowed to take home. By giving students possession over their laptops, they become responsible if anything happens to them (‘Laptop Standards for Proper Care’). If students take responsibility for the damages that happen to their computer, the school is no longer forced to pay for the costs of repairs.

Obviously portability is not the only advantage of laptop programs in numerous schools. Apart from portability, laptops also have advantages in organization. Many programs for computers such as Microsoft Word© help students keep their documents organized. For example, in a survey sent out to the Bay School student body (see attached), many students explained that computers helped keep their notes organized and provided increased neatness. The computers did this in a way unparalleled by non-electronic methods. Because the students at the Bay School make different folders named after each of their classes, students who would normally have problems with organization can now find it easier to find files in their folders, rather than searching through a messy binder.

Organization has also been known to increase efficiency. Pamela Livingston, author of 1-to-1 Learning: Laptop Programs That Work, explains that computers allow students to perform many tasks faster (Livingston). Because students don’t need to spend time completely rewriting their essays in various drafts, the school is saved a great deal of precious time. By speeding up student work, having a laptop program seems much more practical for schools such as Bay, which need to be able to fit large amounts of work into small amounts of time.

Laptop computers can also make schools more practical by increasing student interest. If one observes the students at the Bay School, they can clearly see that interested students retain much more information than students who are bored. One factor which sparks interest in students is the increased amount of visuals on computers.

William Penuel, an author for the Journal of Research on Technology in Education, describes how computers use graphics to make a much more effective learning environment (332). It is evident that students learn much better when using an interactive website than when looking at an old textbook. This allows students to learn advanced concepts much easier. One surveyed Bay School student explains that they are able to learn more easily “because sometimes it provides a more visual way of learning the subject.” That student could understand the ideas better because they were laid out in a more accessible format. Students are also interested in computers because it is

207 natural for their generation to use technology. According to Pamela Livingston, children these days are “innately multitaskers” (Livingston). Because of their ability to concentrate on multiple tasks at once, students are drawn to computers, which allow them to utilize those skills. Although many people debate whether or not multitasking is actually a good skill to have, it can be very useful for certain jobs nowadays.

Because of the widespread use of technology, inside and outside of the workplace, another aspect which computers succeed in is their practicality in the 21st century. Today, there are many more careers in technological industries and the knowledge of using computers effectively can be an invaluable skill in most professions. Alison Armstrong, author of The Child and the Machine: How Computers Put Our Children’s Education at Risk, explains that a common belief is that using technology is an important skill for students to learn because it keeps on becoming a bigger influence in peoples’ lives (2). Although she goes on to debate whether we actually need to educate our children in programming and other computer-related subjects, this can sometimes be a major deciding factor for schools that wish to incorporate laptops in their curriculum. Many schools have begun to have laptops, because it is impractical to teach programming without universal computer use at a school. Besides the uses in programming, many people think that using a laptop for education is important because our children are surrounded by technology. It is important for today’s children to be able to get by in such an environment. One school in Orange County, California, claimed that their goal “was to prepare these students for a technology-driven world in which innovation, creativity, autonomy, and individual and group research was prized along with the traditional accumulation of knowledge” (O’Donovan). In order to succeed in life, the children needed to be adept at using technology for productive means.

As computers became popular in schools many people began to question whether they actually helped in the education of students. People no longer heard much about the positive aspects of computer use, and instead heard about the schools with supposed ‘successful’ laptop programs, who decided to cancel them due to a lack of visible progress. Like before, researchers conducted experiments on the effects of computers, but this time many cases showed similar negative aspects of computer use. Although it was clear that these were negative effects of one-to-one laptop programs, it wasn’t clear whether these caused computer use in schools to actually impede the students’ education.

One of the main arguments against computers in schools is the fact that they have not been proven to raise students’ grades and standard test scores. The recent failure of a state funded laptop program in Maine, due to the fact that it did not show much improvement in test scores, received a lot of coverage on the internet. One website reports that the failure in Maine was a result of “technology not adding anything to education” (‘A Review of Oneto-One Laptop Programs in America’). Perhaps this website is being too harsh on Maine’s program; simply not raising test scores is not enough to render the entire one-to-one laptop program a failure. There is, after all, much more to a school than just test scores. However, an example of a failure would be a school in Liverpool, New York, which tried to improve grades by incorporating laptops in the school, but instead lowered grades. An article in the New York Times quotes the school board president in Liverpool saying “‘after seven years there was literally no evidence it had any impact on student achievement – none’” (Hu). However this program’s failure can not be blamed solely on the computers; much of it was as a result of foolish technology guidelines which caused students not to use the laptops productively.

As a result of ineffective technology guidelines, many schools also have the problem of students misusing technology on the school issued computers. One of the more common cases of misuse is when students play video games during class. O’Donovan, an assistant superintendent of special education in one district in California, explains that because this is such a serious problem, schools have resorted to changing their laptop policies in order to handle it (O’Donovan). It seems that many schools, such as the Bay School, have realized the importance of changing such policies. In addition to having precepts against the misuse of technology, the Bay School requires students to sign a Laptop Acknowledgement form and agree with the laptop policy (‘The Bay School of San Francisco: Student Laptop Acknowledgement Form,’ ‘Laptop Standards for Proper Care’). However, this still does not end the problem of misuse of technology at the Bay School. In the survey to Bay School students, one student explains that computers generally improve students’ grades, but if students play games or are distracted in other ways, they can significantly lower that student’s grades. This remains a large problem for schools with one-to-one laptop programs.

One of the main reasons why students misuse technology is because it is too distracting and entertaining for them. Although many students have access to the internet and some of the most advanced databases in the world, they still have trouble working productively. Alison Armstrong explains that this is because on all of the databases there is an overwhelming amount of information which students have to search through (115). They often get lost and end up surfing the web on websites which had nothing to do with the topic they were researching. In Liverpool New York and other school districts, the students were reported to have visited pornography websites and hacked in

208 to the websites of local businesses simply because they were bored (Hu). Many students have proved that they are not responsible enough to use computers productively.

Because of the frequent misuse of technology, schools are skeptical about paying the enormous costs associated with laptop computers. One of the main factors of the cost is the price of purchasing the computers and all their components. Although the cost of computers is constantly decreasing, they must be replaced frequently. If a school sticks with using the same computers for a long period of time, they will very soon become obsolete (Armstrong 28). In order to prevent this from happening, a school should buy low cost computers which can be easily replaced. This is the case in The Bay School where computers cost only $800, a relatively small amount of money compared to many other computers. Keith Kuwatani, the monitor of the technology office at Bay, explains that even though the cost for laptops is relatively cheap at Bay, the school still needs to pay for software and internet coverage which adds up to a large amount of money (Kuwatani). Although the computers themselves may seem cheap, the other expenses make each computer cost vast amounts of money. Everyday, Keith is required to fix many students’ broken laptops which would generally be time-consuming, but not very expensive. For the cases he isn’t able to fix, he sends the computer to Dell for repairs. The cost for many of these repairs can be gigantic, yet the school is required to pay for them. The expenses attributed to such repairs have made numerous schools wary about whether or not they wish to invest in the large maintenance fees.

Although all these factors have been proven not to help students learn, in certain cases they can be avoided.

In certain schools, such as the Bay School, teachers have created a unique learning environment in which these negative effects are minimized. This makes it so that in these unique situations, computers can be more beneficial to students than they previously would be. Although the Bay School certainly has these problems, they can be ignored in the place of bigger advantages. It is important not to neglect these special qualities because they can be the deciding factor about whether a laptop program is successful.

Laptop programs at schools such as Bay are successful in numerous ways, one being that laptops have become part of the normal culture for students. At Bay School, many of the students have become used to checking their homework on the community website, contacting their teacher via email, and using programs such as OneNote© to improve their skills at note taking. The Bay School community also discourages the misuse of technology and other themes represented in its precepts. Older schools would have a difficulty adapting to these changes, but newer schools, such as the Bay School, seem not to have these problems because they are still in the act of being formed. This allows for many changes in school culture which would not be possible in older schools.

Keith Kuwatani explains that the Bay School’s community is much more “tight knit” than communities in other schools (Kuwatani). Because of their ability to constantly keep in contact with each other nobody is ever out of the loop. Teachers are able to send emails to students in order to explain a possible change in assignments, as well as using the community site to post class materials. Clubs and social events are also managed through the computer, allowing the students to always know what’s going on. Students, such as the ones who took the survey, voiced criticism for the somewhat less than desirable laptops which we currently have, but we are still very lucky to have them at all. For many schools, laptops are a luxury which they simply can’t afford. However, the Bay School has the funding to afford these educational advantages, and indeed it seems to help in our everyday lives.

As a result of its unique culture, the Bay should be commended on is integration of technology into the curriculum of various subjects. This is an area which many schools have problems with. Although students may be supplied with laptops in those schools, the laptops’ unique advantages toward education go unchecked. This may be a result of the lack of training teachers have towards using technology. In order for technology, such as laptops, to work, teachers must be able to adjust their teaching styles (Greaves). This seems to be the case here at the Bay School; many of the teachers are knowledgeable in using technology, and they work to enrich their classes with it.

Students at Bay are required to use their laptops to complete many assignments without wasting paper printing them out. Numerous programs on Bay School laptops are designed to help students create presentations, write essays, and make graphs, and teachers work to include those into their curricula. In addition to classes incorporating technology, Bay also offers classes, such as Digital Imaging and Computer Science, which are focused almost entirely on using computers. Because of this unique integration of technology, The Bay School has surpassed many of its fellow schools in using their laptop programs productively.

So are laptops actually beneficial to the Bay School? Do the benefits outweigh the costs? The most logical answer in this context would be a ‘Yes.’ Although laptops have proven to sometimes get in the way of students education by their distractive nature, as well as their ability to occasionally lower students’ grades, this is surely not enough to condemn them. One must look past the obvious flaws with one-to-one laptop programs and see the long term advantages they have towards students’ education. Admittedly, laptop programs cost a fortune, but do we really want to stop these amazing educational advances just so we can stuff a little extra cash in our pockets? If people walk down the halls of the Bay School they won’t only see the good type of student, but also the irresponsible

209 students. This is an inevitable characteristic of all high schools which is next to unsolvable, but it doesn’t reflect badly on the school’s laptop program. There is a certain level of personal responsibility involved when using the laptop program; students have the ability to do both good and evil on the computer. In the survey, one student explains they thought the affects of laptops on their grades were that “using it improves it. Misusing it lowers it.

[Finding] the [balance] is the key.” Indeed the success of the Bay School one-to-one Laptop Program is in the hands of the user.

Appendix 1: Survey Results 1. Which grade are you in?

Freshman: 22.0% 22 people Sophomore: 35.0% 35 people Junior: 22.0% 22 people Senior: 21.0% 21 people 2. How many hours do use your Bay School laptop daily?

Less than 1: 1% 1-2: 8% 2-3: 14% 3-4: 19% 4-5: 19% 5-6: 20% 6-7: 6% 7-8: 10% More than 8: 3% 3. How many hours a day do you actually use your computer productively? (Be honest!)

Less than 1:6% 1-2: 27% 2-3: 27% 3-4: 19% 4-5: 12% 5-6: 5% 6-7: 4% 7-8: 0% More than 8: 0% 4. How many times this year have you had to bring you computer to the tech office?

None: 3% 1: 19% 2: 26% 3: 15% 4: 10% 5: 5% 6: 2% More than 6: 10% I lost track...: 10% 5. Do you like using your computer?

100 narrative responses Yes: 74 No: 17 Unsure: 9

210 6. Do you feel that you are able to learn concepts better when you use your laptops? Why or why not?

100 narrative responses Helps: 59 Doesn’t hep: 14 Unsure: 27 7. Do you think that using a computer improves or lowers your grades?

100 narrative responses Raise: 59 Lower: 10 Unsure: 31 8. Do you think the Laptop program has a positive impact on the students at Bay? Why? 100 narrative responses Yes: 71 No: 5 Unsure: 24 9. How would you feel if Bay stopped its laptop program?

100 narrative responses Happy: 4 Sad: 83 Ambivalent: 13 Works Cited “A Review of One-to-One Laptop Programs in America.” One Laptop Per Child News. One Laptop per Child News.

16 Jan. 2008. Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://www.olpcnews.com/commentary/academia/laptop_programs_in_america.html>.

Armstrong, Alison, and Charles Casement. The Child and the Machine: How Computers Put Our Children’s Education at Risk. Beltsville: Robins Lane Press, 2000. Print.

“The Bay School of San Francisco: Student Laptop Acknowledgement Form.” The Bay School. The Bay School Community Site, 29 April, 2009. Web. 29 April, 2009. <https://home.bayschoolsf.org/ftpimages/374/download/download_group10069_id314768.pdf>.

Beasley, William, Kathyanne W. Dobda, Lih-Ching Chen Wang. “Reflections on Teaching in a Wireless Laptop Lab.” International Journal of Instructional Media 34.2 (2005): 343+. Questia School. Web. 22 Mar. 2009. <http://www.questiaschool.com/read/5014474263?title=Reflections%20on%20Teaching%20in%20a%20 Wireless%20Laptop%20Lab>.

Greaves, Tom. “One-to-One Computing Tools for Life.” T H E Journal (Technological Horizons in Education).

27.10 (May 2000): 54. Gale Expanded Academic ASAP. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Hu, Winnie. “Seeing No Progress, Some Schools Drop Laptops.” New York Times. New York Times, 4 May 2007.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://www.nytimes.com/2007/05/04/education/04laptop.html?_r=1&scp=1&sq=Seeing%20No%20Progr ess,%20Some%20Schools%20Drop%20Laptops&st=cse>.

Kuwatani, Keith. Personal interview. 16 Apr. 2009.

“Laptop Standards for Proper Care.” The Bay School. The Bay School Community Site, 29 April, 2009. Web. 29 April, 2009. <https://home.bayschoolsf.org/ftpimages/374/download/download_group10069_id314766.pdf>.

Livingston, Pamela. 1-to-1 Learning: Laptop Programs that Work. International Society for Technology in Education, 2006. iv-xiii. Gale General Onefile. Web. 17 Mar. 2009.

O'Donovan, Eamonn. “Are one-to-one laptop programs worth the investment? Administrators are learning that a successful program requires more financing.” District Administration 45.2 (2009): 18-23. Gale General OneFile. Web. 17 Mar. 2009.

Penuel, William R. “Implementation and Effect of One-to-One Computing Initiatives: A Research Synthesis.”

Journal of Research on Technology in Education 38.3 (2006): 329-348. Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://eric.ed.gov/ERICDocs/data/ericdocs2sql/content_storage_01/0000019b/80/2a/5b/5b.pdf>.

211 Benjy Wachter Craig Butz Research in the Community 4/14/09 Making a Difference For Kids With Learning Differences Starting in elementary school, students are divided into separate groups based on what is deemed to be their intelligence level. To be in a “smart group” means a student is able to perform what the teacher requests in the way he or she requests it. Reading groups, math levels and oral spelling tests are examples of activities that showcase a student’s presumed academic competence. But what about the students making up the “dumb groups?” Often, these students are thought of as the “bad kids” in school and are told that they are failures. This sets these children up to experience low academic self esteem throughout their lives. As one such student lamented, I felt dumb, weak, and completely inferior. I had a vision in my head of my classmates and I in a race. I always finished last. In the vision, I had a rock tied to my leg. It made me slower and it made me sad (Coby Moss, Read This When You Can, 18).

Though some students in these “dumb groups” truly do not make an inadequate effort in school or have behavioral problems, many others are misidentified as unintelligent due to natural cognitive weaknesses known as Learning Differences (LDs). Some common examples of LDs relate to problems with processing specific types of information (i.e. Dyslexia, Dysgraphia), with cognition and focus (ADD, ADHD), or with socialization (Asperser’s, Autism). People with these learning differences will have trouble accomplishing tasks that the school system believes to be basic and crucial to life, such as spelling, reading and handwriting. Because of this, they are set apart from the “smart kids.” People with LDs often suffer from poor support and understanding of their disabilities throughout their educational years, which can have a debilitating effect on their adult lives. When schools increase the aid they give to their LD students and approach teaching them with an open mind, those students are more successful in their lives.

Although some elementary, middle, and high schools are able to identify children with LDs and provide them with crucial support, many schools do not. College often provides a unique opportunity for students with LDs to pursue their strengths and direct the course of their learning, however many LD students do not make it to college. Unlike at other times in a student’s academic career, in college students can choose which subject areas to focus on and which to deemphasize. Therefore LD students, many of whom have great strengths in some academic areas while suffering from major weaknesses in others, can truly thrive. The potential for independent academic pursuits and personal empowerment are what can make college so special. Unfortunately, not all colleges provide support and flexibility for their students. The schools that do not will become yet another “toxic” environment for LD students.

The Problem: Facing the ‘Gold Star Complex’ Why do LD students so often fall behind? Intellectually, the difference between the LDs and non-LDs is frequently not very large. In fact, many LDs have very high IQs and are capable of extraordinary performance in specific fields (such as Albert Einstein.) However, when it comes to experience and performance in the relatively regimented curriculum of an elementary or middle school, LD students often encounter serious problems. Think back to the “smart group” versus “dumb group” dichotomy of elementary school. The “smart” students are recognized and praised for their ability to perform tasks such as memorizing, spelling by recognition and staying completely focused. For many LD students, mastering these specific “basic” skills represents a terrible struggle.

Those who are unable to demonstrate these skills will usually be placed in the “dumb group,” separated from the rest of the class, regardless of their actual academic abilities. Although placing students in different tiers may not always be a mistake (since students are, in fact, on different academic levels), the system is too quick to judge LDs. LD students who try to operate in this system often feel like failures because they are never rewarded with elementary school’s symbols of excellence such as medals or gold stars. I have named the feelings that LDs have as a result of this experience the “Gold Star Complex.”

The Gold Star Complex can be overcome, however. There are hundreds of famous and highly renowned people who have LDs, but have achieved amazing feats by focusing on what they do best. For instance, Charles Schwab, the founder, chairperson, and CEO of the largest brokerage firm in America, is a man comfortable with making tough business decisions and handling big numbers. If you sat him down in front of a written manuscript, however, he might be flummoxed, since he is dyslexic. Another important LD person in the San Francisco community is the mayor himself, Gavin Newsom, who says he “understands the struggles of students who work twice as long.”

Examples like Schwab and Newsom (both of whom have provided a lot of time and support to helping the

212 young LD population) are critical, because they demonstrate what LDs are capable of accomplishing. Finding individuals who can advocate for LD students is essential, because these students are currently disenfranchised in schools. One key LD crusader on behalf of LD people is Jonathan Mooney. Mooney claims to have “beaten the system” and to have found his own way in the scholastic world. He has dedicated his life to teaching LD students to do the same. He has accomplished several important goals in his “LD Revolution.” First, he has written multiple books that use his own experiences to help other LD students to succeed. Second, he has founded and has continued to support a number of public LD programs that have made their way into thousands of schools across the country.

Finally, he has been working to bring LD people of all ages together. He believes that their “time has come” to show the school system that they deserve an equal chance for success.

My extensive review of literature about LD students’ experiences in school, and my interviews with students with LD and with leaders in the LD field have convinced me that the responsibility for LD students’ poor performance in school does not lie with the LD students themselves. Rather, it lies with the current school system’s inability to accommodate and acknowledge these students’ natural shortcomings. More often than not, it is the fact that the school is unable to identify and support the LD student which convinces the student that he cannot achieve, which begins a downward spiral in his academic career.

Parents and teachers also play a critical role in a student’s educational development. The learning specialist of the Bay School, Dr. Charles Roth, states that a lot of the demoralization of students comes from “a combination of parents and teachers giving them a lot of criticism.” An LD student in elementary school cannot possibly know how to advocate for herself. If the parents are unwilling to speak up for their child, the student is unlikely to get direct help from the school or anywhere else. Even when parents do advocate for their children, they sometimes confront obstinate or ignorant teachers, who can be a major obstacle for LD students.

Consider the example of Frank Driscoll, Bay School Class of ’11, who is dyslexic. He spent the first few years of his elementary education at the Waldorf School. He always knew he was a slow reader and was diagnosed with dyslexia early in life. “I need to clarify things a lot,” he says, “and I ask a lot of questions.” At an early age, Frank had already made the first step in an LD person’s path to being a successful learner: identifying the ways he learns best. However, “my teacher hated questions,” said Frank with remorse. “She always said I was being disruptive and she didn’t help me.” Frank said that trying to learn the way he knew best was not accepted by the teacher, and being in school made him feel “uncomfortable” and “weird.”

Luckily, he and his family were able to identify this mismatch early, and he transferred to the Presidio Hill School in middle school. There, “things were much more liberal and the teachers were open-minded… and I felt I could really be me.” Frank’s grades and view of himself as a student improved as he “came to terms with [his] LD.” Frank said that by the time he came to the Bay School, he “was all set.”

Bearing the Scars: The Effects of Inadequate Responses to LD on Later Life Although Frank’s story ended well due to the positive environment he found in Presidio Hill, many students never find a healthy school experience and constantly think less of themselves. This problem has ruined the lives of millions of otherwise hardworking and intelligent people.

But it can’t be that bad, you may say. These people may be uncomfortable in school, but surely they are not completely destroyed as adults. How wrong you would be. In Jonathan Mooney’s book, Learning Outside the Lines, the author provides frightening statistics regarding LD teenagers and adults. For example, in a 2004 survey, 8% of students in every school were found to have an LD. 50% of those students (half!) will either drop out of high school, abuse substances, or spend time in juvenile hall. In a different study, it was found that, while 76.4% of all high school graduates go on to college, only 1.8% percent of LD students will go to a four-year university. Also, 42% of LD people who go on to become parents are below or near the federal poverty line, compared with the national average of 16%. Finally, 25-40% of all welfare recipients have LDs. While some of these statistics may not result from inadequate support in school or home, I would argue that most of them are. Too many LD students are, from a young age, led to believe that they are incapable of strong performance in any scholastic subject, even ones in which they have great talent. “For a kid, going to school is his job,” says Dr. Roth, “Think of your dad [a doctor] going to the hospital every day and people telling him that he’s a failure. What do you think that would do to him?” The problem does not only encompass the specific subject area that the student’s LD affects, but lowers his self-confidence in all subject areas.

Can a Better System Be Found?

Failing to educate LD students (along with their parents and teachers) at a young age is one of the greatest flaws in our close-minded school system. However, the damage it causes is not irreversible. Mooney suggests that “for every toxic year of school, one ‘detox’ year will bring them back to neutral.” We can see this in Frank

213 Driscoll’s case, when he changed schools from a toxic learning environment to a healthy one; he soon was on a path to success.

Colleges, as stated earlier, are one good place for LD students to begin their “detox” education. For instance, Mr. Mooney and some of his colleagues in LD research advocacy transferred into Brown University, just as Frank transferred from one school to another as undergraduates. What Mooney claims to have found at Brown was “a place where they said, ‘It’s your education. We’re not gonna tell you what to do and when to do it.’” This was important to him because he could take courses of and even get his major in one of his greatest skills, literature, without being told he would fall short because of his dyslexia. He says it was the first time in his life when he was actually encouraged to follow his dreams and wasn’t judged by a diagnosis.

However, many factors can prevent an LD student from going to college for four years, or from pursuing higher education at all. There are other ways to attain this important self-advocacy, however. Some specialists suggest that LD high-school graduates take a “gap year” before pursuing higher education, or even take more than four years to graduate from high school. Also, transferring from one education program to another, friendlier one seems to be a common theme in many success stories. What’s most important is that LDs get exposed to some environment with flexibility and individual attention in their careers to ensure that they gain (or, ideally, never lose) the feeling that they can actually succeed.

No matter what kind of education an LD student receives or is entitled to, there are some very simple ways to help the LD population and to inspire them to view their own minds positively. “When academics were really changing for me in elementary and middle school, my family, friends and teachers really helped build my confidence by supporting my strengths in the non-academic areas where I was strong, like sports or art” (Cole Benz, Read This When You Can, 24). While certain learning differences create gaps in the skills that are important for “perfect” performance in school, many people with LDs possess unusual creative or alternative thinking skills.

Mooney expresses this sentiment in another of his important catchphrases: LD people finding success “not despite, but because” of their LDs. Many specialists say the best way to keep an LD student on the right track is to help them find their passions as well as their skills. Although LD people may find one scholastic skill or way of thinking impossible, many have other skills that may be superior to non-LD people. When an LD person finds such a skill and receives encouragement from others, she can be empowered and uplifted.

The Gold Star Complex and the trauma that many LD students suffer throughout most of their academic lives are real. Luckily, we are in an era of change, in which there is increased understanding and tolerance for LD students in our nation as well as in our world. Hopefully, in the future the Gold Star Complex will be dissected and erased from early education, and LDs of all ages will get the support and equal chance at the success they deserve.

214 Works Cited A New Understanding of Attention Deficit Disorder. Dr. Thomas E. Brown. N. date. Web. 26 Mar. 2009. <http://www.drthomasebrown.com/> College Planning for Students with Learning Disabilities. Kid Source Online™, 25 Jul. 2000. Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://www.kidsource.com/kidsource/content3/college.planning.LD.html> Driscoll, Frank 20 Apr 2009 Great Schools-Public and Private Schools Ratings, Reviews and Parent Community. Great Schools Inc. © 19982009. Web. 26 Mar, 2009. <http://www.greatschools.net/> Flink, David 25 Apr, 2009 Kinzie, Susan . "Bumps Abound When Students Become Their Own Advocates." The Washington Post. washingtonpost.com, 25 Oct. 2008: A01. Web. 20 Mar. 2009. <http://www.washingtonpost.com/wpdyn/content/article/2008/10/24/AR2008102403825.html?hpid=artslot> Learning Differences and Challenges – LD, ADHD – College Discussion.

Mooney, Jonathan 25 Apr, 2009 Mooney, Jonathan and David Cole. Learning Outside the Lines: Two Ivy League Students with Learning Disabilities and ADHD Give You The Tools for Academic Success and Educational Revolution. New York: Simon & Schuster, 2000. Print.

National Resource Center on AD/HD: A Program of CHADD. Centers for Disease Control and Prevention. © 2009.

Web. 26 Mar, 2009. < http://www.help4adhd.org> Roth, Charles 23 Apr, 2009 S.A.F.E Voices (Student Advisors For Education). Read This When You Can. San Francisco: Parent’s Education Network, 2008. Anthology. Print.

Slovak, Jeff 25 Apr, 2009 "Student Perspective on Special Education." News and Notes. Host Farai Chideya. Natl. Public Radio. NPR.org.

Web. 25 Mar. 2009. <http://www.npr.org/templates/story/story.php?storyId=16879328> Taylor, Blake E. S. ADHD & Me: What I Learned from Lighting Fires and the Dinner Table. Oakland, CA: New Harbinger, 2007. Print.

The International Dyslexia Association Promoting Literacy through Research, Education and Advocacy. The International Dyslexia Association, ©1996-2007. Web. 26 Mar. 2009. < http://www.interdys.org>

215 Thea Walsh Craig Butz Research in the Community April 29, 2009 Whales: Man’s New Best friend?

Whales are the largest animals on the planet and have been around for 60 million years. They are also the first animal to be conserved and have the most protection at the moment. Though these facts are unique and extraordinary, I still wonder what the appeal is to these distant and foreign animals. Through research and interviews I have discovered that the American love of whales is not entirely from facts but from the emotions and sense of humanity we receive from interacting with them. People feel a spiritual and strong connection to whales over other animals; because of their uniqueness, humanity, intelligence, immense size, and symbolism.

The American people are very interested in whales and with their protection. This concept can best be displayed with a few anecdotes. A group of green peace activists from southern California somehow got all the way to Norway, at a great expense, to a small fishing town to sink the one whaling boat of a poor fisherman (Whale Nation). Since this man probably relied on this job as his only source of income this action would completely derail his life. The team of Californians traveled around Norway, sending ten more boats to the bottom of the ocean (Whale Nation). Not only is this attack ineffective, sinking eleven local whaling boats will not solve the issue of whaling, it was also inconsiderate, wasteful, and possibly lethal (Price 1). This story poses a question; do some people care more about whales than fellow humans?

A strong display of our affection towards whales is shown in our rescue efforts. When three whales were trapped under the Antarctic ice, "an eclectic coalition environmentalists, oil-company officials, the Alaska National Guard, even Eskimo whalers--hurried to the rescue. An oil company donated $500,000 in barge and helicopter fuels for efforts to cut through the ice." This would never happen with any other animal ("Heroic Measures for Giant Whales" 1). Our society’s quick actions to save these animals, which faced a natural death, demonstrates the great connection and love between people and whales (Jawboning). The purpose of this essay is to take the facts of our attraction and try to reason why.

One of the first reactions people have about whales is noticing how magnificent they are. It is true that these giant mammals that live in the ocean are amazing to look at. It is also made a point of that they are gentle, this appeals to people and makes them think of whales as peaceful and harmless (Leslie). Unlike other large interesting animals such as tigers and sharks we do not see whales as a threat, but a vulnerable sweet animal, a friend while out at sea (Whale Nation). Whales appeal to all people on some level because of their friendly and intelligent qualities.

However underneath this gut attraction there is a similarity and understanding between whales and people that keeps the bond so strong.

Though there are many other mammals, few are described as personable and humanistic as whales. Leslie Roberts, an ex-green peace activist, recalled her meeting with two humpback whales, “The whale and I made eye contact again and again and when they decided to swim off, they swam on their sides and raised one flipper, like it was waving good-bye!” The whale’s knowledgeable sense of interactions and sensitive personality led her to become intrigued with whales. Though she was not an avid whale fan before this interaction the mystical and peaceful nature of whales turned her into a passionate protector.

Many people have noticed the spiritual and wise nature of the whale and converted into whale lovers. One leader of the green peace organization to save the whales said in a speech, “Living cetaceans have an almost unbelievable capacity for enriching the lives of human beings with whom they come in peaceful contact...They have a uniquely universal appeal to the human spirit" (Barstow 2). This appeal to our own nature rewards whales more respect in this human dominated society. The calmness and curiosity many people recognize in whales has actually enriched the lives of sailors throughout time. This old creature has traits we can recognize as humanistic which creates a comfort, importance, and trust in the giant mammal.

One Alaskan tribe, the Inupiat, valued the nature of the whale so highly it became their faith. They believe that the whale plays a pivotal role in their cultural hunt of the animal and daily life. They believe in the spirit of the whale, who has the ability to hear and see everything (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 100). The concept of an all knowing wise whale is actually based on evolutionary facts. Since they have been alive for millions of years they have developed a highly evolved ear that can hear things from miles away (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 95). The Inupait go through great lengths to please the whale spirit, such as dyeing their boats white so the whale spirit will come to the one he judges most worthy and "bless" them with his body (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 100). The Inupiat people also believe cleanliness is required by the whale spirit; therefore, they handle the bodies with care and efficiency (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 100). This very respectful, engaged way of interacting with the whale explains another aspect of whale humanity. One of the cultures that have

216 been hunting whales for the longest has noted its formidability and peacefulness. The fact that the Inupiat recognized the whales’ humanity and saw it as a spirit shows the impact of the whale’s demeanor.

Many Alaskan tribes saw another connection between whales and their own society. These tribes drew many connections between women and whales. Women are thought of as similar to whales because they both provide food for the hunting based society (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 100). In an interview with an Inupiat man, a researcher named American Eskimos celebrate the whale discovered that "at a certain level the women are the whales, the key to nourishment and food for a hunting people" (American Eskimos celebrate the whale 100). This connection between humans and whales is a direct sign of their humanity based on women’s ability to interact with whales like no other animal.

Folklore is passed down in these tribes about how women can converse with the whale spirit. The belief is that whaler’s wives “could lure the whale to the shore with a special shaman song (American Eskimos celebrate the whale, 100). This story must be rooted in the undeniable humanity of whales in their interactions with humans.

Every person I’ve talked to or read about who experienced close interactions with whales described it as otherworldly and spiritual. They notice many human like qualities and deep thought behind their eyes. This incomprehensibly old and developed creature has an effect on humans we cannot entirely explain.

With little proof on many whale species, around the world it is generally assumed that whales are intelligent. It is definite that some species, such as the Orca whale, are smart enough to be trained like dolphins and dogs. However for many of the greater whales, no tests have ever concluded intelligence. Most of our assumptions are based on whales behavior, which differs from species (Hard loss for right whales 1). For example, it has been noted that humpback whales work together to catch fish, scientists hypothesizes that they have a more complex brain and a better understanding of community. However, one specialist Margaret Klinowska, a Cambridge University expert on cetacean intelligence, “holds that the structure of the whale brain has more in common with that of comparatively primitive mammals such as hedgehogs and bats than with the brains of primates."

Regardless of the evidence, many extremists and activists claim whale’s great intelligence. John Lilly, a physician, “became convinced in the 1950s that whales and dolphins are not only smarter and more communicative than humans, but also have their own civilizations, complete with philosophy, history, and science that are passed down orally through the generations" (Price, 3). Although this extreme claim is not accepted, many people make similar assumptions. I believe these ideas are grounded in the human like nature of the whale and the fact that they have been around millions of years before human (Ban on Commercial Whaling). Whales have been evolving to live in the ocean for millions of years which can cause people to believe they are wise on little evidence (What is a whale?). Though whales are ancient, and it is a common belief to respect elders as wise, we can not assume whales are intelligent without evidence. However, this alleged intelligence is another appeal to whales.

Another simple appeal of whales is their great size. Large size is a common factor among all of the heavily conserved animals; for some reason we are more attracted to large animals and whales are the largest. As someone who has never seen a whale I cannot comprehend their size. Any one who’s ever encountered a whale in nature cannot help but notice its immense size and be impressed (Whale-watching). Throughout history symbols of great things have been large such as statues of gods and country leaders. If bigger is better in our culture, then whales are the best. A green peace activist, Leslie Roberts, remembers seeing a whale saying, “Their size astonishes, I can’t explain it" (Leslie). Even though it is the simplest answer the whale’s appearance creates interest and respect for the animal. The size of whales also symbolizes the power of the ocean; the largest animal in the world dwells beneath the surface. The idea that such big creatures could come from the deep blue waves shows how formidable the ocean really is.

One reason whales are focused on by animal protection groups is because of their symbolism. As I said before large objects or animals are often chosen as a symbol of an idea or powerful person. For example many organizations have turned whales into a symbol of the ocean to help people conserve it (Why save the whales?). If the whales die out it is a tangible image of how we are treating the ocean. Organizations continue the metaphor by saying that our mass hunting of whales shows how we feel about this earth (Ocean in Crisis). Whales had been around for millions of years and humans killed 99% of them in a few hundred years (Blue Whale facts). This significant and clear message has helped organizations raise awareness about the ocean and pollution. The fact that they can be instrumental in pollution reduction not only proves how loved they are by people, but causes activists to like them more as well.

Leslie Roberts, author of Antarctica, a book on the content and surrounding oceans believes Americans like them so much because of a different type of symbolism, “Americans are drawn to whales because they symbolize some of our core cultural values – freedom, family, and joy. We live in a country that was entirely wild until not so long ago and

217 there's part of our sensibility that longs for that wild and free place -- now that we have largely destroyed it. The whale brings to mind perhaps simpler times”.

She believes that not only do whales have human characteristics, but they also stand for American values. This is just another reason why we love whales so much in our culture, they symbolize goals to some people in our country.

We all want to live the American dream, and in Leslie’s opinion whales are. Every person who interacts with a whale values the occasion and interprets it in there own way, the profound effect whales have on people create many different opinions on them; however, most of them are very positive. This spreads the national love of whales.

Our love and intrigue of whales in America is matched by no other animal. We are drawn to these gigantic animals for a medley of reasons but I believe the most important one is the sense of humanity we experience when we interact with them in the wild. As humans we value the animals we deem most like us, intelligent in the same way as us. We draw many parallels between whale’s society and our own; some people even go so far as to compare their language or social behaviors to ours (What is a whale?). Though there is little evidence of their intelligence, we prize them as one of the smartest, which is probably because of their human like qualities. Though Whales are amazing animals that definitely need to be protected, I believe we should broaden our horizon to all animals, because they all deserve to be conserved. Even though we may not be able to relate to some animals, like pigs, in the same way as whales or dogs they still warrant respect from our race.

Works Cited: Barstow, Robbins. Why save the whales? CSI, 25 Jan. 1996. Web. 20 Mar. 2008.

Berta, Annalisa. What is a Whale? American Association for the Advancement of Science, 1944. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Bishop, Daniel "Heroic measures for gentle giants. (saving whales trapped beneath the ice in Alaska)." Opposing Viewpoints Resource Center. Gale, 1988. Web. 25 Mar. 2009 Holt, Sidney, Erika Casriel. Why Japan won't save the Whales. 28 May, 2007. Web. Lande, Rivivan. Whale-Watching. San Francisco: National Association of Biology Teachers, 1973. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

O'Caughey, Willy. Jawboning. Senor Café, 18 Nov. 2003. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Turner, Edith. American Eskimos Celebrate the Whale: Structural Dichotomies and Spirit Identities among the Inupiat of Alaska. The MIT Press, 1993. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Slay, Chris. Hard Loss For Right Whales. Whale Net, 2004. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Stop Whaling Now. IFAW: International fund for Animal Welfare, 2008. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

Tsujimoto, Naoko. "In Japan, What's on the Plate Is Culture." The New York Times, 2000. Web. 25 Mar. 2009.

William Aron, William Burke and Milton Freeman. "Ban on commercial Whaling." Opposing View Points. Gale, 2004. Web. 20 Mar. 2009.

Williams, Heathcote. Whale Nation. London: Haymart house, 1988. Print Price, David Andrew. "Environmentalists Overstate the Importance of Certain Species." Opposing Viewpoints Resource Center. Gale, 1999. Web. 25 Mar. 2009 Woodard, Colin. "Oceans in Crisis." CQ Global Researcher . CQ Press, CQP Electronic Library. 1 Oct. 2007 Web. 25 Mar. 2009

218 Emma Williams-Baron Craig Butz Research in the Community May 15, 2009 The Curious Culture of Cults America is known to many as a Land of Opportunity. Americans are free to start a new business, marry outside their ethnic group, and experiment with different religious standpoints. Some of these religions can be considered cults, and some of these cults pose serious danger to their members and their communities. Peoples’ Temple was one such cult. Although in hindsight, Peoples’ Temple obviously fit the description of a dangerous cult, more than 900 people missed the signs and followed Jim Jones to the eventual mass murder-suicide. Dangerous American cults can be recognized through common characteristics; once recognized, the threat can be addressed and avoided.

The definition of a cult itself is hotly debated by many experts in the field. Anne Tapper, who has investigated cults in her capacity as a nurse trained to treat ex-members, writes that “some religious conservatives…define cults as religions that deviate from orthodox scriptural truth,” which would encompass any religious group that does not believe in the same version of God as the speaker, making this definition somewhat ambiguous (Tapper). Tapper also mentions that “sociologists and academic theologians study cults… [and see them] as normal vehicles of social change found in all cultures” (Tapper). This definition, by using “normal” to describe cults, masks or even dismisses the threat posed by many cults to nonmembers as well as members of the cult. This definition most accurately describes only those cults that do not threaten society or themselves. Tapper’s last definition, which is advocated by former cult members, families, and professionals who work with them, is that “a cult is a group that has excessive devotion to a person or cause and that uses unethically manipulative persuasion and control to serve the goals of the leaders, regardless of possible harm to its members and others” (Tapper). This last definition makes the most sense based on many articles and papers on this subject, as well as common usage: a dangerous cult is just that – dangerous. Whether it is psychological harm and manipulation, physical torture, sexual abuse, or financial extortion, most cults partake in some type or types of harm towards their members and surrounding communities.

However, that is not to say that all cults are harmful. There are those that are classified by experts as “the mystic-religious cult,” which is different from “the quasi-religious, ‘manipulative’ cult” (Campbell). Mystical cults, such as UFO fan clubs and some offshoots of major religions, generally do not pose a major threat to their members or society. These are the type described by sociologists as “normal vehicles of social change” (Tapper). The two types of cults (mystic-religious and manipulative) are clearly distinct, although the possibility exists that a mysticreligious movement can become manipulative and dangerous, depending on the leader, like Jim Jones of Peoples’ Temple. Mystic-religious cults usually fit the description of “small, informal, transient groups” bent on worshipping a common interest or obsession that binds the group together (Campbell).

It is the larger, treacherous cult, like Peoples’ Temple, that endangers human life; these cults usually demonstrate four main characteristics. Richard Block, a professor at Montana State University, lists these four distinctions of a cultic environment as “Compliance, Exploitation, Mind Control, and Anxious Dependency” (Block). All of these factors are one-way relationships between a cult member and cult leader. Compliance with a leader’s every whim is expected of all members; depending on the level of extremity of the cult, a leader’s whim can be anything from working in extreme conditions, with little to no sleep or nutrition, or retiring to the leader’s bedroom at a moment’s notice (Layton 75). The second characteristic, exploitation, is present in many cults in that a cult leader will ask members for monetary donations, which, depending on the intensity of a leader’s control and desires, can include all of a member’s financial assets, leaving the member completely financially dependant on the cult. Mind control and manipulation, the third characteristics, work together to condition a member against outside society, bind the member closer to the cult, and increase their devotion to the cult’s ideals. Mind control can be developed by intense concentration of a cult’s leaders on an individual over a long period of time, until praise and personal attention have won over a new member, who may eventually allow their every move to be dictated by the cult’s leader. Once a strong bond between the cult leader and member is established, the leader can turn their attention elsewhere, leaving the member caught up in the community of the cult and hungering for the amount of attention they had become accustomed to from the leader. This leads to anxious dependency; the cult member is dependant on the leader for attention and affection, and the member feels compelled to win back the trust they are shocked to have lost (Galanter).

Peoples’ Temple is a classic example of a dangerous cult exhibiting the four characteristics of compliancy, exploitation, mind control, and anxious dependency. Tapper explains that most dangerous cults have a “rigid belief system that cannot be questioned,” a “charismatic, authoritarian leader who…exercises considerable control over the

219 members,” a system of “isolation from nonmembers and families of origin,” a “high-demand schedule,” and “deceptive recruitment tactics,” including extreme emotional manipulation, privileges granted to the leader, but denied to members, and the expectation that members relinquish all financial assets to the group (Tapper). Peoples’ Temple had all this. Founded in 1955 in Indianapolis by the magnetic Jim Jones, Peoples’ Temple originally strove to help the poor, promote racial acceptance, and promote the ideals of Socialism. These views were accompanied by a belief in reincarnation and Jim Jones as the reincarnation of such people as Jesus, Stalin, Lenin, and others (Layton 45). Jones gathered a congregation diverse in race and age, before moving to Ukiah, California, where Deborah Layton came into contact with Jones. Layton writes that she “became accustomed to unconditional love” in her childhood, but when her siblings went off to college and her parents became more distant, she began to slip in school, feeling alone and in desperate need of attention (Layton 17). Her brother, Larry, asked her to attend a Peoples’ Temple meeting with him (Larry was already a member). After the hours-long sermon, Layton was introduced to Jones himself; he, having never met her before, immediately told her exactly what she had been yearning to hear: that “people [didn’t] appreciate her” and that “he need[ed] her” (Layton 41). This sort of approach is what Tapper would deem “deceptive recruitment,” since Jones manipulated Layton’s emotions in an attempt to woo her to his cause (Tapper). Layton was encouraged by Jones and other Temple Members to stay with them, not returning to any of her former commitments, an invitation which she refused. However, Jones did not forget her; Layton received weekly letters from him and several other members, telling her of how much they missed her (after only one visit) and how happy they were in Peoples’ Temple. Layton was thrilled to find that “an important adult [Jones] found me smart, worthwhile, and interesting” (Layton 49). The letters continued for a year; Layton says she was “seduced by massive amounts of adulation, flattery, and attention” (Layton 51). Layton then joined Peoples’ Temple, and, she explains, “it was easy to be part of Jim’s world” because Jones made all the decisions and a Peoples’ Temple member was not required (nor encouraged) to think for themselves (Layton 52). Compliancy is, in the beginning, easy, since new cult members are given no reason to doubt the intentions of the cult. However, after the respect she had become used to from Jones, Layton was quickly warned that “those who left or betrayed the cause in any way…would be reincarnated as the lowest life form on Earth” (Layton 53). Layton did not, indeed could not, recognize from inside the situation this common cultic tactic of enticement followed by threats and intimidation (Galanter).

As Layton’s self-confidence grew from continued flattery and sense of community, Jones arranged sessions to break her spirit. Layton was falsely accused in front of the entire congregation of such crimes as thinking disloyal thoughts, begging Jones for sexual favors and threatening suicide should he refuse, and visiting her parents too often (which proved her disloyalty to the Temple). In fact, Jones pressed himself upon many members, male and female alike, and raped many of them; Jones insisted that this was an honor to his chosen member. Sessions created to break members’ spirits included the audience’s participation in the verbal abuse; all members were encouraged to shout “we hate you!” and the like for long stretches of time (Layton 64). These sessions were not uncommon, and most members were made victim many times. However, few left Peoples’ Temple for this reason. Most were held by the continued adoration lavished on them after memory of their ‘session’ faded, by Jones’ private apologies for having to ‘make an example of them’ in front of the congregation, and threats of reincarnation. Many felt that the sessions showed Jones’ waning trust in them, which made them feel they had to prove themselves and gain his love again. To prove loyalty, members were required to write down and submit to Jones their deepest, darkest thoughts and secrets. It was generally accepted that a damning secret proved profound devotion to the Temple, so members wrote confessions to crimes they made up, such as molesting a child or contemplating killing the President.

Unbeknownst to all but a few very trusted members, these confessions were kept on file, ready to use as blackmail should a member attempt to leave.

Jones’ grip on his congregation becomes more evident as he financially exploited and manipulated them into arriving in Jonestown. Jones was becoming “crazed with fear” and insisted CIA agents were investigating the Temple (although these rants were products purely of Jones’ increasingly paranoid mind); he began to look for new, prejudice-free places to locate his church (Layton 135). The small country of Guyana in South America seemed perfect; a portion of forest could be cleared, the government was supportive of Communism, and the intended site was very isolated. In 1973 Jones bought 3,800 acres of land, big enough for a commune, and started sending members to clear the land and erect crude huts. When this new “Promised Land,” named Jonestown, was ready, he began sending a larger trickle of members to live there and farm the land. In 1977 Jones got word that a reporter was going to publish an exposé revealing some of Peoples’ Temple’s sordid details. Jones panicked, and ordered most of the rest of the Temple members to Jonestown; there were now about 900 people living in Jonestown, isolated from their non-Temple families and civilization. They had been ordered beforehand to sell all their possessions; in Jonestown, they had only a few pieces of clothing and very bare necessities. This is in accordance

220 with Tapper’s characteristics of “isolation from nonmembers” and the expectation that members donate all wealth to the cult’s organization (Tapper).

Layton was originally excited to arrive in Jonestown; members reporting daily through a radio had detailed their great joy and happiness there. Unfortunately, however, upon arriving in Jonestown, Layton realized that life would consist of only the most Spartan existence. Layton wondered why, since they had many millions of dollars in banks, they had to live so frugally. The main activities were hard labor in fields for food and hours-long sermons lasting from the evening into the early morning. With very little sleep (3 or 4 hours at most) and poor nutrition (food was bug-infested and scarce), Temple members were kept busy to prevent them from thinking. “Physically weak from malnutrition and lack of sleep and mentally exhausted from fear of punishment, we were feeble, compliant automatons” Layton explains (Layton 181). There was virtually no means of communication to the outside world; there was a single radio, which Jones used to keep up-to-date with events in America, but only three other people had access to it (and those three were highly trusted members of Jones’ inner circle). Casoni, a crime specialist in Montreal, describes the philosophy of separation as “a constant demarcation or division…sought in order to set members apart from outsiders” (Casoni). The physical separation from the outside world is an obvious ploy to contain Temple members, as well as an allowance for Jones to exert his control more freely, unhindered by witnesses or laws. Jones’ voice was broadcast incessantly over loudspeakers everywhere in the camp, sessions for chastisement were frequent, and new punishments were devised.

These new punishments included “the Box,” an underground room the size of a coffin in which a member could be sealed for up to ten days without any food besides gruel, and “the Well,” a punishment created especially for children (Layton 176). When sentenced to the Well, the child was suspended by a rope tied to their ankles and dunked into the water at the bottom of a dark well again and again, while someone hidden inside the well grabbed at them to scare them. “The sins deserving such punishment included stealing food...expressing homesickness…failing [one of the weekly] socialism exams, or even natural childish rebelliousness” (Layton 176).

Layton writes that to punish an elderly man who fell asleep during one of Jones’ midnight sermons, after the backbreaking work of the fields and little sleep, Jones commanded the man’s son to place a huge boa constrictor around his father’s neck in front of the congregation of 909. Jones left the boa there, strangling him, until the man was crying, his face was purple, and he had wet his pants. These punishments are obvious signs of Jones’ complete control over his members, or children, as they referred to him as “Dad” or “Father” (Layton 152).

Life continued in this way for Layton and the other members of Jonestown until late 1977. Layton writes that “no one wanted to be here, but we were too afraid of each other to do anything” because Temple members were called upon to report each other for any disloyal thoughts or plans; “everyone seemed to be afraid of everyone else,” she remembers (Layton 204 and 164). This is a sign of the “rigid belief system” that “could not be questioned” (Tapper). Conditions in Jonestown were comparable to conditions in Nazi concentration camps. Relatives of Temple members, concerned that they had heard nothing for so long, petitioned and eventually convinced California’s Congressman Leo Ryan to visit Jonestown to investigate. Congressman Ryan managed to persuade Jones to allow him into Jonestown in 1978. Ryan was given what we now know to be a very staged tour, showing only the most favorable aspects of Jonestown, and introduced to members coached beforehand on points to hit (including how happy they were, how well they were treated, and that they didn’t want to leave). A few brave souls mustered the courage to approach him on their own and express their desire to leave. Ryan pledged them space on his plane. However, at the end of his two-day visit, Ryan addressed the congregation of 909 assuring them that he believed things to be pleasant, and that he would report the same to the United States government. He then left for the airstrip, accompanied by his aids, reporters, and the defectors.

Despite Ryan’s positive take on circumstances in Jonestown, Jones became flustered and anxious after Ryan left. He announced that one defector, Larry Layton, was only posing as a defector, and had plans to shoot the Congressman and real defectors. Jones insisted that the United States government would take swift and decisive action, ultimately wiping out Peoples’ Temple. Jones presented only one course of action: for Peoples’ Temple to wipe itself out first. He then had his armed guards bring forth vats of what appeared to be Flavor Aide; Jones explained that the drink was laced with cyanide, and was the only way out for Peoples’ Temple. Jones concluded that “my opinion is that you be kind to children and be kind to seniors and take the potion like they used to take in ancient Greece and step over quietly because we are not committing suicide; it's a revolutionary act. We can't go back; they won't leave us alone” (Suicide Tape Transcript). Those Temple members that did not swallow the poison were shot, but those who refused were few. Jones himself died from a shot to the head, in what appears to have been suicide. Larry Layton did indeed pull out a gun on the plane, although he didn’t shot anyone. However, a truck full of Temple members drove after the Congressman with machine guns, and fatally wounded the Congressman and four others.

221 Peoples’ Temple is only one example of a dangerous cult that demonstrates the common structure many cults share. By comparing the characteristics dangerous cults frequently have in common, we can recognize dangerous cults present in our society today, and prevent tragedies like the Jonestown mass murder-suicide. Family or friends concerned that a loved one has fallen prey to a dangerous cult should educate themselves about the possible cult and keep communication lines open, creating a nonjudgmental place for the loved one to feel safe in (Tapper). Tapper recommends “helping them understand that the ideals that caused them to join the cult – usually serving God or humanity – can be fulfilled in other contexts” (Tapper). And with support, deprogramming is possible; there are even professionals who specialize in deprogramming ex-cult members.

Works Cited Campbell, Colin. “Clarifying the Cult.” British Journal of Sociology 28.3 (1977). JSTOR. Web. April 22, 2009.

Casoni, Dianne. “When Does A Cult Become Dangerous? Group Philosophy as Associated to Different Types of Dangerous Behavior.” Université de Montréal. Université de Montréal, November 2000. Web. April 21, 2009.

Layton, Deborah. Seductive Poison: A Jonestown Survivor’s Story of Life and Death in the People’s Temple.

United States: Anchor Books, 1998. Print.

Galanter, Marc. Cults and New Religious Movements: A Report of the American Psychiatric Association. 1989.

American Psychiatric Pub. Web. April 21, 2009.

Gasde, Irene. “Cult Experience: Psychological Abuse, Distress, Personality Characteristics, and Changes in Personal Relationships.” International Cultic Studies Association. ICSA, 2008. Web. April 21, 2009.

Maaga, Mary MaCormick. “Suicide Tape Transcript.” Alternative Religions. Alternative Religions, 1998. Web. April 21, 2009.

Tapper, Anne. “The Impact of Cults on Health.” An Organization of Former Members of the International Churches of Christ. Reveal, May 31, 2005. Web. April 23, 2009.

222